Home

SuSE Linux / User Guide

Contents

1. Eile Image Settings Help o WES RAIA Y E ua OM X nx Image Name Size Format e Viewer Scan Preview Y O 4Kooka Gallery 28 items el A O p alll jpg 1280x938 JPEG s Preview A x Scan Size 34 Q Gallery Kooka Gallery Gute eel 2 o RX Scanner Settings AGFA SNAPSCAN 1236U 2 gt Autoselection 31 Co Scan mode Ba Color IC active on black O fal Q scanner background O Halftone pattern DispersedDot8x8 i Threshold J Resolution 600 3 i 2 Selection 31 Threshold 1 A aa 2 width 72 mm O Brightness t n Q oor lo height 78 mm TICE l aes 304MB gt iL Use custom gamma table Edit e E 9 FinalScan j PreviewScan 2 Loading file home tux kde share apps Scanlmages kscan 0001 jpeg 1766x1873 pixel 32 bit F Figure 22 3 The Kooka Scanning Parameters 22 5 The Gallery The gallery window shows the default folder where Kooka stores all its image files An example is shown in Figure 22 4 To save an image to your personal home directory click the thumbnail to select it then select File gt Save Image Then enter your personal home directory and give the file a descriptive name 4 items Rx Image Name Size Format Kooka Gallery fy kscan_0001jpeg 1766 x 1873 JPEG 762x811 JPEG kscan 0003jpeg 630kB JPEG kscan_0004 jpeg 181MB JPEG Figure 22 4
2. messages eee eee eee eee eee ee 120 logging login attempts 4 106 AA exo px Exec vexe rk Hd aes 354 368 M man pages mirerien aeien 368 A erasing ties AR ER a hee ea ai 396 MAI uri Sad ode RR YVES 357 369 modems AA A 91 module disk oooocccoccccccccccoo 110 monitor settings ooocccooccccocccncccoos 72 MOTE 359 MOV eno anne oxen tc eee ede 312 314 SAO iaa 313 proportions sirsririirercressssiwsi 313 seeking channels we 312 The Launcher Menu 313 video source ooooonocconoomm o 912 webcams cece cece eee eee e ee 314 mouse configuring 66 83 Mozilla 5 iic cia ia eret 227 configuring oe ekira en eiaa eha 231 SO CUTI ce oexee eee A a anit 233 MS DOS commands senene suens angaa 361 file systems oooooococccccncccooo 361 I OO S NE E E E ES 361 MU E ES 369 N A dneni 165 167 configuring ooooococcconcrcono o 167 navigating see eee eee 165 network configuring ssssssss 87 101 TOULNG scan 101 ra 89 NFS clients servers NNoteBdit syare neiaa cakran onn AE EEES Index O rto enr e 374 NTFS file system 43 0004 coe coc 28 NTP SCHENIS 00 48 pan tet cond iea 101 DXtveDg tii 315 MS das 316 importing database 315 O office programs KAddressBook nnna 211 KOrganizer 2 secessus 203 OpenOffice org sasoi
3. Figure 18 18 The Composition Editor NoteEdit 310 18 12 NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers TV Video Radio and Webcam The configuration of TV cards is integrated in the configuration tool YaST If your card has been correctly identified it can be automatically configured Oth erwise enter the card settings manually The following sections focus on the motv application created by the author of the BITV driver Another TV application is KWinTV If you prefer KWinTV it should be easy to use after reading this chapter 19 1 Watching TV With mot coi ir Re 312 19 2 Video Text with alevt 314 19 3 Webcams and motv noia a 314 19 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC 315 UJO2Q9M PUD Oppo OSPIA AL 312 19 1 Watching TV with motv motv is an improved successor to xawtv It incorporates all essential functions into the user interface Start the application with SuSE Multimedia Video Start it at the command line with mot v Initially only a TV window ap pears after the application starts Open a menu window by right clicking it Figure 19 1 The TV Application moto 19 1 1 Video Source and Network Search In Settings gt Input select the video source If you select Television here set up the broadcasting network before starting the application This automatically takes place with the network search also found under
4. Configure with Yast After you enter the root password YaST will be started Depending on the access type start the modem ISDN network or DSL configuration of YaST in order to select a provider from a list KInternet can do even more if the option Channel Bundling is activated in YasT a second ISDN channel can be added to an existing connection by means of the menu Add link This doubles the transfer rate though at a higher price Activate channel bundling if you need to download large files The activated channel bundling is evident from the red plus symbol at the top left corner of the KInternet icon Users who want to establish Internet connections automatically can use dial on demand DoD If this mode is selected KInternet will automatically connect to your Internet service provider ISP as soon as a request is submitted After a certain time out the connection is terminated A DoD connection is evident from the blue D at the bottom right corner of the KInternet icon Please note that DoD only makes sense if you have a flatrate For a normal ac cess the repeated establishment and termination of the connection can be quite costly 4 4 Important Utilities 4 4 2 The Download Manager KGet KGet is the download manager for KDE similar to GetRight or Golzilla With KGet you manage your transfers in a window You can stop resume delete and queue transfers and add new transfers Adding Transf
5. 2 60 00 175 SuSE Help Center 391 hostname ier et erred 99 l images GIMP E 335 Konqueror esrrsccudrsroncir kes 145 mun pe 348 retouching cns meme 349 hic ER 338 Inetdi ii icons Sensis s Erna PELENE 102 installing scsesa cessas ie cer ERU RUE TE 7 11 Cusen 13 42 Internet POCCESS e i enel dienen EET Natdodas 87 connecting to ss snene iuran 398 connection 87 145 146 DS via toria core bla dita dba 93 SISDN idan tannic ini neds retina 95 SEDGE vais tut sacs Fere ee Edda 95 addresses sisas sus tai iun 88 J A 222 JavaScript comionidocioni cortar ees 222 joysticks configuring csse 83 cue ER 338 K Dc Riek dala x tle 317 321 audio CDs cintia iia 319 configuring ooooccooonccnoooo gt 318 copying CDs oocoocoocccccoccooo oo 320 data CDS micas 318 KAddressBook ooccoocooccccoooo gt 211 214 creating address lists 213 searching for addresses 213 214 ADA arcaica iras 214 local acre rt 213 214 Katia ns 194 KDE Ark compressing files 152 clipboard ooooococccccccccccc o 148 commands coooccccccccccccnnnn o 396 configuring ooooooocccoconcccno ooo 133 accessibility oooooooo 141 background sssn 138 A eee 137 OS nas 138 Keyboard ccc cece ees 134 keyboard shortcuts 140 Moi UN 139 MOUSE serentak inisa 134 PINTER seien term
6. ls The Toolbar sa da oa ers dra rd The Locator Bat sis a e ela ee E IRE The Main Window coca a6 62 65 Creating an Image Gallery sa io Ghee are Sa SG Iniportant UTES ir o et eere es e me cd a 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 6 4 4 7 4 4 8 4 4 9 KInternet the Door to the WWW The Download Manager KGet ls SuSEWoateher lt lt 605 62h ee eek ae ee haus The Clipboard KIPPE no por iaaii a en Monitoring Print Jobs uu xo xen Pe ao a is Formatting Floppy Disks with KFloppy Ark Displaying Decompressing and Creating Archives Desktop Sharning wes wg eek hh ue cop xag KSnapshot Taking Screenshots 5 The GNOME Desktop 40 28 3 eur a a Bias ad 5 2 5 1 1 5 1 2 DLS 5 1 4 51 5 The lons e se ai o bec Rho ode gb a a The Desktop Metu nome eee ek ecw ade ve mne cte The Pare o cementi dar oh eia Eee REST eS So The Main M n 4c ey 9G e m ees Handling Floppy Disks CDs orDVDs SOLES lec nackte ox aun EORR Pide en go ee m RR 5 21 2 2 5 2 3 Keyboard aose see A Se Umum ee Mouse Configuration ia ac easa cursa a Diaa Menus and Toolbars 24 22 22929993 baa eua SuSE Linux User Guide 152 153 154 157 158 158 158 159 159 159 160 160 161 161 vil viii 5 24 Sereensavet coco cox egy ikae ok Y 9 RR RR S 161 525 MW ndOWS ou abe du bo ER PP Ea 162 526 Background 2446 E a a a a e a 162 527 FOD iuo
7. To change the folder displayed click the down arrow next to Inbox and se lect another folder from the list Use the search bar to search the messages in a folder If desired click a table header for the message list to sort the messages by that header The sort can be either ascending or descending as shown by the arrow to the right Click the header until the correct direction is displayed 16 3 3 Calendar The initial display shows a day view of the current day with the month and a task list shown in an additional pane to the right Week work week and month views are also available from the toolbar or the View menu Use the search bar to find an entered appointment Add appointments and tasks using the buttons in the toolbar Also use the toolbar to page through the calendar or jump to a specific date 16 3 4 Tasks Tasks provides a list of tasks Use the toolbar to add tasks Search the tasks with the search bar 16 3 5 Contacts This view shows all the addresses in your address book To locate a particular address use the search bar or click the button to the right displaying the first letter of the contact s last name Add contacts or lists with the toolbar 16 4 E Mail To configure the mail settings in Evolution go to Shortcuts gt Inbox Then activate Tools Settings 16 4 E Mail 16 4 1 Configuring Accounts Evolution is capable of fetching e mail from multiple mail a
8. Tone 3D Control Ext Source Playback Capture IEC958 Playback IEC958 Capture gt Master r Stereo r Surround ES El Em Uu E 100 100 Ed VE EL IG T Flgttttllg EXECUTED IEEE FG GG I HEEREN Wav Music 5 Lock Xj Lock X Lock s m Mute ME Eg LOA e Lie es LU fa fa UW e urround Digital Wave Surround Center LFE Wave Center Wave LFE IR Lock Lock Figure 18 2 The Mixer QAmix SuSE Linux User Guide xnur ui punog 285 18 2 3 KMix KMix is the KDE mixer It provides a convenient and familiar interface for KDE users It can also be integrated into the KDE panel 18 2 4 The GNOME Mixer Applet If you use GNOME this applet provides a convenient volume control that can be integrated in a panel To add it to a panel right click the panel then select Add to Panel gt Multimedia gt Volume Control Right click the volume con trol applet then select Run Volume Control to access the more advanced mixer functions 18 2 5 alsamixer alsamixer can be run from the command line without the X environment The application is operated with the cursor keys Use 9 W E CY CO and C to set different levels for the left and right channels V mutes single channels In this case MM appears above the muted controller To terminate alsamixer press Esc Note The look and feel of alsamixer depe
9. Xinerama multihead All screens combine to form a single large screen Program windows can be positioned freely on all screens or scaled to a size that fills more than one monitor 3 4 Hardware The layout of a multihead environment describes the arrangement of and the relationship between the individual screens By default SaX2 configures a stan dard layout that follows the sequence of the detected graphics cards arranging all screens in a row from left to right In the Layout dialog of the multihead tool determine the way the monitors are arranged by using the mouse to move the screen symbols in the grid After you have completed the layout dialog verify the new configuration by clicking Test Linux currently does not offer 3D support for Xinerama multihead environ ments In this case SAX2 deactivates the 3D support Input Devices Mouse If the mouse already works you do not need to do anything However if the mouse does not work control it with the number pad of the key board as described in Section AccessX on the following page If the automatic detection fails use this dialog to configure your mouse manually Refer to the documentation of your mouse for a description of the model Select your model from the list of supported mouse types and confirm by pressing 5 on the number pad Keyboard Use the selection field at the top of this dialog to specify the kind of keyboard to use Then select the l
10. sss 235 243 Ergonomics 000eseceeeee scene 379 389 error messages bad interpreter 08 30 permission denied 30 Evolution sese ettet menn 257 267 address books 000005 266 attachments sssssssssse 261 calendar ssusn 260 265 configuring cece eee 258 CONEACIS aiii dada 260 266 creating messages s s 261 encryption eeii innii 261 O neneke o Skena 263 folders i Load cojo deenteni nia 262 importing mail a na 258 A EEES RE PEE ERA 261 starting 0026 tini eee cece 258 virtual folders ssuus 264 F o 395 FAT filesystem serenecon eienen enueia 27 file formats BMP mir des 397 A cenas ee Receta 337 JPEG iaa 338 utem 387 D 387 xui taco 338 Y A Mdb apes EU aret 397 file managers ooooooococccccococ 142 145 A i oneniner ten me etre enis 99 file systems e Lisa sisi den Ea esas cia io 25 SOI Lice ene vun i pesas eii Ea 25 NTFS oa creber eli Ritus 28 29 ReiserES ioc sev iwiea dedere tens 25 files FEKE SU aE EAEAN EEE 396 archiving oooooocccccccccco o 360 370 comparing srs 6 eee Were eee eee o2 compressing eee eee ee 360 370 converting from Microsoft formats 175 COPYING isa 369 sdeleting ui 369 MOVIDOS teorias oa 369 E paths soso oo 358 searching contents 372 searching for ooooooooococcmm m 37
11. start ifup ipppo stop ifdown ipppO Note ipppO is an example Selecting channel bundling vill set up a 128 kBit connection also known as Multilink PPP To bring up or down the second channel use the following commands isdnctrl addlink ipppo jy isdnctrl removelink ipppO f Back Abo Cue Figure 3 21 ISDN Interface Configuration In the following dialog specify the settings for the assignment of the IP ad dress If your provider has not assigned a static IP address select Dynamic IP address If you have a static IP address enter the local IP address of your host and the remote IP address as specified by the provider in the respective fields If the interface sgiykd be used as standard route to the Internet activate Default Route Only one interface per system can be used as the default route Exit the dialog with Next Specify your country and your provider in the following dialog The listed providers are call by call providers To use a provider that is not listed here click New The dialog ISP parameters opens enabling you to enter all set tings for the desired provider The default setting for ISDN type is ISDN Sync PPP The phone number may not contain any separators such as commas or blanks Enter the user name and password received from your provider Then click Next To use Dial on demand see page 89 if you have a stand alone system you must enter a name server Most pro
12. Background and Cell Protection By enabling Protected under Cell Protection prevent a cell from being modified Standard ended BY ok coma mee Be Figure 6 7 The Cell Attributes Dialog SuSE Linux User Guide SLINS SOWIE 610 eoyouedo Sul 183 184 6 7 2 A Practical Example Monthly Expenses Calculations can be done using formulas Any numeric values entered in cells can be used in formulas by referring to the unique coordinates of each cell For example you may want to keep a record of your monthly expenses This could be done by writing a few items into a very basic spreadsheet as in Fig ure 6 8 The cell B3 contains the phone bill for January and B4 the fuel ex penses To add both amounts together enter B3 B4 in cell B5 Now cell B5 should display the corresponding result If you have mistyped the numbers or estimated your phone bill inaccurately just reenter the amounts and Calc will automatically update the sum Figure 6 8 A Spreadsheet Example for Calc Calc offers many functions beyond the four fundamental arithmetic operations A comprehensive list arranged in categories is available under Insert Func tion Any spreadsheet can be easily extended For instance to insert another row between Fuel and Sum right click the 5 button to the left and select Insert Row from the context menu A new row is inserted below the current one and can immediate
13. SuSE Linux User Guide 305 306 Enter ams to start AlsaModularSynth from the command line The param eter j activates the JACK mode provided the JACK engine jackd is run ning see Section 18 5 The required port connections can be established with QJackConnect In the JACK mode PCM modules are automatically converted to JACK modules and vice versa Separate ports are generated for each JACK module AlsaModularSynth only appears in the list of QJackConnect if at least one JACK module exists The directory usr share doc packages alsamodular contains numerous example patches that demonstrate the various possibilities Detailed documen tation is available in the subdirectory html 18 11 1 Randomly Playing Patches A quick overview of some of the sound possibilities is provided by the patches that randomly play sounds without a MIDI keyboard or audio input example ams demo ams generates impressive random music In example ams demo Scope spectrum ams this music can even be visualized with the scope and spectrum viewer modules Right click to open the view of these modules See how the character of the music changes when you change the quantization in the quantizer module ID 7 from the pentatonic scale to a value such as 1 6 whole tone scale One of the most legendary and expensive analog synthesizer modules is the frequency shifter invented by H Bode and built by R A Moog This module was recently implemented as
14. Window In the Window menu you can split the main window horizontally and vertically With Remove Active View remove the split New Tab SuSE Linux User Guide dop1seg FG eui 143 144 creates an empty window in the Konqueror window Switch between these windows with tabs With Duplicate Current Tab generate a second identical window that can be loaded to a separate Konqueror window with Detach Tab You can also close the active subwindow Help Under the Help menu access the Konqueror Handbook or the What s This function This function can also be accessed via the question mark symbol at the top right in the title bar The mouse pointer is then dis played with a question mark If you click an icon a brief help text is dis played The Help menu also provides a short introduction to Konqueror and the possibility to report bugs and other concerns to the developers About Konqueror and About KDE provide information about the ver sion license authors and translations of the project 4 3 2 The Toolbar The toolbar provides quick access to frequently used functions that can also be accessed via the menu If you let the mouse pointer rest above an icon a short description is displayed Right click a free space in the toolbar to open a menu with which to change the position of the toolbar switch from icons to text change the icon size and display or hide the individual bars The
15. All Entries TIAS APT Has PCMCIA No Has SMP No Keyboard Memory Monitor Network card DFE S00TX Fast Ethernet Bus PCI Class spec Ethernet controller Class Network controller Device spec DFE 500TX Fast Ethernet Device DECchip 21140 FasterNet Device identifier spec 69888 Device identifier 65545 Drivers Model D Link DFE 500TX Fast Ethernet Resources Rev 34 Sub Vendor D Link System Inc Sub vendor identifier 70022 Unique key WL76 AujCtKsDPG3 Vendor Digital Equipment Corporation Vendor identifier 69649 old unique key AZIZ AujCIKsDPG3 slot id 9 6 te Save to File Close Figure 3 15 Displaying Hardware Information 3 4 6 IDE DMA Mode H This module enables you to activate and deactivate the DMA mode for your IDE hard disks and your IDE CD DVD drives in the installed system This module does not have any effect on SCSI devices DMA modes can substantially increase the performance and data transfer speed in your system During the installation the current SuSE Linux kernel automatically activates DMA for hard disks but not for CD drives as default DMA activation for all drives often caused problems with CD drives Use the DMA module if you want to activate DMA for your drives If the drive supports the DMA mode without any problems the data transfer rate of your drive can be increased by activating DMA Note
16. DMA Direct Memory Access means that your data can be transferred directly to the RAM bypassing the processor control 3 4 Hardware Note 3 4 7 Joystick Use this module to configure your joystick by selecting the manufacturer and the model from the displayed list With Test check if your joystick responds correctly The test dialog shows three charts for the analog axes of the joystick and marks for the four standard buttons When you move the joystick or press the buttons you should be able to see a reaction in the test dialog As joysticks are usually connected to the sound card you can also access this module from the sound card configuration 3 4 8 Select Mouse Model Configure your mouse with this YaST module As the procedure for the selec tion of the mouse was already explained within the scope of the user defined installation refer to Section Mouse on page 19 3 4 9 Scanner If your scanner is connected and switched on it should be detected automati cally when this YaST module is started In this case the dialog for the installa tion of the scanner appears If no scanner is detected the manual configuration dialog appears If you have already installed one or several scanners a list of existing scanners that can be modified or deleted is displayed Press Add to configure a new device Next an installation is performed with default settings If the installation is suc cessful a corresponding messag
17. If this attribute is assigned to a directory it prevents users from deleting each other s files Typical examples include the tmp and var tmp directories drwxrwxrwt 2 root root 1160 2002 11 19 17 15 tmp 24 3 Users and Access Permissions 24 3 6 Access Control Lists The traditional permission concept for Linux file system objects such as files or directories can be expanded by means of ACLs Access Control Lists They allow the assignment of permissions to individual users or groups other than the original owner or owning group of a file system object Files or directories bearing extended access permissions reveal themselves after the execution of a simple 1s 1 command rw r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap The output of 1s does not reveal much of a change compared to an 1s ona file without an ACL Roadmap is owned by tux who belongs to the group project3 tux holds both write and read access to this file and his group as well as all other users have read access The only difference that distinguishes this file from a file without an ACL is the additional in the first column hold ing the permission bits lleus eui ULM BUOM Get details about the ACL by executing getfacl Roadmap file Roadmap owner tux group project3 user rw user jane rw ffective r group r group djungle rw ffective r mask r other The first three lines of the output do not hold any informati
18. User Guide 49 50 If you exit the module with Close the current settings are saved and applied to the configuration modules Install and Remove Software and System Update Er Software packages can be installed from Software Source Media the CD over a network or from the hard disk Status Name URL On SuSE Linux Version 8 2 99 nfs 10 10 0 155 nfs_inst C To install packages from CD have the SUSE Linux CD set or the DVD available The SuSE Linux CDs can be copied to the hard disk Then use that asthe installation source Insert the path name where the first CD is located for example datal CD1 Only the base path is required if all CDs are copied into one directory Network installation requires a working network connection Configure YaST2 s Network Base module first if required Specify the directory where the packages from the first CD are located such as data1 CD1 Only the base path is required if packages are not divided for example usr full i386 The directory must be listed in the file etc exports on the NFS server Add L Up J Replace l Down J Delete l Enable or Disable j Figure 3 2 Change Installation Source 3 3 2 YaST Online Update The YaST Online Update YOU enables the installation of important updates and improvements The respective patches are available for download on the SuSE FTP server and various mirror servers Under Inst
19. nor noprefix Does not permit use of the number for external calls If your ISDN adapter is connected to a phone exchange you can use this option in order to send a fax to an internal number SuSE Linux User Guide 277 qor quiet capisuitefax usually generates a few informative mes sages This option suppresses this and only allows the display of possible error messages The following command would send the two documents document 1 ps and document2 ps to the target number 089123456 capisuitefax d 089123456 documentl ps document2 ps capisuitefax converts the documents to the correct format and stores them together with a description file in a special folder from which they are then fetched and sent by CapiSuite Naturally there can be a short delay between the execution of the command and the actual sending The user is notified by e mail when a fax message has been successfully sent or after the failure of a set number of attempts You can also use capisuitefax to list the queue and terminate fax jobs The option 1 displays a list of the jobs in the queue The command capisuitefax a faxid can be used to terminate a job Replace faxid with the job ID indicated in the left column of the list In the standard desktop KDE fax messages can easily be sent from any KDE application with the help of the KDEPrintFax utility Configure KDEPrintFax as follows a Start KDEPrintFax This can be done for instance by pressi
20. 162 fullscreen preview run of that screensaver which can be aborted by pressing any key Select the previous or following screensaver for preview by clicking the corresponding triangles below the selection list In the last step determine after how long the screen should be made completely black Blank After the screen saver module should be changed Cycle Af ter or the screen should be locked Lock Screen After All time references are given in minutes 5 2 5 Windows This module controls the behavior of application windows Determine how the window should react to contact with the mouse pointer or to double clicks on its title and define the key to hold for moving an application window When several application windows populate the desktop the active one by default is the one last clicked Change this behavior by activating Select win dows when the mouse moves over them If desired activate Raise selected window after an interval and adjust the latency time with the slider This acti vates a window only when the cursor was placed within the window for a time exceeding the set latency Application windows can be shaded by double clicking the title bar leaving only the title bar visible This saves space on the desktop and is the default be havior It is alternatively possible to set windows to maximize when the title bar is double clicked With the radio buttons select the modifier key to pres
21. File gt Dialogs gt Brushes Pencil points are available that do not actually exist in the real world Make your pencil point extra fine or extra thick or select one of the special shapes dNID SUL ULM saludo The paintbrush draws with a softer more liquid effect than the pencil In the appropriate option box set a fade out the color intensity slowly diminishes while painting or a gradient selection via the gradient setting options When the fade out option is activated release the paintbrush and begin again to apply more color The eraser can both erase and unerase The brush selection also sets the shape and size of the eraser The airbrush applies color like a real airbrush Change the Pressure and use the many different brush settings This tool is ideal for use with a pressure sensitive graphics tablet The clone tool the icon represents a rubber stamp is the ultimate instru ment for photo retouching It can be used to specify parts of images that are then cloned In practice this means that you specify very precisely which part of the image to copy where and in what form This has rel atively little to do with the Cut and Paste functions It uses the paint functionality allowing you to set the shape and opacity of your virtual rubber stamp Things become interesting for example if you have an old photograph with white stains Activate the Clone tool and if needed its option box K
22. File About Sort by Note 5 MIDI Channel Transpose Split Point 0 36 3 a Lo jpm E ee MIDI Channel Transpose Split Point 1 48 Uw fo A Figure 18 14 Configuring Split Zones with SMidiRoute The program QMidiRoute enables flexible MIDI routing It sorts the MIDI events received on the writeable port according topitch velocity or channel and immediately forwards them to the readable ports Using the parameters Chan nel and Transpose you can change the channel and pitch of the lower split zone 18 9 4 kmid The KDE MIDI Player If the package kdemultimedia is installed find Midi Karaoke Player in the KDE start menu under Multimedia Some demo files for kmid are available in kar format in the directory opt kde2 share apps kmid These files also contain the lyrics which are scrolled and highlighted in sync with the playback Access the detailed online help of kmid with ED The MIDI ports must be set correctly under Settings gt MIDI Settings The channel view presented when you click the keyboard button in the tool bar is especially noteworthy Enlarge the window accordingly to see each channel represented as a piano keyboard For each channel select the preferred instru ment 302 18 9 ALSA and MIDI Oo x KMid bachdemo mid KMid o Datei St ck Sammlung Einstellungen Hilfe G Kano n 0 00 0 15 Geschwindigkeit M ae 1 bachdemo mid Kanalansic
23. New Contact A win dow opens in which to enter the data of the person under the General tab The View menu allows creation of custom views of the contacts The table view is the default setting Add view opens a dialog in which to name the view View type has options for whether the contacts should be displayed as icons in a table or as cards OK continues to the next dialog box in which to select the fields to include in the custom view Filters and preferences can be set in the corresponding items OK activates the newly created view 15 8 Filters Filters enable automatic processing of incoming messages and manual pro cessing of selected messages in a folder To filter selected messages to a specific folder highlight the messages and enter Y to activate existing filter rules or select Message Create Filter to create a new one In doing so all exist ing filter rules are applied to this message There is no way to use only certain filters 15 8 1 Filter Rules A filter consists of one or several filter rules and filter actions A filter rule can select messages according to criteria such as the sender content or recipient The respective filter action can perform tasks like moving deleting marking or forwarding these messages 15 8 2 Examples of Filters Assume for instance you are subscribed to the KDE user list kde user kde org Whenever a message from the mailing list arrives the m
24. Next If the sound card was not automatically detected click Select from List and with Next proceed to Manual Sound Card Selection Manual Sound Card Selection If your sound card was not automatically detected a list of sound card drivers and models are shown from which to choose With All see the entire list of supported cards Refer to your sound card documentation for the information required A ref erence list of sound cards supported by ALSA with their corresponding sound modules is available in usr share doc packages alsa cards txt and athttp www alsa project org goemon After making your selec tion click Next to return to Setup 3 4 Hardware 3 4 11 TV and Radio Cards After starting and initializing this YaST module the TV and Radio Cards dialog appears If your card was automatically detected it is displayed at the top of the list In this case highlight the line with the mouse and select Configure If your card was not detected select Other not recognized Press Configure to proceed with the manual selection in which to select your card from the list of vendors and models If you have already configured TV or radio cards modify existing configura tions with Change In this case a dialog presents a list of all configured cards Select a card and start the manual configuration with Edit UOILOINBYUOD ISOA During the automatic hardware de
25. Preferences The items Audio I O and Quality are important for the recording Even if tracks already exist pressing the recording button creates new tracks Initially this may be confusing as these tracks cannot be seen in the standard size program window To import audio files select Project gt Import Audio The program supports the WAV format as well as the compressed MP3 and Ogg Vorbis formats See Section 18 8 for more information about these formats 18 6 2 Editing Audio Files The AudioTrack menu can be opened to the left of each track and offers var ious views One of them is Waveform dB which is not suitable for checking the signal tuning as in this view the data is always adjusted to the maximum amplitude of the track 18 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity File Edit View Project Generate Effect Analyze Help xnur ui punog Mute Solo 1 Proiect rate 44100 Selection 0 58 735329 1 08 038124 0 09 302795 min sec Snap To Off Figure 18 10 Spectral View of the Audio Data Depending on the application various view formats for segment selections are offered under Set Selection Format With Set Snap To Mode the segment boundaries can automatically be adapted to the selected view format For ex ample if you select PAL frames as view format and activate Snap To the seg ment boundaries will always be selected in multiples of
26. Toggle Keys It is possible to request audible feedback from the system when a keycap modifier key is pressed Mouse Activates the keyboard mouse the mouse pointer is controlled with the arrow keys of the number pad Use the sliders to set the maximum speed of the mouse pointer the acceleration time until the maximum speed is reached and the latency between the pressing of a key and the cursor movement 5 2 10 Keyboard Shortcuts This module is used for managing global keyboard combinations It is possible to determine the keyboard combinations to use during text input and those for objects on the desktop The list overview window displays a list of all currently available actions along with their keyboard shortcuts Deactivate or change a keyboard shortcut by clicking the corresponding shortcut entry Then enter a new shortcut or delete the current one with Delete All changes take effect immediately Restore the current keyboard shortcut by clicking its entry and leaving the dialog with Close 5 2 Settings 5 2 11 Sound system alerts This module allows the association of certain system events and application alerts with characteristic audio signals The dialog box consists of two tabs General and Sound Events The two check boxes in the General tab must be activated to use audio signals for certain desktop events In the second tab determine which events and application alerts should be as sociated
27. Virtual Resolution i Screen Layout o le E Geometry DQ nput Devices c Mouse T i Keyboard Q Tablet E i Touchscreen z O Cancel Finalize gt gt To start double click an item in the component list i Figure 3 9 The Main Window of the New Sax2 Sax2 Main Window In the left navigation bar there are four main items Display Input devices Multihead and AccessX Configure your monitor graphics card color depth resolution and the position and size of the screen under Display The key board mouse touchscreen monitor and graphics tablet can be configured un der Input devices Use Multihead to configure multiple screens see Sec tion Multihead on page 78 AccessX is a useful tool for controlling the mouse pointer with the number pad Select your monitor and graphics card Usually the monitor and graphics card are autodetected by the system In this case no manual settings are required If your monitor is not autodetected you will automatically be taken to the mon itor selection dialog Select your monitor from the extensive list of vendors and devices or manually enter the monitor values specified in the monitor manual Alternatively select one of the preconfigured VESA modes After you click Finish in the main window following the completion of the set tings for your monitor and your graphics card test your settings Thus
28. r Copies recursively includes subdirectories mv option s sourcefile targetfile Copies sourcefile to target file then deletes the original sourcefile b Creates a backup copy of the sourcefile before moving i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing targetfile is overwritten rm option s file s Removes the specified files from the file system Directories are not removed by rm unless the option r is used r Deletes any existing subdirectories i Waits for confirmation before deleting each file in option s sourcefile targetfile Creates an internal link from the sourcefile to the targetfile under a different name Normally such a link points directly to the sourcefile on one and the same file system However if 1n is executed with the s option it creates a symbolic link that only points to the directory where the sourcefile is located thus enabling linking across file systems s Creates a symbolic link cd options s directory Changes the current directory cd without any parameters changes to the user s home directory mkdir option s directoryname Creates a new directory rmdir option s directoryname Deletes the specified directory provided it is already empty chown option s username group file s Transfers the ownership of a file to the user with the specified user name R Changes files and directories in all subdirectories SuSE Linux User Guide IOUS
29. 270 270 271 273 276 276 277 279 281 283 284 284 284 285 286 286 286 287 288 xiii 159 HAYES Cia a Son a ud Nu ee ee e 289 18 3 1 XMMS An MP3 WAV OGG and Stream Player 289 18 3 2 kscd Audio CD Player oi ocre ari saatma RET 290 18 3 3 The Audio CD Player WorkMan 290 18 344 GNOME CD Player Applet ose ep Rem xs 290 18 4 BultennpandLatenci s sonas bob RET aS 291 18 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit 293 18 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity ls 294 18 6 1 Recording WAV Files and Importing Files 294 18 6 2 Editing Audio PIES lt s susi kom eS 294 15 6 Saving and Exporting oe eos a e Ed E 296 18 7 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files 297 18 9 Compressing Audio Data 22d ume E ESAE 297 189 ALSA QM MIDI 422334 4iu e bee GR RR RE xa 298 18 9 1 Loading Sound Fonts SB Live and AWE 299 18 9 2 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard 299 18 9 3 Establishing Connections Between MIDIPorts 300 18 9 4 kmid The KDE MIDI Player 302 18 10MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card 303 18 10 1 The Sound Font Synthesizer fluidsynth 304 18 10 2 Configuration of fimidity oo 304 18 10 3 Starting timidity with the Graphical Interface 305 18 10 4 The ALSA Server Mode of timidity 305 18 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Eff
30. 9611 Language Select a e aae ai a ee a 118 3 8 12 Keyboard Layout Selection ss s acr sore 4 655 118 3 9 Miscellaneous 2 25 e a 2 bs ER GSE ea ee om RU RR Rs 118 39 1 Submitting a Support Request 118 S92 JBBOOELOE s scc oko d RR ee Ae Xe 119 E o ars iubar e eue ty e eda s RUE A e ek 120 3 9 4 Loading a Vendor sDriver CD 120 3 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses os c9 m o RR a 120 SUI Controls ins 2 as lek es Gk we oe eee qd Nus ers 120 3 10 2 Restriction of Key Combinations 121 310 3 Module Operators bae pee Ue 122 3 10 4 Starting Individual Modules 122 4 The KDE Desktop 125 41 Desktop Components sprite as ds 126 411 The Desktop Menus o ocola hoi a 646464040 04 4 126 ANS Tho Trash BRE occ ee oe ard ee a he Ye te 127 41 3 CD ROM DVD ROM and Floppy Disks 128 AVA The Printer Icon soss tds 4404 9094 dx bees 128 ANS Whe Panel 4 4 0 2 bs a a eee ed ad 131 AG The Wari Mentor a Pa ge ees a ES 131 ALF The VWHdOWS ii Ge LY Elm m 133 220 GENES uou nue Soie dri es b ent ale ie des a 133 Z2 JPeHpher ls iaa OR ddp aedes 133 Contents 4 3 4 4 4 22 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 p C I Sound amp Multimedia 2 bos ceo Appearance amp Themes 2 2999 X E m Regional amp Accessibility 00 ooo mm oso Konqueror as a File Manager a os satme Ta o o 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 The Konqueror Menu
31. Edit the partition and set the parameters File System ID Even if you do not want to format the partition at this stage spec ify one of the following file system IDs to ensure that the partition is registered correctly Linux Linux swap Linux LVM or Linux RAID Refer to the Administration Guide for details on LVM and RAID File System To format the partition immediately within the scope of the instal lation specify one of the following file systems for the partition Swap Ext2 Ext3 ReiserFS or JFS Swap is a special format that makes the partition usable as virtual memory Every system should have at least one swap partition of at least 128 MB see page on the next page ReiserFS is the default for Linux partitions ReiserFS as well as JFS and Ext3 are journaling SuSE Linux User Guide UO D OISU peugeqr esf 25 26 file systems These file systems are able to restore your system very quickly after a system crash as write processes are logged during the operation Furthermore ReiserFS is very fast in handling lots of small files Ext2 is not a journaling file system It is rock solid and good for smaller partitions as it does not require too much disk space for management File System Options Here specify various parameters for the selected file system De pending on the file system used various options are offered Only make changes if you are absolutely sure
32. Hardware in the YaST Control Center then select Printer This opena the main printer configuration window in which the de tected devices are listed in the upper part The lower part lists any queues al ready configured If your printer was not detected restart the autodetection If it fails again select Configure to configure the printer manually Not every printer can be configured for both printing systems Certain configurations are only supported by either CUPS or LPRng and Ipdfilter YaST informs you about this whenever necessary p Note In SuSE Linux the default printing system is CUPS but you can switch from CUPS to LPRng and back at any time To do so select Change Advanced in the YaST printer configuration module Then select either printing system and configure it Note Automatic Configuration YasT configures the printer automatically if these requirements are met 1 The parallel or USB port can be set up automatically in the correct way and the connected printer can be autodetected 2 The ID string of the printer as supplied to YaST during hardware autode tection is included in the printer database As this ID may be different from the actual name of the model you may need to select the model manually To make sure everything works properly each configuration should be checked with the print test function of YaST The YaST test page also provides important information about
33. MENUS e sur ecu Era MOUSE riores Screensaver system alerts A ete me rete t nes stoolbars enc eee 161 WIDBdOWS ics esee Rees 162 e desktop sci eossr ruere Ret 158 160 desktop menu 005 158 gt dictionatya A ess es as 167 uj 159 s DVDS siete spore vacsietmneereseeaidinie nance 159 file manager 06 cece esses 166 File Roller managing archives 168 pico aa ad A 158 MA N menu oesie 159 mixers applets ia 286 Nautilus oooooooccnocccccooo 165 167 O A ce nens 159 players apple se 290 utilities i bees eee ene 167 169 A eset rnain ni E ees 335 354 A ese etenim 323 328 installing nic rico eret ene 324 graphical user interface 72 81 graphics SGIMP L3 u i dass 335 V VECLOE Dee O 3 4 338 graphics pixel scere eene ns 337 SA 372 group administration 006 103 glKam 5 pelis eine rie a i Ad em iie 325 camera selection 325 installing ccc eee eee 324 rA E 361 BZID exero dresser pins 361 370 H ha 375 Index hard disks adding criar b eee px 399 defragmenting 45 399 SDMA cc aiii 82 hardware CD ROM conocio 63 hard disk controller 72 information ococoococorccccnnoroos 81 SUppor 2 rer nehmen enni os 398 I 391 Eig M 395 man pages see eee eee eee eee 368 OpenOffice org
34. Make Link Drag the link from the Nautilus window and drop it on the desktop 5 1 2 The Desktop Menu Right clicking a free spot on the desktop displays a menu with various options Select New Folder to create a new folder Create a launcher icon for an ap plication with New Launcher Provide the name of the application and the command for starting it then choose an icon to represent it It is also possible to change the desktop background or to reset it to its default setting 5 1 The Desktop 5 1 3 The Panel The panel contains the window icons of all started applications in the taskbar If you click the name of a window in the taskbar it is moved to the foreground If the program is already in the foreground a mouse click minimizes it Clicking a minimized application reopens the respective window Beside the taskbar the Workspace Switcher provides access to additional work areas These virtual desktops provide extra space in which to arrange open ap plications and windows For example put an editor on one workspace some shells on another and your e mail application and web browser on a third If you right click an empty spot in the panel a menu opens offering help in formation and commands for GNOME and panels Select Properties to open a configuration dialog in which to change the position and background of the panel If desired create additional panels or add launchers tools and various applets
35. Most items under Edit only become active if you select an object in the main window Standard editing functions are available The Shred func tion destroys the data permanently Create new directories and files or change file properties such as the file permissions Grant or deny the user 4 3 Konqueror as a File Manager a group with which the user is associated or all users read write and exe cute permissions In the main window one or several files can be selected by moving the mouse pointer over them while keeping the left mouse button pressed or by using the selection functions in the Edit menu View Use the View menu to change views If a directory is very full the text view or the tree view may be more efficient To view HTML pages ac tivate Use index html With Lock to Current Location stop animated images and with Unlock View resume the animation Icon Size Sort Preview Show Hidden Files and Folder Icons Reflect Contents con trol the icons shown in the main window Also use this menu to choose a color or image for the background Go The Go menu contains the navigation functions However you can ac cess these functions more quickly in the toolbar One interesting feature is available under this menu the list of recently viewed directories which can be selected and displayed Bookmarks Bookmarks can be Internet addresses URL or paths to
36. System Information df option s directory The df disk free command when used without any options displays information about the total disk space the disk space currently in use and the free space on all the mounted drives If a directory is specified the information is limited to the drive on which that directory is located H shows the number of occupied blocks in gigabytes megabytes or kilobytes in human readable format t Type of file system ext2 nfs etc du option s path This command when executed without any param eters shows the total disk space occupied by files and subdirectories in the current directory a Displays the size of each individual file h Output in human readable form s Displays only the calculated total size free option s The command free displays information about RAM and swap space usage showing the total and the used amount in both categories b Output in bytes k Output in kilobytes m Output in megabytes date option s Thissimple program displays the current system time If run as root it can also be used to change the system time Details about the program are available in the man page for date man date Processes top options s top provides a quick overview of the currently running esprocesses Press H to access a page that briefly explains the main options to customize the program ps option s process ID If run without any options this command
37. The CapiSuite scripts used here are multiuser capable and allow each user to send and receive faxes individually The target number of an incoming call determines which user receives the fax The list of this module is of course empty when it is started for the first time uolI o2IunuJuJo29 9 NASI The input field under the list can be used to enter any numbers needed for con necting to an external line If your ISDN adapter is connected to an phone ex change you can enter the prefix usually 0 for external calls here If various users want to receive faxes with CapiSuite it must be ensured that the associated phone numbers are all different and that all these numbers are also associated with the line to which the ISDN adapter is connected This is of importance if you concurrently use an ISDN PBX Tip Use only the answering machine module if you intend to receive both fax messages and regular calls under one number as this module includes the functionality for recognizing and receiving fax messages See Sec tion Configuring the Answering Machine on page 273 In order to be able to send fax messages configure a suitable entry in the fax module but leave the field for incoming phone numbers see further below void Tip Existing entries can be edited or deleted and new entries can be created by means of the buttons under the list To create a new entry or edit an existing entry use the dialog box to enter the following d
38. The keyboard is without doubt the most frequently used input computer input device Therefore it must be especially well designed Ergonomic specialists of ten criticize the fact that the and keys are too small Another basic problem is the cable which is often too short preventing a comfortable indi vidual placement Consider buying a wireless keyboard or an extension for the cable The keyboard should be separate from the screen It should also be inclin able but set in a stable position sufficiently large rubber coated feet The middle key row should not be more than 30 mm above the surface of the table There should be room to rest your hands in front of the keyboard If there is no built in wrist pad get one The marking must contrast with the color of the plastic and be easy to read The keyboard should have no intense color and a satin matt finish For the keyboard legend a dark script on a light background is recom mended Black keys are not ergonomic The form of the keys should enable light and accurate typing The lift of key should be 2 4 mm and the working point should be distinctly felt Here 50 80 g is recommended as the force of the key depression stroke SuSE Linux User Guide e2DJ O 10M SUL ui soiuouo8173 387 388 Those who type a lot should take regular breaks Learning the touch system helps because the workload is distributed across all fingers Split or individually separable ke
39. You can use the menu to change the size of the panel and add and remove appli cations To add an application search for the respective application in the menu and select it You can remove applications or applets by clicking the respective icon with the right mouse button and selecting Remove from the displayed menu 4 1 6 The Main Menu You can access the main menu by means of the icon to the far left of the panel By default this menu contains entries for logging out from the system locking the screen executing commands and starting the quick browser and the book mark manager You can use the file manager to display your home directory search for files or start the Control Center for the purpose of customizing the desktop The other menu entries allow you to start a variety of programs sorted by subjects The following section provides information on selected functions that you can start by means of the main menu Detailed information on the Con trol Center is available in Section Settings on page 133 Logout User You can log out from the system by means of this menu item However first you will be asked what should happen after the logout SuSE Linux User Guide 131 132 If you select the Login as different user the login screen is displayed al lowing you or another user to log in to the system You can also turn off or restart the computer Confirm your selection with OK or remain logged in by clickin
40. atively little basic information The drawing application of OpenOffice org for example uses this format 23 2 Using The GIMP 23 2 1 Starting The GIMP By default GIMP is included in the standard installation of SuSE Linux Start GIMP from your main menu or by typing gimp in a command line Some postinstallation procedures are conducted when GIMP is first started for a user Click Install then in the following dialog click Continue GIMP is then cor rectly installed and set up Because many files need to be loaded when it first starts GIMP takes some time to load By default a window is displayed after each start showing the Tip of the Day If desired deactivate it by unchecking Show tip next time 338 23 2 Using The GIMP 23 2 2 The Toolbox Initially GIMP appears on screen in a rather unspectacular way It opens a rel atively small window containing the toolbox The buttons of this window are the main functions needed for powerful image manipulation The following is a description of the icons and their functions GIMP toolbox window can be sub divided into three parts the menu bar with the File Xtns Extensions and Help menus the tool icons and the color pattern and brush selection icons 23 2 3 The Menu Bar The menu bar can be been in Figure 23 1 on page 336 Use File to create a new graphics file load an existing image with the file manager create screenshots screensh
41. conf Click Options to open a di alog in which to customize the sound module options manually In Volume configure the individual settings for the input and output of each sound card Next saves the new values and Back restores the default configuration Un der Add Sound Card configure additional sound cards If YaST detects an other sound card continue to Configure a Sound Card If YaST does not detect a sound card automatically be directed to Manual Sound Card Selection If you use a Creative Soundblaster Live or AWE sound card automatically copy SF2 sound fonts to your hard disk from the original Soundblaster driver CD ROM with Install Sound Fonts The sound fonts will be saved in the directory usr share sfbank creative The start up of ALSA when booting the machine can be enabled or disabled with Start ALSA For playback of MIDI files activate Start Sequencer This way the sound modules required for sequencer support will be loaded along with the ALSA modules The volume and configuration of all sound cards installed will be saved when you click Finish The mixer settings are saved to the file etc asound conf and the ALSA configuration data is appended at the end of the file etc modules conf Configuring a Sound Card If multiple sound cards were detected select your preferred card under List of Automatically Recognized Continue to Setup with
42. dev sdb5 23 5 MB for boot with ext2 Set mount point of dev sda1 to windows C Software Default system Help amp Support Documentation KDE Desktop Environment Office Applications Graphical Base System UOID OISU peugeqr esf A Booting A Change Help Abort Installation Figure 2 4 Suggestion Window 2 5 3 Mouse If YaST did not detect your mouse automatically press in the suggestion window several times until Mouse is selected Then use to open the dialog in which to set the mouse type This dialog is shown in Figure 2 5 on the following page To select the mouse type use T and Q Consult the mouse documentation for information about the mouse type After selecting a mouse type use the key combination D to test whether the device works correctly without select ing it permanently If the mouse does not behave as expected use the keyboard to select another type and test again Use and to make the current se lection permanent 2 5 4 Partitioning In most cases YaST proposes a reasonable partitioning scheme that can be ac cepted without change If desired modify this scheme to meet your needs or create a new one SuSE Linux User Guide 19 20 YasT Er Choose the mouse type of the mouse Mouse configuration attached to your computer Choose your mouse type from the list Use the arrow keys to select a mouse If PS 2 mouse Aux port the s
43. displays a table of all your own programs or processes those you started The options for this command are not preceded by hyphen SuSE Linux User Guide IOUS SUL ULM BUOM 373 aux Displays a detailed list of all processes independent of the owner kill option s process ID Unfortunately sometimes a program can not be terminated in the normal way However in most cases you should still be able to stop such a runaway program by executing the ki11 com mand specifying the respective process ID see top and ps ki11 sends a TERM signal that instructs the program to shut itself down If this does not help the following parameter can be used 9 Sends a KILL signal instead of a TERM signal with which the process really is annihilated by the operating system This brings the specific processes to an end in almost all cases killall option s processname This command is similar to ki11 but uses the process name instead of the process ID as an argument causing all processes with that name to be killed Network ping option s host name IP address The ping command is the standard tool for testing the basic functionality of TCP IP networks It sends a small data packet to the destination host requesting an immediate reply If this works ping displays a message to that effect which indicates that the network link is basically functioning c number Determines the total number of p
44. model Selecting a manufacturer and a model basically means selecting a printer language and a Ghostscript driver suitable for this language with some default settings for the driver These settings may then be changed in an additional dialog as needed For non PostScript models all printer specific data is produced by the Ghostscript driver The driver configuration both choosing the right driver and the correct options for it is the single most important factor determining the output quality The settings made at this point affect the printout on a queue by queue basis If your printer was autodetected using the printer database or if the model has been selected manually YaST presents a choice of suitable Ghostscript drivers usually with a number of predefined configurations for each of them for instance 3 4 Hardware Manufacturer Manufacturer and model of the printer c Selectthe manufacturer of your printer Select manufacturer Select model Model ALPS After a manufacturer is selected the list ANITECH 9 Pin Series of models is updated with printers made APOLLO ActionLaser 1100 pune selected manufacturer Choose APPLE ActionLaser Il O BROTHER ActionPrinter 3250 If you cannot find your printer try the CANON AcuLaser C2000 O Generic printers or Ghostscript devices If CITIZEN AcuLaser C2000PS J you do not know which protocol your CITOH AcuLaser C4000 printer uses consult the printer s manua
45. so you can immediately continue working on the same command line updatedb 4 find option s The find command allows you to search for a file in a given directory The first argument specifies the directory in which to start the search The option name must be followed by a search string which may also include wild cards Unlike Locate which uses a database find scans the actual directory Commands to Access File Contents cat option s file s Thecat command displays the contents of a file printing the entire contents to the screen without interruption n Numbers the output on the left margin less option s file s This command can be used to browse the con tents of the specified file Scroll half a screen page up or down with and or a full screen page down with Space Jump to the beginning or end of a file using and End Press to exit the program SuSE Linux User Guide 371 grep option s searchstring filenames The grep command finds a specific searchstring in the specified file s If the search string is found the command displays the line in which the searchstring was found along with the file name i Ignores case 1 Only displays the names of the respective files but not the text lines n Additionally displays the numbers of the lines in which it found a hit 1 Only lists the files in which searchstring does not occur diff option s filelfile2 The diff command compares the contents of any tw
46. therefore much time and energy has been invested in developing compression procedures that squeeze the amount of in formation together Some well known graphics file formats for pixel images in clude XCF The native GIMP format It supports the layer technique discussed later and other specific GIMP functions If you have created an image using GIMP specific settings and save it in a different file format information is lost BMP A format without compression used by Microsoft Windows An advan tage of this format is that graphics can be loaded and saved very quickly but this positive aspect is outweighed by the file size GIF The Graphics Interchange Format has been specially developed for data transfer on the Internet and has special features to support this For licensing reasons many programs are no longer able to support this for mat One special feature of GIF is the animated Gif a GIF file in which several images are stored In an Internet browser these individual images are displayed so quickly one after the other that the impression of a mov ing image is created GIF despite its limitations is popular predominantly because it allows transparency PNG The Portable Network Graphics is a popular replacement for the GIF format It can generate the same quality of compressed files without loss of information and is freely available It allows a better form of trans parency but is not yet fully supported by all Internet
47. tion SuSE Linux User Guide IOUS SUL ULM BUOM 363 Directory Permissions Access permissions for directories have the type d For directories the individual permissions have a slightly different meaning drwxrwxr x 1 tux project3 35 Jun 21 15 15 ProjectData Output 2 Sample Output Showing Directory Permissions In Output 2 the owner tux and the owner group project 3 of the directory ProjectData are easy to recognize In contrast to the file access permissions from Section File System Permissions on the preceding page the set reading permissions r means that the contents of the directory can be shown The write permission w means new files can be created The executable permission x means the user can change to this directory In the above example this means the user tux as well as the members of the group project3 can change to the ProjectData directory x view the contents r and add new files to it w The rest of the users on the other hand are given less access They may enter the directory x and browse through it r but not insert any new files w 24 3 2 Modifying File Permissions Changing Access Permissions The access permissions of a file or directory can be changed by the owner and of course by root with the command chmod which must be entered together with the parameters specifying the changes to perform and the names of the respective files Both parameters are comprised of 1 the cat
48. Aa x e edes 163 B20 A ceu og okies e SUN eR ACRES SE eS 163 T29 Accessibilty 2s 4 6 Oude aes e uode sis ie es Ghats 163 522 10 Keyboard Shortcuts ed ke a 164 5211 Bound system alerts uc Vue ovx ee oe SE a a 165 5 3 File Management with Nautilus lt o 165 531 Navigating In Noutllus 2 sa 6 66664 een ee eS 165 o2 File Managements c ros aa a as mew 166 53 3 Cont gunngNoutlus e o24 2 445 4484 my d 167 54 ImportantUaltles s sui Oa eae a a e isis e ses 167 SIS CUNA a e FOX tet ad 167 542 Managing Archives with File Roller 168 III Office Applications 171 6 The OpenOffice org Office Suite 173 6 1 The QOuickstarter o ii da 174 6 2 Overview of the Application Modules 174 bo Gets Help RD LR Cre 175 6 4 Converting Microsoft Office Documents 175 6 5 Changing the Global Settings o o 176 6 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer 178 6 6 1 Creating Texts with the AutoPilot 178 6 6 2 Creating Texts without the AutoPilot 178 66 3 Selecting TENE s igor a qup E a SU d 179 6 6 4 Working with the Stylist o 179 66 5 Inserting a Table 204 545 oo aa 181 56 6 Inserting Graphics oi a a Sak ee ee as 182 6 7 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 182 Contents 7 671 Changing Cell Attributes o o 183 6 7 2 A Practical Example Monthly E
49. Causes Stress Noise is a physically powerful stress factor Although it is often played down too much noise makes you ill Apart from health impairments such as defective hearing vegetative disorders and psychic changes noise affects our efficiency by impairing our ability to concentrate Furthermore discontent can reduce working motivation The fact that proper noise abatement can possibly cost a lot of money is also problematic A calm working environment improves efficiency Work at terminal worksta tions is often characterized as mental activity Therefore the maximum load value for scientific work or programming is 55 dB A The dB A represent a weighted evaluation of the acoustic pressure The A filter curve most resembles human perception An increase of the sound level by 10 dB A is normally per ceived as a duplication of volume Because mainly mental work is done at terminal workstations quiet working materials should be used from the start The maximum limiting value for office work is 55 dB A With especially high mental demands or necessary communication of language as low as 35 45 dB A is required This is the case for instance for specialized work scientific work or programming Furthermore the evaluation level of a maximum of 55 dB A is impor tant 1 70 dB A is measured for a quarter of an hour the noise in the re maining time should be less than or equal to 55 dB A Workstations can
50. Copy This copies the selected text region to the clipboard The same can be achieved with the shortcut C Paste Use this to insert text from the clipboard The shortcut for this function is V You can also paste text by clicking the middle mouse button Select All This selects all the text in a document The shortcut for this func tion is A Deselect This menu option deselects a previously selected text area The shortcut for this function is Ctrl ft Shift A performs the same func tion You can do the same by clicking the left mouse button in the docu ment window Toggle Block Selection KWrite not only supports marking and removing hor izontal selections lines or paragraphs it also supports vertical selections any desired text block This menu item toggles the block selection mode on and off This can also be done with the shortcut Ctrl CT shift B Toggle Insert This changes the program s input mode By default KWrite inserts new text at the current cursor position Selecting this menu item switches the editing mode so any existing text is overwritten Alterna tively switch between editing modes by pressing Ins Find and Replace Selecting Find or pressing displays a dialog in which to enter a search string or a regular expression Also de fine the search direction the starting point and other details To go from one match
51. E RS 213 Using KODQUBIOF 22v 0 0 ba RR IRURE Ud a 214 Using CERAM ici be dc hd boh oe ee so Rus 21 5 Using Digikapi clu gos acs Ea Se ee a a ee ale a a 21 6 For More Information s e 6 e cee esere AS 22 Kooka A Scanning Application 22 1 The Kooka Window 4 2 9 Rc 222 The PEI uu 9 ack Xx ee een wd EE NS X 22 2 Whe Find Stam arca Sa Su we RAS ES REESE Cre RR 2225 The Menus is Sete ae Sa RS a V ae oa 220 Me Gallery os anser dee purum dod Prem ed eR ennt d oda e 22 6 Optical Character Recognition 2 29 varia SuSE Linux User Guide XV xvi 23 Graphics with The GIMP 23 1 Image Processing and Graphics Formats 23 1 1 Pixel Images 23 12 Vector Graphics si asai a at as ees 23 2 Using The GIMP Zoe Darts The GIMP o dude e ue E ee mm RE ees 23 2 2 The Toolbox 2323 The Ment Bat o cocida 3 3 8 3X 2324 The Tool Icons 23 949 5 33 3e la da 23 2 5 The S lection Tools o RR Rs 23 2 6 Transformation Tools gt 19 393 27 9x 23 2 7 Paint Tools 23 2 8 Color Brush Pattern and Gradient Selection 23 9 Working with The GIMP umm a 23 3 1 Opening Images 21d ic hon ee xe a eres 239 2 Creating a New Image o ops nia dad et had 23 3 9 Saving DHWages woe ee oo Wee oec Rok a omes 23 3 4 Configuring The GIMP eren 23 35 Layers 25 30 mare Modes o e oas en ee Esa tS use xs 23 4 Introduction to Image Manipulation 23 41 Special Effects z
52. Folder Icons IO Use custom icons UJ UJ r Folder Type Mailbox format maildir r Associated Mailing List Cj Eolder holds a mailing list r Old Message Expiry iL Expire old messages in this folder t see ys r Identity Sender L Standard Default gt r Show Sender Receiver Show Default X cancel Figure 15 3 Creating New Folders list associated with it and an expiry date after which the messages are marked for deletion Furthermore you can select an identity or display a certain sender or recipient To move messages from one folder to another highlight the message to move then press M or click Message Move to In the list of folders that ap pears select the folder to which to move your messages Messages can also be moved by dragging the message from the upper window and dropping it into the appropriate folder in the left window To remove all the messages from a folder click Folder Empty All messages located in the folder are then moved to the trash Note Messages are not deleted permanently until you empty the trash Note 15 6 Message Folders 15 7 The Address Book Save frequently used addresses and contacts in the address book Access it from the Tools menu with the respective icon in the main window or from the Composer window Create a new entry with File gt
53. Heading 10 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Text body indent Automatic Figure 6 5 The Stylist for Writer On the other hand if you select All in the drop down list the Stylist offers all styles from the currently active group Groups are selected with the buttons at the top Text can be hard formatted or soft formatted Hard Formatting Formatting properties are directly assigned to a text range and each property must be applied to each range by hand The assign ment is static and can only be changed manually This is only recom mended for short documents Soft Formatting With this method text is not formatted directly It has a style applied to it The style itself can be modified quite easily Modifying a style automatically results in a formatting change of all the text to which it is assigned This approach has many advantages when creating larger documents theses books and the like Although not as intuitive it is very efficient and fast if the formatting needs to be changed extensively and consis tently Using this method also makes it much easier to try different layouts with the document Define the format of paragraphs pages and frames for a style and select fonts and numbering methods 6 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer To assign a style to a paragraph select the style to use and click the paintbucket icon in the Stylist Click the paragraphs to which to assign the style Pressing or
54. It is shown in Figure 2 16 on the next page If you do not have the necessary network connection local user accounts can still be created 2 6 6 Configuring the Host as a NIS Client If you have decided to manage user accounts through NIS configure the host as a NIS client A NIS enabled network requires some expert knowledge The details of NIS are explained in the Administration Guide The following only ex plains the basic setup of the client side In the following dialog shown in Figure 2 17 on page 40 first select whether the host has a fixed IP address or gets one via DHCP DHCP also provides the NIS domain and the NIS server For information about DHCP see DHCP in the Administration Guide If a static IP address is used specify the NIS domain and the NIS server manually To search for NIS servers broadcasting in the network check the relevant op tion You can also specify several NIS domains and set a default domain For each domain you can select Edit to specify several server addresses or enable the broadcast function on a per domain basis 2 6 Finishing the Installation Authentication User Authentication Method C Here you can choose the authentication c method of users on your system O Select Stand Alone Machine if you want E to authenticate users only by using the local U files eto passwd and etc shadow if you are using NIS NIS or LDAP server D to store user data select Network Client and
55. Linux Yes this is possible To copy and paste in the text mode you must have gpm running In the X Window System and in the text mode highlight the text block by clicking and dragging with the left mouse button then insert by clicking with the middle mouse button The right mouse button has a special function in most programs and applications Do I need to be afraid of a virus in Linux In Linux there have been no serious viruses found Also viruses cannot cause any serious damage if they are riot activated by root The only virus scanners available in Linux serve to search e mails for Windows viruses if Linux is being used as a router or server Nevertheless you should back up important data and configurations Do I need to compile a kernel myself No this is usually unnecessary The kernel has become so large that there are about eight hundred options to consider during the configuration Because it is almost impossible to master all possible configurations and their effects it is strongly discouraged for inexperienced users to recom pile the kernel Do so only at your own risk In cases of custom compiled kernels SuSE cannot provide any installation support Where can I see the system messages In a terminal window enter tail f var log messages as root Additional interesting programs relating to this one are top procinfo and xosview Use the command 1ess var log boot msg to view the boot messages I cannot log in
56. NGG TUNERS o neu eem ee e p RUR RRA E I EUM RR M 263 164 7 Virtual Folders uou ee wee a doe ho Bae XR mut 264 16 5 Calendar zu ku duh EG e SS Dee eeu 265 1651 Adding Appointments gt si 265 Contents 16 52 16 5 3 Scheduling a Meeting _ o o Addie Tasio nia mass e a dee Sep b ES 160 COMAS 2s uer dou Oe dede y XI me x we ya 16 6 1 16 6 2 16 6 3 Adding Contaet i sic h n pube der bue Making 8 List ysa a omo S a Eve eg Sharing Contacts e ri Sua 2S 4 BS Ga OE Ss 16 7 Public Address Books in Evolution 16 8 For More Information lt lt se aces druri ess ee 17 ISDN Telecommunication 171 Cspletite Basics ioo 2 a oque eve bus onem oe th ede Doa ayi 172 Coni parato iu nonae m koX Ee E RIP E PE eo ads 17 21 17 22 17 3 Usage 17 3 1 17 3 2 17 3 3 Configuring Fax Services 22993 A a i Configuring the Answering Machine General Notes about Reception Bax CIperalon vacios a aS Ks Operation of the Answering Machine V Multimedia 18 Sound in Linux 18 1 Basie ALSA PCM Types onsu o aon a e t pe 18 2 Mixers 18 2 1 18 2 2 18 2 9 18 2 4 19 2 5 18 2 6 18 2 7 18 2 8 The GNOME Mixer Applet roads em mo be alsamixer oo nm ooa yo eae bo Mixer Parameters of Soundblaster Live and Audigy The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 Configuration of the S PDIF Channels SuSE Linux User Guide 269
57. O Documentation for Linux PAM Missing O cups Missing Index Directory var cache susehelp Ey OK Apply X Cancel Figure A 3 Generating a Search Index All All sources are searched None No sources selected for the search Custom Determine the sources to search by activating the respective check boxes in the overview Upon completion of the search configuration click Search The relevant items are then displayed in the view window and can easily be navigated with mouse clicks 394 _______ AJ The Search Function of the SuSE Help Center SuSE Linux FAQ This section provides answers to frequently asked questions 1 Iam the only person using my computer Why do I always need to log in Linux is a multiuser system A user name and a password are necessary so Linux knows who is working with it Only log in as root to make changes to your system installing software or changing configuration For everyday use create a regular user This prevents accidental damage to the installation 2 Where can I find the SuSE manuals in PDF or HTML format Our manuals are also available on our CDs The PDF files or HTML ver sions are available in the packages suselinux adminguide en and suselinux userguide_en In the installed system go to the direc tory usr share doc packages suselinux adminguide_en or usr share doc packages suselinux userguide_en 3 Where can I get more information about SuSE Linux Mo
58. Pointer Threshold The pointer acceleration defines the relation between the movement speed of the input device mouse and the speed of the pointer on the screen The higher the selected factor is the more difficult it is to control the screen pointer The threshold in pixels specifies the distance the pointer must cover before the indicated pointer acceleration is activated In this way control the mouse pointer easily when covering small distances and cover large distances on the screen with small movements 4 2 Settings Double Click Interval Here set the maximum interval between two mouse clicks that should still be interpretted as a double click Drag Start Time and Drag Start Distance The object selected with a click is moved if you move it by the distance in pixels specified in Drag start distance within the period specified in Drag start time Mouse Wheel Scrolls By If you have a wheel mouse specify the number of lines the image should scroll per wheel tooth dosed JG eui To be able to navigate the mouse pointer with the arrow keys of the number pad activate this function under Mouse Navigation and customize the param eters according to your needs Printers The printer administration module mainly consists of three parts The top frame lists all printers available in the network The center part features a configura tion and information zone comprising four tabs The lower part indicates the curren
59. SUL ULM BUOM 369 chgrp option s groupname file s Transfers the group ownership of a given file to the group with the specified group name The file owner can only change group ownership if a member of both the existing and the new group chmod options mode file s Changes the access permissions The mode parameter has three parts group access and access type group accepts the following characters u user g group o others For access access is granted by the symbol and denied by the sym bol The access type is controlled by the following options d read w write x eXecute executing files or changing to the directory S Set uid bit the application or program is started as if it were started by the owner of the file gzip parameters file s This program compresses the contents of files using complex mathematical algorithms Files compressed in this way are given the extension gz and need to be uncompressed before they can be used To compress several files or even entire directories use the tar command d decompresses the packed gzip files so they return to their original size and can be processed normally like the command gunzip tar options archive file s The tar puts one file or usually several files into an archive Compression is optional tar is a quite complex command with a number of options available The most frequently used options are f Writes the output to a file and not
60. Screen Location A screen put in the wrong place leads to a cramped posture at work which can cause illnesses A work table that has insufficient depth often prevents the screen from being placed reasonably The natural position of the head and arms is designed for work that lies in front of the body Ergonomics specialists have developed their own guidelines for the vision and gripping area These reject placing the screen to the side An exception is only when the screen is rarely used A reason for this placement is the fact that even the required minimum 80 cm worktable depth is insufficient with a large screen and the use of working documents Often the screen is placed as shown in many PC manual pictures on top of the computer case This also leads to an unnatural posture Observe yourself while you are reading Are you looking straight ahead or slightly down Shoulder keyboard and screen should be in one line so you always look directly at the screen This rule does not necessarily need to be observed all the time Ultimately the workstation should be individually adapted to the person and the working task Flexibility is the key Easily movable rotatable and ideally screens that retract into the table are encouraged A comfortable visual distance varies individually At least 50 cm is re quired Some people need considerably more It is a good idea for users to look away from the screen from time to time I
61. Setup Tool The SuSE Linux system assistant SuSE Linux User Guide AJOSSO 411 Index A access permissions sess 362 366 file systems s sner sereisas 362 address management see KAddressBook alSVE ri nci nd ea 314 o coe ci bere sas eat ehe e das 286 automatic dial up 6c cece eee eee 89 B BACKUPS sonnn 61 creating with YaST 108 restoring ooocooccnenrrccnrarrc cos 109 A Ser iere NER ge 354 362 commands osrstenie ius 354 functions sadiaan e aia 356 Wild cards ooooooooomocco m 358 BIOS boot sequence 6 6 60 eee 14 BMBuicioasest stad adiu e ated dA 387 bookmarks Konqueror AA 221 boot configuration ssssssssssse 33 boot disk caw siete eater etuer 110 boot loader s location ssec ana 115 PTY PO airis 114 O A sane 112 115 A 119 booting CD from oil ida 14 bugs reporting e eee e eee eee ee 398 Buying a Keyboard ssusss 387 Buying a Monitor 0 cess eee 385 Buying a Mouse 6 0 eee ee eee 388 C cable modem ooooocccccccccncncccnn ees 91 calendars Evolution arica 260 265 cards PRAPIOS y rasno keine enone ween 75 SISDN sons ii 95 a co ro sr Ek NEUE RUE EE 89 sradi ise Rb ERE REDE 87 AQUA pioner i neni ket e a Ee PLAY 85 TV uuasausauadcut atre e nace 87 311 CAE qm 371 o ME 369 CDs audio A deci e etx du 29
62. Signature and select the file to check in the following dialog As soon as you confirm the selection KGpg checks the signature and reports the result of the operation Another possibility is to load the signed file into the editor and click Sign verify 14 3 The Applet 14 4 For More Information For theoretical background information about the encryption method re fer to the brief and clear introduction on the GnuPG project pages at http www gnupg org documentation howtos html en This document also provides a list of further information sources SuSE Linux User Guide 6d5 ULIM UOYAA DU 243 KMail The KDE Mail Application KMail is the KDE mail application In addition to sending and receiving e mail and using multiple mail protocols it offers the possibility to configure several user defined filters for sorting e mail messages in individual folders The en cryption decryption and signing of e mail messages can also be handled conve niently in KMail Poul Mail FORMAS 4 uuu ws ele Gee ys Se eae s 246 152 Access Types ocre 4v eR AS ats 246 153 Configuring KMal 62 60 06 4 eee ee a 246 154 Usine KME zu 0d M dre et ea oes 248 15 5 Creating a New Message lees 250 15 6 Message Folders oo soontoe o es 251 15 7 The Address Book 00 0 ao Bes 253 15 9 Filters opina PA AS ae Se Ces 253 15 9 Mail Encryption with PGP orGnuPG 254 15 10For More Information 256 uoupol
63. The following dialogs provide for the configuration of the various ISDN parameters for operating the card The next dialog shown in Figure 3 20 on page 97 is used for the Selection of ISDN protocol The standard setting for Europe is Euro ISDN EDSS1 refer to scenarios 1 and 2a below 1TR6 is a protocol used by older or large phone systems refer to scenario 2b below The standard setting for the US is NIT Select the country code from the selection box In the adjacent input field enter the area code for your location e g 212 for New York If necessary enter the prefix for external calls Use Start Mode to set the start mode for the current ISDN card OnBoot ini tializes the ISDN driver to when the system is booted With Manual the ISDN SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 95 96 5 YaST Ert Accessto your Internet provider If you Set parameters for the Internet connection have selected your provider from the list these values are provided Enter a Provider Name for the provider and a Phone Number to access your provider Enter the Line ID e g 00056780362 the T Online Number e g Name for dialing tonline ds 870008594732 the User Code typically 0001 and the Password to use asthe login ask your provider if MOS Provider name Check Always Ask to be asked forthe T Online Into password every time ees Authorization Line ID T Onlin
64. To encrypt the attachments as well select Encrypt all message parts in Settings gt Configure KMail gt Security gt Crypto Plugins gt Configure Once the preferences have been set click Identities under Configure KMail Select the identity with which encrypted or signed messages should be sent and choose Change Select the Advanced tab in the dialog that opens Clicking Change for the OpenPGP key entry displays a selection box from which to choose the keys Confirm with OK The encryption system is now ready The public key must be made available to recipients of a signed message so they can verify its authenticity It also needs to be accessible to enable others to send encrypted messages to the owner of the key Public keys can be stored on a pub lic PGP key server such as www pgp net 15 9 1 Signing Messages Create your messages as usual Before sending the message click the corre sponding icon second to last in the toolbar of the window or choose Options sign message The message can then be sent To sign it KMail must know your PGP password However if you have already provided the password KMail signs the message without requesting any further information The re sults of the PGP signing process can be reviewed in the SentMessages folder or in the outbox if you did not use Send now There your e mail should be marked wit
65. To repeat a command that has been entered be fore press T until the previous command appears at the prompt Move forward through the list of previously entered commands by pressing Q To edit the command line just move the cursor to the desired position us ing the arrow keys and start typing Use Ctrl R to search in the history The expansion function Expand a file name to its full length after typ ing its first letters until it can be uniquely identified To do so type the first letters then hit Tab If there are several file names starting with the same letters obtain a list of them by hitting Tab twice 24 2 Introduction to Bash First Example Managing Files Now that you know what a command looks like which directories exist in SuSE Linux and how to speed up things when using Bash put this knowledge into practice with a small exercise 1 Open a console from the KDE desktop by clicking the shell icon 2 Enter the 1s command to see the contents of your home directory 3 Use the command mkdir which stands for make directory to create a new subdirectory called test by entering mkdir test 4 Now launch the KEdit editor by pressing and entering kedit in the input field Type a few letters in the editor then save the file as Test file in your home directory Linux distinguishes between upper case and lowercase For this example use an uppercase T 5 View the contents of your home directory
66. UO D OISU peugeqr esf 35 Unlike normal users of the system who for Password for root the system administrator instance write texts create graphics or browse the Internet the user root exists on every system and is called into action whenever administrative tasks need to be performed Log in as root when you need to be the system administrator and only then Because the root user is equipped with extensive permissions the password for A Do not forget what you enter here combination of letters and numbers is recommended To ensure that the Enter a password for the root user password was entered correctly reenter it I in a second field All the rules for user passwords apply to Reenter the password for verification the root password Distinguish between RR uppercase and lowercase A password should have at least 5 characters and as a rule not contain any special characters e g accented letters or umlauts Expert Options Valid password characters are letters digits blanks and _ 1 6 rons Do not forget this root password Abort installation Figure 2 13 Setting the root Password updates are available for your version of SuSE Linux Also the latest release notes are downloaded Any available updates can be installed in the next step If you do not want to test the connection at this point select Skip Test then Next This also skips download
67. When a file is attached to your message it appears in the list of attachments in the lower part of the window Attachments can be saved removed or opened by selecting the name of the attachment and subsequently clicking the desired item in the Attach menu You can also attach PGP keys to your messages by means of this menu PGP keys are treated like file attach ments Their MIME type is application pgp keys 15 6 Message Folders Message folders serve as an organizing tool for your messages By default all message folders are stored in the Mail folder in your home directory The inbox outbox sent mail and trash folders are created when KMail is started for the first time These folders have the following functions inbox KMail stores new messages here unless a filter has been defined outbox Messages to send are stored here sent mail Copies of all e mails sent are stored here trash Stores deleted e mails Using Folder gt New Folder you can create additional folders for organizing your e mail messages Enter the name of the new folder in the dialog that opens see Figure 15 3 on the following page To create a subfolder select the parent folder from the drop down list Belongs to Specify the folder type any mailing SuSE Linux User Guide uoupolgddy IION IY SUL IONX 251 252 Create Folder KMail HZ 2 Folder Position Name Belongs to Top Level m
68. a Folder Bar at any time The different items listed in the Shortcuts are described in the following Y e7 Summary Ximian Evolution 1 2 3 1 BOX File View Actions Tools Help I Q New v Br sena Receive EJ Print d Reload Sor l 9 Summary ya Weather LA Wednesday May 7 2003 IE Boston Overcast Moderate mist 13 0 C ER Calendar ra Linux Today t a Sensors Online Is Linux Bringing Open Tasks Systems to the Factory Floor o NewsFactor Where Are All the Cool Embedded Linux Gadgets E J Appointments No appointments o Open Source Digest Network Programming q with IO Socket o Debian Weekly News May 6 2003 Release Digest KDE May 6 2003 Contacts ic Figure 16 1 The Evolution Window with Shortcuts and Summary 16 3 1 Summary The Summary provides some basic information about e mail appointments and tasks along with personally configurable weather and news sources This window is shown in Figure 16 1 Use Tools gt Settings gt Summary Prefer ences to configure the information displayed SuSE Linux User Guide WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD PUD IDJAI 3 Uy uounjo 3 259 260 16 3 2 Inbox In this view the upper half of the window shows the contents of the folder In box The lower half is a preview pane used to display the selected mail message Disable the preview pane with View gt Preview Pane
69. a ready made document from a template For instance to create a business letter select File gt AutoPilot In the submenu select Letter This opens the dialog as shown in Figure 6 3 Figure 6 3 The OpenOffice org AutoPilot Click Next in each page to proceed to the next one To modify any previous entries use Back When finished click Create to generate the letter according to your specifications Exit the dialog with Cancel Access a help document with Help When finished click Create OpenOffice org produces a letter according your specifications Now compose the text body of the letter itself AutoPilot is not limited to letters but can also assist in the creation of faxes agendas memos and presentations 6 6 2 Creating Texts without the AutoPilot Create a new text document by selecting File New gt Text Document When editing a text document a second toolbar called the object bar is avail able just below the standard function bar Move the mouse pointer over an icon 6 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer to get a short help text Documents can also be formatted with the Stylist which is described in Section Working with the Stylist on the current page 6 6 3 Selecting Text To select text click the desired beginning of the selection and keeping the mouse button pressed move the cursor towards the end of the range which can be ch
70. again Instead of typing 1s again just press T twice and the 15 command should reappear at the prompt To execute the command hit 1 The newly created directory test should appear in blue letters and Test file in black This is how directories and files can be distinguished in a console 6 Move Testfile into the subdirectory test with the command mv To speed this up use the expansion function just enter mv T and press Tab As long as there is no other file beginning with this letter in the directory the shell expands the file name and adds the string estfile Otherwise add a letter or two yourself and test each time to see whether the shell can now expand the name Finally type a space then test after the expanded file name and press QT to execute the command 7 At this point Test file should no longer be in the directory Check this by entering 1s again 8 To see whether the file has been successfully moved change into the di rectory test with the command cd test Now enter 1s again You should see Test file in the listing Change back to your home directory at any point by entering only cd which stands for change directory 9 To make a copy of a file use cp For instance enter cp Testfile Testbackup to copy Testfile to Testbackup Once again the command 1s can be used to see whether both files are in the directory SuSE Linux User Guide IOUS eui ULM BUOM 357 24 24 Specifying Paths When workin
71. aid of anchor points set with mouse clicks draw clean curved lines One advantage of this technique is that you can change the selection with the aid of control points Once you have marked the area required just click inside it to select it This tool requires some practice to master but is invaluable for more advanced work Se lections made with this tool can also be saved and manipulated with the Paths tab of the Layers Channels and Paths dialog As you click Intelligent Scissors tries to draw a selection along color or brightness edges Sometimes it works quite well Modify the settings in the option box 23 2 6 Transformation Tools When Move is activated grab and move your selection with the mouse 23 2 Using The GIMP E The magnifier is not a true transformation tool because it only zooms the screen representation in or out The image itself is not changed To use the zoom out function which reduces the image on the screen by a certain percentage press and hold while clicking with the mouse For a true enlargement of your image open the context menu with a right click in your image and select Image gt Scale Image In the dialog box that opens change the height and width of the image by percentages or by pixel values Use this tool to crop and resize your image For an appealing impression for landscape photographs for example it is recommended to assign the sky one third and the landscape
72. be equipped with partitions sound absorbing floors appropriately wallpapered walls curtains and other sound reducing fea tures Loud working equipment such as matrix printers should be installed in sound absorbing cases The permissible noise levels for office equipment are determined in the DIN standards An air conditioner should not increase the normal noise level Strain caused by excessive noise can also be reduced by an organizational restructuring of work 25 1 The Working Environment 25 2 Office Equipment 25 2 1 Buying a Screen If you already have poor sharpness of vision low quality screens can make things even worse Apart from eye problems tenseness fatigue and many other disorders can be caused The latest technological developments are triniton or black matrix screens and TFT flat screens Unfortunately flat screens are still relatively expensive There are extensive standards that regulate the readability of the depicted information When buying a screen it is recommended to study the extensive standards to avoid a wrong purchase One thing is certain a good screen is usually expen sive The normal tube screens do not last forever They only retain their focus and contrast for a few years All depicted characters should be sharply defined and clearly legible up to the edges of the screen A positive representation dark characters on a light background such as in a book is recommended As th
73. browsers PSD This format is used by the professional Adobe Photoshop application and supports the multilayer technique SuSE Linux User Guide dNID SUL ULM soyda 337 TIFF The Tagged Image File Format is another method of saving files in the professional arena It is particularly popular in the printing business JPEG The compression method of the Joint Photographic Experts Group allows a highly efficient reduction of image files Depending on the com pression factor image information is lost Nevertheless it is an ideal file format for images on the Internet Tip Always save an XCF version of images you create This makes future modifications much easier Tip 23 1 2 Vector Graphics Unlike pixel graphics vector graphics do not store information for all individual pixels Instead they store information about how image points lines or areas are grouped together A line that runs horizontally across the screen represent ing a total of 800 pixels only needs four information units the coordinates of the starting point the coordinates of the end point the information that these two points are connected by a line and possibly the color of the line With four coordinates and four lines connecting them easily create a rectangle The fact that this rectangle is filled with a specific color basically requires just one more information unit In this way even complex images can be represented with rel
74. can be encrypted directly in Konqueror How ever to use this function a key must be generated manually or in KGpg Refer to Chapter Encryption with KGpg on page 235 to see how this is done The quickest way to perform many actions is the drag and drop method For instance easily move files from one Konqueror window to another by simply dragging them there while pressing the left mouse button Subsequently you will be asked whether the objects should be moved or copied 4 3 5 Creating an Image Gallery To facilitate the management of extensive image collections in a directory Konqueror can generate an HTML file with thumbnails Open the respective directory in Konqueror and select Tools gt Create Image Gallery A dialog opens in which to specify the background and foreground colors the page title the location to which to save the gallery and other settings Click OK to start the action By default a file called index html is created If you click this file in Konqueror your images are displayed in a miniaturized well arranged view Click an image to access the full size view 4 4 Important Ulilities The following pages introduce a number of small KDE utilities intended to as sist in daily work These applications perform various tasks such as managing your keys for encrypting and signing files and e mail messages managing your clipboard formatting floppy disks compressing and decompressing diverse file ar
75. changing which pieces are on top Individual layers or groups of layers can shift position moving sections of the image to other loca tions New sheets can be added and others set aside This is very much how the layers work in GIMP By drawing parts of your image on separate layers manipulate change or delete those parts without damaging the other parts of the image Using sep arate layers for text is the most common usage but the possibilities are much more extensive SuSE Linux User Guide 347 GIMP includes a layer manager Access it via Layers Layers Channels amp Paths in the context menu then under the Layers tab in the dialog that opens see Figure 23 4 Here create copy and delete layers or anchor a layer in the background image Use the eye icon in the layer manager to make layers invisi ble without losing their information The icon with four arrows indicates linked layers Layers showing this icon are moved as a group Under the Channels tab view the three color channels red green and blue individually or in any combination The Paths tab provides information about paths that have been drawn with the Bezier selection tool Layers oceano ea ile Mode Normal Keep Trans Opacity 100 0 New Layer a4 9 Background copy a a Background Li El OJAI 4 Gj AW NES Figure 23 4 Layers Channels and Paths Dialog 23 3 6 Image Modes GIMP has
76. choose the appropriate value Then 5 continue with configuration of your client D lid Next Stand Alone Machine O Network Client Q Network Authentication Method 5 N o f o Q Back Abort Installation Figure 2 16 User Authentication In the expert settings use Answer to the Local Host Only to prevent other net work hosts from being able query which server your client is using If you ac tivate Broken Server responses from servers on unprivileged ports are also accepted For more information refer to the man page of ypbind 2 6 7 Creating Local User Accounts When user accounts are created locally any data related to user accounts name login password and so on are stored and managed on this host Linux is an operating system that allows several users to work on the same sys tem at the same time Each user needs a user account to log in to the system By having user accounts the system gains a lot in terms of security Regular users cannot change or delete files needed for the system to work properly Similarly the personal data of a given user cannot be modified viewed or tampered with by other users Each user can set up his own working environment and always find it unchanged when logging back in A user account can be created using the dialog shown in Figure 2 18 on page 41 After entering the first name and last name specify the user name login If you cannot think of a suitable user na
77. click the trash bin with the left mouse button you will see the contents You can retrieve an item from the trash bin if desired SuSE Linux User Guide 127 128 Alternatively right click an icon and select Move to Trash from the menu Files removed with the menu item Delete are not moved to the trash bin but deleted completely To delete the files in the trash bin completely right click the trash bin icon and select Empty Trash Bin 4 1 3 CD ROM DVD ROM and Floppy Disks If you click the floppy disk icon when a floppy disk is inserted the file manager starts and displays the content of the floppy disk A context menu with various options can be displayed by right clicking the individual icons on the floppy disk It is also possible to move the icon to a different location such as the desk top or your home directory by simply keeping the left mouse button pressed and dragging it to the appropriate icon You will be asked whether you want to move or copy the file or create a link You can also copy or move files from your home directory to the floppy disk Right click the floppy disk icon to access the context menu Unmount is a very important option Be sure to unmount the drive before removing a floppy disk from the drive as this is necessary to trigger the actual writing of the data to the floppy disk The handling of CDs and DVDs is similar with the only difference that these media are not writable N
78. clicking the paintbucket icon again turns off the function Easily create your own styles by formating a paragraph or a character as de sired Use the Character and Paragraph items in the Format menu to achieve the desired results In the Stylist click New Style from Selection to the right of the bucket symbol Enter a name for your style and click OK Now you can use the newly created style on other parts of the document Change details of the style easily by selecting it in the list right clicking and selecting Modify from the menu This opens a dialog in which all the possi ble formatting properties are available for modification 6 6 5 Inserting a Table Create a table by clicking the Insert icon in the main toolbar and keeping it pressed for a few seconds This opens another toolbar in which to specify the object to insert If you now move the mouse cursor to the third icon see a grid open as shown in Figure 6 6 Detault Lhorndale El E Cancel Figure 6 6 Inserting a Table Using the Toolbar If your table should have two columns and two rows for instance just run the mouse over that range of columns and rows to select them from the grid When you release the button the table is inserted into the document at the current text cursor position SuSE Linux User Guide ejns eoyo 610 eoyouedo Sul 181 Tip The Insert icon changes depending o
79. configuration e g for CCD cameras 3 5 Network Devices 3 5 1 Basic Information about Internet Access This section explains a number of important terms in connection with Internet access briefly introducing their aim and function SuSE Linux User Guide 87 88 All the machines connected to the Internet form a large network in which vari ous operating systems run with different hardware The Internet uses a standard communication protocol that can be understood regardless of the hardware or software used This is made possible by means of the Internet Protocol IP to gether with the Transmission Control Protocol TCP the User Datagram Proto col UDP and the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP These protocols comprise the common language used by all machines on the Internet The ab breviation for this is TCP IP Every machine on the Internet has an ID number the IP address It can only be addressed by TCP IP with this number Normally a machine also has a text name The Domain Name System DNS is responsible for converting the IP address to a text name This particular service is offered by name servers A ma chine or an application offering a service is called a server for example a DNS server and a machine or application making use of a service is called a client Under TCP IP there are various standardized protocols for forwarding the ap propriate TCP IP data transfers to the given transmission met
80. contents of the currently selected message are displayed in this frame Attachments are depicted as icons at the end of the message based on the MIME type of the attachment Use and to scroll through the pages of the message or use T and Q to scroll line by line The shortcuts are indicated after the respective menu items in the main menu Messages can be marked with different status flags Change the status with Message gt Highlight as The available flags are New red dot header in red The message is new and has not yet been read SuSE Linux User Guide uoupolgdd IION IY SUL IONX 249 250 Unread green dot header in blue A message changes its status from New to Unread after the folder containing it is reopened Read dash The message has been read Replied blue U shaped arrow The message has been answered Forwarded blue straight arrow The message has been forwarded to an other e mail address Waiting envelope The message has been placed in the outbox to send later Sent slanted envelope The message has been read Important flag The message is important 15 5 Creating a New Message To compose new messages select the menu item Message gt New Message Or press N You can also click the envelope and paper icon in the toolbar to start the mail editor Do you have ice cream for me KMail Message Edit View O
81. create circles ellipses lines and even 3D elements 6 9 Creating Presentations with Open Office org Impress 6 9 1 Creating Presentations with the AutoPilot Less experienced users may prefer to use Autopilot to create presentations Se lect File gt AutoPilot Presentation With the AutoPilot define the basic SuSE Linux User Guide ejns eoyo 610 eoyouedo Sul 187 188 structure of a presentation in three brief steps In doing so set backgrounds the output medium and various effects You can also import data from an existing presentation with the help of assistants After completing the procedure by clicking Create Impress offers a number of templates for the page layout Select one that suits your purposes and enter a name for the first slide Then click OK to generate the first slide of the new presentation To complete your presentation enter a title and the text for each page When finished view the presentation by selecting Slide Show gt Slide Show To advance to the next page during the show press the left mouse button To exit from it press Esc Refer to the help system of OpenOffice org to learn more 6 9 2 Adding a Slide To add another slide to your presentation select Insert gt Slide This opens the dialog window shown in Figure 6 11 Enter a name for the slide and deter mine which of the predefined layouts to use Then click OK
82. deactivating the menu item Options Offline Mode The transfers should start at the specified times Settings In the menu Settings gt Configure KGet you can set preferences for the connection determine directories for specific file extensions and specify other settings 4 4 3 SuSEWatcher SuSEWatcher is a program that is integrated in the system tray of the panel It checks for new updates and new hardware To be able to find any new updates SuSE Linux User Guide 147 it requires an online connection The program SuSEWatcher is located in the package kdebase3 SuSE When you click the icon in the panel a window will open informing you about the status of your online updates and the availability of any new updates You can also launch the check manually by clicking Check for updates You can start the online update by selecting Start online update and entering the root password The YaST Online Update window will be displayed The status of SuSEWatcher is displayed by means of colorful icons in the panel 4 4 4 The Clipboard Klipper The KDE program Klipper serves as a clipboard for selected text normally marked by keeping the left mouse button pressed This text can be transferred to another application by moving the mouse pointer to the target location then pressing the middle mouse button on a two button mouse press both buttons simultaneously The text is copied to th
83. down menu or the Browse button Alternatively drag and drop image files from your file manager see Section Konqueror as a File Manager on page 142 or the desktop to the preview image For wallpaper variety activate Multiple Wallpapers and proceed with the further configuration using Setup Multiple The Advanced tab features some special settings that usually do not need to modified Fonts All fonts and font attributes used on the desktop can be configured here Click Choose then specify your settings in the dialog that opens By default an tialiasing is activated for all fonts To deactivate or customize antialiasing select the respective check boxes 4 2 Settings Tip Changes to the antialiasing settings are only applied to newly started programs Programs already open are not affected by the changes Tip Style Here select the style for all widgets elements of the graphical interface in KDE applications The configuration contains three tabs Select the style under Style using the preview in the lower part of the window Use Effects to configure various GUI effects and transparency types if supported by the respective style dop1seg 3G eui 4 2 5 Regional amp Accessibility Country Region amp Language The settings in this module only apply to KDE applications Other applications such as OpenOffice org may need to be configured separately All regional system
84. edit access or create your bookmarks 5 3 2 File Management Nautilus supports dragging and dropping for managing files To move files from one directory to another use New Window from the context menu or the File menu in Nautilus for opening two windows Access the path of the original lo cation of the objects in one window and access the destination path for those files in the second window To move the files drag the files from one window to the other and drop them there Copying files is a little more complicated Right click the object to copy and select Duplicate Then move the copy to the new directory The context menu that appears when right clicking an object provides functions for renaming files and other tasks 5 3 File Management with Nautilus 5 3 3 Configuring Nautilus Nautilus retrieves its default font and other preferences from the desktop config uration To set Nautilus specific preferences select Edit gt Preferences in any Nautilus window The configuration dialog offers four tabs Views Behavior Icon Captions and Preview The Views dialog allows switching the Default View between Icon View and List View A sorting order can be set for any of these options The Behavior dialog allows choosing between single click and double click re sponse and also sets the handling of executable files These can either be started on activat
85. edit previously con figured sound cards Finish saves the current settings and completes the sound configuration If YaST is unable to detect your sound card automatically press Add Sound Card in Sound Configuration to open a dialog in which to select a sound card and module Setup With Quick Automatic Setup you are not required to go through any of the further configuration steps and no sound test is performed The sound card is configured automatically With Normal Setup you have the possibility to adjust the output volume and play a test sound With Options you can manually customize the sound card options Set up your joystick by clicking the respective check box Select the joystick type in the following dialog and click Next The same dialog appears when you click Joystick in the YaST Control Center Sound Card Volume Test your sound configuration in this test screen Use and to adjust the volume Start at about ten percent to avoid damage to your speakers or hear ing A test sound should be audible when you press Test If you cannot hear anything increase the volume Press Continue to complete the sound configu ration The volume setting will be saved SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 85 86 Sound Configuration Use Delete to remove a sound card Existing entries of configured sound cards are deactivated in the file etc modules
86. ee ds 9 3 Toolbars 4 24 hoa Rea Se ek wed oo eo oe s g4 Using the Calendar so ma ace PG dme arie vem es 94 1 Byveni amp d su A RO ee Re A 9412 Attendees sia a EE ee 943 To Do Hems a ti o xy RE Re ae 94A ICON a ea Gee ee a 9 5 APTS o oe eh ok ae Seve EI eR GO A A a S A 96 Address BOOK ca oci eooni a cc deh we del a da de eg RUE UR va AI A AN 10 Address Management with KAddressBook 10 1 Overview of KAddressBOOk eee 10 2 Creating a New Contact 2o ee Eod RR dee dd 10 3 Creating Address Lists oo soe o Rex RE Re ds 10 4 Searching Address Data 2222 ded Rx E e ses IV Internet 11 The Web Browser Konqueror ILI Opening Web Pages 2 623 99 o a ae hee 11 2 Saving Web Pages and Graphics ooo 11 3 Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords 11 4 Bookmarks gt 46 ek a A EUR ex 115 Java and JavaScripts coo a g a RERO ORG Rs 12 The Web Browser Galeon 12 1 Optimized forthe Web consal e esac epa E Ee a 12 2 Efficient Surfing with Tabs o ooo 12 3 Smart Bookmarks gt s s iec tarawiad a 124 Settings and Controls coi obs bI tss 12 5 For More Information s occ se sari cdda taca baa es Contents 203 204 204 205 206 207 208 208 209 209 209 210 211 212 212 213 213 217 219 220 220 221 221 222 13 The Mozilla Web Browser 13 1 13 7 13 3 The Initial Browser Window o o 20005 19 1 The Mena Bar 0 900 os ee a
87. file references di rectly accessible in the browser booting The sequence of computer operations from power up until the system is ready for use browser Program that searches and displays contents Today it is mostly used for programs that graphically display contents of v World Wide Web pages cache In relation to the ve main memory it is rather small but still a fast memory buffer For example open files are saved to the cache to spare the hard disk next time the file is loaded client Workstation in a computer network operated by a server command line Text based mode of operating where commands are entered at a prompt A command line can be accessed from within a graphical environment as well as from virtual consoles console Formerly synonymous with terminal In Linux there are severalvirtual consoles that allows the screen to be used for several independent parallel work sessions CPU Central Processing Unit ES processor cursor The cursor is normally a block character that marks the place for input on a computer screen This term also often refers to the symbol representing the location of the mouse in graphical interfaces daemon A daemon Disk and execution monitor is a program that monitors in the background and comes into action when required Such daemons answer FTP or HTTP requests for example or control activity in the PCMCIA slots AJOSSO DDC Direct Display Channel Communication
88. for example find out how current a page is or allow the Internet site to slowly scroll down the screen 12 1 Optimized for the Web 12 2 Efficient Surfing with Tabs Galeon can display multiple WWW documents in a single application window To open a link in a web site in the form of a new tab right click that link Select Open in new tab in the pop up menu Create a fresh Galeon tab by clicking File gt Open New Tab Click the tabs to switch the display 12 3 Smart Bookmarks Smart bookmarks give access to a site s functions along with its address for ex ample searching the Internet for terms with Google Enter the word in the input field after the Google icon The result will be displayed after a few seconds To activate or create additional smart bookmarks select Bookmarks Smart Bookmarks Toolbar Folder actions gt Edit A window opens in which to edit the bookmarks To create a new bookmark mark Smart Bookmarks Toolbar and select File New item Enter a name in Name and the web address in URL The Smart URL field is a URL that additionally contains a wild card for the entered string For example the smart URL for Google is http www google com search q s s is the wild card Save your bookmark settings with File gt Save 12 4 Settings and Controls Modify the configuration of the browser with Settings Preferen
89. indicated 1 1 Step One The Start Screen Software A default system with office applications is preset Booting Determines where SuSE Linux installs the boot manager The Master Boot Record MBR of the first hard disk is the default setting Time Zone Depending on the selected language settings the time zone of the respective country is selected Check this setting as many languages are used in several countries Language Shows the language setting UOHOIIO SU AONO Modify the YaST suggestions at any time by clicking the respective heading The dialogs displayed enable detailed settings The exact procedure is described in User Defined Installation on page 13 After the changes you are returned to the overview and can proceed with the installation using the modified values by clicking Accept Caution If the hardware was detected correctly you do not need to change any thing Do not change the boot loader partitioning or hardware settings unless you know what you are doing Caution 1 3 Step Three Installation Start the installation with the current settings by clicking Yes in the green win dow displayed by YaST Depending on the performance of your computer the complete installation of your system with about 350 program packages takes approximately fifteen minutes 1 4 Configuration Following the installation specify some important settings before starting using SuSE Linux Detailed instru
90. installation support For in formation about the support scope address and phone numbers visit our web site at www suse de en YasT offers the possibility to directly send a support request by e mail to the SuSE team Registration is required first Start by entering the respective data your registration code is located at the back of the CD cover Regarding your 3 9 Miscellaneous query select the problem category in the following window and provide a de scription of the problem Figure 3 31 Also read the YaST help text which ex plains how best to describe the problem so the support team can help you Tip If you need advanced support such as for special problems consider using the SuSE Professional Services Refer to http www suse de en support for details UOILOINBYUOD ISOA SuSE Support Question SuSE Support Describe your problem briefly but as Support Key 12345678912345 thoroughly as possible Exact error messages and previous actions you TuX SuSE Change have taken are especially important Do not include more than one question Choose a category in a mail Separate multiple requests C Unspecified into different subject blocks and write a y sooo cca O DSL specific request for each topic This ECHMD T e makes them easier to process NE 9 IEEE DN accelerating responses C Notebook C Mail C Modem C Network C Printer Sound The hardware and software informatio
91. key simply write the message in the Create Message window Before sending the message click the red key icon in the window s toolbar Now the message can be sent If KMail cannot find a key for the recipient a list with all available keys is shown Select the appropriate one from the list or abort the process KMail also informs you if errors occur during the encryption process You cannot read encrypted messages if you did not click Always encrypt to self in the Security tab 15 10 For More Information More information is available on the KMail home page at http kmail kde org 256 15 10 For More Information Evolution An E Mail and Calendar Program Evolution is a groupware suite created by Ximian It offers regular e mail fea tures along with extended features like task lists and a calendar The application also provides a complete address book including the ability to send contact in formation to others in vCard format 16 1 Starting Evolution 6 4 se s x ee api 258 16 2 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs 258 163 Overview of Evolufloh xu su oam xs 259 16 1 E Mail sas we ie horse Ap E Oed OX RS Im mus 260 165 Calendar cx xo ah es ee eo ae SES 265 16 0 Contacts uice De o Re Dh Hea Sy 266 16 7 Public Address Books in Evolution 266 16 8 For More Information 267 WUDIBOld Jopue o2 pup ID JA 3 UY UOHunjo 3 258 16 1 Starting Evolution Start Evo
92. m A 13 12 The Navigation Toolbar ado sae 13 1 8 The Personal Toolbar 2 3 m mm ISTE Sidebar cased ee reae RR E PROB E EE Working with Taps os Jima G2 pan A eG ES Pr terenees 2a bo kad Soa wd a eX Da ke ea xo 3L 14 Encryption with KGpg 15 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 Key Management ceci de i a E 14 1 1 Generatinga New Key Pait ou 2 253 Rk sr 14 1 2 Exporting the Publie Key 14 1 3 ImportingKeyS leen Il Signing Keys y ocna a TR nec e eg The Rey Server Dialog 2412 ia 208 aa mb ead 14 21 Importing a Key from a Key Server 14 22 Exporting Your Keys to a Key Server The Apis TT 14 3 1 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard 14 3 2 Encrypting and Decrypting by Dragging and Dropping 1433 TheKGpg Editor o e o For More Information i259 doe Xr wm aa KMail The KDE Mail Application 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 Mail Porm ts oiae a ew xt aa RES UR eR RS REUS Acess IPS A a dd eU RH S ia ContigurineKMOI os soni 4 soe moy RR oS da Sor 15 3 1 Defining Your User Identity 15 3 2 Setting up Network Connections 15 3 3 Configuring the Appearance of KMail Using KMOll e esu de e OE ER eee Creating a New Message 24 25 os or Ud s SuSE Linux User Guide 227 228 228 230 230 231 231 231 235 236 236 237 238 238 239 239 241 241 241 242 242 243 245
93. managed key data to process signed or encrypted contents 14 1 1 Generating a New Key Pair To be able to exchange encrypted messages with other users first generate your own key pair One part of it the public key is distributed to your com munication partners who can use it to encrypt the files or e mail messages they send The other part of the key pair the secret key is used to decrypt the encrypted contents Note The public key is intended for the public and is distributed to all of your communication partners However only you should have access to the secret key Do not grant other users access to this data Note Start KGpg from the main menu or with the command kgpg from the command line A padlock icon symbolizing KGpg appears in your panel Click the icon to open the function menu Select Open key manager Refer to Figure 14 1 Un der the Key menu access all options related to the generation or management of keys To generate a new key pair for yourself click Generate Key Pair Ctr Gy m Key Management kgpg les EPS File Keys Settings Help Sy b vs m Key v Trust Expiration Size Creation ld E tux example org Tux Ultimate Unlimited 1024 2003 05 06 0xA57D070D Figure 14 1 The Key Manager In the following dialog shown in Figure 14 2 on the facing page enter your user name your e mail address and an optional comm
94. match To select directly from the address book click To or CC Evolution can send e mail as plain text or HTML To format HTML mail select Format in the toolbar To send attachments select Attach or Insert gt At tachment To send your message click Send If not ready to send it immediately make another selection under File For example save the message as a draft or send it later 16 4 4 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures Evolution supports e mail encryption with PGP It can sign e mail and check signed e mail messages To use these features generate and manage keys with an external application such as gpg or KGpg SuSE Linux User Guide WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD PUD IDJAI 3 Uy uounjo 3 261 262 To sign an e mail message before sending it select Security gt PGP sign When you click Send a dialog prompts for the password of your secret key Enter the password and exit the dialog with OK to send the signed e mail To sign other e mail messages in the course of this session without needing to unlock the secret key repeatedly activate Remember this password for the remainder of this session When you receive signed e mail from other users a small padlock icon appears at the end of the message If you click this symbol Evolution starts an external program gpg to check the signature If the signature is valid a green check mark appears next
95. menu from the ap pointment scheduler KOrganizer or the mail program KMail On start up the KDE Address Book window consists of three frames The top frame contains the menu and toolbars The two lower frames contain the current list of contacts and the address data of the currently selected contact See Figure 10 1 Address Book Browser KAddressBook easy ah File Edit View Settings Help Incremental search Given Name iu 4 a e x P 41 3407 None s 7 None CUUUOTUUC APS Address Home Address Iceberg St 42 Laurie Island Southpole 31415 Arctic Figure 10 1 Overview of KAddressBook 10 2 Creating a New Contact Open the contact editor with File gt New Contact the respective icon or the entry in the toolbar A dialog opens with two tabs in which to make your en tries Refer to Figure 10 2 on the facing page Enter all important information including the name title private and business addresses all phone numbers e mail addresses and URLs under the General tab If desired assign the contact to a category that can later be used for filter ing the address view Select a standard category Family Friend Business Cus tomer or School or create a new category The Details tab contains some useful additional information such as birthdays and anniversaries and offers the possibility to add comments for this contact As soon as all required fi
96. neina 173 188 application modules 174 AutoPilot oooooccccccooccccoos 178 A renda 182 186 Calc cell attributes 183 Cale charts coi ia 185 Calc importing spreadsheet tables 185 configuring creirai dien 176 177 A Erde e aed 187 graphics cercana cede 182 i M Q 175 Impress esee 187 188 Microsoft document formats 175 Navigator coooooooccoocoooccnnooo 179 presentations 187 188 selecting text errira eian 179 spreadsheet 182 186 SU liS M 179 tables cui 181 A EEA n Ai 178 182 Writer Stylist ooooooooooo 179 P package alsamodular ssssssss 305 ASOQqVIGSW asscessurk rre 298 CGU TEE pei 294 SAWE STR scene E Rhe 298 299 s JACK aimata EE EAA 293 kalsatools siias ereit 298 kdemultimedia 302 CIEGO asta aii cds 298 POSTEL Keri et eve iTS saan 59 dqjackoognnecb etia veni i 293 PESOS gerer peek a 292 SENOMALL mireia s 59 sSnd cs 2 idet AIME EE 298 UREA 298 vorbis tools rroen 297 partitioning srsrcni senri snenia erna iai 399 partitions fstab RAID swap types passwd muxoo nicas eere npes cea passwords changing 0c cece cece eens 375 A ce eee se 358 absolute 00 cece eee 358 relative 2 0 2 0 ccc cee eee ee 358 working with sssss 358 PBX cod 96 permissions access control list
97. new appointment is then shown in your calen dar 16 5 2 Scheduling a Meeting To schedule a meeting with other people click New Appointment then select Actions gt Schedule Meeting Enter information as for an appointment Un der Meeting add attendees For those in your Contacts click Invite Others and select attendees from the dialog When finished click Save and Close The attendees will be sent an e mail about the scheduled meeting This system can also be used to schedule a time that fits all attendees or to re serve resources For more information about the scheduling functions refer to the internal help 16 5 3 Adding Tasks Evolution helps to keep track of your tasks To add a new task to your list click New Task Enter summary information due and start dates and a description Enter task status and other information under Details Click Save and Close to add the task to your list Double click the task to reopen the dialog and make changes or mark it as completed SuSE Linux User Guide uJDJ60Jg 1I0pue o2 PUD IDJA 3 Uy uounjo 3 265 266 16 6 Contacts 16 6 1 Adding Contacts Along with the name and e mail address Evolution can store other address and contact information about a person The e mail address of a sender can quickly be added by right clicking the marked address in the message preview Select Add to Contacts and confirm the i
98. of Install and Remove o Installation Software IS f online Update Ser Patch CD Update ISC 2 di Hardware Network Devices e Sj System Update LAN Network Services Security and Users System UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 5 ERE Misc Help Search Close 4 Figure 3 1 The YaST Control Center 3 3 Software 3 3 1 Change Installation Source The installation source is the medium containing the software to install YaST can administer a number of different installation sources It enables their selec tion for installation or update purposes When this module is started a list displaying all previously registered sources is displayed Following a normal installation from CD only the installation CD is listed Click Add to include additional sources in this list You can add remov able media such as CDs and DVDs and network connections such as NFS and FTP Even directories on the local hard disk can be selected as the installation medium See the detailed YaST help text During the installation or update YaST can take multiple installation sources into consideration Therefore all registered sources have an activation status in the first column of the list Click Activate or Deactivate to activate or deactivate individual installation sources During the installation of software packages or updates YaST selects the suitable installation source from the range of activated installation sources SuSE Linux
99. off JavaScript at least for Mail amp Newsgroups Other dialogs available under this entry are related to the browser s Cache and to the Proxies used by it The settings in the Cache dialog depend on the specific circumstances with which the browser needs to cope but it can be said that the default 4096 kB size of the Memory Cache is often too small A cache is a tempo rary storage area used for the files fetched from the network so they can be reused SuSE Linux User Guide 233 Encryption with KGpg KGpg is an important component of the encryption infrastructure on your sys tem With the help of this program generate and manage all needed keys use its editor function for the quick creation and encryption of files or use the ap plet in your panel to encrypt or decrypt by dragging and dropping The gener ation and management of keys is required for the correct handling of encrypted files or e mail messages by other applications such as KMail or Konqueror This chapter covers the basic functions needed for daily work with encrypted files 14 1 Key Management 2 9 e 9 ege m m os 236 14 2 The Key Server Dialog 22 c 3Gge 5 239 14 5 The Applet e a ee SA ee os 241 14 4 For More Information i59 ex 243 Bd9y UM UOHAA 1DUJ 14 1 Key Management This section covers operations needed for handling your digital key ring Other programs such as your mail program KMail or Evolution access the
100. oooccccccccccccnrccn nos 63 72 TAO M RD MD RED 87 routing sss 101 Samba Qu D 101 A inre da UR A 100 SSCAMNET xod ee EE ERN Aus 83 security esee 103 108 software 6 eee e cece eee 49 60 sound cards corsanrerncnnrcrnenans 85 S8ystem iiennieelersee rer as 47 120 System services 102 O ces exoriens tumens 25 timezone eessssss 118 ET estes tb rete ad ERE E RS 87 Ur PT 103 P C E REA 72 Control Center i 12i nid iaa 48 Pirate ee Ven obe sio ev Ue Hd 369 CRASHES 4 o sot Ue vu ped oW tone 400 D noc desktop sharing AE pnt sigs bre E rRERCRPIN LER PPAR dial on demand dictionaries GNOME inem lea cokeri iiia 167 iff osea eb a etel a eo c Ioa ete 322 digital cameras sss 323 328 connecting esses 324 gtKam essi ose c y mE et 325 Konqueror 0 00 cece eee eeee 324 directories A dade 369 CHEATING det ainsi Eiai pesi Res 369 GOLA ici caro ans 369 navigating sssssesseseee 358 Paths nere ren eed 358 A aM 354 DNS configuring 6c eee 99 download manager 20005 147 driver CD aiii woe ed eium 120 drives mounting iiare aeri rinane strai 372 unmounting esee 372 UL 373 E e mail configuring criteria 101 e mail applications Evolution ooomommooom 257 267 ARMA cocinas spa ees 245 256 editors aii dt 375 encryption
101. or if there is some other FAT file system select whether to delete or resize the partition Before do ing so read Section Resizing a Windows Partition on page 26 If desired go to the Expert Partitioner dialog to create a custom partition setup at this point see Section Expert Partitioning with YaST on the following page Caution If you choose Use entire hard disk all data on that disk will be lost Caution YasT checks during the installation whether the disk space is sufficient for the software selection made If not YaST automatically removes parts from the soft ware selection as needed The suggestion window then includes a notice to in SuSE Linux User Guide 23 24 form you about this As long as there is sufficient disk space available YaST sim ply accepts your settings and partitions the hard disk accordingly 2 5 5 Expert Partitioning with YaST With the expert dialog shown in Figure 2 8 the partitioning of your hard disk can be modified manually Partitions can be added deleted or edited SuSE Partition your hard disks Expert Partitioner O BPCO Device Size F Type Mount Stat End Usedby Label not familiar with the concepts of hard s ursus r rea o Dee Teri devisda 9GB FIREBALL TM21105 0 255 veu mpi went E gs bx e idevisdal 19GB Win95 FAT32 LBA 0 248 as devsdb 85GB DNES 309170W o 1114 Vdev sdb1 1 9GB Linux native 0 254 Please note that nothin
102. pack age conflicts require this package be deleted For example this may be the case if the current package has been replaced by a different package However this does not happen very often Automatic installation after selection This packages has been automatically selected for installation because it is part of a predefined selection such as Multimedia or Development 56 J 833 Software Automatic update after Selection This package is already installed but a newer version exists on the installation media This package is part of a predefined selection such as Multimedia or Development selected for update and will automatically be updated Delete automatically after selection This package is already installed but a predefined selection such as Mul timedia or Development requires this package be deleted This does not happen very often Additionally decide to install or not to install the sources for a package This in formation complements the current package status and cannot be toggled with the mouse or selected directly from the context menu Instead a check box at the end of the package line enables selection of the source packages This option can also be accessed under Package UOILOINBYUOD ISOA Install Source Also install the source code Do Not Install Source The sources will not be installed The font color used for various packages in the individual package window pro vides add
103. paragraphs Normally the BIOS setup can only be accessed at a specific time when the machine is booting During this initialization phase the machine per forms a number of diagnostic hardware tests One of them is a memory check recognizable from the memory counter When the counter appears look for a line usually below the counter or somewhere at the bottom mentioning the key to press to access the BIOS setup Usually the key to press is Del FD or Esc Press this key until the BIOS setup screen ap pears To change the boot sequence in an AWARD BIOS look for the BIOS FEA TURES SETUP entry Other manufacturers may have a different name for this such as ADVANCED CMOS SETUP When you have found the entry select it and confirm with I In the screen that opens look for a subentry called BOOT SEQUENCE The boot sequence is often set to something like C A or A C In the former case the machine first searches the hard disk C then the floppy drive A to find a bootable medium Change the settings by pressing Or until the sequence is A CDROM C Leave the BIOS setup screen by pressing Esc To save the changes select SAVE amp EXIT SETUP or press F10 To confirm that your settings should be saved press Y 2 1 Starting Your System from the CD ROM If you have a SCSI CD ROM drive you need to change the setup of the SCSI BIOS In the case of an Adaptec host adapter for instance open the set
104. recognition routine that termi nates the recording session after five seconds without noises Tip Incoming fax calls are also automatically recognized and received in most cases This automatic routine can however fail with older fax machines which is why a separate fax number is to preferred wherever possible Tip Use Add Edit and Delete to administer the entries The entry form for cre ating a new entry or for modifying an existing one contains the following fields User Select the system user for whom the answering machine should be con figured One or more fax numbers are assigned to each registered user Incoming calls to these numbers are then sent to the user as e mails Phone Numbers Set the phone numbers for which messages should be recorded for the user Faxes can also be sent to the declared phone num 274 17 2 Configuration YaST24 Uhle TES User Igernot 2 Phonenumbers fi 24 Delay 15 gt Duration 30 gt Action MailAndSave Pin 5542 x Figure 17 4 Answering Machine User Preferences bers as the answering machine has an automatic fax recognition feature Separate multiple numbers with commas Delay This value defined in seconds determines after how much time the an swering machine should answer an incoming call A value can be selected from the list or entered Duration Determines the maximum recording time for the answerin
105. right mouse button and selecting Copy then move the mouse to the desired location on the desktop Click the right mouse button again and select Paste The icon is now available on your desktop and can be moved around by dragging it with the left mouse button pressed dosed FG eui Icons Rearranges the symbols on the desktop You can also change the order of the icons Windows The windows on the desktop are either placed on top of each other at the top left corner or next to each other Configure Desktop This menu item starts a configuration dialog with which to configure the appearance of the desktop Details about the configuration of the desktop are provided in Section Settings on page 133 Help Use this submenu to open the KDE manual or write a bug report to the developers via the KDE web site You can also start an information page about KDE Lock Screen If you leave your workstation and do not log out you should use this function to prevent others from gaining access to your files Depend ing on the setting the screen either turns black or a screensaver starts To continue using the computer enter your password Logout User Logout from your system if you are not going to use the system for some time 4 1 2 The Trash Bin The trash bin is a directory for files marked for deletion You can drag and drop icons from the file manager or the desktop to the trash bin icon by keeping the left mouse button pressed If you
106. schedule a new event select Actions New Event Among the event details that can be specified are date and location attendees and duration Un der Reminder specify the exact time minutes hours or days in advance at which the attendees should be reminded of the event If an event recurs specify the interval Another way to create an event at a specific point in the calendar is to double click the corresponding field in one of the program s calendar views This opens the same dialog window as that available from the menu Specify the attendees of an event either by entering their data manually in the dialog or by inserting data from the address book To enter such data manually select New To import data from the address book select Address Book then the corresponding entry from the dialog Edit Event KOrganizer a ELS General Attendees Recurrence Summary Location p Date amp Time Start 1105 05 03 j 1000am End 105 05 03 L 11 00am iCj Recurring event O No time associated Duration 1 hour A C Reminder UJ UJ Showtime as Busy Categories Access Public Template J l Save as Template j v oK i Apply yx Cancel Figure 9 4 Scheduling with KOrganizer SuSE Linux User Guide J9SZUDBIOA UM Bulnpeyos 207 208 9 4 2 Attendees Participants for a schedule item are listed under Attend
107. search on the key server is successful a list of all retrieved server entries is displayed in a new window Select the key to include in your key ring and click Import See Figure 14 4 on the next page Confirm the following message with OK then exit the key server dialog with Close The imported key then appears in the main overview of the key manager and is ready for use To avoid being asked repeatedly about whether you trust the key and assume that this key is really used by its authorized owner edit the trust level of the SuSE Linux User Guide 6d5 ULIM UOYAA OU 239 240 Search Result 3 NS Found 1 matching keys w Friendly Fred lt fred example org gt Key to import BCO2F4FE Cancel Figure 14 4 Hits and Import newly imported key By default a newly imported key always appears with a instead of a specification regarding the trust level Right click the newly imported key to access a small context menu for the key management Select Edit Key KGpg opens a text console in which to set the trust level by means of a few commands See Figure 14 5 amp GPG Konsole a Ex Session Edit View Bookmarks Settings Help quit this menu save save and quit help show this help fpr show fingerprint list list key and user IDs uid select user ID N key select secondary key N check list signatures sign sign the key lsign sign the key locally nrsign sign the key non revoc
108. select Skip Update then click OK 2 6 5 User Authentication If the network access been configured successfully during the previous steps of the installation you now have two different possibilities for managing user accounts on your system Local User Administration Using this method users are managed locally on the installed machine This is the typical solution for stand alone work stations User Administration with NIS or LDAP This method is mostly used in organizations to manage workstations on a department wide basis The user administration for the entire department is carried out on a central host or name server making the creation of local accounts unnecessary In fact the method could be chosen because local accounts are undesirable SuSE Linux User Guide UOID OISU PSUEq Jesy 37 38 Here validate the Internet connection just Test Internet Connection configured The test is entirely optional A successful result enables you to run the YaST Online Update To validate your Internet access activate the test procedure The following steps will be performed Download latest release notes Check for latest updates Select Yes Test Connection to the Internet No Skip This test Back Abort Installation j l Figure 2 15 Testing the Internet Connection If all requirements are met YOST opens a dialog in which to select the user ad ministration method
109. settings can be configured under five tabs Locale Use the drop down menu to select the desired country from the list Settings such as the language numbers currency time and date are auto matically set to suitable values A preview of all current regional settings is displayed in the lower part of the dialog For example to use the re gional settings for the US but use Spanish as the system language click Add Language to select this language and add it to the list of available system languages To remove a language mark it in the list and click Re move Language Numbers If you want to use different number settings than the default settings associated with the country selected under Locale you can configure the decimal symbol thousands separator positive sign and negative sign in this dialog The decimal symbol and the thousands separator for curren cies is configured separately under the Money tab The default setting on a US system is for the decimal symbol an optional for the thousands separator no entry for the positive sign and for the representation of negative numbers Money You can configure all currency related settings in this dialog in case they should differ from the default settings for the selected system lan guage For example on a US system the currency symbol is the dec on on imal symbol is thousands are separated with a and the number of SuSE Linux User Guid
110. share apps korganizer However given that the directory kde begins with a dot it may not be shown by the file selection dialog In this case enter the complete path manu ally or explicitly toggle the display of hidden files dot files in the file selection dialog The default shortcut for this is F8 Having opened the directory kde share apps korganizer select a file that can be used as a calendar file by KOrganizer In our example this is the file palm ics In the case of a user called tux the complete path and file name would be home tux kde share apps korganizer palm ics as shown in Figure 8 4 on page 201 KOrganizer should not be running when data is being exchanged with the hand held Otherwise KPilot will fail to carry out the sync operation SuSE Linux User Guide JOlldM UJI anduon pjeupubpH o BurziuoJuo Ag 199 200 amp KPilot lt 3 gt 3 20Xx ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file Browse Sync Action East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only O Sync only PC items to Pilot next sync only IR Sync archived entries to the PC 2 Cancel Figure 8 3 KPilot Configuration 8 3 Working with KPilot Synchronizing the data of KDE applications with those of the handheld com puter is quite easy Simply start KPilot then press the HotSync button on
111. some applications Graphical system with modern applications between 1 GB and 2 GB This includes recent versions of graphical desktops namely KDE and GNOME and bigger application packages such as OpenOffice org and Netscape or Mozilla For downloading lots of movies and music with Linux 2 GB Both items 3 GB Burning CDs and the items listed above 4 GB These guidelines can help develop a partitioning scheme for your system Under 500 MB A swap partition and a root partition Between 500 MB and 4 GB A small boot partition located within the first cylinders of the hard disk boot at least 8 MB or 1 cylinder to hold the kernel and the boot loader Also create a swap partition of approximately 256 MB then use the rest for the root partition For more than 4 GB Boot boot swap root 250 MB home directories home with about 200 MB for each user and the rest for programs and data usr You may also reserve an extra partition each for opt and var SuSE Linux User Guide UOID OISU peugeqr esf 21 Some commercial programs install their data in opt If necessary create a separate partition for opt or make the root partition large enough KDE and GNOME are also installed in opt Tip Things should be fine if your partitioning setup is similar to that pro posed by YasT This is usually a small partition for boot at the begin ning of the hard disk about 10 MB or 1 cylinder on a l
112. standard between the monitor and the graphics card which transmits various parameters such as monitor name or resolution to the graphics card directory Directories make up the structure of a vile system A directory lists file and directory names DNS Domain Name System A system that converts name based addresses to TCP IP addresses and vice versa driver A program between the operating system and the hardware that trans lates the communication between these two layers e mail electronic mail The means of transporting mail electronically between registered users via a network As with normal mail often referred to as snail mail the address must be entered In e mail it is in the form sender sender s domain to recipient recipient s domain E mail not only lets you send text but also sound files or pictures It has many advantages it is inexpen sive and mail usually reaches its destination within minutes EIDE Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics Improved IDE standard that allows hard disks with a size over 512 MB environment A shell usually provides an environment in which the user can perform temporary settings These settings include path specifications for pro grams the user name the current path and the appearance of prompts The data is saved in an veenvironment variable The assignment of the envi ronment variables is possible for example by means of the configuration file
113. the cradle to start the sync operation 8 3 1 Backing up Data from the Handheld To do a full backup select File Backup The backup will be performed dur ing the next sync operation After that switch back by selecting File Hot Sync from the menu Otherwise the time consuming full backup will be per formed again during the next sync operation After a full backup all copies of the handheld s programs and databases are found in kde share apps kpilot DBBackup lt user gt where user is the name of the actual user as registered on the handheld The two built in KPilot viewers can be used for a quick lookup of addresses or memos but they are not designed to actually manage this data The KDE appli cations mentioned above are much more suited for these tasks 8 3 2 Installing Programs on the Handheld The File Installer module is an interesting and useful tool for the installation of handheld programs These programs normally have the extension prc and 8 3 Working with KPilot 8 KPilot lt 3 gt 3 AE X ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file home tux kde share apps korganiz er palmics Browse Sync Action 3 East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only Sync only PC items to Pilot next sync only IR Sync archived entries to the PC X Cancel
114. the sound system Under System Bell you can switch from system notification to a system bell and specify the volume pitch and duration of the bell By default system notifications are used Use this module to determine how the system should inform you in the event of a problem when a task is performed or if an event requiring your immediate attention occurs In the upper part of the dialog use drop down menu to select the application for which to configure the system notifications As soon as you select a program 4 2 Settings all events the application can send to the user are listed in the lower window You can determine the notification type for each notification in the Actions dialog The standard view of the system notification dialog only offers the activation of a Play a sound check box for audible notification Click More Options to ac cess other action modes You can log the notification to a file execute a program or show the message in a pop up window In the lower part of the dialog under Quick Controls you can globally activate or deactivate the said actions for all programs dop1seg 3G eui 4 2 4 Appearance amp Themes This item features all fine tuning options for the appearance of your desktop Screen saver The module for selecting and configuring the screensaver consists of three parts Select a suitable screensaver from the list to the left The preview to the right shows how the
115. the changes look Save your work from time to time under a different file name If you do not like one of your modifications revert to a previous stage Retouching may take some time because you often need to change brushes and redefine the image section to copy Working with the clone tool requires some experience 23 5 For More Information There is a very good GIMP web site at http www gimp org There find and download documentation plug ins and more Also Important Links of fers an impressive collection of links for GIMP 23 5 For More Information Part VI Excursions Working with the Shell Graphical user interfaces are increasingly becoming important for Linux but us ing the mouse is not always the best way to perform daily tasks The command line readily provides high flexibility and efficiency The first part of this chap ter provides an introduction to the Bash shell It is followed by an explanation of the user permissions concept in Linux and a list of the most important com mands The chapter closes with a description of the vi text editor 221 TiO Ge cuu ua oe S x RUE EUR ES 354 242 Introduction to Bash lr 354 24 3 Users and Access Permissions 362 244 Important Linux Commands 368 245 The vi Editor uc ek ke eR ERR ERES 375 lleus SUL ULM BUOM 354 24 1 Introduction Text based applications are especially important for controlling older Linu
116. the configuration with man timidity cfg Also refer to the documentation in usr share doc packages timidity Suitable instrument patches are available at http www stardate bc ca eawpatches html default htm From this URL you can download the file eawpats12 full rar Although the size of this file is 22 MB the down load is worthwile as it equips you with a full set of GM GS XG instruments To use these patches with timidity proceed as follows First assume the root identity Then create the directory usr share timidity eawpats copy eawpats12_full rar there and change to this directory The command unrar x eawpats12_full rar decompresses the archive Now edit the file timidity cfg in the directory usr share timidity lt should only contain the two lines shown in File 3 dir usr share timidity eawpats Source timidity cfg File 3 timidity cfg eawpats12 full rar also contains a file called timidity cfg which is placed in the directory eawpats following the decompression The file is in cluded with the source command In this file only the four lines shown in Ex ample 4 are relevant All other lines can be deleted Source gravis cfg Source gsdrums cfg source gssfx cfg source xgmap2 cfg 18 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card File 4 timidity cfg of eawpats12_full rar Then the file permissions must be updated To do this enter the command chmod R a r usr share timidity eawpats To use sound fonts instea
117. the dialog click OK To define one of your custom profiles as the default for this printer click Set as Default Your default profile is used when printing from applica tions You can only switch between the individual profiles in the printer administration module 4 2 2 Desktop Unter Erscheinungsbild bestimmen Sie Schriftart und gr fe Farben Hin tergrundfarben und Unterstreichungen auf der Arbeitsfl che Fenstereigen schaften meint das Verhalten der Fenster und deren Aktivierung Sie k nnen beispielsweise einstellen dass der Fokus der Maus folgen soll Dann m ssen Sie nicht mehr in ein Fenster klicken um es zu aktivieren The taskbar is part of the panel and assists you in finding your way around on the desktop It displays the applications currently started on your system In this module determine to what extent started programs and virtual desktops should be displayed in the taskbar and which actions should be associated with mouse clicks in the taskbar Unter Kontrollleisten legen Sie die Position und Gr e der Leisten fest und konfigurieren das Ausblenden derselben Ebenso k nnen Sie zus tzliche Men s in die Kontrollleiste legen Sollte Ihnen die standardm fige Zahl an virtuellen Arbeitsfl chen nicht gen gen legen Sie unter Virtuelle Arbeitsflachen zus t zliche an und weisen ihnen Namen zu 4 2 3 Sound amp Multimedia Here you can perform all settings for the playback of audio CDs and for
118. the window View the entire list with 1s dev less It is also possible to save the output of commands to a file For example ls test gt Content generates a new file called Content that contains a list of the files and directories in test View the file with less Content Similarly you can also use a file as the input for a comand For example sort the text lines in Test file with sort lt Testfile The output of the command sort is sent to the screen The text is sorted by the first letters of the individual lines If you need a new file containing the sorted list pipe the output of the com mand sort to a file To test this create an unsorted name list in an editor and save it under list in the test directory Then change into test and enter the command sort lt unsortedlist gt sortedlist Finally view the sorted list with less Just like the standard output the standard error output is sent to the console as well However to redirect the standard error output to a file named errors append 2 gt errors to the corresponding command On the other hand both standard output and standard error are saved to one file named alloutput if you append gt amp alloutput Finally to append the output of a command to an already existing file the command must be followed by gt gt instead of a single gt 24 2 8 Archives and Data Compression Now that you have already created a number of files and directories consider the subject o
119. then be processed with OpenOffice or KWrite 334 ____ 226 Optical Character Recognition Graphics with The GIMP GIMP GNU Image Manipulation Program is a very powerful program for the processing of pixel graphics GIMP is the first choice for retouching or modify ing photographs and other image files Once you are familiar enough with the program you will even be able to create entire images from scratch An average user however will not need all of the powerful functions of GIMP It can even be used for free style painting All tools such as brush pencil or airbrush are available see Figure 23 1 on the following page Frequent users of these fea tures should definitely consider acquiring a graphics tablet 23 1 Image Processing and Graphics Formats 337 232 Using The GIMP colar ag Soe eue dos 338 23 3 Working with The GIMP ess 345 23 4 Introduction to Image Manipulation 349 23 5 For More Information 0 64804 oca 350 dINID SUL UM saludos 336 Thecimp 3 File Xtns Help PnTRRPP AL SR BSB AaABTAD 0x0 30065 3 m EVAL Mode 8 Ei Eh Gy X cj Feather Edges E amp Auto Shrink Selection Free Select 3 I l G JL JL 2 Figure 23 1 The GIMP Toolbox The Default Window Taking into account the power and performance of GIMP and the prices for commercial professional graphics pr
120. this may be due to lacking ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface support of the system hardware In this case use this option to perform the installation without ACPI support Installation Safe Settings The DMA mode for CD ROM drives and any critical power management functions are disabled Experts can also use the command line to enter or change kernel parameters Manual Installation If the automatic loading of drivers causes problems with the installation you can perform the installation manually In a manual installation drivers are not loaded automatically However this will not work if you use a USB keyboard on your machine Rescue System If you are unable to boot into your installed Linux system for some reason you can boot the computer from the DVD or CD1 and select this item This option starts a rescue system a minimal Linux system without any graphical user interface which can be used by experts to access disk partitions for troubleshooting Memory Test This tests your system RAM by means of repeated read and write cycles This is done in an endless loop as memory corruption often shows up very sporadically so many read and write cycles might be necessary to detect it If you suspect that your RAM might be defective start this test and let it run for several hours If no errors are detected after a longer time period you can assume that the memory is intact Terminate the test by rebootin
121. tion is provided for the operation of the fax functionality and the answering machine 17 3 1 General Notes about Reception The development of Capisuite heavily relied on using already existing capabil ities of Linux This is why the delivery of incoming faxes and voice messages is handled by the internal Linux mail system instead of proprietary applications and protocols This requires the configuration of a mail client for receiving local messages for each user of Capisuite For details read the respective chapters about the mail program or the documentation provided with the application Follow these steps to activate reception of local e mail messages in KMail Start KMail as usual Select Settings gt Configure KMail Click the network icon in the list to the left Select the Receiving tab Reception is already configured if an entry with the type local is already present in the list The dialog box can be closed with Cancel in that case If not click Add 276 17 3 Usage a Select Local mailbox from the list and confirm with OK Name the new account for example local inbox by entering the name in the upper input field All the other settings can be left at their default values Then complete the configuration by clicking OK If you have not disabled the sending of mail in the CapiSuite configuration see previous section you will receive all incoming
122. to my computer with telnet I always get the answer Login incorrect You are probably trying to log in as root For security reasons this is not possible via telnet by default SuSE Linux User Guide 397 398 19 20 21 22 23 With YaST set up a normal user account Log in with this user name Then change to the user root with su It is much better and safer however to use the program ssh instead of telnet The ssh program uses en crypted secure connections How do I connect to the Internet in Linux Section KInternet the Door to the WWW on page 145 provides informa tion about this I found a bug in SuSE Linux Where should I report it First ascertain whether it is actually a bug in the program or just an error in operation or faulty configuration settings Also read the documentation in usr share doc packages and usr share doc howto The bug may have already been discovered Check in the support database at http sdb suse de sdb en htm1 Enter a keyword or work your way forward or backward via the Histor link If it really is a bug send a description of it by e mail to feedback suse de How can I install applications Applications included in the SuSE Linux CDs are best installed with Yast Another possibility is to start YaST from the command line yast i package Replace the placeholder package with the file name of the RPM package including the path You can also specify mul
123. to specify the minimum and maximum bit rate SuSE Linux User Guide 297 298 099123 is a command line Ogg player The program requires the specification of a playback device Start it with a command like ogg123 d alsa09 mysong ogg 18 9 ALSA and MIDI Apart from the possibility to play PCM data many sound cards also offer MIDI functionality The ALSA MIDI sequencer implements an efficient architecture for routing MIDI data You need package pmidi package aseqview package vkeybd package awesfx package snd_sf2 and package kalsatools Many sound cards have an external MIDI port for connecting MIDI devices such as synthesizers keyboards and sound modules If the MIDI port of the card is supported by ALSA use a sequencer application such as jazz to record and play MIDI files An overview of the MIDI devices provided by your card is available in the KDE Control Center under Sound amp Multimedia gt Sound System MIDI Here also determine the devices to use for playing MIDI files On the command line list the available MIDI devices and their internal ALSA port numbers with the command pmidi 1 For a Soundblaster Live card the listing would appear as in Output ALSA and MIDI on the current page Port Client name Port name 72 0 External MIDI 0 MIDI 0 0 1320 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 0 7331 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 1 T7332 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 2 WAS IES Emul0k1 Wav
124. to the existing panels with Add to Panel Use drawers to organize your favorite applications or important documents The contents are only displayed when the drawer is opened with a single click Right click the drawer and se lect Properties to modify its size and appearance Click the icon to change it Remove panel elements by right clicking the respective icons and selecting Re move doptseq 3INONO SUL 5 1 4 The Main Menu Open the main menu by means of the icon to the far left of the panel Apart from the applications which are organized in categories find default functions such as Log out and Lock screen Use Open Recent to gain quick access to recent files Use Search for Files to find files With Run Program enter and run a command for example for starting a program instead of navigating through the various program menus From the main menu you can also start the GNOME Control Center for configuring the desktop or YaST for installing additional software 5 1 5 Handling Floppy Disks CDs or DVDs To access floppy disks CDs or DVDs insert the medium in the appropriate drive Right click an empty spot of the desktop and select the desired medium from the Drives list A floppy disk or CD icon appears Double clicking the icon launches Nautilus which displays the contents of the medium Copy files to your personal home directory by dragging and dropping Copy files to a floppy dis
125. to the padlock symbol If the signature is invalid a broken padlock appears The encryption and decryption of e mail is just as easy After composing the e mail message go to Security PGP encrypt and send the e mail message When you receive encrypted messages a dialog opens to ask for the password of your secret key Enter the passphrase to decrypt the e mail message 16 4 5 Folders It is often convenient to sort e mail messages into a variety of folders To view your folder tree select View Folder Bar If accessing mail over IMAP the IMAP folders are also shown in this folder bar For POP and most other formats your folders are stored locally sorted under Local Folders Your Contacts Calendar and Tasks are also treated as folders in this view but should not be used for storing e mail Several folders are included by default Inbox is where new messages fetched from a server are initially placed Sent is used for saving copies of sent e mail messages Outbox is temporary storage for e mail that has not yet been sent It is useful if working offline or if the outgoing mail server is temporarily unreach able Drafts is used for saving unfinished e mail messages The Trash folder is intended for temporary storage of deleted items The folder can be emptied automatically by activating the respective option under Tools gt Settings gt Mai
126. two thirds of the image height Using the mouse click and drag to open a rectangle A click inside this rectangle crops the surrounding area You can always undo this immediately with 2 You can also change the size of the rectangle Resize the selec tion by grabbing and moving the top left or bottom right corners Move the entire rectangle by grabbing and moving the bottom left or top right corners diAIO SUL ULM saludo This icon hides a multitude of functionalities that might confuse a begin ner Process the whole image by clicking the tool icon first then the image or a portion by first making a selection then clicking the tool icon Four functions are available rotate the image or the selection around an arbitrary rotation point enlarge or reduce Scaling convert a rectangle into a trapezoid Shearing or distort the perspective of an area The de fault setting is Rotation Other functions can be specified in the option box opened by double clicking the tool icon A simple tool that flips mirrors the selected area horizontally or verti cally Once you have modified your whole image or a selection with the aid of a trans formation tool reconnect this floating selection to the image Prior to this inte gration you can still modify the result of your transformations There are sev eral possibilities for integrating the changes into the image use the anchor layer keyboard shortcut Ctr H click in the image somewhe
127. under Peak 18 8 Compressing Audio Data Uncompressed audio data in CD quality consumes almost ten MB per minute The MP3 procedure was developed by Fraunhofer IIS for the purpose of dras tically compressing this data Unfortunately this procedure is patented There fore companies that distribute MP3 encoders are required to pay license fees The powerful MP3 encoder Lame was developed for Linux Although the source code of Lame is under the GPL we are not allowed to include this en coder in our distribution For more information about the legal situation visit the project web page at http 1ame sourceforge net In some countries including Germany and the USA the use of Larne is permitted for research purposes only Ogg Vorbis package vorbis tools isa free audio compression format that is now supported by the majority of audio players The web page of the project is http www xiph org ogg vorbis The vorbis tools package includes an encoder and a simple player The encoder is started from the command line with oggenc The only parameter needed is the WAV file to compress The op tion h displays an overview of the other parameters The latest version of the Ogg encoder even supports encoding with a variable bit rate In this way an even higher degree of compression can be achieved Instead of the bit rate spec ify the desired quality with the parameter q The parameter b determines the average bit rate m and M can be used
128. use Tools gt Write ISO Image If this options is used all other options in this section will be deactivated The Settings tab features options needed for the creation of CDs with multiple data or audio tracks multi session CDs In the Name of Media tab you can specify a name description publisher and other details for the CD Under File system you can specify settings for the file system on the CD RockRidge Joliet UDF and determine how symbolic links file permissions and blanks are treated Finally the Advanced tab enables advanced users to specify additional set tings 20 3 Creating an Audio CD Basically there are no significant differences between creating an audio CD and creating a data CD Select File gt New Audio Project Drag and drop the indi vidual audio tracks to the project folder with the left mouse button The audio SuSE Linux User Guide uopooddy Bululng qd eur ae 319 320 Burning Settings Multisession Advanced r Burning Device Device Burning speed a 7 r Options 1 F Simulate writing X Writing on the fly el r Ix Disc at once use BURN PROOF User Defaults Save User Defaults Figure 20 2 Burning CDs with K3b data must be in MP3 WAV or Ogg Vorbis format The sequence of the tracks can be determined by moving them up or down in the project folder The dialog for
129. useful for filtering messages sent to a mailing list Setting up a Filter Select Tools gt Filters This dialog lists your existing filters which can be edited or deleted Click Add to create a new filter CENAS X Rule name Untitled dy Ada criterion Execute actions if all criteria are met v Sender contains vf dy Remove A y Then dy Ada action Move to Folder w lt click here to select a folder l db Remove J Figure 16 2 Setting up a Filter Enter a name for the new filter in Rule Name Select the criteria to use for the filter Options include sender recipients source account subject date and sta tus The drop box showing Contains provides a variety of options such as SuSE Linux User Guide uJDJ60Jg JOPUSIOD PUD IDJAI 3 Uv uounjo 3 263 264 Hn as contains is and is not Select the appropriate condition Enter the text for which to search Click Add criterion to add more filter criteria Use Execute actions to determine if all or only some of the criteria must be met to apply the filter In the lower part of the window determine the action to take when the filter criteria are met Messages can for example be moved or copied to a folder or assigned a special color When moving or copying select the destination folder by clicking In the
130. user group the new user is assigned and the resulting permissions account See rsaccess permissions ACL Access Control List Extension of the conventional permission concept for files and directories ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line Transmission procedure that transmits data about one hundred times faster than ISDN in the telephone network AGP Accelerated Graphics Port A high speed slot for graphics cards based on PCI but offering a larger v bandwidth Furthermore AGP graphics cards can revert directly without routing around the processor to the Random Access Memory and ve main memory in contrast to PCI models to swap graphics data there ATAPI Advanced Technology Attachment Packet Interface ATAPI is a type of CD ROM drive that is connected to an E IDE con troller Apart from ATAPI drives there are SCSI CD ROM drives handled by a SCSI controller and proprietary CD ROM drives that use their own controller or are connected to a sound card backup A backup is a duplicate of data used to restore data that has been dam aged or lost Backups should be done regularly especially the important files AJOSSO 2 402 bandwidth Maximum load capacity of a data channel BIOS Small component responsible for the initialization of important hardware processes This essential procedure is complete when the boot menu ap pears on the screen bookmark A mostly personal collection of interesting web page or
131. want to install A standard installation with office applications requires about 1 GB 2 GB is recommended if you want space for your own data as well To install just about everything you need 3 GB to 6 GB depending on the version I need more space for Linux How can I add another hard disk To make more space available integrate a new hard disk or parts of it i e partitions into your Linux system at any time For example if it turns out that you need more space in opt mount an additional hard disk partition to this directory To do so follow this procedure a Install your hard disk following the instructions of the manufacturer then start Linux b Log in as user root c Partition the new hard disk with disk For further information refer to the manual page of fdisk with man fdisk d Format the partition with mke2 s dev hdb1 e Enter the following commands cd opt mkdir opt2 mount dev hdb1 opt2 cp axv opt2 Check thoroughly to see whether all the data has been copied Af terwards move the old directory and add a new one an empty mount point mv opt opt old mkdir opt Use an editor to add the new partitions in etc stab This could resemble that in File SuSE Linux FAQ on the current page SuSE Linux User Guide 399 400 28 29 dev hdb1 opt ext2 defaults 1 2 File 5 Sample Line in etc fstab for an Additional Partition Now shut down the computer and reboot f Af
132. what you are doing Encrypt File System If you activate the encryption all data is written to the hard disk in encrypted form This increases the security of sensitive data but re duces the system speed as the encryption takes some time fstab Options Here you can specify various parameters for the administration file of the file systems etc fstab Experienced users have the possi bility to modify a number of options Refer to the respective chapter in the Administration Guide before changing anything Mount Point This specifies the directory at which the partition should be mounted in the file system tree Various YOST suggestions can be expanded at the respective entry field If you accept these suggestions the default file system structure is implemented However you can also specify any other names 3 Select Next to activate the partition Note If you partition manually create a swap partition The swap partition is used to free the main memory from data that is not used at the present moment This keeps the main memory free for the most frequently used important data Note Resizing a Windows Partition If a hard disk containing a Windows FAT or NTFS partition was selected as in stallation target YaST will offer to delete or shrink this partition In this way you 2 5 Installation Suggestion can install SuSE Linux even if there is currently not enough space on the hard disk This function
133. with the package manager se lect Install or Remove Software in the YaST Control Center The dialog window of the package manager is displayed as shown in Figure 3 4 file Package Extras Help Filter Selections Package Summary A Program to Exact Microson Cabinet es EZ CheckHardware CheckHardware tool T E expat XML Parser Toolkit 490 8 kB 1 95 6 64 I A ot KDE vj tontcontig library for font configuration 7377k8 2213 O GNOME system E treetype2 A TrueType font library 5260kB 21448 Help amp Support Documentation EZ tribiai Free Implementation of the BiDi algorithm 1537 kB 0104 273 ej Office Applications E twm2 An Improved Version of the FVWM Window Manager 80MB 257 21 O Games E ohostscripttontsstd Standard Fonts tor Ghostscript 26MB 7 074131 O Multimedia E alib The utility functions for Gtk 352 0 kB 1 2 10 458 158 Runtime Environment i alibclocate Locale Data for Localized Programs 37 0 MB 232 67 Li Simple Webserver with Apache2 vj gnome tilesystem GNOME Directory Layout 542B 0 152 O Simple webserver Bar A library for the creation of graphical user interfaces 24MB 1210671 O LDAP Server and Tools zi hermes A graphics conversion library 1718k8 132341 i Network Server itnteuro European fonts for the X Window System 217 7k8 121413 E KemetDevel Zim A shared library for loading and rendering 3D images 4213kB 19147 i Kde Devel QJ imuneel A program to enable the wheel on a Microsoft Intelli
134. with which sounds All sound associations already defined for appli cations are listed Test a sound by first selecting the corresponding notice in the Event column then clicking Play Change the sound by clicking Event then Browse The dialog that appears provides a list of files from which to choose Close it with OK doptseq 3INONO SUL 5 3 File Management with Nautilus Nautilus is the file manager and viewer of GNOME The following section pro vides an overview of the basic functions of Nautilus as well as a few tips on its configuration More information can be found in the help pages for Nautilus 5 3 1 Navigating in Nautilus Nautilus has a navigation behavior similar to most web browsers Open a new window by right clicking a free area of the desktop then selecting new win dow Alternatively double click the personal folder The standard window is shown in Figure 5 1 on the following page Use the icons in the toolbar to move forward and backward to move one level up in the directory tree to stop loading a document to reload the document or to go to the preferred starting page Location shows the path to the current directory or to the current file A different path can be directly entered here The left sidebar contains the current object and some information about it A drop down menu is located right above the sidebar and is set by default to In formation It is however po
135. yet available for all ISDN adapters However drivers are already available for ISDN adapters from AVM and can easily be installed and config ured with YaST Refer to the chapter on the ISDN configuration and the help texts of the respective YaST module for more information The functionality of the CAPI driver can easily be tested by executing the com mand capiinfo as the user root If detailed information about the capabilities of the ISDN adapter is returned the driver is installed correctly and CapiSuite can be installed and used Here you can also see if the CAPI driver you use supports fax operation This is the case if the T 30 protocol is listed in the sections B1 protocols support 17 1 CapiSuite Basics to B3 protocols support If this is not the case you will merely be able to use CapiSuite for receiving voice calls The CapiSuite package must be installed with the YaST software installation module to be able to configure CapiSuite More information on installing soft ware is provided in the respective section of the YaST chapter Following the installation YaST contains two modules for configuring the fax and answering machine functionality These modules are described below 17 2 1 Configuring Fax Services The YaST module Fax from the Network Devices group contains a form with a user list and buttons for the processing of list entries The list contains all the users already configured for the fax system
136. you can change the settings according to your needs Click OK to confirm the changes and return to the main menu where you can edit other options The available options depend on the utilized boot loader The following list intro duces some options of the boot loader GRUB Boot Loader Type Use this option to switch between GRUB and LILO You will be taken to another dialog in which you can specify the way in which this change should be performed For instance you convert the current GRUB configuration into a similar LILO configuration However some settings may be lost if no equivalent options are available You can also create a new configuration from scratch or generate and edit a suggestion for a configuration If you start the boot loader configuration in the running system you can load the configuration from the hard disk If you decide to return to the original boot loader you can load its configuration by means of the last option However this possibility only exists as long as you do not close the boot loader module 3 8 System Boot Loader Location Use this dialog to define where to install the boot loader in the master boot record MBR in the boot sector of the boot partition if available in the the boot sector of the root partition or on a floppy disk Use Others to specify a different location In this connection refer to the information about GRUB or LILO in the Administration Guide Disk Order If your c
137. 0 Audio creating costoso penectus 319 booting ore reete 14 ab rning remm 317 321 SGOpPYINE rieres cirios uriene reeni 320 data creating ioiii bon tirnardi 318 ISO images 0 eee e eee 320 players e WorkMan ecusostecuse sd rebaja 290 ur A eaeiadenan sd 365 370 chmod iii 364 370 GOWN cerati 365 369 jo MD 375 Command Line secet ete net 353 COMMANAS soma e ii 368 375 As 371 Dic PPM DM 369 Sehi Parei oaaao 365 370 414 375 A A cete esed eran 374 OP 373 SUMON sicario 372 pdatedb cete ae is 371 configuration files asound conf sss 86 estaba cies scere rs 29 372 399 modules conf ssssss 86 eYCCORB Disi eb me stent dees as 117 DEI 117 configuring cable modem ooccooccccccccnnoros 91 CD ROM cocciocrcnc neus 63 Control Center cee e eee 48 DNS ais bss 99 A uc iaetentda aes 93 e mail scs eres esans 101 AS AAA emen 107 graphics cards oooooooococcocm m 75 group administration 103 Index hard disk controller 72 hard disks DMA 82 shardware siiisidiaia cali d 62 87 SISDIN tras 95 JOY Sticks cantan aa ios 83 keyboard layout 118 lang uage 25 ied pe hes 118 MOGEMS aie dorem tetur sta ees 91 T InOUSRusspeebhiqeresr re pner DE RU 83 NetWork erecrcr e 87 101 EJ c oo 99 NTP CODES iu ou mace actu Ee EE EAE YE 101 printing c
138. 1 Shell ii cio 357 uncompressing seesse 361 VIEWING 2 ee eee eee eee eee es 359 371 A ES 371 firewall itsaser aAa EE AEREE 107 formatting hard soft formatting floppy disks A 545ecxeteme crm tes 151 VEES tiy odi ceres bbs csaleneuge Ru masala 373 Frequently Asked Questions 395 G Gale n oanrinne nesie ee ida 223 225 configuring eee eee 225 ATIK lt a niece tae ee oer ker OE MUR 284 GIP sy 21 pee E AR nate hb bates ion 337 GIMP desicion 335 350 s brushes sucre e nem 345 channels AMETS caida cria gradients 1 00 esc rete 345 graphics formats 337 dii stcxtyetanaitir we aan ananahi 339 image modes 0e ee eee 348 A tete rera 347 amatr al oe ssec coetu crt ponat 336 opening images s suse 345 patlis iioc b inoar iket 348 patterns 0 eee eee eee eee 345 retouching images 343 349 Saving images a nais aiian eiia 346 selecting ieren si auenia teneas 339 340 special effects 349 zStartng eoe E reere pean ce era 338 PUNE reri ura eser eyed 342 349 SuSE Linux User Guide 415 416 PS api 338 itoolbox crier ie 339 transparency s sssesssse 346 GNOME SCDS scence sick sai aaah rede 159 configuring ania eea 160 Accessibility ooooooo 163 background 162 A O 163 keyboard sere rieiesespriiipis 160 keyboard shortcuts 164
139. 1 To stop the printing take out all paper or open the paper trays 2 As the print job will be removed from the printer queue only after having been sent completely to the printer it will usually still be there Even a reboot will not remove it To delete the print job use a tool like kprinter Instructions for managing print jobs from the command line are provided in the Administration Guide 3 Itis possible that some data is still transmitted to the printer even though the print job has been deleted from the queue To stop all processes still using the printer device use the fuser command For a printer con nected to the first parallel port enter fuser k dev 1p0 To achieve the same for a USB printer enter fuser k dev usb 1p0 4 Do a complete reset of the printer by switching it off Wait a few seconds before putting the paper back into the trays and switching the device back on The printer should now be ready to accept new jobs For More Information Details about the Linux printing systems are provided in the Chapter Printer Operation in the Administration Guide which should already be installed on your system To read the manual start SuSE Help and click Administration Guide The PDF file is also available in usr share doc packages suselinux reference en and can be opened with a browser The above mentioned chapter in the Administration Guide discusses printing issues and solutions in general terms For more speci
140. 196 5 2 Working with KPIOE oscars y 200 JO ldM ULM anduon pjeupuoH p BulziuolyoAs 196 8 1 KPilot Basics The main purpose of KPilot is to allow the sharing of data between the appli cations of a handheld computer and their KDE counterparts KPilot does come with its own built in memo viewer address viewer and file installer but these cannot be used outside the KPilot environment Independent KDE applications are available for all these functions except the file installer For the communication between the handheld and the different desktop pro grams KPilot relies on conduits KPilot itself is the program that oversees any data exchange between the two computer devices Using a particular function of the handheld on your desktop computer requires that the corresponding con duit is enabled and configured For the most part these conduits are designed to interact with specific KDE programs so in general they cannot be used with other desktop applications The time synchronization conduit is special in that there is no user visible pro gram for it It is activated in the background with each sync operation but should only be enabled on computers that use a network time server to correct their own time drift When a synchronization is started the conduits are activated one after another to carry out the data transfer There are two different sync methods 1 A HotSync operation only synchronizes the data for which any conduits
141. 2 4 Installation Mode Here you can decide whether to perform a New Installation or an Update Of course the latter is only possible if SuSE Linux is already installed In this case you can also boot this system with Boot installed system If your installed sys tem does not start perhaps because some important system configurations were corrupted you can try to repair the system with System repair If SuSE Linux was not installed so far you can only perform a new installation The procedure for the new installation is described in the following section More information about the system update is provided in Section System Update on page 59 Click OK to continue Figure 2 3 on the following page SuSE Linux User Guide uoipblisu peugeqr esf lt appears that your machine ima y r Please select has a Linux system installed are ae P New installation To verify this existing partitions o must be mounted This can be Update an existing system a time consuming process for Repair installed system large partitions S Boot installed system Please choose what to do Abort Installation Select New Installation if there is no existing Linux system on your machine or if you want to replace an existing Linux M G OK e Figure 2 3 Selecting the Installation Mode 2 5 Installation Suggestion After hardware detection the suggestio
142. 246 246 246 247 247 248 248 250 Xi Xii 15 6 Message Folders s o atr chk hb Sud o mus 251 15 7 The Address Book 424483 aria As 253 WS Fillers A EUR EUR e my REESE MS 253 15 31 Milter Rules 2005 gr or Remo RO Pa XS EU SESS HES 253 158 2 Examples ol Filters v vanae eh Ee um ee eds 253 15 9 Mail Encryption with PGP orGmuPG 254 1591 Signing Messages 269629 be ee da 255 15 9 2 Checking the Signature of a Received Message 255 159 5 Sending Public Keys uu moscmeikeer e8 r3 ex 256 15 9 4 Decoding Encrypted Messages o o 256 15 9 5 Encrypting Your Own Messages o 256 15 10For More Information gt i sro siest vb RE PAG Re v 256 16 Evolution An E Mail and Calendar Program 257 16 1 Starting EVOIMMOR s oo oa Sep RR Rhe sedes 258 16 2 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs 258 16 3 Overview of EVOIWMOM cce i e gda ko ee Re a eS 259 16 9 SUIS os o Eus oe hadi Ye wes Tx ER S Ed 259 16 9 2 InbOX i i 99g a A qv 260 163 8 Calendar 68h 4v 9 bu Re UE god ee ee 260 15 541 TASKE 2 OSes peque Roo e ew eee ee bee RR 260 16 5 5 COMAS au meu eue Een ex eie b E Gots a 260 164 E Mail conoce PAS SE ee xA ERES S 260 1641 Configuring Accounts o o 261 16 42 Mail Preferences culo uero A a UR Rss 261 164 3 Creatine Messages uuu da edu Edo ue re ES SV 261 16 4 4 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures 261 102 5 Folders i222 36k oo rm A RE 262
143. 309 Start the application with noteedit A few examples can be found in usr share doc packages noteedit examples which can be opened with File gt Open Use TSE3 gt TSE3 Midi In to import MIDI files These are loaded into the editor with TSE3 gt Score Set various options for the conver sion in the Filter dialog box Midi gt Devices allows selection of one of the ALSA MIDI devices configured in the system This device is then used for playback as well as for recording The instrument the MIDI channel and many other parameters such as the stereo panorama can be set under Staff Staff Properties Notes can easily be entered with the help of the mouse First choose the length of the note and any required accidental in the toolbar Click to insert a note or right click to insert a rest The Insert menu provides objects like clef meter and key More information about NoteEdit is available in the directory usr share doc packages noteedit In Linux there are several MIDI sequencers some of which are very mature For example Jazz is a proven stable program The development of Rosegarden the classic among sequencer programs and notation editors for Linux was resumed recently Therefore this program may also be of interest to you MusE is also a very active project Meanwhile the program can be used as a sequencer
144. AP Usually POP3 is suitable After making your selection a window appears in which to enter the POP3 server data Enter the name of the server in the field at the top In the other fields enter the values provided by your Internet service provider or your system administrator The fields User Server and Password are required The Extras tab offers several methods of encryption and authorization If you are uncertain about which options your server provides try Test server capabilities 15 3 3 Configuring the Appearance of KMail Under Appearance customize KMail according to your preferences Use the Fonts tab to configure the fonts for the various displays such as the message text and first level quoted text To do this activate Use custom fonts To customize the colors activate Use custom colors in the Colors tab Double click an entry to access a dialog box in which to select the colors The Layout tab offers options for splitting the KMail window and for display ing a MIME tree A MIME tree shows all the attachments to a message The Header tab provides options for general settings like displaying the file size or encryption symbols Also customize the date display and message grouping Profiles is responsible for the administration of default appearance presets Some standard profiles are provided already like those for users who prefer high contr
145. BIG 325 you reach the entries that cannot be expanded These are the index listings of the pictures Click an item to select it If View Thumbnails is activated the pic ture names and thumbnails are displayed in the right window pane Otherwise the names and an icon are displayed Images in the right pane can be selected or deselected by clicking them Select all images with Select gt All or A To save the selected images use the disk icon in the toolbar select File gt Save Selected Photos or use the shortcut S The Save dialog shown in Figure 21 2 has a number of op tions Under What to Save select whether to save the thumbnails the images or both With Open image s with you can save the image and open it in an other program To open the images in The GIMP immediately enter gimp Using the file names suggested by the camera is recommended Create Dir Delete File Rename File home geeko _4 Directories ab Desktop Documents public html What to save r Save photos _j Save audio data Save thumbnails Open image s with F Use filenames provided by the camera Filename prefix Selection home geeko AAA OK Cancel Figure 21 2 Saving Images 326 21 4 Using gtKam 21 5 Using Digikam Digikam by Renchi Raju is a KDE program for downloading photographs from digital cameras On start up Digikam presents a window with
146. Blank CD RW A EI cksum composite 3 curl 8 db2 lo 1 PR E cleanappledouble pl i conjure 8 cut i db2 pr i CiesHog clear convert BS db2 re S Documents cmp s cpio l cvsbug 3 db2_st Export cmuwmtophm 2 cpp cvslock E dbmm lt HKDesktop col 3 crontab 3 cytune Y dc I M lcs colert csh i db2 archive 2 ddate Tech Docs colrm cslatex e db2 checkpoint dealloc jautosave 2 column 3 cspctl X db2 deadlock S dechur 8 bin 2 comm csplain db2 dump dl detect amp j buecherliste E composeglyphs csplit i db2_dump185 devdur cvsroot misc 4T D iF dead EG e gt Fiter Arnes 303 nuu uu Untited2 HData_2 Name Type Size Local Path cvs Executable 563 7 KB usr binfcvs Ejdbmmanage PERL program 10 7KB usr bin dbmmanage E dir Executable 457KB fusrfbin dir Kab 0 7 Figure 20 1 K3b Creating a New Data CD Then select Burn from the toolbar A dialog with five tabs offering various op tions for writing the CD will be opened Figure 20 2 on page 320 20 2 Burning CDs The detected writer is displayed under Device in the burning dialog Set the burning speed in Burning Speed The following options are offered here Mode This option determines how the laser writes a CD In the DAO disk at once mode the laser is never deactivated as
147. Changing the Global Settings 176 6 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer 178 6 7 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 182 6 8 Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw 187 6 9 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress 187 eyns eoyo 81o eoyouedo SUL 174 6 1 The Quickstarter When started for the first time from the main menu Applications gt Acces sories gt More gt OpenOffice org Quickstarter you will be asked whether the quickstart function of the program should be enabled If you intend to use OpenOffice org frequently and have enough RAM available it can be useful ES S Open Ctrl O Open Recent 14 OpenOffice org Calc 7 OpenOffice org Draw i OpenOffice org Impress OpenOffice org Global X OpenOffice org Math Te OpenOffice org Web OpenOffice org Writer 4 Y stan with R Configure OpenOffice org Quickstarter 24 Start OpenOffice org printer administration Help z Quit Ctri Q us sckage Datak ere 85 Figure 6 1 The OpenOffice org Quickstarter The Quickstarter icon then appears in the desktop panel at the lower right edge of the screen Right clicking it displays a menu like the one shown in Figure 6 1 which gives access to a number of possibilities directly start the individual OpenOffice org application modules quickly reopen the recently used files or
148. E manuals sssssssssss 395 SuSEWatcher sescent einne 147 sysconfig editor oooooococoonnonocooooo gt 117 system configuring sssssss 47 120 language rebooting SECUMILY o 2s E E HEN md shutdown updating 5s system log perre sisare ekinin dads System messages system services 66 eee eee eee ee eee T CSD orcad O 360 370 TGPZIP notre pr eR E tae Ga ena 88 POTS eie energi Hodis ei ta sate 89 ir p P 374 397 test page scusa xe edici 69 text editing x d 189 text editors cece eee eee see KWrite TIFE iseen asien eet e Anon irte van 338 time ZONE sites ri ipe eee 118 top cioe in Ov It exer het xe rede 373 TV Sales coeleste de bp 314 card configuration 55 87 ui ete ati oe anlar 312 314 nxtvepg ssss II 315 teletext AAA refte 914 The TV Magazine for Your PC 315 Index U UMOUNE inicio creber ag dard 372 updatedb eresien oi Per 371 updating Ole circa 50 51 patch CD iviniinininiara aii io nt 51 USB digital cameras ssssus 324 users administering with YaST 103 V vector graphics sssssss 187 338 A dua pa eddie aed duqus 375 virtual consoles navigating occooccccocccnncccncnos 354 Switching 6 66 06sec eee eens 117 virtual memory assire 06 cece koneita 25 W web browsers Galeon oooccccronicoroccn 223 225 Konqueror sss 220 222 Mozilla 122i
149. Figure 8 4 Dialog Showing the Path to a KOrganizer Calendar File they are ready to start immediately after uploading them to the handheld Be fore using such add on programs read their licenses as well as the instructions included JO ldM ULM anduon pjeupuoH p BurzluolyoAs SuSE Linux User Guide 201 NI mer Eile Settings Help ea 9 HotSync Memo Viewer Address Viewer a File Installer Figure 8 5 The Main Window of KPilot 202 8 3 Working with KPilot Scheduling with KOrganizer KOrganizer is a KDE application for scheduling and managing events and tasks Because of the variety of ways in which the program can present your schedule itis a very helpful tool to keep track of deadlines outstanding tasks and ap pointments It can also remind you of birthdays and meetings if you enable this function 91 Starting KOrganizer oo kg see Ros 204 9 2 Configuring KOFTgODIZer 3 5 uso pd a nS 204 OS TOODA gt su ue oe wedi ore Kee ak SYS ee ee 205 B4 Using the Calendar 2 4 3 4 04 04 3 5 xe ooh as 206 OS PODIAS oosa ee od a a Bk Be Rx YE 209 96 Address BOOK 3 23 Rma EE Red Peces 209 bo TCCT 210 JEZIUDBJOY uli Buinpeyos 204 9 1 Starting KOrganizer Start KOrganizer from the main menu or with korganizer The main window has several toolbars a menu bar the date navigator with a month view of the calendar the main part displaying th
150. Guide 129 130 Configuration of prnigang kprinter General Image Text HP GL 2 Driver Settings NY Page size A4 Paper type Paper source Tray 2 r Orientation _ Duplex Printing G Portrait a None Landscape ma kJ Long side El C Reverse landscape Short side O Reverse portrait r Banners 3 Pages per Sheet m Start none ol o2 End none O4 2 Save Ux Cancel Figure 4 2 Settings in KPrinter is displayed Select a file and confirm with OK You can also select the file by double clicking it The respective file then appears in the overview of the main window together with the name type and path specification Now click Print to send the job to the printer The job is placed in the queue and can be moni tored with KJobViewer On the other hand if you click the document two ad ditional buttons become active to the right You can use the X button to remove the document from the selection or use the magnifying glass icon to display edit and save the file with Kwrite or OpenOffice org depending on the docu ment type Afterwards simply close the editing program and click Print in the KPrinter dialog Your changes are thenadopted for printing All KDE applications use KPrinter for printing For example if you click the printer icon in Kwrite the KP
151. If there are still unresolved package conflicts an alert is displayed and solutions suggested If you set package conflicts to Ignore this information will be saved per manently in the system Otherwise you would have to set the same pack ages to Ignore each time you start the package manager To unignore dependencies click Reset Ignored Dependency Conflicts Help Help gt Overview provides a brief explanation of the package man ager functionality A detailed description of the various package flags is available under Symbols If you prefer to operate programs without us ing the mouse click Keys to view a list of shortcuts 58 3 3 Software Dependency Check Check Dependencies and Autocheck are located in the information window If you click Check Dependencies the package manger checks if the current package selection results in any unresolved package dependencies or conflicts In the event of unresolved dependencies the required additional packages are selected automatically For package conflicts the package manager opens a dia log that shows the conflict and offers various options for solving the problem If you activate Autocheck any change of a package status triggers an auto matic check This is a useful feature as the consistency of the package selection is monitored permanently However this process consumes resources and can slow down the package manager For this reas
152. It only contains the respective configuration files SuSE Linux User Guide Caution UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 61 62 eT ie The update option differs between two Update Options modes In either case itis recommended to make a backup of your personal data With New Software This default setting updates the existing software and installs all new features and benefits of the new Update from SUSE Linux 8 2 9 to SUSE Linux 8 2 99 SuSE Linux version The selection is based on the former predefined software ERAS Update Mode Only Installed Packages This selection y Update with Installation of New Software and Features only updates the packages already Based on the Selection installed on your system Note New software in the predefined software 2 Default system selection such as new YaST modules is e not available afterthe update You A EIA a dol might miss advertised features Q Minimum system Afterthe update some software might notfunction anymore Active Delete C Only Update Installed Packages Unmaintained Packages to delete those packages during the update Xj Delete Unmaintained Packages Figure 3 7 Update Options Important Information about Updates The system update is a very complex procedure For each program package YasT must check which version is installed on the computer and what needs to be done to replace the old version with the new version correctly Ya
153. Local Security Configuration Current Security Settings C Level 1 Home Workstation C Level 2 Networked Workstation C Level 3 Network Server a Custom Settings See y will be providing any type of service network or any other Use Custom Settings to create your own configuration Back Abort next Figure 3 25 Security Settings 3 7 4 Firewall Use this module to configure SuSEfirewall2 to protect your machine against at tacks from the Internet When the module is started four dialogs appear consec utively In the first dialog select the interface to protect See Figure 3 26 on the next page External interface is the interface facing the Internet Internal inter face is only required if you are located in an internal network and intend to use the firewall to protect your computer against internal attacks In this case your computer would be in a demilitarized zone DMZ Normally a configuration with DMZ is only used for company networks After selecting your interface activate the individual services of your computer for which to allow access from the Internet See Figure 3 27 on page 109 If you do not offer any server services but only use your computer for surfing the In ternet and sending and receiving e mail skip this dialog without activating any of the services If you are not familiar with the terms masquerading and traceroute simply ac cept the third dialog w
154. PI VCI pair for example 0 38 for British Telecom Meter IE Address If unsure ask your provider For PPPoE enter the device of the ethemet card to which your DSL modem is connected If you did not set up your ethernet card yet do so by pressing Manually 3 Configure Network Cards Device Activation Device activation may either happen during boot or manually with tools like ifup or kinternet An activation during boot may be appropriate for dial on demand connections Ca Back Abort Next B i Figure 3 18 DSL Configuration At the beginning of the configuration as shown in Figure 3 18 select the PPP mode and the ethernet card to which your modem is connected usually et h0 With Ger te Aktivierung determine whether the DSL connection should be established automatically when the system is booted or established manually Subsequently select your country and provider The contents of the following dialogs depend on the previously selected settings If you are not sure about some options read the detailed help texts in the dialogs To use Dial on demand see Section Information about the Internet Dial Up on page 89 for a stand alone system configure a DNS server Today most providers support dynamic DNS assignment so a valid IP address of the name 3 5 Network Devices server is provided each time a connection is established Nevertheless a suitable dummy DNS must be entered in this dial
155. ST also tries to adopt any personal settings of the installed packages However some config urations may cause problems after the update if the old configuration is unable to handle the new program version as expected or if unexpected inconsistencies arise between various configurations The older the existing version is and the more the configuration of the packages to update diverges from the standard the more problematic the update will be Sometimes the old configuration cannot be adopted correctly In this case an entirely new configuration must be made Before starting the update the exist ing configuration should be saved 3 4 Hardware New hardware must first be installed or connected as specified by the vendor Turn on external devices such as the printer or the modem and start the re spective YaST module Most devices are automatically detected by YaST and the 3 4 Hardware technical data is displayed If the automatic detection fails YaST offers a list of devices model vendor etc from which to select the suitable device Consult the documentation enclosed with your hardware for more information Note If your model is not included in the device list try a model with a similar designation However in some cases the model must match exactly as similar designations do not always indicate compatibility Note 3 4 1 CD ROM Drives Within the scope of the installation all detected CD ROM drives are integra
156. Save your settings with Finish Consult the Administration Guide for more information 3 6 6 Routing This tool is only needed if you are located in a local network or are connected to the Internet by way of a network card as is the case with DSL As indicated in Section DSL on page 93 for DSL the gateway data is only needed to configure the network card correctly However the entries are dummies that do not have any function The value is important only if you are located in a local network and use your own computer as gateway the gateway to the Internet 3 6 7 Mail Transfer Agent This configuration module allows you to adapt your mail settings if you send your e mail with sendmail postfix or the SMTP server of your provider You can fetch mail via SMTP or the fetchmail program for which you can also enter the details of the POP3 server or IMAP server of your provider You can also use a mail program of your choice such as KMail see Sec tion KMail The KDE Mail Application on page 245 or Evolution to set your SuSE Linux User Guide 101 102 POP and SMTP access data as usual to receive mail with POP3 and send mail with SMTP In this case you do not need this module Connection Type If you want to specify your mail settings with YaST specify the desired type of connection to the Internet in the first dialog of the e mail configuration module Choose one of the following options Permanent Sel
157. SuSE SuSE Linux USER GUIDE 3 edition 2003 Copyright O This publication is intellectual property of SuSE Linux AG Its contents can be duplicated either in part or in whole provided that a copyright label is visibly located on each copy All information found in this book has been compiled with utmost attention to detail However this does not guarantee complete accuracy Neither SuSE Linux AG the au thors nor the translators shall be held liable for possible errors or the consequences thereof Many of the software and hardware descriptions cited in this book are registered trade marks All trade names are subject to copyright restrictions and may be registered trade marks SuSE Linux AG essentially adheres to the manufacturer s spelling Names of products and trademarks appearing in this book with or without specific notation are likewise subject to trademark and trade protection laws and may thus fall under copy right restrictions Please direct suggestions and comments to documentation suse de Authors J rg Bartsch Gernot Hillier Marcel Hilzinger Johannes Meixner Matthias Nagorny Siegfried Olschner Marcus Sch fer Arvin Schnell Adrian Schr ter Translators Tino Tanner Rebecca Walter Editors J rg Arndt Antje Faber Berthold Gunreben Roland Haidl Jana Jaeger Edith Parzefall Peter Reinhart In s Pozo Thomas R lz Thomas Schraitle Layout Manuela Piotrowski Thomas Schraitle Setting ETFX DocBook
158. The Kooka Gallery To add images to the gallery simply drag and drop them from Konqueror Start Konqueror navigate to the directory containing the images to add to the gallery SuSE Linux User Guide 333 and drag them with the mouse to a folder of the Kooka gallery 22 6 Optical Character Recognition If the character recognition module is installed documents can be scanned in lineart mode saved in the proposed format then processed for text recogni tion from the Image menu Process the entire document or only a previously selected area A configuration dialog tells the module whether the original text is in printed type handwriting or standardized type Also set the language so the module can process the document correctly See Figure 22 5 Optical Character Recognition Kooka O OCR Image Spelichecking Starting Optical Character Recognition with GOCR GOCR is an Open Source project for optical character recognition The author of gocr is Joerg Schulenburg For more information about gocr see http jocr sourceforge net Using GOCR binary usr bin gocr pun a 160 E Fi pusiaze ey 8 0 EP Eo x Me E Figure 22 5 OCR with Kooka Optical Character Recognition Switch to the OCR Result Text window and check the text which may need to be proofread To do this save the text with File gt Save OCR Result Text The text can
159. Updates n o aoaaa 36 26 5 User Authentication si 9009 p S we ees 37 2 6 6 Configuring the Host as a NIS Client 38 2 6 7 Creating Local User Accounts o 39 26 8 Reading the Release Notes 2 a 40 27 Hardware Configurations casio sia a SUR s 41 Z8 Graphical L gin ciao et hae we hese i a 42 II Configuration 45 3 YaST Configuration 47 9 4 ca uses 2 ele ser Ap RR GR s RUSSE SUCRE qo 48 3 2 The YaST Control Center oo e oco e Re 48 2 39 SOWIE v s oor gr y d ox Ere opo E eue E e ge 49 33 1 Change Installation Source lt so oia a ora ko o 49 B02 YOS Online Update oi sanai R9 baso 50 mes Path CD Update cias ek ete ae Heine 51 3 3 4 Installing and Removing Software 51 mb System Update dnd eke a ee ea SS 59 OA Hardware A 62 241 CD ROM Drives ceo Bee ee ee ee we ae 63 2412 PRIMER ei xu 09 Rogie HG a de ux SS EU 63 34 3 Hard Disk Controller s ce serosa teti traces 72 Contents 3 0 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 4 4 Graphics Card and Monitor SaX2 72 3 45 Hardware Information llle 81 346 IDE DMA Mode 252 2683 otro m oom m RES 82 J47 ovs 40255 v2 2 nice espe ERE RENE E 83 34 8 Select Mouse Model 22 9 Rs 83 S49 Scainet xax e p e RACE EUR ES 83 3410 Sound ra a A a oe hoe 85 34 11 TV and Radio Cards 22s oso we eG 87 Netware Devices uu a vea Rog RR RE Byes a eee 87 3 5 1 Basic Information about Internet Access 87 3 5 2 I
160. XML This book has been printed on 100 chlorine free bleached paper Contents Ul Changesin the UserGude 22 L3 44 o X Ro s 02 Acknowledgements xvi oh As Installation Quick Installation TL StepOne Whe Start Stree c uuo eeu RE em ue toe E 1 2 Step Two Accept Suggestions 22d 9 x y XO Tix Step Three Installations ma cmo Xe 9k ees 14 Configuration ce oso n RR eR REG Oe EO Se Ses User Defined Installation 21 Starting Your System from the CD ROM 2 11 Possible Problems When Starting from the CD DVD 24 lheBookboebeen se 24e qwe RO ae RE RR RD ERE 23 Lanpuage Selecion suos bacs doe Edd E RES RUE UE 24 Tastallation MOGe uu laa a aa RE 25 Installation Suggestion aoia o so toer y er a E rd 25 1 Inst lahon Mode oss sk Ru aa 202 Keyboard Layout cu s db Rem T Ru S ny Pe e 2 5 9 MONIS aes Sue EUR Sx RO RUN RUP RULES EO EP E 2 544 Partitioning sas de ak a ka SG 9 Ra we ans 25 5 Expert Partitioning with YOST uc tke 256 Software osaa sm araa mi BAe ae ee RE as 30 2 5 7 Boot Configuration Boot Loader Installation 33 200 VUE MONE uuu ed a e a oe a 33 259 Language se oni sna a a ba 33 2 5 10 Launching the Installation s s a e s ss mes 34 2 6 Finishing the Installatobi e cc m a A d Se E a 34 206 1 fOOCPASSWOId seose e ai eee AA 35 2 6 2 Network Configuration x ay oaa s naa p a E age 35 2 63 Testing the Internet Connection ota aoran 35 2 6 4 Loading Software
161. a LADSPA plug in by S W Harris and is there fore available for AlsaModularSynth In example ams demo bode ams the effect is applied to the random music example bode ams demonstrates the frequency shifter in the spectrum viewer module One example by the author of the plug in is example bode wail ams Here realize a feedback by way of the JACK In module in the JACK mode example wind ams shows that even the sound of wind can be generated with AlsaModularsynth There are also other example patches like example random and sequence0 18 11 2 AlsaModularSynth as an Effect Processor Especially in the JACK mode AlsaModularSynth can be used as a versatile effect processor One example for this is example capture ams If you connect an external sound source to your sound card and use alsamixer to specify the cor rect settings for the capture the example will work even without JACK With the Ladspa Browser started with Module Show Ladspa Browser generate 18 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor Available Ladspa Plugins bode shifter 1431 ui i Bode frequency shifter bode shifter cv 1432 AS ode frequency shifter CV chebstortion 1430 C Chebyshev distortion cmt xnur ui Punos t comb_1190 cry Bode Search Label bodeShifterCW Author Steve Harris lt steve plugin org uk gt Copyright GPL Create Plugin Create Poly Plugin Figure 18 16 The Lads
162. a more sophisti cated boot loader such as rs LILO AJOSSO MD5 Algorithm for generating check sums mounting This describes the insertion of file systems into the directory tree of the system MP3 Very efficient compression procedure for audio files that reduces the size by a factor of ten in contrast to an uncompressed audio file multitasking Operating systems that can invoke more than one program simultane ously are called multitasking systems multiuser Enables more than one user to work simultaneously on the same system network The interconnection of several computers accomplished normally using servers and clients NFS Network File System A protocol for accessing a vile system shared over a network NIS Network Information Service A centralized data administration system in networks User names and passwords can be simultaneously managed network wide by the NIS operating system Program that permanently runs in the background on a computer and enables basic system operations partition Logically independent section of a hard disk each possibly containing different file systems In Windows also known as drives SuSE Linux User Guide 407 408 path Unique description of a file s position in a file system plug and play Automatic hardware component configuration technology Resources such as IRQ and DMA are configured and managed separately from the system process In Linux st
163. aand Javascript tapia e eae ed ais 222 JoJenbuoy JOSMOIG ASM SUL 11 1 Opening Web Pages Simply enter a web address in the URL line for example www suse de Konqueror displays the address Writing the protocol http at the be ginning is optional as it is recognized automatically by the program This fea ture only works properly with web addresses however For FTP servers enter ftp at the beginning of the entry line Welcome to SuSE Konqueror S nr Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help RAZA OG a ARANA E gt Location http www suse com index us html ju ASusk Welcome to SuSE 44 LWN Welcome to LWN net United SuSE States The Linux Experts and Canada Contact Site Map Links Register cea Software SuSE ONLINE STORE Home User Business Customers Partners Country Language E Maintenance Web Support Database SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Become a Partne Register Software SuSE Gear Business Eind a Partner Hardware Database Downloads Solutions Lam already a Certified Hardware Information amp Maintenance amp SuSE Partner S S PARAR Support Support Review Corner Training Customer SuSE is a member of References B je 0 http www suse com us private download index html F Figure 11 1 The Browser Window of Konqueror 11 2 Saving W
164. able under Net work Devices If the autodetection fails select the manual configuration In the dialog that opens enter the port under Device SuSE Linux User Guide 91 92 Enter all modem configuration values Modem parameters Modem Device specifies to which port your modem is connected ttySO ttyS1 etc referto serial ports and usually correspond to COMI COM2 etc in DOS Windows ttyACMO and ttyACM1 referto USB ports If you are on a PBX you probably need to enter a Dial prefix Often this is 9 or0 Modem device devimodem Choose Dial mode according to your U phone link Most telephone companies use tone dial as the Dial mode Check the additional check boxes to turn on Dial prefix if needed your modem speaker Speaker on or for your modem to wait until it detects a dial tone Detect Dial tone Dial mode Special settings Press Details to configure the baud rate Tone dialing Rj Speaker on and the modem initialization strings s Es Bulse dialing R Detect Dial Tone Details Back Abo next Bi rt Ni Figure 3 17 Modem Configuration If a PBX is interposed you may need to enter an extra number to dial external numbers usually a zero but you can find this out in the operation instruc tions for your telephone system Also decide between tone and pulse dialing whether the speaker should be switched on and whether it should wait for the dial tone The la
165. ably nrlsign sign the key locally and non revocably deluid delete user ID delkey delete a secondary key delsig delete signatures pref list preferences expert showpref list preferences verbose trust change the ownertrust revsig revoke signatures disable disable a key enable enable a key showphoto show photo ID t gt Command H _ New aij GPG Figure 14 5 Assigning Trust At the prompt of the text console Command gt enter t rust Now assign a value between 1 and 5 indicating how much you trust that the signers of the imported key have checked the true identity of the owner of this key Enter the selected 14 2 The Key Server Dialog value at the prompt Yourdecision If you are sure enter 5 Answer the following question by entering y Finally enter quit to exit the console and return to the list of keys The key now has the trust level Ultimate 14 2 2 Exporting Your Keys to a Key Server To export your key to one of the freely accessible key servers on the Internet se lect Export in the key server dialog Designate the target server and the key to export by means of two drop down menus Then start the export with Export Key Server Operation lE Import Export Key Servers Key server hkp blackhole pca dfn de Key to be exported 0xA57D070D Tux lt tux example org gt Close Figure 14 6 Exporting a Key to a Key Server 14 3 The Applet On s
166. ackages to send and ends after they have been dispatched By default there is no limitation set f flood ping sends as many data packages as possible A popular means reserved to root to test networks i value Specifies the interval between two data packages in seconds Default one second nslookup The Domain Name System resolves domain names to IP addresses With this tool send queries to information servers DNS servers telnet option s host name or IP address Telnet is actually an Internet protocol that enables you to work on remote hosts across a network telnet is also the name of a Linux program that uses this protocol to enable operations on remote computers 374 _ 244 Important Linux Commands Caution Do not use telnet over a network on which third parties can eaves drop Particularly on the Internet use encrypted transfer methods such as ssh to avoid the risk of malicious misuse of a password see the man page for ssh Caution Miscellaneous passwd option s username Users may change their own passwords at any time using this command Furthermore the administrator root can use the command to change the password of any user on the system IOUS SUL ULM BUOM su option s username The su command makes it possible to log in under a different user name from a running session When using the command without specifying a user name you will be prompted for the root password Sp
167. ad the suitable driver module for your network card from this floppy disk PCMCIA CD ROM non ATAPI FireWire and file systems This floppy disk contains all PCMCIA modules used especially for laptop computers Furthermore the modules for FireWire and some SuSE Linux User Guide 111 112 less common file systems are available here Older CD ROM drives that do not comply with the ATAPI standard can also be operated with drivers from this floppy disk To load drivers from a module disk to the rescue system select Kernel modules hardware drivers and the desired module category SCSI eth ernet etc You will be prompted to insert the respective module disk and the contained modules will be listed Select the desired module Watch the system messages carefully Loading module lt modulename gt failed in dicates that the hardware could not be recognized by the module Some older drivers require specific parameters to be able to address the hard ware correctly In this case refer to the documentation of your hardware User Defined Disk This option enables you to write any existing floppy disk image from the hard disk to a floppy disk Download Disk Image This option enables you to enter an URL and authen tication data to download a floppy disk image from the Internet To create one of the above mentioned floppy disks select the respective option and click Next You will be asked to insert a floppy
168. ade available by HTML define how a document looks and how it is displayed in a ssbrowser HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol A protocol used between the ve browsers and Internet servers to transmit vs HTML pages over the ve World Wide Web IDE Integrated Drive Electronics A widely used hard disk standard in low grade and middle grade PCs Internet World wide computer network based on v TCP IP which is used by a very large population IP address A numerical 32 bit Internet address appearing in four decimal series sep arated by periods for example 192 168 10 1 which is uniquely assigned to a machine connected to ss TCP IP networks IRO Interrupt Request A request to the operating system carried out by a hardware component or a program to assign it processor capacity SuSE Linux User Guide 405 406 ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network A popular digital standard for high speed data transferral over the tele phone network KDE K Desktop Environment User friendly graphical desktop environment for Linux similar to GNOME kernel The kernel is the central core of the Linux operating system It manages memory contains the drivers that enable communication with the hard ware and handles processes and tasks Applications run on top of the kernel LAN local area network A LAN is a local vznetwork and is usually rather small LILO Linux Loader Small program installed in the boot sector of the har
169. adjust or edit your pictures use The GIMP as described in Chapter Graphics with The GIMP on page 335 File Folder Select Camera Help Index Settings F View Thumbnails E S Olympus C 2100UZ en Eh ay DCIM 0 MA P8280002 P8280003 P8280004 l 1000LYMP 5 P8280005 Figure 21 1 The Main Window of gtKam Connect your camera to the appropriate port and turn on the camera Start gtKam with the command gtkam amp From the menu select Camera gt Se lect Camera In the dialog that opens select the camera model or use Detect Select the appropriate port if the detection fails The main gtKam window is divided into three sections the menu and tool bars the left pane with index settings and camera and directory selection and the right pane for displaying an index listing with or without thumbnails The icons in the toolbar provide the main functions needed The disk icon saves the selected images The trash icon deletes them The icon with the arrows loads the image index displayed in the right pane The icon with the paper and pencil opens the camera configuration options The door icon exits the program Your camera should be listed in the left pane Use the plus sign to the left to expand the tree display of the directory structure Your exact directory structure depends on the camera type and model Continue expanding until SuSE Linux User Guide xnur PUD SOIOLUDD JOLI
170. affected by the language selection Click OK to complete the configuration or Discard to undo your changes 2 5 10 Launching the Installation When satisfied with the installation settings click Next to begin the installa tion Confirm with Yes in the green dialog that opens Installation usually takes between fifteen and thirty minutes depending on system performance and the software selected 2 6 Finishing the Installation After completing the basic system setup and the installation of all selected soft ware packages provide a password for the account of the system administrator the root user Then configure your Internet access and network connection 2 6 Finishing the Installation if available With a working Internet connection it is possible to update the sys tem with security patches and software updates during installation If desired configure a name server for centralized user administration in a local network Also configure any hardware devices such as printers and scanners 2 6 1 root Password tyoot is the name of the superuser the administrator of the system Unlike reg ular users which may or may not have permission to do certain things on the system root has unlimited power to do anything changing the system config uration installing programs and setting up new hardware If users forget their passwords or have other problems with the system root can help The root account
171. ail is moved into another folder The following steps are necessary for creating this filter 1 Add a new folder as described in Section Message Folders on page 251 Assign a name such as kde user SuSE Linux User Guide uoupoldd IION 30 SUL IONX 253 254 First find a way of identifying messages to filter The messages of the KDE user list described in our example can be identified by the kde user kde org address found in the To or Cc field Click Settings gt Configure Filters The left side of the window that opens displays the existing filters The right side is composed of two pan els filter rules and filter actions Click the New icon to create an empty filter It appears as unknown Select To or Cc from the first drop down menu and contains from the second drop down menu Enter kde user kde org in the text field In Filter actions select Move to Folder from the first drop down menu A second drop down menu with the list of folders appears Choose the folder to which the filtered messages should be moved if they meet the desired criteria In this case choose kde user from the drop down menu Confirm the changes with OK More complex filters are also possible You may want to save only the messages from the KDE user list written by Fred Johnson f j anywhere com Here the remaining filter criteria come into pla
172. aining the pointer is active only the window containing the pointer is photographed To save the screenshot click Save Snapshot and designate the directory and file name for the image in the following dialog Use Print Snapshot to print the screenshot 4 4 Important Utilities doptseq 3d eui New Snapshot j Print Snapshot j Save Snapshot Options Snapshot delay No delay R Only grab the window containing the pointer 9 Heip j Quit Figure 4 9 KSnapshot Taking Screenshots SuSE Linux User Guide 155 The GNOME Desktop GNOME GNU Network Object Model Environment is a fast Linux desktop The aim of its development was to make the user interface more uniform while streamlining the various aspects of the look and feel The basic components for window management and other components enable data sharing among vari ous applications and are based on a uniform operating concept and help system 51 The Desktop ado dec e RR EUER ed A 158 5 DISSE ft n Sos e oed dose d ane eek qois deett 160 53 File Management with Nautilus 165 54 Important Utilities 4 si xc PvE Y RAE 167 doptsedq JWON9 SUL 158 5 1 The Desktop The most important elements of the GNOME desktop are the icons on the desk top the panel at the lower border and the desktop menu The mouse is your most important tool 5 1 1 The Icons By default the desktop features t
173. al time scheduler but switching a pro cess to another scheduler is only possible with root privileges The application setpriority in the package rt stools package is required for this task For example proceed as follows to run the application timidity with the FIFO scheduler 1 Start timidity 2 Start a root console 3 Use the following command to find the process ID of timidity pidof timidity 4 Change the scheduler with the command setpriority lt processID gt fifo 10 You can use the following command in a root shell to speed up this procedure for i in pidof timidity do setpriority i fifo 10 done Running a program in root mode is always risky as the program is permitted to do anything If the computer is connected to the Internet the security risk would be unacceptable Security bugs in the program could be exploited for the purpose of gaining access to the system Caution The commands described in the following paragraphs should never be ex ecuted on machines that can be accessed from the Internet or if a system crash or data loss would have serious consequences Caution il 18 4 Buffering and Latencies The sudo mechanism should be used for running a program in root mode This mechanism is demonstrated by means of the timidity application To en able all users on your system to execute timidity with root privileges modify the file etc sudoers See the man page for sudo man sudo and the man
174. ality is especially useful if the selected hard disk merely con tains one Windows partition that covers the entire hard disk which is often the case with preinstalled computers If YaST sees that there is not enough space on the selected hard disk but that space could be made available by deleting or shrinking a Windows partion it will present a dialog in which you can choose one of these two options SuSE If you delete Windows all data on this artition will be ly lo n ing Wi data Installing on 1 SCSI 1 96 GB devisda QUANTUM FIREBALL_TM21108 This disk appears to be used by Windows There Is not enough space to install Linux O Delete Windows completely Shrink Windows partition EE de Figure 2 9 Possible Options for Windows Partitions If you select Delete Windows completely the Windows partition will be marked for deletion and the freed space will be used for the installation of SuSE Linux Caution If you delete Windows all data will be lost beyond recovery as soon as the formatting starts Caution To shrink the Windows partition interrupt the installation and boot Windows in order to prepare the partition from there Although this step is not strictly required for FAT partitions it speeds up the resizing process and also makes it safer These steps are vital for NTES partitions FAT file system In Windows first run scandisk to make sure the FAT partition is f
175. all files with one command The command rm il for instance would delete all files in the current directory whose name includes the string fl 24 2 6 Moreor Less Linux includes two small programs for viewing text files directly in the shell Rather than starting an editor to read a file like Readme txt simply enter less Readme txt to display the text in the console window Use to scroll down one page Use Page 1 and Page J to move forward or backward in the text To exit less press The program less got its name from the the precept that less is more and can also be used to view the output of commands in a convenient way To see how this works read Section Pipes on this page Instead of less you can also use the older program more However it is less convenient because it does not allow you to scroll backwards 24 2 7 Pipes Normally the standard output in the shell is your screen or the console window and the standard input is the keyboard To forward the output of a command to an application such as less use a pipeline SuSE Linux User Guide IOUS SUL ULM BUOM 359 360 To view the files in the test directory enter the command 1s test less The contents of the test directory will be displayed with less This only makes sense if the normal output with 1s would be too lengthy For instance if you view the contents of the dev directory with 1s dev you will only see a small portion in
176. allation Source se lect one of the various servers When you select server the respective URL is copied to the input field below where it can be edited You can also specify local URLs in the form file my path or simply my path Expand the existing list with additional servers using New Server Click Edit server to modify the settings of the currently selected server When the module starts Manual Selection of Patches is active enabling deter mination of whether individual patches should be loaded To apply all avail able update packages deactivate this option However depending on the band width of the connection and the amount of data to transmit this can result in long download times If you activate Download All Patches Again all available patches installable packages and descriptions are downloaded from the server If this box is not 3 3 Software activated default only retrieve patches not yet installed on your system Additionally there is a possibility to update your system automatically Click Configure Fully Automatic Update to configure a process that automatically looks for updates and apply them on a daily basis This procedure is fully auto mated and does not require any interaction Of course this only works if a con nection such as an Internet connection to the update server exists at the time of the update If you decide to perform a manual update default click Nex
177. and Application Shortcuts or assign shortcuts to individual ac tions and save them as a custom scheme To create a new shortcut for an action or modify an existing shortcut select the tab for the respective area e g Global Shortcuts and click the action to assign e g Show Taskmanager The section Shortcut for Selected Action is then activated in the lower part of the dialog Three radio buttons offer the basic con figuration options none default and custom Existing schemes are write protected allowing restoration of the default values at any time Save your own modifications by clicking Save at the top right 4 2 Settings and entering a name for your custom scheme The new scheme is then listed in the selection menu Tip Under Application Shortcuts you can only configure standard actions available in all applications Program specific shortcuts must be config ured in the program itself via Settings gt Configure Shortcuts Tip doptseg FG eui Accessibility The settings in this module facilitate the access to the system for users with hearing problems or motor disorders This module contains the Bell and Key board tabs Audible bell System bells can be communicated to the user in a visible or in an audible form The default setting is the audible variant with Use System bell To configure a specific sound activate Use customized bell and u
178. and root should enter chown geeko Roadmap chgrp changes the group ownership of the file However the owner of the file must be a member of the new group In this way the user tux from Output File System Permissions on page 363 can switch the group owning the file ProjectData to project4 with the command chgrp project4 ProjectData as long as he is a member of this new group 24 3 3 The setuid Bit In certain situations the access permissions may be too restrictive Therefore Linux has additional settings that enable the temporary change of the current user and group identity for a specific action For example the cdrecord program normally requires root permissions to access the writer for writing CDs or DVDSs Thus a normal user would not be able to create CDs as it would be too dangerous to grant all users direct access to all devices A possible solution to this problem is the setuid mechanism setuid set user ID is a special file attribute that instructs the system to execute programs marked accordingly under a specific user ID Consider the cdrecord command rwxr x 1 root root 281356 2002 10 08 21 30 usr bin cdrecord Set the setuid bit with the command chmod u s usr bin cdrecord SuSE Linux User Guide 365 366 Then assign the cdrecord program to the group users with the command chgrp users usr bin cdrecord The following access permissions are granted rws x 1 root users 281356 2002 10 08 21 30 u
179. anged with the mouse It is also possible to completely detach single frames from the Kooka window for deliberate placement on the desktop To move the frames click and drag the thin double line right above the frame Any frame except the main window can be placed within any other frame aligned to the left right top bottom or centered Centered windows have the same size are stacked and can be brought to the foreground with tabs The Image Viewer and the Scan Preview frames share a window by default Tabs allow switching between them The left frame provides the gallery This is a small file browser for accessing the scanned images The frame to the lower right is shared by the OCR optical character recognition and the thumbnails which can be loaded into the image viewer with a simple click of the mouse See Figure 22 1 on the next page Selecting Show Scan Parameters in the Tool Views subentry of the Settings menu creates a third tab labeled Scan Parameter next to the already existing Image Viewer and Scan Preview tabs in the main window This is where the actual scanning parameters are set 22 2 The Preview A preview should always be created when the object to scan is smaller than the total scanning area Set a few parameters to the left of the preview frame Select the scanning size with Custom or one of the standard formats See Figure 22 2 on page 332 The Custom setting i
180. anguage for the keyboard layout the country specific position of the keys Use the test field to check if special characters are displayed correctly The status of the check box used for activating and deactivating the entry of accented letters depends on the respective language and does not need to be changed Click Finish to apply the new settings to your system Touchscreen Currently XFree86 only supports Microtouch and Elo TouchSys tems touchscreens SaX2 can only autodetect the monitor not the toucher The toucher is treated as an input device 1 To configure the toucher start SaX2 and select Input devices gt Touchscreens 2 Click Add and add a touchscreen 3 Save the configuration by clicking Finish You do not need to test the configuration Touchscreens feature a variety of options and usually must be calibrated first Unfortunately there is no general tool for this purpose in Linux The standard configuration contains suitable default values for the dimensions of the touchscreen Normally no additional configuration is required SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 79 80 Graphics Tablet Currently XFree86 only supports a limited number of graph ics tablets SaX2 enables the configuration of graphics tablets connected to the USB port or the serial port From the configuration perspective a graphics tablet is just an input device like a mouse 1 Start SaX2 an
181. any proxies and to change settings related to search engines Text Document Under this entry configure global word processing options such as the basic fonts and layout Writer should use HTML Document Under this entry change the settings related to the HTML authoring features of OpenOffice org ejns eoyo 610 eoyouedo Sul Spreadsheet Use this to change settings for Calc such as those related to sort lists and grids Presentation Under this entry change settings that should apply to all pre sentations For instance specify the measurement unit for the grid used to arrange elements Drawing This entry covers settings related to the vector drawing module such as the drawing scale grid properties and some print options Formula This entry provides a single dialog to set some special print options for formulas Chart This defines the default colors used for newly created charts Data Sources Use this to define how external data sources should be ac cessed Note All settings as listed above are applied globally they are used as de faults for every new document you create Note SuSE Linux User Guide 177 178 6 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer 6 6 1 Creating Texts with the AutoPilot To use a standard format and predefined elements for your own documents try the AutoPilot This is a small utility that lets you make some basic decisions then produces
182. ar and zoo You can start Ark from the main menu or from the command line with the com mand ark If you already have some compressed files move these from an open Konqueror window to the Ark window to view the contents of the archive Io view an integrated preview of the archive in Konqueror right click the archive in Konqueror and select Preview in Archiver Alternatively select the menu item File gt Open in Ark to open the file directly See Figure 4 7 home tux Documents test zip Ark File Edit Action Settings Help PEA IAS Filename Size Method Size Now Ratio Timestamp CRC FA 67 306 Defl N 24 890 63 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 35c0301b ba 254 087 Defl N 67 352 74 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 6efaaffc bashref html 669 157 Defl N 115 423 83 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 11cbad55 O files selected 3 files 967 3 KB Figure 4 7 Ark File Archive Preview Once you have opened an archive perform various actions The Action menu offers options such as Add File Add Directory Delete Extract View Edit With and Open With 152 4 4 Important Utilities To create a new archive select File New Enter the name of the new archive in the dialog that opens If you enter a file extension an archive with the speci fied format is generated If you omit the extension zip is used as the default After you have entered
183. aracters lines or entire paragraphs Release the button at the end of the desired selection While selected text is displayed in inverted colors Open a context menu by right clicking the selection Use the context menu to change the font the font style and other text properties The Navigator displays information about the contents of a document It also enables you to quickly jump to the different elements included For example use the Navigator to get a quick overview of all the chapters or to see a list of the images included in the document Figure 6 4 shows the Navigator in action The elements listed in the Navigator vary according to the document loaded in Writer Open the Navigator by selecting Edit gt Navigator EJ Text frame Graphics OLE objects flntitled active Figure 6 4 The Navigator in Writer 6 6 4 Working with the Stylist The Stylist can help you format text in a number of ways It can be opened or closed at any time by toggling Format Stylist or by pressing F11 The dia log window of the Stylist is shown in Figure 6 5 on the next page If you set the drop down list at the lower edge of the Stylist to Automatic OpenOffice org tries to offer a selection of styles adapted to the task at hand SuSE Linux User Guide ejns eoyo 610 eoyouedo eu 179 180 maoog p E E Complimentary close D i First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1
184. ard You can place your public key here before you continue to process it Export Public Key To File If you prefer to distribute your key as a file on a data medium instead of sending it by e mail click this option confirm or change the file path and name and click OK To make your public key available to a wide audience export it to one of the key servers on the Internet For more information refer to Section The Key Server Dialog on the next page 14 1 3 Importing Keys If you receive a key in a file for example as an e mail attachment integrate it in your key ring with the feature Import Key and use it for encrypted commu nication with the sender The procedure is similar to the procedure for exporting keys described above 14 1 4 Signing Keys Like any other files keys can also be signed for the purpose of guaranteeing the authenticity and integrity If you are absolutely sure the imported key truly belongs to the individual specified as the owner express your trust in the au thenticity of the key by means of your signature Note Encrypted communication is only secure to the extent that you can pos itively associate public keys in circulation with the specified user By cross checking and signing these keys you contribute to the establish ment of a web of trust Note Select the key to sign in the key list Select Keys Sign Key In the following dialog designate the secret key
185. ard was detected correctly when the system was booted the name of the card appears here Devices that were not recognized are listed as Other not detected The lower part of the screen lists configured devices including the network type and the address You can configure new network cards or modify the configuration of a configured device SuSE Linux User Guide 89 Manual Configuration of the Network Card Make the following basic settings to configure a network card that was not rec ognized Network Interface Specify the network type and the device number Support for Wireless Connections If you are located in a wireless LAN and your network card supports this connection type use Wireless Device to access the Wireless settings dialog in which to configure the operating mode network name ESSID network ID NWID encryption key and nickname Press OK to complete the configuration of your card Kernel Module and Selection of the Network Card If your network card is a PCMCIA or USB device activate the respective check boxes and exit the dialog with Next If not select the network card model with Select from list YaST automatically selects a suitable kernel module Exit this dialog with Next Here set up your networking device The values will be written into etc modules conf Manual network card configuration Options for the module should be written in the format op
186. arge hard disk a swap partition between 128 and 256 MB and the rest for Tip Partitioning with YaST When you select the partitioning item in the suggestion window for the first time YOST displays a dialog listing the partition settings as currently proposed Accept these current settings without change or change them before continu ing Alternatively discard all the settings and start over from scratch e Er YaST has checked your hard disks and Suggested Partitioning proposes the displayed partition setup for your hard drive Format partition dev sdb7 6 3 GB for with reiser Format partition dev sdb6 258 8 MB for swap Format partition dev sdb5 23 5 MB for boot with ext2 Set mount point of dev sdat to windows C You can continue with this proposal based on YaST s ideas Activate the second radio button in this case It YaST s suggestion does not fit your intentions create your own partition setup starting with the partitions as currently present on the disks Activate the third radio button in this case This is also the option to choose for advanced options like RAID and LVM Choose 34 Accept proposal as is Base partition setup on this proposal Create custom partition setup Figure 2 6 Editing the Partitioning Setup Nothing in the partitioning setup is changed if you select Accept Suggested Partitioning Setu
187. arted programs or executable files run as processes often re ferred to as tasks Processes can be controlled by commands like top en tered in the shell processor The processor is the brain of every computer working through and per forming commands given by a user or a program in machine language The processor has control over the entire system and is responsible for the actual performance of the computer prompt See ve command line protocol Standard specifically defined for regulating communication for hardware software or networks There is a multitude of these standards The most common examples are ve HTTP and FTP proxy Most commonly used cache implemented by Internet providers that stores frequently requested contents in a database to allow other machines requesting those pages to load them directly from it This process not only reduces the time it takes to download this information but also conserves the available bandwidth RAM Random Access Memory See ve main memory ReiserFS A file system that logs its changes to a journal Compared to Ext2 this features allows a file system to be restored very speedily ReiserFS is opti mized for small files root The user undertaking the configuration and maintenance of a complex computer system such as a network This system administrator is usually the only person who has access to all parts of the system root permis sions root directory The base dir
188. arting from the bottom toward the top of the list starting from the last partition of a hard disk toward the first For example if you have three partitions you cannot use the second exclusively for Linux and retain the third and first for other operating systems 2 5 Installation Suggestion Creating a Partition 1 Select New If several hard disks are connected a selection dialog ap pears in which to select a hard disk for the new partition Then specify the partition type primary or extended Create up to four primary parti tions or up to three primary partitions and one extended partition Within the extended partition you can create several logical partitions see Sec tion Partition Types on page 20 2 Select the file system to use to format the partition and a mount point if necessary YaST suggests a mount point for each partition created Details of the parameters are provided in the next section 3 Select OK to apply your changes The new partition is then listed in the partition table If you click Next the cur rent values are adopted and you are returned to the suggestion screen Partitioning Parameters If you create a new partition or modify an existing partition various parameters can be set in the partitioning tool For new partitions suitable parameters are set by YaST and usually do not require any modification To perform manual settings proceed as follows 1 Select the partition 2
189. ast Caution Selecting a profile overwrites the current layout settings Caution ad 15 4 Using KMail When KMail is started the main window is opened By default the main win dow consists of the following three sections 15 4 Using KMail Mi Local Folders sent mail KMail mm File Edit View Go Folder Message Tools Settings Help 34 Ow cao x QUE Folder Unread Total Subject Receiver Local Folde i Qinbox 1 1 M outbox eis trash drafts IIN Do you have ice cream for me 9 From tux lt tux localhost gt H To tux localhost ir Date Today 11 05 39 am M L prefer pistachios ice cream Do you have some for me M Cheers s 5 Geeko a g Ue 1 message 0 unread Figure 15 1 Main Window of KMail after Start Up Folder Area left This section contains a list of your mail folders mail boxes indicating the total number of messages and how many are still unread To select a folder simply click it The messages it contains appear in the top right frame The number of messages is also displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the application window Header Area right The subject sender and time of reception of received mes sages are listed in this area Click a message to select it and display it in the message window Sort the messages by clicking one of the columns subject sender date etc Message Area below The
190. ata User Here you can select the system user for whom you want to activate the fax functionality Incoming fax messages and status reports will be sent to this user account SuSE Linux User Guide 271 272 The fax system for one Fax Machine Configuration or more users can be set up in this dialog Each user must have at least one unique fax number configured Refer to the telecommunication chapter in the manuals for further details User Table Fax Numbers MSN Action StationID Headline Prefix Only for users behind a PBX Please enter the prefix number for getting a public line This number will be dialed bef destination number When adding or editing a user a dialog will be Prefix shown with the following 0 fields User The system user this fax account belongs ta Figure 17 1 YaST Module for the Configuration of the Fax Function Fax Numbers Phone numbers allocated to the user for incoming fax mes sages are entered in this field Multiple phone numbers can be separated by commas All faxes sent to these numbers will be forwarded to the user by e mail Leave this field empty if you only want the user to be able to send fax messages Outgoing MSN Enter the phone number used for sending fax messages If this entry is missing the first phone number from the fax numbers field will automatically be used StationID For id
191. ate the check box Apply colors to non KDE applications Window Decorations Select a decoration style for your application windows from the list under the General tab Click Apply to test the selected style To position or move indi vidual elements of the title bar activate the check box Use custom titlebar but ton positions and rearrange the elements under the Buttons tab If additional configuration options are available for the selected style access these under the Configure tab Background Determine a background for your desktop By default your modifications are applied to all virtual desktops To configure the backgrounds separately for the individual virtual desktops deactivate the Common Background check box The effect of your configuration can be seen in the preview at the top right of the dialog window The background colors can be selected under the Background tab To modify the color components click the color bar next to Color 1 or Color 2 to open a color editor Here you can change the color settings as desired or use the pipette to adopt a color from any desktop element or a loaded image or web page Se lect special gradient effects under Mode To use an image as a background for one or several backgrounds activate Sin gle Wallpaper Then select the scaling mode or the position of the wallpaper on your desktop and designate a suitable wallpaper with the drop
192. atic Address Configuration If you have a static IP address activate the re spective check box Enter the IP address and the correct subnet mask for your network The preset value for the subnet mask should meet the re quirements of a typical home network UOILOINBYUOD ISOA Exit this dialog with Next or configure the host name name server and rout ing Refer to Sections Host Name and DNS on page 99 and Routing on page 101 Cable Modem In some countries US Austria Internet access via cable modems has become relatively widespread The cable subscriber gets a modem like device from the ISP which is connected to the TV cable network on one side and to the com puter on the other using a 10BaseT twisted pair cable and a network card As far as the computer is concerned this is basically a permanent network link with a static IP address Following your provider s specification select either Automatic Address Setup with DHCP or Static Address Configuration for the configuration of your network card Most providers today use DHCP A static IP address is gener ally included in a provider s business package In this case the provider should have assigned a static IP address Regarding the setup and configuration of cable modems refer to the Support Database article available online at http sdb suse de en sdb html cmodem8 html 3 5 4 Modem In the YaST Control Center the modem configuration is avail
193. aving of calendar This also saves all changes automatically at a user definable interval To be prompted before any items are deleted enable Confirm deletes 9 1 Starting KOrganizer Under Time amp Date customize the defaults for working hours and appoint ments define the default alarm time and set your time zone KOrganizer switches between winter and daylight saving time automatically Under Fonts set your preferred font type and size for the different text fields of the program Fonts can be selected for the time bar the month view and un der Agenda view for the day view week view and work week view Under Colors set the colors that should be used to highlight events to do items and other elements For instance define that to do items due on the cur rent day should be dark red and that overdue to do items should be light red The other items of the preferences dialog allow customization of the various views and the program s group features Under Group Scheduling provide additional e mail addresses which is useful if you are registered for a certain event under a different address Preferences KOrganizer DY gt Personal Personal iL Use email settings from Control Center e Full name Anonymous Time amp Date Email address nobody nowhere BG iL Send copy to owner when mailing events Fonts Auto Save 9 O Enable automatic s
194. aving of calendar a Save interval in minutes 10 Colors iXj Confirm deletes r Mail Client Views KMail ail a e a Sendmail Group Scheduling a iL Export to HTML with every save a Group Automation Defaults K L Apply 2 Cancel Figure 9 2 Configuring KOrganizer 9 3 Toolbars The toolbars of KOrganizer can be changed in a number of ways For instance add buttons change the size and position of the toolbars and enable text labels Right clicking a toolbar opens a menu with various items to change the toolbar SuSE Linux User Guide J9SZUDBIOA UM Bulnpeyos 205 206 properties For instance instead of having a toolbar at the top or bottom it can be displayed at the left or right with the buttons arranged vertically Enabling the text labels of the buttons may make it easier for you to work with the pro gram You can also change the size of the button icons for improved visibility Access a dialog for configuring the toolbars from the context menu via Config ure Toolbars item or by selecting Settings gt Configure Toolbars from the main menu In this dialog add a button to a toolbar by selecting the cor responding action in the left hand list then clicking the button with the right arrow to move it over to the right hand list Change the button order using the up and down arrows in the dialog To drag a toolbar to another position use the handle
195. ay It contains the following four menus File Select File gt Export to save a list of all installed packages in a text file This is recommended if you want to replicate a specific installation scope at a later date or on another system A file generated in this way can be imported with Import and generates the same package selection as was saved In both cases define the location of the file or accept the sugges tion To exit the package manager without saving changes to the package se lection click Exit Discard Changes To save your changes select Quit Save Changes In this case all changes are applied and the program is terminated Package The items in the Package menu always refer to the package currently displayed in the individual package window Although all status flags are displayed you can only select those possible for the current package Use the check boxes to determine whether to install the sources of the pack age The item All in This List opens a submenu listing all package sta tus flags However these do not merely affect the current package but all packages in this list Extras The Extras menu offers options for handling package dependencies and conflicts If you have already manually selected packages for installa tion click Show Automatic Package Changes to view the list of packages that the package manager automatically selected to resolve dependencies
196. between MIDI ports specify the port address of the program after the program name For example assign port number 128 0 to the first program and 129 0 to the second The ports of the programs are also displayed by kaconnect As vkeybd was executed without the addr parameter the connection between the program port and the WaveTable port or the external MIDI port can now be established manually To do this select the respective ports and click connect To use the command line tool aconnect enter aconnect 128 0 73 0 or the respective ports to establish a unidirectional connection between the sender port 128 0 and the receiver port 73 0 You can now establish a connection between the MIDI port of the keyboard and the MIDI port of the ALSA sequencer viewer If you modify keyboard settings such as the panning or the pitch wheel which must first be activated under View these changes are promptly reflected in aseqview List the ports available for sending and receiving as well as their con nection status with aconnect iloraconnect ol Terminate con nections established with aconnect with the option d for exam ple aconnect d 128 0 129 0 To terminate all connections enter aconnect x Get information about other options in the man page for SuSE Linux User Guide xnur ui Punos 301 aconnect man aconnect Tip aseqnet can be used to establish MIDI connections over a network Tip
197. burning an audio CD is not very different from the dialog for burning a data CD However the option Disc at once and the Track at once mode bear greater importance The Track at once mode inserts an intermission of two seconds after each track 20 4 Copying a CD Select Copy CD from the toolbar In the following dialog specify the settings for the reading and writing device as shown in Figure 20 3 on the next page The options introduced above are also available here An additional function enables the creation of several copies of the CD 20 5 Writing ISO Images If you already have an ISO image go to Tools gt Write ISO Image A window will open enabling you to enter the location of the Image to Write K3b will 20 4 Copying a CD Burning cD text Advanced r Burning Device Device Burning speed a r Options Simulate Writing X Writing on the fly suseftoms kde share apps k b templ r K DiscAtOnce Defaults User Defaults Save User Defaults Figure 20 3 K3b Copying a CD calculate a check sum and display it in MD5 Sum If the ISO file was down loaded from the Internet this sum shows if the download was successful Use the Options and Advanced tabs to set your preferences To burn the CD click Write 20 6 For More Information Apart from the two main functions described above K3b offers other functions such a
198. c tion Language Selection on page 17 If you want to change this setting you can do this here Furthermore advanced users can use the Details button to set the language for the user root The drop down menu offers three options ctype The value of the variable LC CTYPE in the file etc sysconfig language is adopted for the user root This sets the localization for language specific function calls SuSE Linux User Guide UO D OISU peugeqr esf 34 Select the appropriate time zone Choose the country or region where you are located Specify whether the hardware clock of your machine is set to local time or UTC Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed such as Microsoft Windows use local time Machines that have only Linux installed should be set to Universal Time Coordinated UTC If you are unsure use the default values already selected Clock and Time Zone Configuration Begion Time Zone Europe Canada Central and South America Asia Australia Africa Pacific Global Etc l Change Time or Date j Alaska Aleutian Arizona Central Eastern East Indiana Hawaii Indiana Starke Michigan Mountain Samoa Hardware clock set to ure 11 44 16 05 09 2003 Cancel Accept Lae Figure 2 12 Selecting the Time Zone yes The user root has the same language settings as the local user no The language settings for the user root are not
199. ca ci 369 FOULlng carito a i e 101 runlevels default mira iii 117 o A A renean 116 117 Switching oaceae ainia 117 S Samba ui qe la 101 A eme S ee vere 100 a a A 72 SaX2 eqmultihead civic dada acia 78 scanning character recognition 334 configuring sss 83 Kooka isses 329 334 troubleshooting 84 scheduling see KOrganizer SCPM arco 116 screenshots ssss see KSnapshot SDB ies 395 security configuring 06 103 108 firewall 4 2 rere a exer enei 107 A s nup RU EUR 353 shells Jioc Los desees serere Mente 359 A aco eios det apt beet 354 commands 64 368 375 A ere ee t Hx 358 DIpesS cese nx datorii Fame 359 Wild cards ce iere nes 358 shortcuts advantages of oooccccccccoom m 388 software ELI M installing removing sound SuSE Linux User Guide 419 420 alsamixer sssssssss 286 configuring in YaST 85 gamix GNOME Mixer ss 286 SMIXELS 22 iran Cra a aid 284 NoteEdit serrara eronneen 309 A nenei 289 290 GNOME K8ed AA s XMMS iii p ernreserenr SQ AMIN suse e ese ax METRE ME The Mixer KMix ssssss 286 WorkMan evoca he tas 290 sound fonts YaST installation 86 support request sssseeseeeee 118 SuS
200. cal sbin share Gin Mail ete Be Gin H5 Guan Gin ib ua Figure 24 1 Excerpt from a Standard Directory Tree root directory starting point of the directory tree home private directories of users dev device files that represent hardware components etc important files for system configuration etc init d boot scripts usr bin generally accessible programs bin programs needed early in the boot process usr sbin programs reserved for the system administrator SuSE Linux User Guide IOUS SUL ULM BUOM 355 356 sbin programs reserved for the system administrator and needed for boot ing usr include header files for the C compiler usr include g header files for the C compiler usr share doc various documentation files usr share man system manual pages man pages usr src source code of system software usr src linux kernel source code tmp var tmp temporary files usr all application programs var configuration files e g those linked from usr var log system log files var adm system administration data lib shared libraries for dynamically linked programs proc process file system usr local local distribution independent extensions opt optional software larger add on program packages such as KDE GNOME Netscape 24 2 3 Bash Functions There are two important functions of the shell that can make your work a lot easier The history function
201. cally as they were extracted from the provider data If you are located in a local network you might receive your host name via DHCP in which case you should not modify the name 3 6 2 NFS Client and NFS Server You need these two tools only if you are located in a network In this case you have the possibility to operate a file server that can be accessed by members of your network On this file server you can make programs files or storage space available for users Use the NFS Server module to set up your computer as an NFS server and to determine the directories to export for use by the net work users The NFS server should be set up by an expert To configure an NFS server refer to the brief instructions in the Administration Guide under Linux in the Network NFS Subsequently any user with the needed permissions can mount these direc tories in his own file tree The easiest way to do this is by means of the NFS SuSE Linux User Guide 99 100 Client module in which the user merely needs to enter the host name of the computer acting as NFS server and the mount point on his computer To do this select Add in the first dialog and enter the needed data See Figure 3 22 Host name of the NFS server server mylan de Choose Remote filesystem Mountpoint local homedirs Select limyhome Browse Options defaults Cancel Help Figure 3 22 Configuration of NFS Clients 3 6 3 Config
202. ccounts The account from which to send e mail can be selected when composing a message To edit a current account select the account in Settings gt Mail Accounts and click Edit To add a new account click Add The configuration assistant described in Section Starting Evolution on page 258 opens To delete an account select it and click Delete To make an account the default account for sending e mail select the desired ac count then press Default To disable fetching e mail from an account select the account then click Disable A disabled account can still be used as the address for sending but that account is not checked for incoming e mail If necessary reactivate the account with Enable 16 4 2 Mail Preferences Use Mail Preferences to select or disable the quote highlight color or how long after opening a message is marked as read Also make settings regarding how images in HTML mail messages are handled 16 4 3 Creating Messages To compose a new message click New Mail Message Replying to or for warding a message opens the same message editor Next to From select from which account to send the message In the recipient fields enter an e mail ad dress or part of a name or address in your address book If Evolution can match what you enter to something in the address book a selection list is displayed Click the desired contact or complete your input if none
203. ces This dialog provides access to settings controlling both appearance and functionality Galeon features built in password management and cookie controls It also has options that specify the web sites from which images may be downloaded All these options can be accessed through a single dialog via Tools gt Cookies gt View Cookies 12 5 For More Information For more information about Galeon see http galeon sourceforge net The GNOME home page http www gnome org can also be helpful SuSE Linux User Guide UO9J D2 smog JSM SUL 225 The Mozilla Web Browser Mozilla is a web browser developed as an Open Source program with the aim of providing an Internet application that is fast compliant with standards and portable across different computing platforms In addition to the basic browser Mozilla includes a number of extra components such as a mail component and a web page design component This chapter focuses on the web browser compo nent 13 1 The Initial Browser WindoW 228 122 Working with Tabs iam homo ms 231 13 3 Preferences oa ua opo uxo oe RUE S ox ee RR Rex XL 231 JOSMOIG geM DIIZON SUL 228 13 1 The Initial Browser Window In its default configuration the window presented by the browser includes these elements the actual document window occupying the majority of the window that is used to display web pages although it may be empty at th
204. check the documenta tion of your graphics card Colors and Resolutions Here three tabs Colors Resolution and Expert are available Colors Depending on the hardware used select a color depth of 16 256 32768 65536 or 16 7 million colors 4 8 15 16 or 24 bit For a rea sonable display quality set at least 256 colors SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 75 Resolution When the hardware is detected the resolution is queried Therefore the module usually only offers resolution and color depth com binations that your hardware can display correctly This keeps the danger of damaging your hardware with wrong settings very low in SuSE Linux If you change the resolution manually consult the documentation of your hardware to make sure the value set can be displayed Colors Resolution Expert Select resolutions O 1600x1200 Dl 1600x1024 D 1600x1000 O 1400x1050 DO 1280x1024 E El 1152x864 i E 1024x768 El 800x600 El 640x480 Graphics engine starts with resolution 1280x960 Figure 3 12 Configuring the Resolution Expert In addition to the resolutions offered in the previous tab this tab enables you to add your own resolutions which will subsequently be included for selection in the tab Virtual Resolution Every desktop has a certain resolution that is displayed over the full screen of the monitor Additional
205. chive types and sharing your desktop with other users 4 4 1 Klnternet the Door to the WWW In order to be able to surf the Internet or send and receive e mail messages you have to connect a modem or an ISDN or Ethernet card to your machine and con figure it This can be done with the help of the system assistant YaST As soon as the respective device has been configured correctly you can control the Internet dial up with KInternet Upon start up KDE will load KInternet the program will check whether an In ternet connection can be established If this is possible the application icon will SuSE Linux User Guide doptseg JG eui 145 146 automatically appear as a plug icon in the right part of the KDE panel Here is an overview of the icons and their meanings x Currently there is no connection to the Internet Pd The connection is just being established or terminated Ss The connection has been established i Data are transmitted to or from the Internet p An error has occurred If a connection has already been configured with YasT you can use View Log to identify the reason for the error The menu can be accessed by clicking the KInternet icon with the right mouse button S D The connection is not yet active but will be established as soon as a re quest is made Click the KInternet with the right mouse button to access a menu for configur ing KInternet To configure your access select Settings
206. cking Next The dialog consists of four pages The main page shows the available chart types The types offered include line area column and bar charts To the left the page displays a preview of your data according to the type selected The most suitable type for our example is the line chart Click Next to proceed to a page in which to choose from different variants of line charts with or with out symbols stacked percent cubic spline and so on For the current example select Symbols If you enable the Show text elements in preview option the column headers January February etc are displayed on the X axis and the numerical values on the Y axis Also a chart legend is added on the right hand side On the next page give the chart as well as its X axis and Y axis a title In this case use Monthly Expenses as a chart title and Euro on the Y axis The X axis title is disabled by default Finally after clicking Create the chart is inserted into your spreadsheet Figure 6 10 on the following page shows the sample chart in its final form 6 7 4 Importing Spreadsheet Tables There is often a need to import data available as a table so it can be presented as a spreadsheet In Calc there are two ways to achieve this SuSE Linux User Guide ejns eoyo 610 eoyouedo eu 185 Overview of expenses Telephone 5005 Gas d v Sum 400 300 a 200 100 0 January Feb
207. configuration dialog can be started with Configure Toolbars To the right the toolbar features the Konqueror icon which is animated while a directory or web page is loaded 4 3 3 The Location Bar The location bar is preceded by a black symbol with a white X If you click this icon the contents of the line are deleted allowing entry of a new location Valid locations can be path specifications like the one that appears when the home directory is displayed or web page URLs After entering an address press or click Go to the right of the input line Access directories or web pages visited recently via the black arrow to the right of the location bar This function saves some typing if you need to access certain contents repeatedly For even more convenience create a bookmark 4 3 4 The Main Window The main window displays the content of the selected directory If you click an icon the respective file is displayed in Konqueror or loaded into the respective application for further processing If you click an RPM package the description is displayed Install the package with Install package with YaST 4 3 Konqueror as a File Manager If you right click an icon a menu opens The kind of menu displayed depends on the file type and offers common actions such as Cut Copy Copy Paste and Delete Furthermore you can use Open with to select applications from a list of suitable programs Files
208. contact card to your address book 16 7 Public Address Books in Evolution By means of the LDAP protocol Evolution can access public address books such as those used by SuSE Linux Openexchange Server or Microsoft Exchange 16 6 Contacts Evolution offers full access to these address books it can read them and add new entries Accordingly if you use SuSE Linux in a large network e g in your company do not hesitate to make use of this possibility M Note Some specific information about your network is required for configur ing LDAP access Obtain this information from the responsible system administrator Note To configure access to an LDAP server from your workstation select Tools gt Settings gt Directory Servers All previously configured LDAP accesses are listed in the overview Click Add to add a new LDAP access A configuration assistant starts helping configure the LDAP access in a few steps Exit the wel come screen of the assistant with Next and specify the following settings in the dialogs Server Information Enter the server name and the login method for the LDAP server The default method is anonymous access Connecting to the Server Enter the port number and the security protocols SSL or TLS to use Searching the Directory Enter the search base the search range the search duration and possibly a limitation of the displayed hits Display Name In this last st
209. cordings the AC97 Capture control is used to control the level of the AC97 recording sources Furthermore Wave and Music can be selected as recording source This internal loopback capture can be activatedin the AC97 standard by selecting the Mix control as record ing source 18 2 7 The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 Digital Mixer PCM Out 1 PCM Out 2 PCM Out 3 PCM Out 4 PCM Out 5 PCM Out 6 Let Right Let Right Let Right Let Right Let Right Let Right Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Left Right 3 Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Reset Peaks A Figure 18 3 Monitor and Digital Mixer of envy24control envy24control is a mixer application for sound cards using the Envy24 ice1712 chip Start this mixer with SuSE gt Multimedia gt Sound or from the com mand line with envy24control amp The flexibility of the Envy24 chip can re sult in varying functionalities in different sound cards The latest details on this sound chip are available in usr share doc packages alsa alsa tools envy24control SuSE Linux User Guide 287 Monitor and Patchbay of envy24control The Monitor Mixer of envy24control shows the signal levels that can be mixed digitally in the sound card The signals designated as PCM Out are generated by applications that send PCM data
210. create a new document from a template Customize the Quickstarter settings by selecting Configure OpenOffice org Quickstarter Once enabled the Quickstarter is started automatically each time you log in to your desktop To stop this from happening in the future click Quit in the Quickstarter menu shown in Figure 6 1 6 2 Overview of the Application Modules OpenOffice org comprises several application modules subprograms which are designed to interact with each other 6 1 The Quickstarter Writer Powerful word processor application Calc Spreadsheet application that includes a chart utility Draw Drawing application for creating vector graphics Math Application for generating mathematical formulas Impress Application for creating presentations Table 6 1 The OpenOffice org Application Modules The discussion in this chapter is focused on Writer and Calc The other modules are only explained briefly A full description of each module is available in the online help also see Section Getting Help on this page 6 3 Getting Help Get help for OpenOffice org at any time from the Help menu Depending on your selection the depth and type of help provided varies To get thor oughly acquainted with a topic select Help gt Contents The help system provides information about each of the modules of OpenOffice org Writer Calc Impress etc If you find this information too broad or overwhelming t
211. ctions are available in Finishing the Installation on page 34 First set a password for the system administrator user root This special user is always configured by YasT and is needed for system maintenance tasks SuSE Linux User Guide 9 10 SuSE Installation Settings p gt Language Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below Selecti lection Mode Ie New installation Installation Keyboard layout Seti net e English US Mouse Perform PS 2 mouse Aux port Installation Partitioning Format partition dev sdb7 6 3 GB for with reiser Format partition dev sdb6 258 8 MB for swap Format partition dev sdb5 23 5 MB for boot with ext2 Set mount point of dev sdat to windows C Software Default system Help amp Support Documentation KDE Desktop Environment Office Applications Graphical Base System A Booting A N Y Change v H Help Abort Installation Figure 1 1 Suggestion Screen Caution Remember the root password as you can only modify the system or in stall programs using the root identity Caution If a network card or other communication hardware such as a modem or ISDN card is found during the installation these can now be configured and a con nection can be established with the Internet or a local network LAN This en ables use of various services during the remaining part of the p
212. d a key the file will be encrypted without any further messages In the file manager encrypted files are characterized by the suffix asc and the pad lock icon These files can be decrypted by clicking the file icon dragging it to the KGpg symbol in the panel and dropping it there Then select whether the file should be decrypted and saved or displayed in the editor If you select De crypt and Save KGpg prompts for the password of your secret key and saves the decrypted file in the same directory as the encrypted file 14 3 3 The KGpg Editor Instead of creating contents for encryption in an external editor then encrypting the respective file with one of the methods described above you can use the integrated editor of KGpg to create the file Open the editor context menu Open Editor enter the desired text and click Encrypt Then select the key to use and complete the encryption procedure To decrypt files use Decrypt and enter the password associated with the key Generating and checking signatures is just as easy as encrypting directly from the editor Go to Signature Generate Signature and select the file to sign from the file dialog Then designate the secret key to use and enter the associ ated password KGpg informs you about the successful generation of the signa ture Files can also be signed from the editor by simply clicking Sign verify To check a signed file go to Signature Verify
213. d be able to place your feet completely on the floor and your thighs and lower legs should also be at right angles Gymnastic balls and balancing chairs offer an alternative to con ventional seating arrangements Unfortunately a good chair constructed according to ergonomic criteria is rela tively expensive but the investment in your health is worth it Important features of a good chair include a backrest reaching to the shoulder blades and with an adjustable kinetic resistance support for the lumbar spinal column a seat that is also adjustable and can be tilted forwards or backwards automatic regulation of backrest and seat to retain an ideal angle springs that softly cushion the weight when sitting down stability provided with the help of at least five foot legs with rollers that are restrained when you stand adjustable height of the seat according to standards 42 to 53 cm and backrest individual adjustment of arm rests if there are any luxury a footrest if your feet do not reach the floor SuSE Linux User Guide SOOI AGHIOM SUL ui soiuouo8173 381 382 25 1 3 Good Lighting for Productive Work Generally speaking workplace lighting does not come close to the intensity of light outdoors This difference is unnoticed because the human faculty of per ception is very flexible The influence of lighting conditions on our own effi ciency is often underestimated If the light is too bright you canno
214. d disk that not only can be started by Linux but by other operating systems as well link A link is a pointer to a file just as widely used in the Internet as in the Linux file system In Linux there is a distinction made between hard and symbolic links While hard links refer to the exact position in the file system the symbolic link only points to the respective name Linux High performance UNIX like operating system core distributed freely un der the GPL x GNU The name is an acronym Linus uniX and refers to its creator Linus Torvalds Although the name in a strict sense only refers to the kernel itself the popular understanding of the term Linux usually entails the entire system login Authentication of a user by user name and password to gain access to a computer system or network logout The procedure of closing down an interactive Linux session and getting back to the login prompt where you enter your user name and pass word main memory Physical memory of limited capacity that can be accessed rather quickly This is often referred to as RAM Random Access Memory man pages Traditional documentation for Unix systems which can be read using the command man MBR master boot record The first physical sector of the hard disk from which the content is loaded to the main memory and executed by the BIOS This code then loads either the operating system from a hard disk partition or
215. d first If you have special wishes in connection with the programs to install the partitioning of your hard disk or other features read the chapter about the custom installation YaST addition allyfacilitates the configuration and administration of your hardware Internet access and system without any irritating reboots Get to know the graphical desktop environments KDE and GNOME and learn how to adapt them to your personal preferences The following sections in troduce some very useful and interesting programs from the large range of available applications including office programs such as OpenOffice org web browsers file managers scanning tools and image editing tools Additionally find information on the SuSE help system and the available infor mation sources containing further documentation Also included are a list of fre quently asked questions about SuSE Linux and a glossary of the most important terms from the world of computers and Linux 0 1 Changesin the User Guide The documentation of the previous version SuSE Linux 8 2 has been modified as follows The instructions for the installation and configuration with YaST have been updated Due to new features the following chapters have undergone substantial editing The KDE desktop everything about KDE The GNOME desktop everything about GNOME OpenOffice org the complete office suite for Linux A new version of the comfortable scanning application Koo
216. d of the Gravis instrument patches modify the file usr share timidity timidity cfg For example to use the Vintage Dreams sound font with timidity create a timidity cfg consisting of a single line soundfont usr share sounds sf2 Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 More information about this subject is available in usr share doc packages timidity C README sf Xnur ui punog 18 10 3 Starting timidity with the Graphical Interface There are few programs that offer as many program interfaces as timidity For an overview enter man timidity The Athena Widget Interface is a mature interface that is started with usr bin timidity iatv amp Note You should not be in the directory usr share timidity when you start timidity Note 18 10 4 The ALSA Server Mode of timidity To start timidity in the ALSA server mode enter usr bin timidity iA B2 8 Os amp A message such as Opening sequencer port 128 0 128 1 willbe displayed showing the MIDI port by means of which the synthesizer can be addressed e g with vkeybd addr 128 0 To terminate timidity enter killall timidity to kill all timidity processes 18 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor AlsaModularsynth package a1samodular is a digital replica of an analog modular synthesizer The program has a JACK interface and can load all kinds of LADSPA effect plug ins Thus it can also be used as a versatile effect proces sor
217. d select Input devices gt Graphics tablet 2 Click Add select the vendor from the following dialog and add a graphics tablet from the selection list 3 Mark the check boxes to the right if you have connected a pen or eraser 4 If your tablet is connected to the serial port verify the port dev ttySO refers to the first serial port dev ttyS1 refers to the sec ond Additional ports use similar notation 5 Save the configuration by clicking Finish AccessX If you do not use a mouse on your computer start SaX2 and activate AccessX The mouse pointer can now be controlled with the keys on the number pad as follows Button 1 corresponds to the key This key activates the left mouse button Button 2 corresponds to the key X This key activates the middle mouse button Button 3 corresponds to the key This key activates the right mouse button A Click is emulated with the key 5 This key equals a click of the previously activated mouse button If no mouse button was activated the left mouse button is used Double Click equals the key This key works like the key 5 except that it invokes a double click Button Lock equals the key 0 This works like the key 5 except that it keeps the button pressed Button Release equals the key Del This key works like a mouse click invoked by the key 3 4 Hardware Arrow up and left works like the key 7 The mouse pointer moves up and l
218. d the end of a document with Home and End End this viewing mode by pressing 9 Learn more about the man command itself with man There are many more commands than listed in this chapter For information about other commands or more detailed information we recommend the O Reilly publication Linux in a Nutshell In the following overview the individ ual command elements are written in different typefaces The actual command is always printed as command Without this nothing can function Options without which the respective program cannot function are printed in italics Further details like file names which must be passed to a command for correct functioning are written in the Courier font Specifications or parameters that are not required are placed in brackets Adjust possible specifications to your needs It makes no sense to write ls file s ifno file named file s actually exists You can usually com bine several parameters for example by writing 1s la instead of 1s 1 a 24 4 1 File Commands File Administration ls option s file s Ifyou run 1s without any additional param eters the program will list the contents of the current directory in short form 1 detailed list 24 4 Important Linux Commands a displays hidden files cp option s sourcefile targetfile Copies sourcefile totargetfile i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing target file is overwritten
219. d the photographs and save them in the selected directory More information about Digikam is available in theDigikam help Help Digikam Handbook Information is also available on the Internet at http digikam sourceforge net 21 6 For More Information For more information about using digital cameras with Linux refer to the fol lowing web sites http www gphoto org Information about gPhoto gPhoto2 and gPhoto2 compatible GUIs a http www thekompany com projects gphoto Information about Kamera a KDE front end for gPhoto2 SuSE Linux User Guide xnur PUD SOIOLUDD OLIBIG 327 a http www stud uni karlsruhe de urc8 GnoCam Informa tion about GnoCam 328 21 6 For More Information Kooka A Scanning Application Kooka is a KDE application for scanning This chapter explains the user inter face and the functionality of the application 221 TheKookaWindow 330 22 2 Ihe PREVIEW uuo vested ete y oy Ronde x ded A 330 22 9 The Final Scan 22 2499 x cA 330 224 The Menus dd xk e E i Rye exea 331 22 3 THE GAE ee doe dene here io eee us 333 22 6 Optical Character Recognition 334 uouooiddw Buluuoos v D 00y 330 22 1 The Kooka Window Start Kooka from the main menu or enter the command kooka When started Kooka opens a three frame window with a menu bar to the upper left and a toolbar directly below it All windows can be freely readjusted or rearr
220. dated packages from unnecessarily occupying hard disk space 3 3 Software Use Accept to perform an update with the values displayed Change the values by clicking on the respective headline or by using the Change menu Your hard disk has not been modified in any way so you can still safely abort Installation Settings Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below Update Options Update to SuSE Linux 8 2 99 Update Based on Selection Default system Delete Old Packages Packages Affected Packages 1 Backup Create Backup of Modified Files Create Backup of etc sysconfig Directory Language English US Keyboard layout English US Change w Back Abort Next Figure 3 6 Suggestion Dialog for Updates Packages Click Packages to start the package manager and select or deselect individual packages for update Any package conflicts should be resolved with the consis tency check The use of the package manager is covered in detail in Section In stalling and Removing Software on page 51 Backup During the update the configuration files of some packages may be replaced by those of the new version As you may have modified some of the files in your current system the package manager normally makes backup copies of the re placed files With this dialog determine the scope of these backups Caution This backup does not include the software
221. define the re sources If you activate Share homes the home directories of the users appear as Windows shares on the clients If you activate Share printers you can use Select to share individual printers 3 6 Network Services 3 6 4 Configuration of Samba Clients Configure a Samba client to access resources files or printers on the Samba server In the Samba Workgroup dialog enter the domain or workgroup Use Browse to display all available groups and domains and select one of them with a mouse click If you activate Also Use SMB Information for Linux Au thentication user authentication is conducted via the Samba server After speci fying all settings click Finish to complete the configuration 3 6 5 NTP Client NTP Network Time Protocol is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of net work hosts In the respective YOST module select a type with Add Several op tions are then displayed Server and Radio clock are the most frequently used options Radio clock requires special hardware UOILOINBYUOD ISOA If you select Server enter the address of an NTP server when prompted Nor mally your system administrator does this for you However you can also en ter one of the public NTP servers listed at http www eecis udel edu mills ntp servers html Confirm with OK To start the NTP daemon when the system is booted select When booting sys tem
222. determine the text color with the aid of the color selection icon in the toolbox Then activate text input with the T icon and click the image A dialog box opens in which to specify your text and the font settings Depending on which fonts are available on your system specify a font family in the first selection column The second column determines style and weight medium bold or italic and the third column sets the type size Click OK to add the text to your image As long as dotted lines surround the text you can move it However once the text is an chored in your image you can only remove it with Undo as long as you have not saved the image Put text on its own layer for easy modification later In the option box of the text tool select between a single line of text and a text window with several lines and text alignment When you activate Use Dynamic Text a click inside the image opens a dialog in which to enter and align multi line text 23 4 3 Retouching Images The most suitable tool for this purpose is the clone tool It is represented by a rubber stamp in the tool window The use of this tool is described in Sec tion Paint Tools on page 343 but here are a few hints SuSE Linux User Guide 349 350 Set the brush to a medium size with a diffuse border area Work on an enlarged representation of your image Open a second view of the image with View gt New View and zoom to 1 1 to see how
223. disk If you click Next again the content will be written to the floppy disk 3 8 4 Boot Loader Configuration with YaST This YaST module greatly simplifies the configuration of the boot loader How ever you should not experiment with this module unless you understand the concepts behind it Read the corresponding parts of the Administration Guide be fore changing the boot loader configuration The following discussion mainly covers the default boot loader GRUB Note Do not change the boot method from a running system unless you really know what is going on behind the scenes Note In the YaST Control Center select System Boot Loader Configuration The current boot loader configuration of your system will be displayed enabling you to make any needed changes see Figure 3 30 on the facing page 3 8 System To edit boot loader settings choose the Boot Loader Setup appropriate entry ofthe table then click Edit To add a new option use Add To remove an option click Delete Ch Option MALA To editthe settings of sections choose Available Sections or Default Section and edit them Boot Loader Location 1 SCSI 1 96 GB dev sda QUANTUM FIREBAL O The Ch column of the table is meant for cid ieviitn Mewedh detecting whether the option was Default Section Linux O changed Available Sections Linux default Floppy Failsafe Activate Boot Loader Partition No 2 To edit boot loade
224. dress which only identifies the machine is not sufficient A port number is needed to sort out which TCP IP data belongs to which application These standard services are usually provided on servers at the following port numbers DNS on port 53 HTTP on port 80 SMTP on port 25 and POP3 on port 110 FTP on ports 20 and 21 UOILOINBYUOD ISOA The client can only use services if it addresses the correct port number on the server 3 5 2 Information about the Internet Dial Up If you activate Dial on demand or Automatic dial up in the YaST modules the Internet connection is established automatically whenever necessary for ex ample when an external URL is entered in the browser or when e mail is sent and fetched Dial on demand or automatic is only advisable if you have a flat rate for Internet access With manual the computer only establishes a connec tion to the Internet when you want it to do so Background processes such as fetching e mail in regular intervals frequently establish connections to the In ternet which can be expensive To connect to the Internet you can use the KDE program Klnternet described in Section Kinternet the Door to the WWW on page 145 3 5 3 Network Card When the YaST module is started an overview of the network configuration is displayed The upper part of the dialog lists all network cards that were auto matically detected or manually configured If your c
225. e Alle Lesezeichen l schen 7 6 The Tools Menu This menu provides a number of actions that can be used to format the current document in a basic way Highlight Mode This is set to Normal by default but you can choose from numerous highlight modes for different document formats such as HTML and programming languages End of Line The end of line characters as stored by KWrite should always be set according to the operating environment in which the documents will be used and distributed Use this menu to choose UNIX Win dows DOS or Macintosh Indent Text blocks can be indented by a certain amount as defined under Settings gt Configure Editor gt Editing To indent the current text either select Indent or press 1 To undo one level of indentation select Unindent or press 0 SuSE Linux User Guide 193 7 7 The Settings Menu Show Toolbar Enable this to display a toolbar of the main editing functions Show Statusbar Enable this for KWrite to include a status bar at the lower edge of its window The status bar would display the current line and col umn number the input mode and the save status of the document Show Path If this is enabled KWrite displays the file name of the loaded doc ument together with its complete path rather than just the file name in the window title bar Configure Editor This opens a d
226. e and fill type In Fill Type select the type of fill to use in the new image the cur rent foreground or background color white or transparent By default trans parent areas are rendered with a gray checkerboard pattern gt New Image S fam Im Create a New Image From Template rimage Size idth a Width 256 E s Im Height 256 T Pies 512 KB Width 3 556 E Height 3 556 Tin a i 72 000 Resolution X X y 72000 piein 5 Image Type Fill Type mj RGB Foreground Grayscale 2 Background White Transparent O None Eese j l X carcel Figure 23 3 Creating a New Image 23 3 3 Saving Images Save with the mouse or S When using the mouse right click inside the image to open the context menu of the image To save your image activate File gt Save If you have already assigned a name to the image it is saved under that name If not GIMP file manager opens and lets you specify the required file name and path With Determine file type specify which image format GIMP 23 3 Working with The GIMP should use for saving Use a correct file extension In theory it is no problem to save a GIF file with a TIF extension If the file type is set to By Extension GIMP saves in the file type identified by the file extension in the file name 23 3 4 Configuring The GIMP GIMP provides some simple setting options
227. e outset the menu bar the navigation toolbar and the personal toolbar There is also a combined status and component bar at the bottom of the window Finally to the left of the document window Mozilla provides a sidebar that contains a number of different tabs each of them giving access to a particular task Linux Penguins Mozilla 3 mer Eile Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Q Q Q OQ So iri 4i Home Bookmarks The Mozilla Or S Latest Builds Y Mozilla deutsch Sidebar Tabsw X TAE Home User Contact Site Map Links Register Softward Bookmarks Add Manage Search Home User gt Products gt SuSE Accessories gt Linux Penguins Name D Personal Toolbar Fol Linux Penguins b EMozilla Projekt History Mozilla deutsch LJ G3 Y EJ Doe Figure 13 1 The Initial Browser Window When you right click in the document window Mozilla opens a context menu with a number of entries Use this menu for example to add the current page to your bookmarks Bookmark This Page or to view its source code View Page Source 13 1 1 The Menu Bar The menu bar includes the following menus 13 1 The Initial Browser Window File Edit This menu provides the common entries to open save and print files or web pages It also allows you to send an entire web page or only the link to a page as an e mail Selecting Edit Page loads the current page into the Moz
228. e 139 140 fraction digits is 2 The position of the currency symbol and the prefix for positive and negative amounts is arranged in such a way that the cur rency symbol precedes the prefix and the amount Time amp Date Here enter the time format the date format the short date for mat and the first day of the week A detailed explanation is displayed if you click the symbol in the title bar then the respective menu item Other This tab features the setting for the default paper format and measure ments On a US system the default paper format is US Letter and the imperial system is used for measurements Keyboard Shortcuts This module comprises two tabs Use the Shortcut Schemes tab to select an existing layout or create new keyboard layout schemes The Modifier Keys tab provides an overview of the special keys available on your keyboard Your system offers a number of predefined shortcuts for specific tasks arranged in schemes Use the Shortcut Schemes tab to manage all shortcuts on your sys tem By default the following schemes are available on your system Windows Scheme With Win Key Mac Scheme KDE Default for 3 Modifier Keys KDE Default for 4 Modifier Keys Windows Scheme Without Win Key and a Unix Scheme To change the scheme used on your system select one of the listed schemes from the drop down menu and adopt it globally Global Shortcuts Shortcut Sequences
229. e Number User code Password 10001 CJ Always ask for password Back Abort Figure 3 19 T DSL Configuration in Germany driver must be initialized manually by the user root with rcisdn start Hotplug loads the driver when the PCMCIA card or USB device is connected Complete all settings and click OK In the following dialog define the interface for your ISDN card or add fur ther providers to existing interfaces Set up the interfaces with the SyncPPP or RawIP modes Most Internet providers use SyncPPP which is described below Depending on the connection scenario specify one of the following for Your Phone Number 1 The ISDN card is connected directly to the socket NTBA By default ISDN offers three numbers MSN Multiple Subscriber Number On request up to ten numbers can be made available for your line Assign one of the MSN numbers to your ISDN card Enter the num ber without the prefix If you enter an incorrect number your telecom provider will automatically use the first MSN assigned to your ISDN line 2 The ISDN card is connected to a PBX Various specifications are required depending on the constellation a For private use Usually the Euro ISDN or EDSS1 protocol is used for the internal ports of small phone systems These phone systems 3 5 Network Devices Start Mode OnBoot the driverisloaded ISDN low level configuration for contr
230. e Path Ey J README txt Plain Text home tux tmp en README txt um ey e e Print system currently used CUPS Common UNIX Print System Connected to localhost 631 Keep this dialog open after printing m Collapse J System Options Q Help J S5 Print l X Cancel J Figure 4 1 The Main Window of KPrinter Under Orientation choose between Portrait and Landscape the respective opposite formats rotate the text by 180 degrees To the right of Orientation specify the settings for two sided printing If None is selected only one page is printed per sheet If you click the circle preceding Long side the front and back will be printed like in a book With Short side the back is printed reversely and you have to turn the sheet up to view the text correctly Under Start End mark your document with headlines and subtitles such as confidential or se cret Under Pages per Sheet select to print two or four pages on one sheet For this purpose the pages are downsized accordingly If you click Save your set tings will be adopted for other print jobs too However if you click OK the settings only apply to the current job If you terminate the dialog with Cancel all changes are discarded After making all settings click Expand The second part of the window now becomes visible Click the blue folder icon By default your home directory SuSE Linux User
231. e acceptable value ranges are read from the model and entered here Usually they do not need to be changed Expert Here enter some options for your screen In the upper selec tion field define the method to use for the calculation of the screen reso lution and screen geometry Do not change anything unless the monitor is addressed incorrectly and the display is not stable Furthermore you can change the size of the displayed image and activate the power saving mode DPMS 3 4 Hardware Graphics Card The graphics card dialog has two tabs General and Expert In General select the vendor of your graphics card on the left side and the model on the right General Expert r Model vendor and Name selection Voodoo Banshee Voodoo5 5500 ARK Logic Inc ATI Alliance Chips and Technologies Cirrus Logic Diamond IBM Imstt Intel Intergraphics LeadTek Research Inc Matrox NSC Nvidia Figure 3 11 Selecting the Graphics Card Expert offers more advanced configuration possibilities On the right side turn your screen to the left or to a vertical position useful for some turnable TFT screens The entries for the BusID are only relevant if you operate several screens Normally nothing needs to be changed here You should not modify the card options unless you have experience in this field and know what the options mean If necessary
232. e basic functions of the browser Use Forward and Back to jump one step ahead or back in the his tory of pages viewed previously Reload updates the contents of a page Usu ally web sites are stored in the Cache for a certain time in case they are called again Reload always loads the current page from the Internet Stop aborts the loading of a page so no further data is transferred from the corresponding site The next element to the right is the location bar in which to enter Internet ad dresses URLs or search terms If you enter a search term then press Search Mozilla searches the web for that term using the search engine set in the pref erences After having visited a number of sites directly select their addresses again by clicking the down arrow which opens a drop down list Mozilla stores the contents of this list so it is available in your next browser session Start typ ing a previous address then hit to complete it automatically Print prints the current page The downward arrow to its right also gives ac cess to a print preview of the document To the very right the navigation tool bar displays the Mozilla logo which is animated as long as the browser is trans ferring data 13 1 3 The Personal Toolbar The personal toolbar is a customizable toolbar that is preconfigured to include the following elements Home This points to a web address of your choice which you have configured to b
233. e box with the left mouse button the KJobViewer window will open automatically when you log in the next time You can also start KJobViewer us ing the printer symbol in the panel 4 4 Important Utilities 4 4 6 Formatting Floppy Disks with KFloppy KFloppy is the floppy disk formatter of KDE You can start the program from the main menu or from the command line with the command k 1oppy KFloppy will open a dialog see Figure 4 6 in which you can specify a number of set tings by means of selection lists Under Floppy Drive you select the primary or the secondary drive provided your machine has two floppy disk drives The default setting for the size is 3 5 1 44 MB which is the most commonly used floppy disk type The setting for the file system is very important You can choose between the Linux format ext2 and MS DOS If you select MS DOS you will be able to read and write the floppy disk on a Windows machine KDE Floppy Formatter doptseg 3q eui Floppy drive L Primary Size 3 5 1 44MB 3 File system DOS Quick format G Full format iX Verify integrity j Volume label 9 Help KDE Floppy B Qut 0 Figure 4 6 The Floppy Disk Formatter KFloppy The frame at the center of the window contains four check boxes that can be activated or deactivated by clicking You can only select one of the first two op tions with the circular check boxes either Q
234. e currently selected calendar view and a list containing all the current to do items All the common program actions such as saving printing and creating or deleting events can be performed from the menus See Figure 9 1 New Calendar modified KOrganizer mer Eile Edit View Go Actions Schedule Settings Help Jg ao A Bae G GS ES m Es m wei Gud COD ou 344 May 2003 bu Sun 4 Mon 5Tue 6 Wed 7Thu 8 Fri 9 Sat 10 SunMonTueWedThuFri Sat 2 3 HOC EE 8 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 To do items Summary Priority Complete Incoming messages O Outgoing messages 0 Figure 9 1 Managing Your Schedule with KOrganizer 9 2 Configuring KOrganizer To configure KOrganizer select Settings gt Configure KOrganizer This opens a dialog in which to enter your name and e mail address When working with the program the name is used to indicate who is the owner of a given to do item or event The e mail address is used to identify the owner of the calen dar A user who is not the owner can read the calendar but not modify it Send copy to owner when mailing events should be enabled if you want to receive a copy of every e mail sent out by the program in your name to the attendees of an event For KOrganizer to save your scheduling items automatically when exiting check Enable automatic s
235. e depicted characters must be large enough a 17 inch monitor is rec ommended at least for graphical user interfaces like KDE For the pro cessing of CAD layout and graphics it should be 21 inches It is especially important that the screen does not flicker In concrete terms the minimum sync frequency with 15 inch monitors should be at least 73 Hz However 85 Hz is recommended For larger screens such as 21 inch 100 Hz is a good value Luminosity and contrast should be variable The focus of the characters should not differ with adjustments of brightness or contrast The image should be free from distortion and show no color errors To avoid reflex glare a good antireflective coating of the screen surface is recommended The screen should be rotatable and inclinable A vertical adjustment is recommended Colors make the displayed information easier to comprehend However the display of colors can also be straining for the eyes because different colors are refracted differently by the lenses For red colors people are farsighted but for blue colors people are nearsighted Older screens of ten have convergence errors the three beams of the screen tube are no SuSE Linux User Guide e2DJ O 10M SUL ui soiuouo8173 385 386 longer aligned precisely so colored borders appear around letters for ex ample Electromagnetic radiation emitting from the screen should be kept to a minimum 25 2 2
236. e displayed as Mozilla s start page Bookmarks This button lets you access the bookmarks collected from intranet or Internet sites The Mozilla Organization This points to the home page of the Mozilla project SuSE The Linux Experts This points to the home page of SuSE Linux 13 1 The Initial Browser Window 13 1 4 Sidebar The sidebar is located to the left in a separate subwindow What s Related Under this tab Mozilla can list a number of sites whose topic is related to the current one Search This is an interface to several well known search engines Bookmarks This tab is an additional entry point to your bookmarks which are presented here in a tree structure History This tab provides a list of the recently visited web pages 13 2 Working with Tabs Mozilla can display several web pages at a time in one window by using tabbed browsing This is often more convenient than opening a new browser window for each new document To display a document open a link under a new tab right click the corresponding link then select Open Link in New Tab from the context menu The different documents are now directly available by clicking the different tabs arranged at the top of the main window As soon as you start using tabs an extra button appears to the left of the tab bar which allows you to open a new empty tab Use the keyboard and press D to achieve the same To close the currently active tab click the button wit
237. e selected location from the clipboard By default Klipper is started when KDE is loaded and appears as a clipboard icon in the panel You can view the content of the clipboard by clicking this icon The Klipper context menu and the last seven entries also referred to as the his tory are displayed see Figure 4 4 If an extensive text was copied to Klipper only the first line of the text is displayed The most recent entry is listed on top and is marked as active with a black check mark To copy an older text fragment from Klipper to an application select it by clicking it with the left mouse button move the mouse pointer to the target application and click the middle mouse button 3 kprinter README txt kprinter 3j Clear Clipboard History Y Configure Klipper Help 5 Quit Figure 4 4 The Clipboard Klioper As well as the contents of the clipboard the context menu features the following menu items 148 4 4 Important Utilities Enable Actions If you click this a black check mark is displayed in front of it For example if you mark a URL with the mouse when actions are en abled a window opens enabling you to select a browser for displaying this URL Click Actions Enabled to disable this function Clear Clipboard History Deletes all entries from the clipboard Configure Klipper This menu opens the Klipper configuration dialog Klipper can be customized in many ways Control the program with keyboard sho
238. e status 45 249 uc eec 254 signing messages 255 writing messages 250 Mia ds da 286 Konqueror bookmarks 0000s scene 221 digital cameras 605 324 file manager 142 145 image galleries 55 145 o acca donee O E 222 JavaScript ic nico 222 keywords eee 221 saving web pages 220 web browser ss 220 222 Kook ics cert cenar ceca 329 334 character recognition 334 configuring cee 332 gallery 2 vitre vero 333 334 preview sens ganrd iusan d eismskEd 330 scanning 6 eee cece eee eee 330 331 KOrganizer 0 cece e eee 203 210 address book ooooococcooooo 209 attendees calendar categories EEEE EEEE 209 configuring 6 cece 204 events Gunrid eee e cee eee eee eee 207 help 1 is ene aeternas 210 printing i e eere a 209 SLATE E 204 onc ON 208 s toolbars siio e ds 205 KPilot dev pilot cece 197 Basic Function ssesss 196 KDE Addressbook Conduit 199 KOrganizer sis 199 working with 200 KSC cbr O bio ean 290 KSnapshot 154 Writer enkas eeeeee t Pese 189 SuSE Linux User Guide 417 418 L A ili a rita ar atin 118 ati dd 359 371 Maid 369 A A tu EE Sa bed iR SH E din 371 log files boot msg dor
239. e that is saved on your hard disk GIMP click File gt Open or press Ctr to open the GIMP file manager dialog shown in Figure 23 2 Mew Foker j Delete File Bename File Folders bin Desktop Documents pies public_html amm pg 1704 x 2272 pixels RGB 1 La Determine File Type Automatic Selection home tux amm pg X Cancel Po Figure 23 2 Load Images On the left hand side change to a different directory by double clicking On the right hand side the files are listed The file list is sorted alphabetically Indi vidual sorting by file type or date is not possible A handy feature is the small integrated preview window If GIMP recognizes the file format see a thumbnail picture of the currently selected file Double click the file name or click OK to open the image For convenience GIMP works with each image in a separate image window completely independent from the window containing the tool icons Move the image window around on your screen and if needed change its size and zoom settings independently SuSE Linux User Guide dNID SUL ULM saludo 345 346 23 3 2 Creating a New Image To create a new image select File New Ctr WN A dialog box opens enabling specification of several image attributes see Figure 23 3 The most important ones are width and height usually represented in pixels image typ
240. e the wheel on a Microsoft Intellimou 86 4 kB 0 9 5 825 oO O Telk Development System eid LJiespertenced User Description Technical Data Dy le 1 Dependencies Versions c 3ddiag A Tool to Verity the 3D Configuration With 3Ddiag you can verity the 3D configuration Q TO 161 1 41 GB 318 1MB 172 G8 k Check Dependencies J CJ Autocheck Cancel Accept 5 Figure 2 11 Installing and Removing Software with the YaST Package Manager Changing the Installation Scope If you install the default system there is usually no need to add or remove in dividual packages This basic system consists of a software selection that meets most requirements without any changes If you have specific needs modify this selection with the package manager It offers various filter criteria for determin ing a selection from the numerous packages in SuSE Linux The filter selection box is located at the top left under the menu bar At start up the Selections filter is active This filter groups the program packages by their application purpose such as multimedia or office applications The various groups of the Selections filter are listed under the filter selection box The pack ages included in the selected system type are preselected Click the respective check boxes to select or deselect entire selections for installation The right part of the window displays a table listing the individual packages included in the current selection T
241. e vertically adjustable must be between 68 and 76 cm high Even more width is needed for certain working tasks such as CAD work stations When changing between screen work and other kinds of work at least 200 cm is required There should be at least 60 cm leg room Previous experience has shown however that this leg room is often too little 25 1 The Working Environment When using large screens tables should be 100 or even 120 cm deep The table surface should not be in bright colors and should have minimal reflection A lot of office furniture is available in a subdued grey only 25 1 2 Sitting Correctly on the Right Working Chair Sitting in a working chair makes you sit in the same posture for a long time un like in an easy chair where you can move around easily Constant sitting in the wrong position such as bending forward or twisting to the side can harm the respiratory and digestive organs This leads to premature fatigue circulatory disturbances and backache resulting from overstraining the spine and the ver tebrate disks In extreme cases years of sitting in the wrong position can lead to muscular and skeletal illnesses Correct sitting means a frequent change of posture Different parts of the body are then constantly being used Basically it is a question of the correct adjust ment The height of your working chair is best when your forearms lying on the table are at right angles to your upper arms You shoul
242. e will appear Now test your scanner by insert ing a document and clicking Test Scanner Not Detected Only supported scanners can be autodetected Scanners connected to another network host will not be detected The manual configuration distinguishes three types of scanners USB scanners SCSI scanners and network scanners USB scanner Specify the vendor and model YaST will attempt to load USB modules If your scanner is very new the modules may not be loaded automatically In this case continue automatically to a dialog in which to load the USB module manually Refer to the YaST help text for more information SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 83 84 SCSI scanner Specify the device such as dev sg0 SCSI scanners should not be connected or disconnected when the the system is running Shut the system down first Network scanner Enter the IP address or the host name You can use a scanner that is connected to a host in your network and config ured as a network scanner To configure a network scanner refer to the Support Database article Scanning in Linux http sdb suse de en keyword scanner When selecting a network scanner enter the host name or the IP address of the host to which the scanner is connected If your scanner was not detected probably the device is not supported How ever sometimes even supported scanners are not detected If that is the case proceed wi
243. e window can be changed as usual However the respective package may no longer meet the search criteria To remove such packages from the list update the list with Update list The Individual Package Window As mentioned above a list of individual packages is displayed to the right in the individual package window The content of this list is determined by the currently selected filter If for example the Selection filter is selected the indi vidual package window displays all packages of the current selection In the package manager each package has a status that determines what to do with the package such as Install or Delete This status is shown by means of a symbol in a status box at the beginning of the line Toggle the status with a mouse click or select it directly by opening the context menu by right clicking Depending on the current situation some of the possible status flags may not be available for selection For example a package that has not yet been installed cannot be set to Delete View the available status flags with Help gt Sym bols The package manager offers the following package status flags Do Not Install This package is not installed and will not be installed SuSE Linux User Guide 55 Install This package is not yet installed but will be installed Keep This package is already installed and will not be changed Update This package is already installed and will be r
244. eTable Emul0k1 Port 3 File 2 MIDI Devices of a Soundblaster Live Card The first column lists the internal port numbers by which the device is ad dressed by the ALSA driver The other columns show the designation and port name of the device Apart from the external MIDI port several WaveTable ports are listed Use a command like pmidi p 73 0 mysong mid to play a MIDI file over one of the listed ports Note If a MIDI player is interrupted during playback a continuous sound may persist If this happens run the all_notes_off script or restart ALSA as root with rcalsasound restart Note 18 9 ALSA and MIDI Many sound cards like Soundblaster AWE and Live have an internal WaveTable synthesizer that converts MIDI events into audible sounds These MIDI events can be sent to the WaveTable synthesizer by an external MIDI key board or by a program such as a MIDI player or sequencer For Soundblaster AWE and Live cards the WaveTable synthesizer must be initialized with a sound font before any sound can be heard Xnur ui punog 18 9 1 Loading Sound Fonts SB Live and AWE The package awesfx contains the s x1oad command for loading sound fonts in Soundblaster AWE and Live cards Suitable sound font files are available on the driver CD of your sound card The start up script of ALSA can automati cally load the sound fonts required for the WaveTable synthesis provided the respective files were installed from the Creative dr
245. eb Pages and Graphics As in other browsers you can save web pages To do this select Location Save as and specify a name for your HTML file However images will not be saved To archive an entire web page including the images select Extras Archive Web Page Konqueror suggests a file name that you can usually accept The file name ends with war the extension for web archives To view 220 11 1 Opening Web Pages the saved web archive later simply click the respective file and the web page is displayed in Konqueror along with its images 11 3 Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords Searching the web using Konqueror is very practical Konqueror defines a num ber of search engines for you all with a specific shortcut To search for a certain topic on the Internet enter the shortcut and the keyword separated by a colon The relevant page containing the search results is then displayed You can also define your own shortcuts Simply select Settings gt Configure Konqueror Web Shortcuts A dialog appears in which to define your own abbreviations 11 4 Bookmarks If you frequently visit certain pages it can be useful to save them as bookmarks Use the Bookmark menu to save all important locations of web pages or direc tory links on your local hard disk To create a new bookmark in Konqueror click Bookmarks gt Add Bookmark If you have already added some bookmarks also
246. ecify a user name and the corresponding password to use the environment of the respective user The password is not required from ts root as root is authorized to assume the identity of any user halt option s To avoid loss of data you should always use this pro gram to shut down your system reboot option s Does the same as halt with the difference that the system performs an immediate reboot clear This command cleans up the visible area of the console It has no op tions 24 5 The vi Editor Operating the vi editor takes some practice For many it is the preferred editor partly because it is available on any UNIX like operating system and is included in default Linux installations Also if nothing else works vi will The short in structions that follow should enable you to edit various configuration files and other types of files with vi vi provides three operating modes In command mode keys are interpreted as command elements Insert mode interprets all keys as text entries and last line mode is used for more complex commands which are entered in the last line The most important commands in command mode are SuSE Linux User Guide 375 376 Changes to last line mode i Changes to insert mode characters appear at the current cursor position Changes to insert mode characters appear after the current cursor position Changes to insert mode characters are added at the end of the line Changes to comma
247. ecify the paint color or the tip of the painting tool SuSE Linux User Guide diAIO SUL ULM saludo 339 340 23 25 The Selection Tools Rectangular select is the simplest selection tool By keeping the left mouse button pressed and dragging the mouse at the same time mark a rect angular area When you release the mouse button a frame indicates the selected area If you press after you begin drawing the selection only perfect squares can be selected This tool works like rectangular select except it selects a circular or ellipti cal area It is used in the same way except pressing after you begin selecting limits the selection to perfect circles This is the first usable selection tool for photographs The lasso allows a free hand selection of an irregular shape Press the left mouse button and follow the shape as required When you release the mouse button the start point and end point are joined with a straight line An accurate selection is difficult so working with an enlarged image is recommended The magic wand fuzzy selection tool selects an image area through color similarity of adjacent pixels If the default settings are not suitable change the threshold value in the option box or combine several selections using ft Shift The magic wand is ideal for selecting irregular areas of similar color With a bit of effort the Bezier Curves tool allows you to capture specific areas or objects of an image With the
248. ect Processor 305 18 11 1 Randomly Playing Patches 306 18 11 2 AlsaModularSynth as an Effect Processor 306 15 11 33 Synthesizer Patches ou mmn orem mor Goel s 307 18 11 4 Keeping Track with the Control Center 308 18115 The MIDI Out Module gt o gt o so sucer amad regus 309 18 11 6 Writing WAV Files with the WAV Out Module 309 18 12NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers 2 n RR cs SS 309 xiv Contents 19 TV Video Radio and Webcam 19 1 Watching EV withumotw 29 eR RETE SEG 19 1 1 Video Source and Network Search 19 1 2 From Silent Film to Sound Film 19 1 3 Screen Proportions and Full Screen Mode 19 1 4 The Launcher Menu lll nn 19 2 Video Text with alep i ouo eee XR 19 3 Webcams and motvz usce 84 eas RUE es UU 3 Ros 19 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC 19 4 1 Importing the EPG Database 1942 borting the Programs ciao epo SES Sg s 20 K3b The KDE Burning Application 2 Creating a Data C ato lA eats Bot e ops 20 2 B rmng 2 926244 eee bee bbe ERR SES 203 eating am Aulo CD uio a mE ET SE ea 20 44 Cops a CD o boca vue a d or vede e Nm Us 205 Writing ISO B ages oe Res RR EY GLACE Se ES UR 20 6 For More Information 2 222244 x oA 21 Digital Cameras and Linux 21 1 Connecting to the Camera s s 2 eeu os RE a 21 2 Installating the Progtatfis o so od sacii aari Pe a k Oe
249. ect this option if you have a dedicated line to the Internet Your machine will be online permanently so no dial up is required If your sys tem is part of a local network with a central e mail server select this op tion to ensure permanent access to your e mail messages Dial up This item is relevant for all users who have a computer at home are not located in a network and establish dial up connections with the Inter net occasionally via modem DSL or ISDN No connection If you do not have access to the Internet and are not located in a network you cannot send or receive e mail Furthermore you can activate virus scanning for your incoming and outgoing e mail with AMQViS by activating the respective check box The package is in stalled automatically as soon as you activate the mail filtering feature In the following dialogs specify the outgoing mail server usually the SMTP server of your provider and the parameters for incoming mail If you use a dial up con nection you can specify diverse POP or IMAP servers for mail reception by var ious users By means of this dialog you can also assign aliases use masquerad ing or set up virtual domains Click Finish to exit the mail configuration 3 6 8 Network Services inetd This tool allows you to determine which network services such as telnet finger talk and ftp should start when SuSE Linux boots These services enable exter nal hosts to connect to your computer Y
250. ected effectively against attacks For more information about the SuSE Firewall refer to the Administration Guide under Network Security gt Firewall 3 8 System 3 8 1 Backup Copy of the System Areas The YaST backup module enables you to create a backup of your system The backup created by the module does not comprise the entire system but only saves information about changed packages and copies of critical storage areas and configuration files Define the kind of data to save in the backup By default the backup includes information about any packages changed since the last installation run In addi tion it may include data that does not belong to packages themselves such as many of the configuration files in etc or in the directories under home Apart from that the backup can include important storage areas on your hard disk that may be crucial when trying to restore a system such as the partition table or the master boot record MBR 3 8 System YaST ite Choose the services thatshouldbe t Firewall Configuration Step 2 of 4 Services available from the Internet Configure the services that should be available on your server If you are not running a server of a some kind you should not need any of the services Cy HTTP Li Fere ICJ HTTP with SSL https Even correctly configured packet Mail Server filtering rules cannot save you from vulnerabilities that may be present in IL sure the services t
251. ectory of the file system that does not have any parent di rectory all other directories have a parent directory In UNIX the root directory is represented asa AJOSSO SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface Hard disk standard implemented in servers and other high level ma chines because of its high speed performance See server server A server is usually a rather powerful computer that offers services such as HTTP DNS and FTD or data to other machines connected via a net work There are also programs called servers like the v X server shell An especially flexible command line often equipped with its own specific programming language Examples of shells are Bash sh and tcsh SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol vs Protocol for transferring vse mails SSL Secure Socket Layer Encryption procedure for transferring v HTTP data superuser See root system administrator See root task See v process TCP IP Internet communication protocol finding increased use in local networks known as intranets telnet Telnet is the v protocol and command for communicating with other hosts Normally the user only sees telnet as a means for logging into a remote system SuSE Linux User Guide 409 410 terminal Formerly the designation of a keyboard and monitor combination con nected to a central computer On workstations this term is also used for programs that emulate a real terminal Tu
252. ed in the upper left corner of the program window Select the output plug in module with Options Preferences gt Audio I O Plugins If the xmms kde package is installed the aRts sound server can be configured here M Note XMMS automatically redirects its output to the Disk Writer Plugin if it is not able to find a configured sound card In this case the played files are written to the hard disk as WAV files The time display then runs faster than when playing the output through a sound card Note Various visualization plug ins can be started through Options Prefer ences Visualization Plugins If you have a graphics card with 3D accel SuSE Linux User Guide 289 290 Envy24 Control Utility 0 1 0 TerraTec EWS 88MT at 0 Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings Analog Volume About Master Clock S PDIF Output Settings A Internal Xtal y Professional SEO Professional Consumer Copyright Emphasis Category y Copyrighted y No emphasis v DAT Volume Change 4 Copy permitted 50 15us w PCM encoder CD ICE 908 v General Copy Rate 48 5 A 1 st generation y Original Figure 18 6 Configuring the S PDIF Parameters with envy24control eration select an application such as the OpenGL spectrum analyzer If the xmms plugins package is installed try the new Infinity plug in To the left under the menu button there are five buttons wit
253. ee cre rr rer 227 web pages archiving cere ie rhet 220 webcams dus vecti e ERE ERR 314 wildcards sicci ir di ias 371 X X Dc nee aioe tenbincee anne ese 77 configuring csse 72 smultihead cerco isa 78 KC Fiatia aki seda se ethan EAREN iem 337 XMMS sastite hte EA ld 289 Y YaST backups 2 cesses 61 108 sboot disk 52 uoces tends 110 boot from hard disk 15 bootmode d bp bein 39 cable modem ooccocccccccccccco lt 91 sCD ROM asistan ERI XAR Pe 63 configuring 00 0 47 120 Control Center sssss 48 ISK SPAaC miis 21 DMA c astern soe ten Teee 82 A misce Foe irme 107 package manager 53 graphical user interface 72 81 package status ooooooocoooomo 55 graphics card oooooooccncccno coo 72 partitioning ooooococooommm 19 24 graphics cards sssssuuss 75 patch CD update sssese 51 group administration 103 printing acia ry emeret 63 72 hard disk controller 72 profile manager sssse 116 hardware 26 serene 62 87 radio cards soproni pi ccc cee ceceenees 87 hardware information 81 rcconfig 0 2 60 cece cece cece eee ees 117 host name and DNS 99 rescue system 66 6 cece eee eens 16 installation ACPI disabled 16 root password esee 35
254. ee the date when the file was created the file size in bytes and further details which are covered later One very important option that exists for many commands is the help option By entering 1s help display all the options for the 1s command Also use the 1s command to view the contents of other directories To do so the directory must be specified as a parameter For example to see the contents of Desktop enter ls 1 Desktop 24 2 2 Files and Directories To use the shell efficiently it is really useful to have some knowledge about the file and directory structures of a Linux system You can think of directories as 24 1 Introduction electronic folders where files programs and subdirectories are stored The top level directory in the hierarchy is the root directory referred to as This is the place from which all other directories can be accessed The home directory contains the directories in which the individual users can store their personal files Figure 24 1 shows the standard directory tree in Linux with the home directories of the example users xyz linux and tux The direc tory tree of a Linux system has a functional structure that follows the File Sys tem Standard The following list provides a brief description of the standard directories in Linux Gin bo ev ec home Hid in A Cop Grog mane np usc ar 3 iia sta 507 liso yx9 Linux tux XL1R6 bin etc tib lo
255. eep CT Shift held down and click the image area to use for the copy Then release the mouse button and place the cursor on the damaged image area If you now press the left mouse button and move the mouse the image area marked in the first step of the procedure is inserted When you move the mouse upwards the area copied moves upwards too The point is marked by a crosshair Depending on the brush settings a small or a SuSE Linux User Guide 343 344 large radius is copied and depending on the tool settings copying is car ried out in a translucent or opaque manner The Convolver tool the icon shows a drop of water is used for precise manual blurring or sharpening of image parts Which of the two actions is active is set in the option box The brush selection determines size and borders of the manipulation area Blurring lays a kind of haze over the im age or as when using a drop of water on a water color painting blurs the painted areas Sharpening is the opposite Here the program attempts to increase the contrast and make a neater separation of edges Sharpening works well if you later look at your image from a distance It also means a loss of information however Seen from very close up the images look extremely pixellated The pen can be used for drawing and also for calligraphy Writing well however can only be achieved with the aid of a graphics tablet In the tool settings adapt the shape of the pen to your o
256. ees in the item view Sort the attendee list by clicking the column header of the value by which to sort To add an attendee for an item click New Then enter the name in Name and the e mail address in the field below Use Address Book to query the address book and select entries from it In Role define the function of an attendee observer chair participant which can also be used to sort the list of attendees later With Status assign a status to an attendee such as needs action accepted or completed Change the status of an attendee at any time by selecting the attendee in the list then choosing another status from the drop down list If you check Request response the attendees receive an e mail with the relevant schedule item Edit Event KOrganizer Me EOS General Attendees Recurrence Organizer nobody nowhere Name Email Role Status RSVP Name New Email Role AE Status i z Address Book ixj l Template J l Save as Template j v oK Apply y ae Cancel J Figure 9 5 Entering Attendee Details 9 4 3 To Do Items Create a new to do item by selecting Actions gt New To Do In the dia log that opens specify the exact start and due date and time for the new task its progress in percent and its priority If other people are involved specify their details under Attendees The created to do item is then automat
257. eft Arrow up acts like The mouse pointer moves up in a straight line Arrow up and right acts like the key 9 The mouse pointer moves up and right Left arrow works as the key 4 The mouse pointer moves to the left Right arrow acts like the key 6 The mouse pointer moves to the right Down arrow corresponds to the key 1 The mouse pointer moves down Down arrow corresponds to the key 2 The mouse pointer moves down in a straight line Arrow down and right corresponds to the key 3 This key moves the mouse pointer down and right With the slider set the speed of the mouse pointer movement when a key is pressed For More Information For more information about the X Window System its history and its proper ties refer to Configuration of the X Window System with SaX2 in the Administration Guide 3 45 Hardware Information YasT performs a hardware detection for the configuration of hardware compo nents The detected technical data is displayed in this screen This is especially useful for example if you want to submit a support request for which you need information about your hardware SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 81 82 Dd YaST The Hardware Information module displays the hardware details of your computer Click any node for more information You can save hardware information to a file Click Save to File and enter the file name Hardware info
258. egories concerned u user owner of the file g group group that owns the file o others additional users if no parameter is given the changes apply to all categories 2 a character for deletion setting or insertion 3 the abbreviations yr read w write m x execute 4 file name or names separated by spaces 364 243 Users and Access Permissions If for example the user tux in the example File System Permissions on the preceding page also wants to grant other users write w access to the directory ProjectData he can do this using the command chmod o w ProjectData If however he wants to deny all users other than himself write permissions he can do this by entering the command chmod go w ProjectData To prohibit all users from adding a new file to the folder ProjectData enter chmod w ProjectData Now not even the owner can write to the file without first reestablishing write permissions Changing Ownership Permissions Other important commands to control the ownership and permissions of the file system components are chown change owner and chgrp change group The command chown can be used to transfer ownership of a file to another user However only root is permitted to perform this change IOUS SUL ULM BUOM Suppose the file Roadmap from the example File System Permissions on the facing page should no longer belong to tux but to the user geeko The comm
259. elds under these tabs are completed save the data with OK The new contact then appears in a list of current contacts in the left part of the window 10 1 Overview of KAddressBook Edit Contact KAddressBook 3 General Details a Name Tux Linux omsl T O Work AD ole CEO UN SET A Organization Mobile Formatted name l Edit Phone Numbers j 5 Home A Email Iceberg 5t 42 e l Edit Email Addresses j Laurie Island Southpole 31415 Arctic a l Edit Addresses J IM address Categories v oK i Apply X Cancel Figure 10 2 Recording New Contact Information 10 3 Creating Address Lists To generate lists from your address data open the editor for distribution lists with Settings gt Toolbars gt Distribution Lists Use New List to create one or several new lists under different names The new entries appear in the drop down menu at the top left corner of the editor Select the desired list then drag and drop all desired contacts from the overview in the left part of the window to the list overview Renaming and deletion of lists is also possible here See Fig ure 10 3 on the next page 10 4 Searching Address Data Basically KAddressBook offers three options for searching address data Incremental search Use the drop down menu to determine search details such as the Given Name Family Name o
260. election bar does not move hit the Microsoft compatible serial mouse ttyS0 COM1 Tab key maybe repeatedly until it does Microsoft compatible serial mouse ttyS1 COM2 Use the Test button to apply and test the Microsoft Intellimouse 3 buttons and wheel ty SO COM1 selected settings Microsoft Intellimouse 3 buttons and wheel tyS1 COM2 Mouse Systems serial mouse ttyS0 COM1 Mouse Systems serial mouse ttyS1 COM2 Mouse Man protocol serial Logitech mouse ttyS0 COM1 Mouse Man protocol serial Logitech mouse ttyS1 COM2 Old Logitech serial mouse series 9 ttySO COM1 Old Logitech serial mouse series 9 ttyS1 COM2 Logitech busmouse Sun Mouse dev sunmouse Oldest 2 button serial mouse ttyS0 COM1 Oldest 2 button serial mouse ttyS1 COM2 Microsoft busmouse ATI XL busmouse Plug and Play mice ttyS0 COM1 Plug and Play mice ttyS1 COM2 USB mouse Intell Wheel mouse Aux port Intell Wheel mouse USB If you select None you have to use the keyboard as described in the manual IntelliMouse Explorer ps2 tel Test Figure 2 5 Selecting the Mouse Type Partition Types Every hard disk has a partition table with space for four entries Each entry in the partition table can be a primary partition or an extended partition Only one extended partition entry is allowed however Primary partitions consist of a continuous range of cylinders phy
261. elus i a a he a ee ee Xv er 22412 Inserting Tebo 2 5 2509 oso vp Rae SESS 234 3 Retouching Images 12422229 46x GIG 23 5 For More Information 1 2 229 94 oco om a aS VI Excursions 24 Working with the Shell 24 1 Introduction 242 Introduction to Bash 64k ae eG ew A de ca a ea 24 2 1 Commands Contents 335 337 337 338 338 338 339 339 339 340 340 342 344 345 345 346 346 347 347 348 349 349 349 349 350 351 2422 Files and Directories 354 24 2 3 Bash Functions e ess 00 2048 04 004 ama eg 356 242 4 Specifying Paths x cwi soc 4 x9 9 a US 358 2425 Wild Cards oor scooped A Bee ee ee 358 24 2 6 More Or ess ccad e poed e bee he 4d 9 Gom hes 359 ALE MAPS La l2 dee e be et eh us 359 24 2 8 Archives and Data Compression 360 2429 IMPOR a 361 2 2 NO Cleaning UD oe uo mm deem xu ue 362 24 3 Users and Access Permissions 362 24 3 1 Pile System Permissions 2o 6 a na meg 362 24 3 2 Modifying File Permissions 364 243 3 The s tiid Bit ico 0 05444 bo ee bebe ge 365 24 34 The seteid Bit Gsi a es bk ea a a ans 366 22135 TRE SUCKY BIE sos ba a oS a a ha MOOS E 366 243 6 Access Control Lists 2l ll 367 244 Important Linux Commands 0 02000 368 2441 File Comme socio a xa kx 368 24 4 2 System Commands ooo o eee 373 24 5 THE vi Editor cie id a Ad Rue 375 25 Ergonom
262. ensure that your configuration is suitable for your devices If the image is not steady terminate the test immediately by pressing and reduce the refresh rate or SuSE Linux User Guide 73 74 the resolution and color depth Regardless of whether you run a test all modifi cations are only activated when you restart the X server Display With Edit configuration gt Properties a window with the tabs Monitor Fre quencies and Expert appears Monitor In the left part of the window select the vendor In the right part select your model If you have floppy disks with Linux drivers for your monitor install these by clicking Driver disk Monitor Frequencies Expert r Model Vendor and Name selection SION MASTER SION MASTER SION MASTER SION MASTER SION MASTER ISION MASTER P P P P P PRO 451 A902MT SION MASTER PRO 452 MAS01U SION MASTER PRO 500 P P P P a P LEO SYSTEMS LG LG ELECTRONICS LION M MACOM SION MASTER PRO 501 SION MASTER PRO 502 SION MASTER PRO 510 A201HT SION MASTER PRO 511 MA201D SION MASTER PRO1 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Me lt lt lt lt lt Manufacturer Disk Figure 3 10 Monitor Selection Frequencies Here enter the horizontal and vertical frequencies for your screen The vertical frequency is another designation for the im age refresh rate Normally th
263. ent The default setting 236 14 1 Key Management for the Expiration Never key pair is valid for an indefinite period can be accepted unless you want your keys to expire after a certain time The default settings for the Key size and the Algorithm can be accepted as they are Now start the key generation with OK After this process is completed the newly generated key appears in the overview window of the key manager Key Generation kgp r Generate Key Pair Name Email Comment optional Expiration Never Key size 1024 Algorithm DSA amp ElGamal Expert Mode X Cancel Figure 14 2 Generating Keys 14 1 2 Exporting the Public Key After generating your key pair make the public key available to other users This enables them to use it to encrypt or sign the messages or files they send you To make the public key available for others select Keys gt Export Public Key The dialog that opens offers three options Export Public Key To Email Your public key is sent to a recipient of your choice by e mail If you activate this option and confirm with OK the dialog for creating a new e mail message with KMail appears Enter the SuSE Linux User Guide 6d5 ULIM UOYAA DU 237 238 recipient and click Send The recipient will receive your key and can then send you encrypted contents Export Public Key To Clipbo
264. entification purposes the fax protocol uses a special ID that should normally contain the external phone number of the fax device in international notation An example for a valid station ID is 49 89 123456 for the fax number 123456 in Munich Germany The maximum length of this entry is twenty digits Valid characters are numbers spaces and the symbol as prefix to the international country code Header This field can contain an arbitrary text to use as a header for sent faxes Whether and how this text is featured on the sent document de 17 2 Configuration Uy Ya gernot DIE User gernot Fax Numbers 23 Outgoing MSN StationID 49 871 935362 Headline Gernot Hillier Action MailAndSave GI Figure 17 2 Fax Functionality User Preferences pends on the respective ISDN driver Action The default setting MailAndSave causes a received fax message to be saved in the system and forwarded to the user by e mail The SaveOnly option merely causes the fax to be saved to the hard disk This option is recommended for expert users only Click OK to accept the changes Click Cancel to drop the changes and close the form 17 2 2 Configuring the Answering Machine The provided standard scripts also offer a comfortable multiuser answering ma chine This can be be configured with the YaST Answering Machine module in the Network Devices group Similar to the fa
265. ep enter the name under which the selected server should appear in the list Close the assistant with Next and Finish Upon completion of the configuration the new LDAP server appears in your contact list under Other Contacts and can be browsed for any entries 16 8 For More Information Evolution offers extensive internal help pages Use the Help menu to access this information For more information about Evolution refer to Ximian s web site athttp www ximian com SuSE Linux User Guide uJDJ60Jg JOPUSIOD PUD IDJA 3 Uy uounjo 3 267 ISDN Telecommunication Even in this age of the Internet and e mail traditional communication means like phone and fax are still important The communication package CapiSuite offers an ISDN based solution for a computer supported answering machine and fax transmission The following chapter explains how CapiSuite works This is followed by a de scription of its configuration with YaST and a brief introduction to the usage of the system 171 Capisuite Basics coso cg a 270 17 2 Configuration s e ir e dena eS 270 VA Usage CDI a A Re 276 UOIDIIUNULUOIA S NASI 270 17 1 CapiSuite Basics Capisuite is a daemon a program that runs in the background that provides basic telecommunication functions The current version mainly offers functions for telephone and fax connections For example the system supports the establishment and termination of incom ing and o
266. eplaced by the version on the installation medium Delete This package is already installed and will be deleted Taboo Never Install This package is not installed and will never be in stalled It will be treated as if it does not exist on any of the installation media If a package would automatically be selected to resolve dependen cies this can be prevented by setting the package to Taboo However this may result in inconsistencies that must be resolved manually depen dency check Thus Taboo is mainly intended for expert users Protected This package is installed and should not be modified as unresolved dependencies from other packages exist or could arise Third party pack ages packages without SuSE signature are automatically assigned this status to prevent them from being overwritten by later versions existing on the installation media This may cause package conflicts that must be resolved manually for experts Automatic installation This package has been automatically selected for instal lation as it is required by another package resolution of package depen dencies Tip To deselect such a package you may need to use the status Taboo see above Tip Automatic update This package is already installed However as another package requires a newer version of this package the installed version will automatically be updated Delete automatically This package is already installed but existing
267. ermissions of the Roadmap file the first column must be examined more closely rw r Type Users Permissions Group Permissions Permissions for Other Users This column is comprised of one leading character followed by nine char acters grouped in threes The first of the ten letters stands for the type of file system component The dash shows that this is a file A directory a a link 1 a block device b or a character device could also be indi cated The next three blocks follow a standard pattern The first three characters refer to whether the file is readable r or not A w in the middle por tion symbolizes that the corresponding object can be edited and a dash means it is not possible to write to the file An x in the third position de notes that the object can be executed Because the file in this example is a text file and not one that is executable executable access for this particular file is not needed In our example tux has as owner of the file Roadmap read r and write access w to it but cannot execute it x The members of the group project3 can read the file but they cannot modify it or execute it Other users do not have any access to this file Other permissions can be as signed by means of ACLs Access Control Lists See Section Access Con trol Lists on page 367 for details and refer to the chapter Access Control Lists in Linux in the Administration Guide for further background informa
268. ers Start KGet by pressing and entering the command kget When the program is started for the first time a dialog will be displayed Confirm this dialog to integrate KGet in Konqueror When you close the dialog KGet will be integrated in the system tray of the panel as an icon with a downward arrow dop1seg 3G eui Click on this arrow to open the dialog displaying your transfers To add a trans fer to the list select the menu item File gt Paste A dialog will open Enter a URL in the input field and confirm with OK Then specify the location for sav ing the downloaded file After all information has been entered the entry for the transfer will be added to the main window of KGet and started Another way to add a transfer is by means of drag and drop Simply drag a file e g from an FTP server from Konqueror and drop in the main window Timer Controlled Transfers You can also instruct KGet to perform your transfers at a specific time Activate the menu item Options gt Offline Mode All transfers you insert from this point will not be started immediately but queued To start the timer double click the respective entry A dialog will open Select Advanced The dialog will be expanded by the settings you need for timing the transfer Enter the day month year and time Then close the window After you have specified the timer settings for all your transfers set KGet back to the online mode by
269. es this support A suitable cable is also required Note Using the USB connection can quickly drain your camera s batteries Consider using a power adapter Note Simply connect the camera to the USB port and turn on the camera You may need to switch you camera to a special data transfer mode For this procedure consult the manual of your digital camera 21 2 Installating the Programs Use Yast to install the gtkam package The other required packages are se lected automatically Digikam is included in the default installation If it is not installed use YaST to install it if desired For more information about installing packages with YaST refer to Section Installing and Removing Software on page 51 21 3 Using Konqueror KDE users can easily access digital cameras by means of the familiar Konqueror interface Connect your camera to the USB port A camera icon should appear on the desktop Click this icon to open the camera in Konqueror The camera can also be accessed by entering the URL camera in Konqueror Navigate 324 21 1 Connecting to the Camera through the camera s directory structure until the files are shown Use the usual Konqueror file management features to copy the files as desired More informa tion about using Konqueror is available in Chapter The Web Browser Konqueror on page 219 21 4 Using gtKam gtKam is a graphical interface for downloading and deleting pictures from the digital camera To
270. esheet href styles home css type text css title SuSE Homepage Styles gt 16 tyles 17 Java t 18 lt script language JavaScript type text javascript le src jscript change_img js gt lt script gt lt script language JavaScript Line 10 Col O INS NORM Figure 7 1 The KWrite Text Editor 7 1 General Features 7 2 The File Menu New Ctrl N This creates a new file and at the same time opens a new KWrite window in which to start typing your text Open 0 Use this to open an existing file It opens a file selection dialog that resembles a file manager The left hand area provides a num ber of quick navigation buttons to use to list the files in your home direc tory or on the floppy with just one click Alternatively use the entry field in the toolbar at the top or browse directories with the arrow buttons As soon as a directory is selected the files and subdirectories in it are listed in the right hand part of the dialog To speed things up narrow down the list according to the file type by specifying the file extension e g txt under Filter JOJO 4XO SLM SUL To mark the current directory for quick return later click the star button in the toolbar and create a bookmark for it Any directory bookmarked in this way can subsequently be reached via the menu to avoid going through the entire file system again and again Use the configuration menu menu accessible with the wre
271. evertheless you must unmount CD DVD drives be cause otherwise you will not be able to eject the CD You can also select Eject which will cause the medium to be unmounted and ejected Both methods only work if the CD DVD is no longer accessed and any file manager window dis playing the content of the CD DVD has been closed 4 1 4 The Printer Icon Click on the printer icon on the desktop to start KPrinter This program en ables you to adjust a number of settings and send print jobs directly The upper part of the main window see Figure 4 1 on the next page shows the selected printer and allows selection of a different printer Click the black arrow next to the printer name to display a list of all available printers and select the desired printer To configure the selected printer click Properties A configuration dialog like that shown in Figure 4 2 on page 130 opens enabling you to change the paper format e g from A4 to A5 or change between multiple paper trays The latter is especially interesting if one of the trays contains letterhead paper and another contains plain white paper 4 1 Desktop Components Print kprinter 3 r Printer Name 4 miie JUYJLAZ J 2 Properties A State Idle accepting jobs x Type prnigang U Location 3 Etage Raum neben Teek che m Comment HP Laserjet 4050 Series PS U E z A Files Copies Advanced Options Additional Tags O O Name Typ
272. ext message skip to the previous message replay current message noe Table 17 1 Commands for Message Playback 17 3 Usage Part V Multimedia Sound in Linux Linux offers a wide range of sound applications in various stages of develop ment This chapter provides an overview of a wide range of applications for various multimedia tasks together with some technical background information Applications that are not part of the standard installation can be installed with Yast 18 1 Basic ALSAPEM Types bin eae ad ees 284 18 2 MIXOES oa eke ao et a ES A a a ae Gee 284 Teo Payens oe biG oe soe ER Ea ee Sees ee ates 289 18 4 Buffering and Latencies 291 18 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit 293 18 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity 294 18 7 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files 297 18 8 Compressing Audio Data 297 189 ALSA and MIDI eckson mia REESE Rs 298 18 10MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card 303 18 11AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor 305 18 12NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers 309 xnur ui punog 284 18 1 Basic ALSA PCM Types As of version 0 9 of the Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA the con cept for PCM devices was substantially modified and expanded The user can now influence the way ALSA addresses the sound card by selecting a specific PCM type The main PCM types are hw and plughw To unders
273. f archives and data compression Suppose you want to have the entire test directory packed in one file that you can save on a floppy disk as a backup copy or send by e mail To do so use the command tar for tape archiver With tar help view all the options for the tar command The most important of these options are explained here c for create Create a new archive t for table Display the contents of an archive X for extract Unpack the archive v for verbose Show all files on screen while creating the archive 24 2 Introduction to Bash f for file Choose a file name for the archive file When creating an archive this option must always be given as the last one To pack the test directory with all its files and subdirectories into an archive named testarchive tar use the options c and f For the testing purposes of this example also add v to follow the progress of the archiving although this option is not mandatory After using cd to change to your home directory where the test directory is located enter tar cvf testarchive tar test After that view the contents of the archive file with tar tf testarchive tar The test directory with all its files and directories has remained unchanged on your hard disk To unpack the archive enter tar xvf testarchive tar but do not try this yet lleus eui ULM BUOM For file compression the obvious choice on Linux is the popular gzip pro gram Justenter gz
274. f the Selec tions filter are listed under the filter selection box The packages already installed on the system are preselected Click the status box at the begin ning of a line to toggle the status flags of a selection You can also select a status directly by right clicking the selection and using the context menu The individual package window to the right displays the list of packages included in the current selection enabling selection and deselection of individual packages The Package Groups Filter The Package Groups filter provides a more tech nical overview of the range of packages and is suitable for users who are familiar with the package landscape of SuSE Linux This filter sorts the program packages by subjects such as Applications Development and Hardware in a tree structure to the left The more you expand the branches the more specific the selection is and the fewer packages are dis played in the individual package window to the right Moreover the filter provides the possibility to display all packages in al phabetic order To do this select zzz Alle in the top level As SuSE Linux contains a large number of packages it may take some time until this long list is displayed The Search Function The Search function is the easiest way to find a specific package By specifying various search criteria restrict the filter so much that often only one package is displayed in the individual package win do
275. f the eye Avoid dark shadows Ceiling lights should emit light diagonally from above Lighting strips should be set perpendicular to the screen table The line of sight at the screen table should thus run parallel to the lighting strips Whether the lighting is considered to be pleasant depends on the color temperature and light color of the lamp type Warm white or neutral white is recommended 25 1 The Working Environment The light requirement depends not only on the working task but also on age older people need more light The fact that older people often have only a small lamp in their homes has nothing to do with their light re quirement but rather with the fact that they want to save electricity A screen workstation near daylight requires optimum shielding against direct and reflex glare especially when the line of sight is directly out the window or at a 45 degree angle to it The built in antiglare facilities should be variable Under no circumstances should artificial illumination cause reflex glare on the screen 25 1 4 Optimum Climate The room climate determines our well being to a great extent Problems arise more often if it is too cold too warm too drafty or too dry Low relative humid ity can lead to burning eyes dry mucous membranes skin irritations and in creased susceptibility to colds Things get complicated when people who work in the same room are accustomed to different base temperatures For yo
276. fact that a specific package version may be required for smooth interaction can make things even more complicated All these factors must be taken into consideration when installing uninstalling and updating software Fortunately YaST provides an extremely efficient tool for this purpose the software installation module usually referred to as the pack 3 3 Software age manager When the package manager is started it examines the system and displays installed packages If you select additional packages for installation the package manager automatically checks the dependencies and selects any other needed packages resolution of dependencies If you unknowingly select conflicting packages the package manager indicates this and submits sugges tions for solving the problem resolution of conflicts If a package needed by other installed packages is accidentally marked for deletion the package man ager issues an alert with detailed information and alternative solutions Apart from these purely technical aspects the package manager provides a well structured overview of the range of packages in SuSE Linux The pack ages are arranged by subjects and the display of these groups is restricted by means of suitable filters Thus the package manager facilitates the management of software packages and is a valuable tool for maintaining your system UOILOINBYUOD ISOA The Package Manager To change the software selection on your system
277. fic problems and trou bleshooting hints consult the Support Database If you have problems with your printer check the Support Database articles Installing a Printer and Printer Configuration with SuSE Linux 9 0 and Later which you can find by searching for the keyword installation or online at http sdb suse de de sdb html jsmeix print einrichten html SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 7 72 http sdb suse de de sdb html jsmeix_print einrichten 82 html The most important issues of the current version are summarized in a central article Known Problems and Special Features in SuSE Linux 9 0 3 4 3 Hard Disk Controller Normally YaST configures the hard disk controller of your system during the installation If you add controllers integrate these into the system with this YaST module You can also modify the existing configuration but this is generally not necessary The dialog presents a list of detected hard disk controllers and enables the as signment of the suitable kernel module with specific parameters Use Test Loading of Module to check if the current settings work before they are saved permanently in the system Caution This is an expert tool Do not modify the settings unless you know what you are doing Your system may no longer boot if you specify incorrect settings In any case you should make use of the test option Caution zd 3 4 A Graphics Card and Monitor SaX2 T
278. fields in the module contain a letter with a different color yellow by default Use Att to select the respective button directly without navigating there with Tab Exit the YaST Control Center by pressing Exit or by selecting Exit in the cate gory overview and pressing Enter 3 10 2 Restriction of Key Combinations If you have system wide key combinations when the X server is running the At combinations in YaST might not work Furthermore keys like Ait or might be occupied by the settings of the terminal Replacing Alf with Esc Alf shortcuts can be executed with instead of Alt For example H replaces H Replacing backward and forward navigation with F and BX If the and combinations are occupied by the window manager or the terminal the combinations E forward and backward can be used instead Restricted function keys The F keys are also used for functions Certain func tion keys can be occupied by the terminal so might not be available for SuSE Linux User Guide 121 122 YasT However the key combinations and the F keys should always be fully available on a pure text console The following paragraphs assume that the key combinations are functional 3 10 3 Module Operation Navigating Buttons and Selection Lists Tab and Art Tab navigate back and forth among buttons and frames Navigating in Selection Lists 1 and Q always navigate amon
279. fig if you do not know exactly what you are doing as this could seriously inhibit the operability of your system Caution More information is provided in the Administration Guide under The Boot Con cept SuSE Linux User Guide 117 118 3 8 10 Time Zone Selection The time zone was already set during the installation but you can make changes here Click your country or region in the list and select Local time or GMT Greenwich Mean Time GMT is often used in Linux systems Machines with additional operating systems such as Microsoft Windows mostly use the local time 3 8 11 Language Selection Here select the language for your Linux system The language can be changed at any time The language selected in YaST applies to the entire system including YaST and the desktop environment KDE 3 3 8 12 Keyboard Layout Selection Note Only use this module if you work on a system without the X Window System and a graphical user interface If you use a graphical system such as KDE set up the keyboard with the module Display and Input Devices See Section Graphics Card and Monitor SaX2 on page 72 Note The desired keyboard layout usually matches the selected language Use the test field to see if special characters such as the pipe symbol are displayed correctly 3 9 Miscellaneous 3 9 Submitting a Support Request By purchasing SuSE Linux you are entitled to free
280. final dialog SuSE Linux User Guide 41 42 tran Put the hardware settings into effect by pressing Next Change the values by clicking on the respective headline or by using the Change menu Hardware Configuration Skip Configuration Use Following Configuration NVidia RIVA TNT2 nv Connected to Monitor BELINEA 105035 1024x768 16 bit 3D Acceleration Disabled Printers CUPS Client Only Configuration using server print dhs suse de Sound Creative Sound Blaster AudioPCI64V AudioPC1128 Configured as snd card 0 TV cards Not detected Change Back Abort Installation Figure 2 19 Configuring the System Components 2 8 Graphical Login SuSE Linux is now installed and ready for your first login On your screen you should see the graphical login as shown in Figure 2 20 on the next page Enter the user name created during installation then the respective password 2 8 Graphical Login Welcome to SuSE Linux on linux Login OR Password H E Session Type S EE moo Figure 2 20 The Login Screen SuSE Linux User Guide UOID OISU peugeqr esf 43 Part Il Configuration YaST Configuration YasT the setup tool used for the installation is also the configuration tool for SuSE Linux This chapter covers the configuration of your system with Yast This includes most of the hardware the graphical user in
281. folder list that appears select the folder Use New to create a new folder Click OK when the correct folder is selected When finished creat ing the filter click OK Creating a Filter from a Message Select the message on which to base the filter Right click and select Create Rule From Message Select the desired filter option This opens the filter creation di alog with the correct criteria already selected Add additional criteria if desired Select the appropriate filter action Click OK when finished Applying Filters Filters are applied in the order listed in the dialog under Tools Filters Change the order by highlighting a filter and clicking Up or Down Click OK to close the filter dialog when finished Filters are applied to all new mail messages They are not applied to mail al ready in your folders To apply filters to messages already received select the desired messages then select Actions gt Apply Filters 16 4 7 Virtual Folders VFolders are a unique feature of Evolution A VFolder is a virtual folder that dis plays messages based on search or filter criteria Rather than moving the mes sages into a folder messages shown in a virtual folder remain in their original folder Actions are applied to the message in the original folder VFolders are a useful means of reading new mail in one place after it has been sorted into a number of differe
282. following section describes the efficient utilization and configuration of the desktop environment the file manager Konqueror and some small but useful utilities 41 Desktop Components 2 622299 a 126 A2 DENES oi uu Bt ok eh A tede el 133 4 3 Konqueror asa File Manager 142 44 Important Utilities o o aa s sa d mde RERO 145 doptseg Fay eui 126 4 1 Desktop Components The graphical desktop environment should not pose any problems for former Windows or Macintosh users The main components are the icons on the desk top and the panel at the bottom of the screen The mouse is your most important tool Click a symbol or an icon once with the left mouse button to start the as sociated program or the file manager Konqueror If you click an icon with the right mouse button different menus appear depending on the program As well as the icons there are two desktop menus 4 1 1 The Desktop Menus If you click the desktop with the middle mouse button if your mouse only has two buttons press both buttons at the same time a window and desktop man agement menu are displayed If you keep the mouse button pressed you can select a menu item directly Alternatively release the mouse button and click the respective menu item Unclutter Windows If you have several windows on your desktop these are placed next to each other and aligned with the top left corner Cascade Windows Starting from the top left corner the window
283. for fast and efficient work Explore File gt Preferences to see the range of options available Once you are more familiar with GIMP experiment with the various settings Refer to the internal help system for advice An important setting is the multilevel Undo function which allows you to undo recent actions To use it select Edit gt Undo in the context menu or press Z Under File Preferences gt Environment set the number of undo steps Tip Many functions or tool settings have their own windows that you can open and close as needed On a larger screen leave frequently needed dialog windows open without any problem dNID SUL ULM saludos Tip Tear off menus are another feature of GIMP Whenever a menu shows a dotted line on top click this line detaching the menu from the larger context menu The menu is then displayed on your desktop in its own window 23 3 5 Layers Layers are crucial to using GIMP effectively They allow you to arrange image contents and more easily edit and modify your image To store layer informa tion when saving a file save in GIMP s native format XCF As well as preserv ing layer information it also saves GIMP features such as the location of guides To understand how layers work imagine an image created from a stack of trans parent sheets Different parts of the image are drawn on different sheets The stack can be rearranged
284. frames The many editing tools are all equipped with tool tips and should therefore be quite easy to use Undo History which can be accessed with View His tory is a useful feature for viewing recent editing steps and undoing them by clicking the respective item in the list Use Discard with caution because it deletes editing steps from the list Subsequently these steps can no longer be undone The built in spectrum analyzer assists in quickly tracking down any noises View the spectrum of the selected segment with View Plot Spectrum Se lect a logarithmic frequency scale in octaves with Log frequency If you move the mouse pointer within the spectrum the frequencies of the peaks are auto matically displayed together with the respective notes Unwanted frequencies are best removed with Effect gt FFT Filter In connec tion with the filtering process it may be necessary to readjust the signal ampli SuSE Linux User Guide 295 Cursor 587 Hz D4 10 dB Peak 623 Hz D 4 Spectrum El 1024 El Export Hanning window Log frequency Close Figure 18 11 The Spectrum tude with Amplify Additionally Amplify can be used to check the ampli tude By default the New Peak Amplitude is set to 0 0 dB This value repre sents the highest possible amplitude in the selected audio format Amplifica tion shows the value needed to amplify t
285. function In rare cases programs interfere with each other causing conflicts When selecting and deselecting software packages in this dialog alerts about unresolved pack age dependencies or conflicts may be displayed If you install SuSE Linux for the first time or if you do not understand the alerts read Section Installing and Removing Software on page 51 which provides detailed information about the operation of the package manager and a brief summary of the software organi zation in Linux M Caution The software preselected for installation is based on our long standing experience and is usually suitable for the needs of most newcomers and advanced home users In general there is no need to change anything here However if you decide to select or deselect any packages you should be aware of the consequences In particular observe any warnings and avoid deselecting any packages of the base system Caution Exiting the Software Selection If you are satisfied with your software selection and there are no more unre solved package dependencies or conflicts click Accept to apply your changes and exit the program If this module is started in the installed system the changes are applied immediately During the installation however the changes are recorded internally and applied later when the actual installation starts 2 5 Installation Suggestion 2 5 7 Boot Configuration Boot Loader Installation During the
286. g A few seconds after starting the installation SuSE Linux loads a minimal ve Linux system which takes control and performs the installation A number of messages and copyright notices are displayed then at the end of the loading process the YaST installation program is started After a few more seconds the screen should display the graphical interface that will guide you through the installation The YasT screens have a common format All buttons entry fields and lists can be accessed with the mouse If your mouse pointer does not move the mouse has not been correctly detected In this case use the keyboard for navigation 2 2 The Boot Screen 2 3 Language Selection Select the language to use for SuSE Linux and YaST English is the default setting for the international distribution If your mouse does not work navigate with the arrow keys until the desired language is selected After this press until Next is highlighted Then press to confirm your language selection o Language Welcome to YaST2 the SuSE Linux Selection installation and system administration program Select your language Installation anon al Settings Deutsch a English GB Espa ol Perform acc Installation EANnv LK Italiano EE Ta Lietuvi Magyar Nederlands Portugu s brasileiro Pycckui fi chc Sloven ina Sloven ina h Svenska Li SN ES H Y Help Abort Installation Figure 2 2 Selecting the Language
287. g Cancel Lock Screen If you leave your workstation you can blacken your screen or start a screensaver To restore the session view enter your normal login password In this way make sure no one reads or manipulates your docu ments or e mail messages Start New Session To start a second session with a graphical user interface on your machine select Start New Session from the main menu Your cur rent session remains active while you are taken to the login screen Log in anew You can also start another window manager You can access the first session by simultaneously pressing Ctrl Alf and F7 If you press F8 in stead of F7 you will be taken to the new session Additional sessions can be accessed by pressing Ctrl Att and F9 to F12 Run Command A dialog window allows you to enter a command In this way you can easily start applications whose name you know without having to navigate through the applications menu Bookmarks By way of this menu start the bookmark editor with Edit Book marks for the purpose of managing your bookmarks If you select a book mark from the menu the browser starts and loads the desired URL Search Search starts the program KFind Use Help to access the program manual which provides information about all details If you forget where a certain file is enter it in the Named field and start a search in your home directory This default setting can be c
288. g in to the host with the login name and password The user pro file can be fine tuned with Details You can manually set the user ID the home directory and the default login shell Furthermore the new user can be assigned to specific groups Configure the validity of the password in Password settings Click Edit to change these settings whenever necessary To delete a user select the user from the list and click Delete For advanced network administration use Expert Options to define the default settings for the creation of new users Select the authentication method NIS LDAP Kerberos or Samba as well as the algorithm for the password encryp tion These settings are relevant for large corporate networks 3 7 2 Group Administration Start the group administration module from the YaST Control Center or click Groups in the user administration Both dialogs have the same functionality allowing you to create edit or delete groups SuSE Linux User Guide 103 104 Linux is a multluser system Several User and Group Administration different users can be logged in the system atthe same time To avoid E Users Q Groups Filter Local Users confusion each user must have a unique identity if they want to use Linux ans i Furthermore every user at least belongs geeko TuX SuSE 1000 users uucp dialout audio video to one group Lo In this dialog you can get information about exist
289. g ma chine the maximum duration of a recorded incoming call in seconds This value is usually of secondary importance as the recording is usually terminated when the caller hangs up However to avoid extensive record ings this value should be set to a reasonable time such as two minutes 120 seconds Action The answering machine features various processing options for in coming messages The default setting MailAndSave records a mes sage saves it in the system and delivers it to the user as by e mail The SaveOnly option can be chosen if the reception of e mails is not desired SuSE Linux User Guide uouooiunuduloo2eJe NASI 275 It merely saves the message to the hard disk This option is only recom mended for expert users The None option completely deactivates the recording of messages It only plays the welcome message and then hangs up PIN Enter a personal identification number PIN for remote access in the field A numerical code of any length can be entered If it is entered dur ing playback of the welcome message the user is taken to the remote ac cess menu The remote access feature is disabled if the field is left empty OK accepts the changes Cancel closes the dialog box without applying any changes 17 3 Usage The following section briefly describes the use of the system Following a short introduction to the reception of messages with the Linux mail system a descrip
290. g of software on your machine The following paragraphs provide some background information about the management of software Background Information about Software in Linux In Linux software is available in the form of packages Normally a package contains everything needed for a program such as an editor a compiler and so SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 51 52 EGD Online Update SuSE YaST Online Update YOU isthe easy Welcome to YaST Online Update way to get all recommended patches and security fixes from a SuSE update server j System Information If Manually Select Patches is checked all available patches will be shown from There was no update executed up to now which to select the patches to install If Reload All Patches from Server is Product SuSE Linux checked all patches will be fetched from the server even when they already are Version 8 2 99 locally available from a previous Base Architecture i386 download After clicking New Server select a local O installation source instead of an FTP or HTTP server or select another FTP or Installation source HTTP server Click Edit Server to edit the location ihe selects d server http ifto leo org downtoad pub comp ostunix linux suse suse y Clicking Configure Fully Automatic Location Update opens a dialog in which to http iftip Ieo org download pub comp os unix linux suse suse configure YOU to check for update
291. g the single items within an activated frame containing a selection list These can for instance be the single modules of a module group in the control center Checking Radio Buttons and Check Boxes Buttons with empty square brackets check box or empty parentheses radio buttons can be selected with or Enter The buttons at the bottom of the individual modules are activated with when selected green background or with the combination yellow letter Refer to Figure 3 33 on the next page The Function Keys Various functions are mapped to the F keys F1 to F12 Which F keys are actually mapped to functions depends on which YasT module is active because the different modules offer different buttons such as details info add and delete The buttons OK Next and Fin ish are mapped to F10 The YaST help which can be accessed with F1 provides information about the functions of the individual F keys 3 10 4 Starting Individual Modules To save time the individual YaST modules can also be started directly To start the modules enter yast followed by the name of the module 3 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses UOHDINBYUOD ISOA Session Edit View Bookmarks Settings Help li A New ai Shell ill Shell no 2 dili Shell No 3 Figure 3 33 The Software Installation Module SuSE Linux User Guide 123 The KDE Desktop As the graphical interface KDE is very intuitive to use the
292. g will be written idev sdb2 65GB Extended 2e idu to your hard disk until you confirm the dev isdb5 235MB Linux native 255 257 entire installation in the last installation eiewaan anim Mn Linux ep aped ET E devsdb 63GB Linux native 291 1114 abort the installation For LVM setup using a non LVM root device and a non L M swap device is recommended Other than the root and swap devices you should have partitions managed by LVM The table to the right shows the current partitions on all your hard disks Hard disks are designated lie this dev hda 1st EIDE disk devihdb 2nd EIDE disk devindc 3rd EIDE disk etc ud Greate J Edit j Delete J Resize devisda 1st SCSI disk devisdb 2nd SCSI disk dev sdc 3rd SCSI disk LM BAD J Crypt File J Expert t Figure 2 8 The YaST Partitioner in Expert Mode All existing or suggested partitions on all connected hard disks are displayed in the list of the expert dialog Entire hard disks are listed as devices without numbers such as dev hda or dev sda Partitions are listed as parts of these devices such as dev hda1 or dev sda1 The size type file system and mount point of the hard disks and their partitions are also displayed The mount point describes where the partition is mounted in the Linux file system tree Any free hard disk space is also listed and automatically selected To allocate ad ditional storage space to vv Linux free the needed space st
293. g with files or directories it is important specify the correct path However you do not need to enter the entire absolute path from the root di rectory to the respective file Rather you can start from the current directory Address your home directory directly with Accordingly there are two ways to list the file Test file in the directory test by entering the relative path with 1s test or by specifying the absolute path with 1s test To list the contents of home directories of other users enter 1s username In the above mentioned directory tree one of the sample users is tux Thus the command 1s tux would list the contents of the home directory of tux Refer to the current directory with a dot The next higher level in the tree is rep resented by two dots By entering 1s see the contents of the parent direc tory of the current directory The command 1s shows the contents of the directory two levels higher in the hierarchy Second Example Working with Paths Here is another example to illustrate how to move around in the directories of your SuSE Linux system Change into your home directory with the command cd Then create a directory in it with the name test2 by entering mkdir test2 Change into the new directory with cd test2 and create a subdirectory in it with the name subdi rectory To change into it use the expansion function enter cd su then press Tab The shell will expand the rest of the di
294. gddy IION 30 SUL IONX 246 15 1 Mail Formats KMail can save messages in the following formats mbox This traditional UNIX format the oldest saves all messages in a single file Directories are also simulated by means of individual files The indi vidual mails can only be distinguished by the From line MailDir In contrast to the mbox format the MailDir format has a unique file name for every message The messages are stored in the respective di rectories and can easily be identified and further processed KMail uses the MailDir format as the more convenient alternative by default but MailDir is not supported by many other e mail programs This can bea disadvantage if you want to switch to a different e mail programm later and still access your old e mails Processing old mails in mbox format is no problem however if you select MailDir Just copy or move the files to the MailDir folder 15 2 AccessTypes KMail allows you to access your electronic mail in various ways The access type largely depends on your Internet Service Provider ISP or mail server The main access types are POP3 and IMAP POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3 POP3 is a standardized procedure for receiving e mail A POP3 server stores the messages until the user retrieves them with a POP3 client in this case KMail This method is used frequently by Internet Service Providers ISPs IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol With IMAP e mail mes
295. gh Details are set to optimal values by default 5 2 8 Theme doptseq 3INONO SUL The style for all control elements on the desktop and of GNOME applications is set here There is a choice of various preinstalled themes Selecting a style in the list overview makes GNOME apply it automatically Details opens another dialog in which to customize the style of single desktop elements like window content window borders and icons Making changes and leaving the dialog with Close switches the theme to Custom theme Click Save theme to save your modified theme under a custom name The Internet and other sources pro vide many additional themes for GNOME as tar gz files Install these with Install theme 5 2 9 Accessibility The settings of this module facilitate the use of the keyboard for users with mo tion impairments The module consists of the three tabs Basic Filters and Mouse Before modifying settings activate Enable keyboard accessibility fea tures Features The keyboard accessibility functions can be deactivated automatically after a certain time Set an appropriate time limit measured in seconds with the slider The system can additionally provide audible feedback when the keyboard accessibility functions are activated and deactivated Enable Sticky Keys Some keyboard shortcuts require that one key is kept pressed constantly this applies to Alt Ctrl or ft Shift wh
296. go to Frank Zappa and Pawar Special thanks of course to Linus Torvalds Have a lot of fun Your SuSE Team SuSE Linux User Guide Part Installation Quick Installation In the best case a few clicks are sufficient to install SuSE Linux on your com puter If no Linux system was installed on your computer previously your hard disk is automatically partitioned an installed Windows system 95 98 or ME is resized a software selection is installed and your hardware is configured auto matically If you do not like the suggestions of the system assistant YaST Yet an other Setup Tool or have special requirements for your system change the indi vidual installation suggestions manually as described in Chapter User Defined Installation on page 13 LI Step One The Stari Sres 1 2 Step Two Accept Suggestions 13 Step Three Installation lt lt lt 14 Configuration coses deme IRE NO oO 00 UOIPO JOJSU AONO 1 1 Step One The Start Screen Turn on your computer and all connected hardware components and immedi ately insert CD 1 or the DVD in the respective drive In the start screen select an installation mode or boot an installed operating system Following the suc cessful installation the CD only needs to be inserted in the drive occasionally to install additional software As the CD can be forgotten in the drive the option to boot the installed system is preselected For ins
297. h the X to the very right of the tab bar Right click a tab to open context menu that offers several related actions such as closing the tab or closing all other tabs 13 3 Preferences Many often needed browser settings are available in the dialog that opens when you select Edit gt Preferences Appearance Under this entry set the fonts and colors the browser should use select a theme and switch between the German and the English language version SuSE Linux User Guide JOSMOIG ASM DINIZON SUL 231 232 Preferences O EOS Category N z b Appearance SS When Navigator starts up display History Languages O Blank page Helper Applications 9 Home page Smart Browsing O Last page visited Internet Search Tabbed Browsing r Home Page Downloads Clicking the Home button takes you to this page or group of pages D Composer D Mail amp Newsgroups Location http mozilla kairo at Choose File Privacy Secunty Use Current Page Use Current Group Restore Default D Advanced L Offline amp Disk Space r Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars Y Bookmarks 7 Search O Go Print E Home Figure 13 2 Preferences Navigator The first thing that can be changed under this entry is the start page for the browser Configure Mozilla to start with a blank page the home page as defined below which may be your organization s in
298. h a network preconfigured Level 3 is for a server with a network preconfigured Use Custom Settings for your own configuration If you click one of the first three items you incorporate one of the levels of pre configured system security options To do this simply click Finish Under De tails you can access the individual settings that can be modified If you choose Custom settings proceed to the different dialogs with Next Here find the default installation values 3 7 Security and Users 5 YaST SuSE Linux is a multiuser system Several User and Group Administration different users can be logged in the system atthe same time To avoid O Users 5 Groups Filter Local Groups confusion each user must have a unique identity if they want to use Linux Furthermore every user at least belongs to one group Group name Group ID Group members In this dialog you can get information about existing groups To shiftto the user dialog select Users To create a new group push the button To edit or delete an existing group select one group from the list and push the button Edit or Delete Users and groups are arranged in various sets Change the set currently shown in the table with Set Filter Customize your view filter with Customize Filter UOILOINBYUOD ISOA To save the modified user and group setting to your system press Finish Add Edit Delete L SetFi
299. h different letters on them These buttons allow quick access to additional menus dialog boxes and configurations The playlist can be opened with the PL button and the equal izer can be activated with the EQ button 18 3 2 kscd Audio CD Player kscd is an easy to use audio CD player It can be accessed from the SuSE menu under Multimedia gt CD KsCD To access the configuration menu click the tool icon kscd can be configured to search an online CDDB server for the name and track names of a CD 18 3 3 The Audio CD Player WorkMan WorkMan offers a simple user interface with an abundance of functions It is ideal for those who prefer a CD player without the KDE look and feel 18 3 4 GNOME CD Player Applet This is a simple applet that can be added to a GNOME panel Add it by right clicking the panel and selecting Add to Panel gt Multimedia gt CD Player 18 3 Players OpenGL Spectrum Analyzer xnur ui punos X MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM 20db PREAMP 60 170 310 600 IK 3K A I4K 16K Figure 18 7 XMMS with Equalizer OpenGL Spectrum Analyzer and Infinity Plug Ins 18 4 Buffering and Latencies This section explains how uninterrupted audio playback can be ensured This problem is by no means limited to Linux but is inherent in all multitasking op erating systems In a multitasking operating system several processes usually
300. h the arrows See Figure 3 14 on the next page If you have a multihead envi ronment more than one screen use Next screen to switch to the other moni tors to adjust their size and position Press Save to save your settings SuSE Linux User Guide 77 78 Step size Change Position Change Size e ha 7 Figure 3 14 Adjusting the Image Geometry Caution There are safety mechanisms but you should still be very careful when manually changing the allowed frequencies False values may destroy your monitor If in doubt refer to the manual of the monitor Caution Multihead If you have installed more than one graphics card in your computer or a graph ics card with multiple outputs you can connect more than one screen to your system If you operate two screens this is referred to as dualhead More than two is referred to as multihead SaX2 automatically detects multiple graphics cards in the system and prepares the configuration accordingly Set the multi head mode and the arrangement of the screens in the multihead dialog Three modes are offered Traditional default One screen Xinerama and Clone mode Traditional multihead Each monitor represents an individual unit The mouse pointer can switch between the screens a Cloned multihead In this mode all monitors display the same con tents The mouse is only visible on the main screen
301. h the notice that it was signed by you 15 9 2 Checking the Signature of a Received Message If KMail is able to verify the signature of an e mail a green frame with the key ID is displayed If the signature cannot be verified a yellow frame with an alert is displayed This means that you do not have a suitable public key for the sig nature SuSE Linux User Guide uoupolgddy IION 309 SUL IONX 255 15 9 3 Sending Public Keys Create a message for the person who should receive your public key Choose Attach gt Attach Public Key The mail can then be sent There is no guarantee that the recipient of a signed message receives the correct key It is possible that the mail is intercepted on the way to the recipient and is signed with another key Therefore the recipient should check the attached key by comparing the finger print with a previously received value Further information about this can be found in the PGP and GnuPG documentation 15 9 4 Decoding Encrypted Messages In KMail select the message to decrypt Enter your password when prompted KMail attempts to decrypt the message If it was encrypted with your public key KMail displays it in clear text If not you cannot read the e mail message KMail saves these e mail messages encrypted to prevent anyone from reading them without your password 15 9 5 Encrypting Your Own Messages To send an encrypted message to a recipient for whom you have the public
302. hanged to a different direc tory such as Documents by clicking Browse If you are not sure what the exact file name is use wild cards If you can remember that the file name contains the character string blubb simply enter blubb This tells the program that blubb can be preceded and followed by any char acters Use the tabs at the top left of the window to change to Contents and Properties In Contents use File type to limit the search to files or di rectories or search for the content of the document If you enter a keyword of the document for which you are looking in Containing text all texts containing this word will be displayed Click the respective file to load it directly Save as allows you to save the file under a new name in a different directory The original file is retained 4 1 Desktop Components Search criteria can be specified in the Properties dialog You can limit your search to files that were modified or created recently or to files that belong to a specific user or group 4 1 7 The Windows The windows of all KDE applications have the same structure The title bar fea tures four buttons in the right corner The question mark provides access to con text help If you click the question mark and subsequently an icon of the appli cation a short help text is displayed The button with the black dash minimizes the window A minimized window is placed in the pane
303. have been enabled 2 A backup operation performs a full backup of all data stored on the hand held Some conduits need to open certain files during a sync operation which means the corresponding program should not be running at the given time Specifi cally KOrganizer should not be running during a sync operation 8 2 Conduits Used by KPilot The conduits used by KPilot can be enabled and configured after selecting Set tings gt Configure Conduits The following conduits are available KDE Addressbook Conduit This conduit handles the data exchange with the handheld s address book The KDE counterpart is KAddressBook Start it from the main menu or with the command kaddressbook 8 1 KPilot Basics KPilot KNotes Conduit This conduit allows you to transfer notes created with KNotes to the handheld s memo application Start the KDE application from the main menu or with the command knotes KPilot Expenses Conduit This conduits allows you to transfer data from the handheld s expenses program to the desktop computer Data can be imported as a comma separated list CSV format or directly into a PostgreSQL or MySQL database table KOrganizer Todo Conduit KOrganizer Calendar Conduit These two conduits are responsible for syncing with the to do and cal endar applications of the handheld The desktop equivalent for these applications is KOrganizer For more information refer to Section Schedul ing with KOrganizer on
304. he graphical user interface or X server handles the communication between hardware and software Desktops like KDE and GNOME and the wide variety of window managers use the X server for interaction with the user The graphical user interface is initially configured during installation To change the settings afterwards run this YaST module In the configuration dialog choose between Text mode only and the graphical user interface The current settings are saved and you can reset to them at any time The current values are displayed and offered for modification the screen resolution the color depth the refresh rate and the vendor and type of your monitor if it was autodetected If you have just installed a new graphics card a small dialog appears asking whether to activate 3D acceleration for your graphics card Click Edit SaX2 the configuration tool for the input and display devices is started in a separate window This window is shown in Figure 3 9 on the next page 3 4 Hardware El E XI File Help Nx Component Y f d x i aa Desktop i SaX2 Extended X11 Configuration Sp bp Monitor Welcome to the SuSE X11 Configuration Manager Graphics card XFree86 Version 4 2 0 X Window System Color and Resolution Virtual Resolution Selected component Desktop i 3D Acceleration Available configuration components are i i Geometry E O T Multihead z Color an J Multihead Mode
305. he leftmost table column shows the current status of each package Two status flags are especially relevant for the installa tion Install the box in front of the package name is checked and Do Not Install the box is empty To select or deselect individual software packages click the status box until the desired status is displayed Alternatively right click the package line to access a pop up menu listing var ious status options However the other status settings are not needed for the installation They are described in detailed in Section Installing and Removing Software on page 51 SuSE Linux User Guide 31 32 Other Filters Click the filter selection box to view the range of possible filters The selection according to Package Groups can also be used for the installation This filter sorts the program packages by subjects in a tree structure to the left The more you expand the branches the more specific the selection of packages is and the fewer packages that are displayed in the list of associated packages to the right Use Search to search for a specific package This is explained in detail in Sec tion Installing and Removing Software on page 51 Package Dependencies and Conflicts Instead of rewriting the same basic functions in each software package pro grammers access the functions of other packages For this reason many pack ages require that other packages are installed for the programs to
306. he respective levels are dis played in the Digital Mixer For each output channel the Patchbay contains a row of radio buttons for selecting the desired channel source Analog Inputs and Outputs Adjust the amplification for the analog to digital and digital to analog convert ers under Analog Volume The DAC sliders are used for the output channels and the ADC sliders are used for the input channels Use the radio buttons to switch the levels between 4 dBu and 10 dBV The first setting is intended for audio professionals The latter is for private purposes 18 2 8 Configuration of the S PDIF Channels The S PDIF channel settings are made under Hardware Settings The Envy24 chip reacts to volume changes with a delay that can be configured with Volume Change 288 18 2 Mixers DAC 0 DAC 1 DAC 2 pi DAC 4 DAC 5 FDAC amp pDAC 7 rADC 0 rADC 1 xnur ui punog A 4dBu 4dBu v 100BY 100BY Figure 18 5 Mixer for Analog Inputs and Outputs 18 3 Players Linux offers a variety of programs for playing audio CDs and various music for mats such as MP3 OGG and WAV files Where possible the supported formats of the players are listed 18 3 1 XMMS An MP3 WAV OGG and Stream Player XMMS is a full blown audio player with robust jitter resistance The application is easy to use The button for displaying the menu is locat
307. he section explaining the installation procedure Therefore the following paragraphs only cover update specific settings SuSE Linux User Guide 59 60 Dependency Conflict sendmail 8 12 9 66 conflict Conflicts with postfix conflicts with sendmail sendmail conflicts with postfix Conflict Resolution LO Do Not Install sendmail lO Remove the Conflicting Package i Delete postfix iO Ignore Conflict and Risk System Inconsistencies OK Try Again Ignore All Expert w Cancel A ta a Figure 3 5 Conflict Management of the Package Manager Selected for Update In case several versions of SuSE Linux are installed on your system this item enables you to select a partition for the update from the list Update Options Here set the update method for your system Two options are available See Figure 3 7 on page 62 Update with Installation of new Software To update the entire system to the latest software versions you can select one of the predefined selections These selections are the same as those offered during the installation They make sure new packages that did not exist previously are also installed Only Update Installed Packages This option merely updates packages that already exist on the system No new features will be installed Additionally you can use Delete Outdated Packages to remove packages that do not exist in the new version By default this option is preselected to prevent out
308. he selected segment to this peak am plitude A negative value indicates overamplification 18 6 3 Saving and Exporting To save the entire project select File gt Save Project or Save Project As This generates an XML file with the extension aup which describes the project The actual audio data is saved in a directory named after the project with data appended The entire project or the currently selected segment can also be exported as a stereo WAV file To export the project in MP3 format refer to the information in Section 18 8 296 18 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity 18 7 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files arecord and aplay can be used to record and play audio data in the WAV format and other formats The command arecord d 10 f cd t wav mysong wav records a WAV file of ten seconds in CD quality 16 bit 44 1 kHz List all options of arecord and aplay by running them with the help option Xnur ui punos qaRecord is a simple recording program with a graphical interface and level display As this program makes use of an internal buffer of about 1 MB config urable with buffersize itenables uninterrupted recordings even on slow hardware especially if it is run with real time priority see Section 18 4 Dur ing the recording the currently used buffer size is displayed in the status line under Buffer and the maximum buffer size required so far for this recording is displayed
309. helpful if the boot configuration of your system is damaged The rescue disk is especially necessary if the file system of the root partition is damaged In this case you might also need the module disk with various drivers to be able to access the system e g to access a RAID system Standard boot disk Use this option to create a standard boot disk with which to boot an installed system This disk is also needed for starting the rescue system Rescue disk This disk contains a special environment that allows you to per form maintenance tasks in your installed system such as checking and repairing file system and updating the boot loader To start the rescue system boot with the standard boot disk and select Manual Installation Start Installation System and Rescue System You will then be prompted to insert the rescue disk If your system was configured to use special drivers such as RAID or USB you might need to load the respective modules from a module disk 3 8 System e Er To create a boot modules or rescue Create boot or rescue floppies floppy select the appropriate item from the list and click Next to continue Boot Floppy This boot floppy can be used to boot your installed system or a rescue system from the first CD ROM orthe rescue floppy Rescue Floppy To start the rescue system boot from the bootfloppy orthe SuSE CD ROM and Floppy Image select Manual i
310. hical objects available in Draw can be modified in various aspects such as line thickness line type color and fill Try to draw a rectangle In the main toolbar which is displayed on the left hand side click the filled rectangle button fifth from top and keep the mouse button pressed for a few seconds until an additional toolbar opens The latter includes a selection of filled and unfilled rectangles and squares some of them with rounded corners Select one of the filled rectangles The mouse cursor should turn into a cross Now move the cursor to the canvas and click it dragging the mouse towards the bottom right Draw will show the outline of a rectangle that is reshaped as you move When you are satisfied with the size of the object re lease the mouse button The properties of the rectangle such as its fill color can be modified with the following steps First activate the object with a single click This should enable the green handles on the rectangle s corners and edges which allow you to re shape and resize it Next open the context menu by pressing the right mouse button After selecting Area a dialog opens in which to change various properties When you are done with your modifications click OK As an al ternative method to change the fill color select one directly in the object bar at the top to the right of the paintbucket There are many more useful drawing objects available in the toolbar Use it to
311. his user is permitted to modify the Linux system files If for any reason YAST cannot be started as described above it can be started from the command line In the shell change to the user root with sux Enter the root password and run the command yast2 Tip To change the language of YaST select System Select Language in the YaST Control Center Choose a language exit the YaST Control Center log out from your computer then log in and restart YaST Tip 3 2 The YaST Control Center When you start YaST in the graphical mode the YaST Control Center as shown in Figure 3 1 on the facing page opens The left frame features the categories Software Hardware Network Devices Network Services Security z Users System and Miscellaneous If you click one of icons the respective contents are listed on the right hand side For example if you select Hardware and click Sound to the right a configuration dialog opens for the sound card The configuration of the individual items usually comprises several steps Press Next to proceed to the following step The left frame displays a help text for the respective topic explaining the re quired entries After making the needed settings complete the procedure by pressing Finish in the last configuration dialog The configuration is then saved 3 1 Starting YaST Software Change Source
312. hod For network connections via a network card the ethernet protocol is used For modem and ISDN telephone connections it is the Point to Point Protocol PPP For ADSL and T DSL connections the Point to Point over Ethernet Protocol PPPoE is used To establish an Internet connection the ethernet PPP or PPPoE connection be tween your host and a host of the Internet provider must be established first Then the TCP IP connection must be established On top of TCP IP there are various standardized protocols for proper data transfer to the application The HyperText Transfer Protocol HTTP is used for the transfer of web sites in HyperText Markup Language HTML format The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is responsible for sending e mails to another machine and the Post Office Protocol POP3 for down loading e mails from a mail server The File Transfer Protocol FTP is used to transfer files For several application programs such as a web browser and an e mail pro gram to use the same Internet connection at the same time separate TCP IP connections are used for each application Large amounts of TCP IP data are also divided into small packets so HTTP packets from the web browser can be sent over its TCP IP connection while alternating with SMTP or POP3 packet transfers from the e mail program via other TCP IP connections 3 5 Network Devices As several applications use the same Internet connection the IP ad
313. hree symbols your personal folder the start di alog for the configuration of the desktop and the trash can If you double click your personal folder Nautilus starts and displays your home directory More in formation about the use of Nautilus is available in Section File Management with Nautilus on page 165 All files deleted with Nautilus are sent to the trash can Right clicking an icon displays a menu offering file operations like copying cutting or renaming Selecting Properties from the menu displays a configu ration dialog The title of an icon as well as the icon itself can be changed with Use custom icon The Emblems tab offers the possibility to add graphical de scriptive symbols to the icon The Permissions tab provides access to the ac cess read and write permission settings for this file for the user the group or others The Notes tab offers the management of comments The menu for the trash can additionally features the Empty Trashcan option This deletes its con tents To remove an icon from the desktop simply move it into the trash can How ever be careful with this option if you throw folder icons or file icons into the trash can the actual data is deleted If the icons only represent links to a file or to a directory only the links are deleted To create a link on the desktop to a folder or a file access the object in question with Nautilus Right click the object and select
314. ht KMid Cuil O rt fay 114 HT 2 o Elektrischer Bass Plektron w Bass Elektrischer Bass Plektron w elle Iud 3 O vorspiel 2 S gezahn He TA A TT z xnur ui punog Figure 18 15 Main Window and Channel View of kmid Tip If kmid is started by clicking a MIDI file in the KDE file manager Konqueror the MIDI settings specified in the KDE Control Center are applied If the program is started separately the settings specified in the program itself are applied Tip 18 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card Some sound cards do not have a WaveTable synthesizer for playing MIDI files with the loaded sound font or instrument patch In this case use a software SuSE Linux User Guide 303 304 WaveTable synthesizer like fluidsynth or timidity 18 10 1 The Sound Font Synthesizer fluidsynth After the program is started with a command like fluidsynth a alsa m alsa seq gm sf2 fluidsynth appears in the list of writable MIDI ports and can be used as sound source In this example gm s 2 is a file in the widely used SoundFont format Suitable files are avail able on the Internet fluidsynth has numerous command line options that can be displayed with fluidsynth h 18 10 2 Configuration of timidity timidity is configured by means of the configuration file usr share timidity timidity cfg View documentation for
315. i Editor SuSE Linux User Guide lleus eui ULM BUOM 377 Ergonomics in the Workplace This chapter is a short discussion of the ergonomic issues involved in the layout of computer workplaces This text should not be seen as a substitute for study ing the respective standards No citations from these are included here and foot notes with references to other literature are completely omitted to preserve read ability It attempts to summarize the latest research findings in a short and con cise manner however much will remain unmentioned The items referred to in each section are mostly gathered from German literature and are almost always based on regulations and policies in the Federal Republic of Germany This in formation is still useful in designing an ergonomic work area 25 1 The Working Environment 380 202 Ice Equipment 2459 eu a a Nome 385 25 3 Links and Literature sw dw a eal a ls 389 SOOI AGHIOM SUL ui soiuouo8173 380 25 1 The Working Environment If ergonomics specialists examined the home workstations of computer users systematically they would find many problems Unfortunately no standard has yet prevented individual users from buying so called special computer tables The low priced metal tube frames with practical rollers little stabil ity ergonomically retractable keyboard tray no wrist pad integrated PC case holder and printer stand with paper shelf little stacking s
316. ialog with all the configuration options available for KWrite This includes the color scheme and the fonts used settings for indentation text selection and word wrap shortcuts and high lighting options and some others The dialog also allows you to define a default view profile and to integrate an external spell check module Configure Shortcuts This opens a dialog in which to change the existing keyboard shortcuts or define custom shortcuts Configure Toolbars This opens a dialog in which to add and remove tool bar buttons 7 8 The Help Menu This menu gives access to the KWrite handbook Click What s This or use the shortcut Cf shift ED to invoke all available context sensitive tooltips 7 9 Kate The editor Kate provides further possibilities It is based on the same editor component as KWrite but supports concurrent editing of multiple files 194 7 7 The Settings Menu Sychronizing a Hand held Computer with KPilot Handheld computers are in widespread use nowadays among users who need to have their schedules to do lists and notes with them everywhere they go Often users want the same data to be available both on the desktop and on the portable device This is where KPilot comes in it is a tool to synchronize data on a handheld with that used by the KDE applications KAddressBook KOrganizer and KNotes 8 amp 1 KPilot Basics 26 eoi ooa noaa REGES 196 5 2 Conduite Used by KPIOT s iro Ex
317. ically in cluded in the left hand list under To do items The Summary column in this list shows the description Priority shows the value selected 9 4 Using the Calendar 9 4 4 Categories To manage your schedule group events and to dos according to certain cate gories Assign the scheduling items to one or several categories for instance if one of your items is related to job training you could assign it to both Busi ness and Education Categories can be assigned in the dialogs for the creation of new events and to dos after selecting Categories Create additional cate gories with Edit Categories 9 5 Printing Selecting File gt Print opens a dialog in which to define the calendar pe riod to print and the type of view to use To specify the period either enter the dates by hand or use the calendar available from the drop downs To use the print preview function you must have KGhostView installed Alternatively specify a different PostScript viewer such as Qv after selecting File gt Print gt Print System Options then going to the Preview item in the dia log 9 6 Address Book To store important contacts or to search for a contact open the address book by selecting File gt Addressbook In the address book window make a new entry by selecting File gt New Contact The KDE address book applicat
318. ics in the Workplace 379 25 1 The Working Environment ccoo ra m 380 2513 The Right Desk sue ee E cR mU RUE EUR S HEUS 380 25 1 2 Sitting Correctly on the Right Working Chair 381 25 1 3 Good Lighting for Productive Work 382 25 14 Optimum Climate o ooo o a 383 25 1 5 Too Much Noise Causes Stress ls 384 25 2 Office EGGIDMENE gt 2s need A EP SESS ss 385 25 251 Buying a Sereen oem obere vom SEX ce seda 385 254 2 Screen LOCATION qs xo osse RE Y X OX EIU 386 25 239 The Keyboard and th Wrists s sa sote g eek ee es 387 20 24 Liberating the Mouse 2a oom Rn 388 25 9 Links and Literature os osa 2 40544 dora ada 389 SuSE Linux User Guide xvii xviii A Help and Documentation A 1 Using the SuSE Help Center A 2 Contents of the SuSE Help Center A 3 The Search Function of the SuSE Help Center B SuSE Linux FAQ C Glossary Contents 391 391 392 393 395 401 Welcome Congratulations for selecting SuSE Linux A few clicks are all that is needed to prepare the installation which takes about fifteen to twenty minutes After con figuring the users and their passwords and selecting the screen resolution your SuSE Linux system is ready for use If you are familiar with earlier versions of SuSE Linux you will notice how much the configuration with the system assis tant YaST has been expanded and simplified The simple quick installation is explaine
319. iew Options Attach Tools Settings Help t Created Expiration O y Aea Soy a Lo le P 13 05 2003 11 03 18 13 05 2003 TV R 13 05 2003 11 033813 05 2003 10 13 05 2003 11 05 39 13 05 2003 cc 5 13 05 2003 11 05 47 13 05 2003 H Subject Desktop Sharing VNC invitation You have been invited to a VNC session If you have the KDE Ren Connection installed just click on the link below vnc invitationtUe eQO 910 10 100 189 0 Otherwise you can use any VNC client with the following paramete Cs CTI Column 1 Line 1 s Defaults amp Figure 4 8 Desktop Sharing with Invitation by E Mail 4 4 9 KSnapshot Taking Screenshots With KSnapshot you can create snapshots of your screen or special applica tions Start the program from the main menu or from the command line with the command ksnapshot The dialog window of KSnapshot consists of two parts see Figure 4 9 on the next page The upper area Current Snapshot contains a preview of the current screen and three buttons for creating and saving the screenshots In the lower part of the window determine further options for the actual creation of the screenshot To take a screenshot use the drop down menu Snapshot delay to determine the period in seconds to wait between the click on New Snapshot and the ac tual creation of the screenshot If Only grab the window cont
320. ile the rest of the shortcut is typed When sticky keys are used the system regards those keys as pressed after being hit once For an audible feedback gener ated each time a modifier key Cir or Alf is pressed activate Beep when modifier is pressed If Disable if two keys pressed together is selected the keys do not stick anymore once two keys are pressed simultaneously SuSE Linux User Guide 163 164 The system then assumes that the keyboard shortcut has been completely entered Repeat Keys Activate Repeat Keys to make settings with sliders for Delay and Speed This determines how long a key must be pressed for the au tomatic keyboard repeat function to be activated and at what speed the characters are then typed Test the effect of the settings in the field at the bottom of the dialog win dow Choose parameters that reflect your normal typing habits Enable Slow Keys To prevent accidental typing set a minimum time limit that a key must be pressed and held before it is recognized as valid input by the system Also determine whether audible feedback should be provided for keypress events accepted keypresses and the rejection of a keypress Enable Bounce Keys To prevent double typing set a minimum time limit for accepting two subsequent keypress events of the same key as the input of two individual characters If desired activate audible feedback upon rejection of a keypress event
321. illa Composer which allows you to edit web pages and to create your own from scratch Mozilla s online help documents include an intro duction to creating web pages which you may want to read as a primer on the topic The File menu also includes the Work Offline item which tells the browser to use only locally stored or cached web pages Edit includes the common editing operations such as Undo Cut Copy Paste and Delete There is also an item to search for words or text strings in web pages Find Previous repeats the previous search action The Preferences item opens a dialog in which to change the browser s configuration options The details of this are described in Sec tion Preferences on page 231 View The View menu includes items to display or hide the different elements of the browser and also to stop loading a web page or reload it There are also items to change the text zoom for the pages displayed and to change the character coding Another item in this menu lets you view the source of a web page This is the navigation menu with items to go Back or Forward in the page history or to jump to the Home page Selecting History from the menu opens a window thats lists the addresses of all the web pages re cently visited with the browser Bookmarks Use Bookmarks to create and edit bookmarks Bookmarks can be arranged in folders Any previ
322. in the dialog opened with Add Host Activate your settings with Apply and OK To start the actual search click the magnifying glass icon in the upper toolbar In the following dialog select a suitable search criterion phone number name e mail and enter the search string in the adjacent input field The result of your search appears in an overview below the search options To integrate the retrieved entries in your address book click the respective buttons You can also send an e mail message to all addresses found 214 10 4 Searching Address Data Search for Addresses in Directory DS r Search for Addresses in Directory Search for in Name 7 Recursive search Full Name Email Phone Number Mobile Number Fax Number Company Orge oogsseJpp y ym jueu1e8DUDb NA sseJoppv le IA e Add Selected j l Mail to Selected j Select All J l Unselect All J l Close j 4 Figure 10 4 Searching an LDAP Directory SuSE Linux User Guide 215 Part IV Internet The Web Browser Konqueror Konqueror is not only a versatile file manager It is also a modern web browser If you start the browser with the icon in the panel Konqueror opens with the web browser profile 111 Opening Web Pag s i R REGES 220 11 2 Saving Web Pages and Graphics 220 11 3 Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords 221 1145 Bookmarks cso 4k wo oe Rex RO 221 T5 Jav
323. ing product updates and release notes 2 6 4 Loading Software Updates If YaST was able to connect to the SuSE servers select whether to perform a YaST online update If there are any patched packages available on the servers you can download and install them now to fix known bugs or security issues Note The download of updates might take quite some time depending on the bandwidth of the Internet connection and on the size of the update files Note To perform a software update immediately select Perform Update Now and click OK This opens YaST s online update dialog with a list of the available patches if any which can be selected and loaded To learn about the process 2 6 Finishing the Installation Put the network settings into effect by Network Configuration pressing Next Change the values by clicking on the od ON respective headline or by using the Use Following Configuration Change menu Network interfaces D Link DFE 500TX Fast Ethernet Configured as eth with DHCP DSL Connections Not detected ISDN adapters Not detected Modems Not detected Proxy Proxy is disabled Remote Administration Remote Administration is disabled Change v Back Abort Installation Figure 2 14 Configuring the Network Devices read Section YaST Online Update on page 50 This kind of update can be per formed at any time after the installation If you prefer not to update now
324. ing users To shiftto the group dialog select Groups To create a new user push the button Add To edit or delete an existing user select one user from the list and click Edit or Delete Click Expert Options to edit various expert settings password encryption type user authentication method default values for new users or LDAP client configuration Users and groups are arranged in various sets Change the set currently shown in the table with Set Filter Customize your view filter with Customize Filter Add Edit Delete To save the modified user and group setting to your system press Finish L SetFilter w Customize Filter j Expert Options wj Back Abort Einish LI I Figure 3 23 User Administration YaST provides a list of all groups which greatly facilitates the group administra tion To delete a group select it from the list the line will be highlighted dark blue and click Delete Under Add and Edit enter the name group ID gid and members of the group in the respective YaST screen If desired set a pass word for the change to this group The filter settings are the same as in the User Administration dialog 3 7 3 Security Settings In the start screen Local security configuration which can be accessed under Security amp Users select one of the following four options Level 1 is for stand alone computers preconfigured Level 2 is for workstations wit
325. ings you can modify by starting the relevant module from the suggestion window This gives complete control over the installation 2 1 Starting Your System from the CD ROM 14 2 2 The Boot Sereen uud n db RO Roa 15 29 Language Selection o idit ernie e de ede ers 17 24 Installation Mode o 17 25 InstallationSuggestion lt lt 18 2 6 FinishingtheInstalation 34 27 Hardware Configuration 41 28 Graphical Login Gone dera E E 42 UO D OISU peugeqr esf 2 1 Starting Your System from the CD ROM Insert the first SuSE Linux CD or the DVD into the drive Then reboot the com puter to start the installation program from the medium in the drive 2 1 1 Possible Problems When Starting from the CD DVD If you experience problems booting from CD 1 one of the following items is probably the cause Resolve the problem as described The CD ROM drive is not able to read the boot image on the first CD In this case use CD 2 to boot the system CD 2 contains a conventional 2 88 MB boot image which can be read even by older drives The boot sequence in the BIOS Basic Input Output System is incorrect The BIOS is a software for activating the basic functions of a computer Motherboard vendors provide a BIOS that is adapted to the hardware Information about changing the BIOS settings is provided in the docu mentation of your motherboard and in the following
326. installation YaST proposes a boot configuration for your system Normally you should leave these settings unchanged However if you need a custom setup modify the proposal for your system One possibility is to configure the boot mechanism to rely on a special boot floppy Although this has the disadvantage of requiring the boot floppy in the drive for boot it allows you to leave an existing boot mechanism untouched This should not normally be necessary however because YaST can configure the SuSE Linux boot loader to boot existing operating systems as well Another pos sibility with the configuration is to change the location of the boot mechanism on hard disk To change the boot configuration proposed by YaST select Booting to open a dialog in which to change many details of the boot mechanism For information read Section Boot Loader Configuration with YaST on page 112 Note The boot method should only be changed by experienced computer users Note 2 5 8 Time Zone In this dialog shown in Figure 2 12 on the following page choose between Local Time and UTC under Hardware clock set to The selection depends on how the hardware BIOS clock is set on your machine If it is set to GMT which corresponds to UTC your system can rely on SuSE Linux to switch from stan dard time to daylight savings time and vice versa 2 5 9 Language The language was already selected at the beginning of the installation see Se
327. installation mode 1T A eee eee 101 installation scope ssssse 31 NS ess nae edt 117 installation source changing 49 safe settings icis 16 installation suggestion 18 Samba installing with 13 42 clients 101 7 E ACCESS ci PRELVED O 100 A O Scanner 1 cece eee eee neces 83 JOYSUCKS tien caved iia 83 SCPM nn nro non 116 keyboard 0 5 e eens 120 A A dete ed 103 108 keyboard layout 18 118 JEeuase 118 sendmail ers zoe receta nied 101 BARBE 0 is zx MN SEEN software esses 49 60 language selection 17 software updates 5 36 manual installation 16 memory test cecceeeeeeeeee 16 sound cards sssssssss 85 A 91 Starting soria nic 14 48 monitor settings oooooooooooo 72 SUP port request M ME HELLE 18 SAGES CLR LN EL EST 19 83 sysconfig editor PREIS 117 CULTOS 255 chaste dl eb ees 120 system repair sse 17 network card 0c eee eee eee 89 system security 0 00 104 network configuration 35 87 101 system start up seen 14 NFS client nnana 99 A AS 95 NFS server ccccccccccuccceucees 99 stextmode 25 23 5 ana 120 NIS client sss 38 time zone selection 118 NTP IV cards ioci e eee 87 clients eri despite ete 101 updating o
328. ion although linked with KOrganizer is an independent program Learn more about itin Chapter Address Management with KAddressBook on page 211 Address Book Browser KAddressBook E ies Ei pe Eile Edit View Settings Help Incremental search Given Name j aul e AQAA None sj f None 3 Given Name Family Name Email Address Figure 9 6 Using the Address Book with KOrganizer SuSE Linux User Guide J9SZUDBIOA UM Bulinpeyos 209 9 7 Help For any problems or questions regarding KOrganizer consult the detailed in structions for the program Access them with Help gt KOrganizer Handbook 210 9 7 Help Address Management with KAddressBook KAddressBook provides quick and comfortable access to all address data of your contacts As well as managing your local address data KAddressBook can access if available a central LDAP server that hosts contact data for your entire department or your entire enterprise KAddressBook supports the import and export of vCard data ensuring the smooth interaction with other programs 10 1 Overview of KAddressBook 212 10 2 Creating a New Contact i lt s rac bace dot te 212 10 3 Creating Address Lists ici oos mom ia ew 213 10 4 Searching Address Data 213 YOOGSSEIOPYY ui JUSWUUSHOUD sseJppv 212 10 1 Overview of KAddressBook KAddressBook can be started independently from the main
329. ion or the content displayed The operating mode of the trash is also set here Activate a confimation dialog before deletion if desired Include a Delete command that bypasses trash can also be set The files are immediately deleted if this option is activated doptseq 3INONO9 SUL The Icon Captions dialog features three options for determining what infor mation should be displayed for icons and how it should be displayed In the Preview dialog select whether to activate preview thumbnails for certain file types 5 4 Important Ulilities GNOME features a wealth of applets and applications This section merely pro vides an introduction to some of the most useful and interesting all of which are compatible with the GNOME configuration scheme 5 4 1 Dictionary Dictionary is a useful applet for checking the spelling and the meaning of words An Internet connection is required as this applet accesses an online dic tionary Enter the term to look up in the Word field The menu under Dictionary gives a choice between Look Up Word and Check Spelling By default the query is sent to the dict org server To use a different server select Edit gt Preferences Refer to Figure 5 2 on the next page dict org allows you to choose between var ious databases for special vocabularies such as jargon or computer terminology Under Default strategy specify what to look for the exact word parts of the wo
330. ip testarchive tar With 1s now see that the file testarchive tar is no longer there and that the file testarchive tar gz has been created instead This file is much smaller and therefore much better suited for transfer via e mail or storage on a floppy Now unpack this file in the test 2 directory created earlier To do so enter cp testarchive tar gz test2 to copy the file to that direc tory Change to the directory with cd test2 A compressed archive with the tar gz extension can be unzipped with the gunzip com mand Enter gunzip testarchive tar gz which results in the file testarchive tar which then needs to be extracted or untarred with tar xvf testarchive tar Youcan also unzip and extract a com pressed archive in one step by adding the z option The complete command would betar xvzf testarchive tar gz With 1s you can see that a new test directory has been created with the same contents as your test di rectory in your home directory 24 2 9 mtools mtools are a set of commands for working with MS DOS file systems The commands included in mt oo1s allow you to address the first floppy drive as a just like under MS DOS and the commands are like MS DOS commands ex cept they are prefixed with an m mdir a displays the contents of the floppy disk in drive a mcopy Testfile a copies the file Test file to the floppy disk mdel a Testfile deletes Test fileina SuSE Linux User Guide 361 362 mformat a fo
331. is the established printer language on Unix and Linux sys tems Many programs produce PostScript output that can then be directly printed by a PostScript printer a PCL3 PCL4 PCL5e PCL6 ESC P ESC P2 and ESC P raster If a PostScript printer is not available the print filter can use the program Ghostscript to convert PostScript data into one of these other standard printer languages Ghostscript uses different drivers for different print ers to make use of specific features such as color settings offered by the various models as much as possible Processing a Print Job 1 The user or an application generates a new print job 2 The print data is temporarily stored in the print queue The print spooler sends it from there to the printer filter 3 Now the printer filter performs the following steps a It determines the type of print data b The print data is converted into PostScript if not in PostScript al ready ASCII text for example is normally converted into PostScript by the filter program a2ps c If necessary the PostScript data is converted to another printer lan guage If the printer is a PostScript model the PostScript data is sent directly to the printer If the printer is not a PostScript model Ghostscript uses a driver suitable for the respective printer to generate the printer specific data that is subsequently sent to the printer 4 After the entire print job has been sent to the printer
332. ithout any modifications You can also accept the final dialog as the default log options are usually sufficient When you click Next a small window asks for confirmation Then the new configuration is saved to the hard disk The next time your Internet connection SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 107 108 This tool aims to be an easy to use Firewall Configuration Step 1 of 4 Basic Settings configuration front end for the Linux packet filter engine The configuration items in the following menus are a collection of the most important functions of the SuSEfirewall2 package Take a few moments to go through all menus and select the options carefully Select interfaces to protect External Interface ethO eth eth2 is typically External Interface mons used for ethernet cards ippp0 for Choose the interface connected to the irene ISDN and pppo for modem and ADSL Internet for which to configure the connections firewall Internal Interface Internal Interface Leave this empty if you do not Choose your internal network interface have an internal network none 5 Warning DSL with PPP over Ethernet uses pppO ppp1 ppp2 etc as the external interface Your ethernet interface is notthe external interface in this case WEN aver y Figure 3 26 SuSE Firewall Selecting the Interfaces to Protect is started your computer will be prot
333. itional information Installed packages for which a newer version is available on the installation media are displayed in blue Installed packages whose versions numbers are higher than those on the installation media are dis played in red However as the version numbering of packages is not always linear the information may not be perfect but should be sufficient to indicate problematic packages If necessary check the version numbers in the informa tion window The Information Window The tabs in the bottom right frame provide various information about the se lected package The description of the selected package is automatically active Click the other tabs to view technical data package size group and so forth the list of dependencies from other packages or the version information The Resource Window The resource window at the bottom left displays the disk space needed for your current selection of software on all currently mounted file systems The colored bar graph grows with every selection As long as it remains green there is suf ficient space The color of the bar color slowly changes to red as you approach the limit of disk space If you select too many packages for installation an alert is displayed SuSE Linux User Guide 57 The Menu Bar The menu bar at the top left of the window provides access to most of the func tions described above and a number of other functions that cannot be accessed in any other w
334. iver CD using YaST Cur rently the script only works for one sound card However ALSA can easily manage up to eight sound cards Sound fonts can be loaded with a command like sfxload D n usr share sfbank creative 8MBGMSFX SF2 n stands for the number of the sound card 0 1 This may not be the number under which the sound card was configured This number is instead determined by the order in which the individual sound drivers are loaded You can also load one of the sound fonts installed in usr share sounds s 2 The sound font Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 by lan Wilson con tains 128 analog synthesizer sounds and 8 drum sets It is suitable for SB AWE as well as for SB Live cards The ROM sound font gu11 rom sf2 by Samuel Collins is only suitable for SB AWE cards It provides an extended general MIDI bank for these cards Review the copyright files and the documentation in usr share doc packages snd s 2 More sound fonts are available at URLs such as http www hammersound net 18 9 2 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard If you do not have an external MIDI keyboard connected to your sound card use the virtual keyboard vkeybd For this purpose the internal port numbers listed with pmidi 1 as described above are important To start the program from the command line enter vkeybd addr 73 0 amp The port address must be adapted to your system Specify the first WaveTable port from the list If an external sound generator i
335. k in the same way SuSE Linux User Guide 159 160 M Caution Do not simply remove floppy disks from the drive after using them Floppy disks CDs and DVDs must always be unmounted from the system first Close all Nautilus sessions still accessing the medium then right click the icon for the medium and select eject from the menu Then safely remove the floppy disk or CD the tray opens automatically The icon disappears from the desktop Caution zl Floppy disks can also be formatted from the floppy disk menu In the dialog box choose the format and density of the floppy disk file system type offers a choice between Linux native ext2 the file system for Linux and DOS FAT because Windows cannot access Linux file systems Help provides some instruc tions for the tool 5 2 Settings The GNOME desktop can be customized according to your preferences and needs Click the Start Here icon on the desktop If this icon is not visible start Nautilus by right clicking the desktop then selecting New Window Under Lo cation enter preferences Open the various configuration dialogs by double clicking the respective icons Tip In the individual modules access specific help for the options with Help The system immediately adopts every change made in a con figuration module Tip 5 2 1 Keyboard In the Keyboard module determine settings such as the repeat rate a
336. ka is now available K3b for burning CDs and DVDs also contains some new features which are covered in the documentation Installation and configuration of telecommunications services see Chapter ISDN Telecommunication on page 269 The chapter about digital cameras and Linux now describes the ap plication digikam The following chapters are new in this edition A chapter about encryption in SuSE Linux explains how KGpg works and how you can use it for managing your keys kaddressbook is a comfortable application for managing your ad dresses The chapter about korganizer shows how to manage appointments and tasks Instructions for synchronizing your PalmPilot with your Linux sys tem using kpilot Mozilla has been included in the list of documented web browsers Typographical Conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this book a etc passwd files or directories a placeholder replace the character string placeholder including the angle brackets with the actual value PATH an environment variable 1s commands 0 1 Changes in the User Guide user users Alt a key to press a File menu items buttons 0 2 Acknowledgements With a lot of personal commitment the Linux developers continue to promote the development of Linux We would like to express our sincere gratitude for their efforts Without them this distribution would not exist Additional thanks
337. l up server are ignored to facilitate the establishment of the connection Activate firewall Here activate the SuSE Firewall to implement protection against intruders when connected to the Internet UOILOINBYUOD ISOA Idle time seconds Here specify the period after which the connection should be terminated if there is no data transfer IP details With this button enter the address configuration dialog If your provider has not assigned a dynamic IP address deactivate Dynamic IP Address and enter the local IP address of your host and the remote IP ad dress Contact your provider for information about these settings Leave the Default route setting active and exit the dialog with OK Press Next to return to the overview and view theconfiguration Finish the con figuration with Finish 3 5 5 DSL The YaST module DSL in the category Network Devices is designed for the configuration of DSL Several dialogs enable you to enter the data for your DSL access YOST supports the configuration of DSL based on the following protocols PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Germany PPP over ATM PPPoATM England CAPI for ADSL Fritz cards Tunnel protocol for point to point PPTP Austria The configuration of your DSL access with PPPoE and PPTP is only possible if your network card is configured correctly If this has not been done select Con figure Network Cards to acces
338. l However the appli cation is not terminated Display it and continue to use it by clicking the icon in the taskbar The button with the square maximizes the window over the entire screen area Another click on this symbol restores the window to its former size The X button closes the window and terminates the application Windows can be moved enlarged or downsized Click the title bar with the left mouse button and keep the mouse button pressed to move the window on your screen If you right click the top bar a configuration menu is displayed To change the size of the window move the mouse pointer along one of the four edges of the window until the mouse pointer symbol changes to a double arrow Then keep the left mouse button pressed while moving this edge Another pos sibility is to move the mouse pointer to one of the four corners and resize two edges of the window at the same time 4 2 Settings The KDE desktop can be customized according to your preferences and needs The menu item Control Center in the main menu opens the configuration dia log for your KDE desktop The following section introduces a number of mod ules 4 2 1 Peripherals This opens the configuration dialogs for the mouse keyboard and printer ad ministration SuSE Linux User Guide doptseg 3G eui 133 134 Keyboard Keyboard repeat Keeping a key pressed causes the associated character to be printed repeatedly as long as the key is p
339. l for example the printer could be limited to low resolution monochrome printing The following list includes the GDI models that can be directly configured with YaST Because SuSE does not test GDI printers there is no guarantee that the list is correct Brother HL 720 730 820 1020 1040 MFC 4650 6550MC 9050 and com patible models HP DeskJet 710 712 720 722 820 1000 and compatible models Lexmark 1000 1020 1100 2030 2050 2070 3200 5000 5700 7000 7200 Z11 42 43 51 52 and compatible models Linux drivers from Lex mark are available at ht tp www lexmark com printers linuxprinters html Oki Okipage 4w 4w 6w 8w 8wLite 8z 400w and compatible models Samsung ML 200 210 1000 1010 1020 1200 1210 1220 4500 5080 6040 and compatible models To our knowledge the following GDI printers are not supported by SuSE Linux This list is by no means complete Brother DCP 1000 MP 21C WL 660 Canon BJC 5000 5100 8000 8500 LBP 460 600 660 800 MultiPASS L6000 Epson AcuLaser C1000 EPL 5500W 5700L 5800L HP LaserJet 1000 3100 3150 3 4 Hardware 2 Lexmark 712 22 23 31 32 33 82 Winwriter 100 150c 200 Minolta PagePro 6L 1100L 18L Color PagePro L Magicolor 6100DeskLaser 2DeskLaserPlus 2DeskLaserDuplex Nec SuperScript 610plus 660 660plus Oki Okijet 2010 Samsung ML 85G 5050G QL 85G Sharp AJ 2100 AL 1000 800 840 F880 121 Configuration with YaST2 UOILOINBYUOD ISOA To set up a printer go to
340. l COMPAQ AcuLaser C4000PS E or contactthe manufacturer DIGITAL AcuLaser C8500 O Adding PPD Files to Database DYMO COSTAR AcuLaser C8500PS C If your printer manufacturer provides AcuLaser C8600 Pa PPD files you can add them to the FUJITSU AcuLaser C8600PS O database PPD files can be downloaded HEIDELBERG CL 700 from FTP or HTTP servers or copied from HITACHI CL 750 hard disk or removable media HP Dot Matrix O 18M EM 900C IMAGEN EM 930C INFOTEC EPL 5200 KODAK EPL 5200 KYOCERA EPL 5700 LEXMARK EPL 5800 MINOLTA EPL 5800L MITSUBISHI EPL 5800P5s H NFC Fpi sano Add PPD File to Database w Bob Keen Figure 3 8 Selecting the Printer monochrome color 300 dpi photo 600 dpi A predefined configuration includes a suitable Ghostscript driver and if available a set of options for the driver related to output quality Not all selectable combinations of driver settings work with every printer model This is especially true for higher resolutions Always check whether your settings work as expected by printing the test page If the output is garbled for example with several pages almost empty you should be able to stop the printer by first removing all paper then stopping the print test from YaST However in some cases the printer will refuse to resume work if you do so It may then be better to stop the print test first and wait for the printer to eject all pages by itself If the printer m
341. l Preferences New folders can be created under Local Folders or as subfolders of existing folders Create as complex a folder hierarchy as desired To create a new folder while in the Inbox view select File gt Folder New Folder In the follow ing dialog enter a name for the new folder Leave the Folder Type as Mail for a new mail storage folder Use the mouse to determine the parent folder under which to place the new folder Exit the dialog with OK To move a message into a folder select the message to move Right click to open the context menu Select Move to Folder and in the dialog that opens the 16 4 E Mail destination folder Click OK to move the message The message header in the original folder is shown with a line through it meaning it is marked for deletion in that folder The message is stored in the new folder Messages can be copied in a similar manner Manually moving a number of messages into different folders can be time consuming Filters can be used to automate this procedure 16 4 6 Filters Evolution offers a number of options for filtering e mail Filters can be used to move a message into a specific folder or to delete a message Messages can also be moved directly to the trash with a filter There are two options for creating a new filter creating a filter from scratch or creating a filter based on a message to filter The latter is extremely
342. lc Calc is the spreadsheet module of OpenOffice org Use this application for example to handle your private or business accounting data If Writer is already running start Calc by selecting File gt New gt Spreadsheet After starting Calc presents an empty spreadsheet divided into rows and columns Rows are numbered from top to bottom and columns are lettered from left to right The intersection of a row and a column marks the location of a cell 182 6 7 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc so each cell has a unique address coordinate For instance the address B3 refers to the cell located in the second column B and the third row This address is also shown at the top to the left of the entry field A cell may be active or inactive The currently active cell has a thick black frame around it To activate another cell move the frame with the cursor keys or click another cell with the mouse You can edit a cell if it is currently active 6 7 1 Changing Cell Attributes To enter something in a cell simply write in that cell By default texts are aligned to the left and numbers to the right To confirm your entry hit C1 To change the formatting of selected cells right click to open a context menu and select Format Cells This opens a dialog in which to change the cell attributes The dialog as shown in Figure 6 7 has the tabs Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders
343. ll settings are correct Finally start the conver sion by clicking Convert 6 5 Changing the Global Settings Global settings can be changed by selecting Tools gt Options This opens the window shown in Figure 6 2 A tree structure is used to display categories of settings OpenOffice org User Data Genera Standard T Memory ES Print External Programs Paths Colors Font Replacement Security El Load Save El Language Settings El Internet Text Document El HTML Document El Spreadsheet Presentation Drawing Formula Chart El Data Sources xI No automati postonng E Paste clipboard F J e me m um m ka m c m m ka Figure 6 2 The Options Dialog 176 6 5 Changing the Global Settings OpenOffice org This entry covers various basic settings This includes your user data like your address and e mail important paths and settings for printers and external programs Load Save This entry includes settings related to the opening and saving of several file types There is a dialog for general settings and several special dialogs to define how external formats should be handled Language Settings This entry covers various settings related to languages and writing aids namely your locale and spell checker settings This is also the place to enable support for Asian languages Internet This entry includes dialogs to configure
344. located at its left hand edge Configure Toolbars KOrganizer Mus Eu DG Toolbar Main lt korganizer gt Available actions Current actions mum Tk 5 Go to Today About KDE New Event 7 About KOrganizer New To Do D Addressbook Close Configure KOrganize a 2 Configure Shortcuts 2 Configure Toolbars e Copy P Cut 3 Cancel Figure 9 3 The Toolbars of KOrganizer 9 4 Using the Calendar The calendar of KOrganizer can be displayed in a number of different views to show a certain month day week or work week There is also a view of the next three days Details of these views can be configured with Settings gt Config ure KOrganizer under the Views item Switch between the different views with the View menu or by clicking the corresponding button in the toolbar 9 4 Using the Calendar Existing event items can easily be modified with the mouse One possibility is to change the start and end date or time by clicking the item s upper or lower edge then dragging it to the desired position In the day week and work week view directly move an item to another time by clicking it then dragging it to the new position You can also move events outside the time of the current view For instance an item can be dragged to the date navigator to the left You can even drag an item to the date navigator of another KOrganizer window 9 4 1 Events To
345. long as the CD is written This mode is recommended for the creation of audio CDs However it is 20 1 Creating a Data CD not supported by all CD writers In the TAO mode track at one a sepa rate write process is applied for every individual track The RAW mode is not used very often as the writer does not perform any data corrections The best setting is automatic as allows K3b to use the most suitable set tings Simulate This function can be used to check if your system supports the se lected writing speed The writing will performed with the laser deacti vated to test the system On the fly Burns the desired data without first creating an image file do not use this feature on low performance machines An image file also known as ISO image is a file containing the entire CD content that is subsequently written to the CD exactly as itis Burnfree This option was formerly known as burn proof It helps to avoid buffer underruns of a CD writer If burnfree is selected the CD writer will mark the current position and can return here in the event of a buffer un derrun However this causes small data gaps which are audible in audio CDs Therefore select a suitable burning speed in order to avoid buffer underruns Create Image File only This option creates an image file You can determine the path for this file under Temporary File The image file can be written to CD at a later time To do this
346. lot device If you have a USB cradle enter dev ttyUSBO If you have a serial cradle connected to the first or second serial port enter dev ttyS0 or dev ttyS1 respec tively The connection speed should normally be set to 57600 Also provide the user name set on the handheld in the corresponding field The program checks that the name actually matches the user name on the handheld when you first sync with it The configuration dialog is shown in Figure 8 2 General Address DB Specials Sync About r Device Options Pilot device devttyso Speed 57600 Pilot user r Startup Options IR Start HotSync Daemon at login IR Show daemon in panel o Stop daemon on exit OK 3 Cancel Figure 8 2 Configuring the Connection in KPilot Creating a dev pilot Link There should be no need to create a dev pilot link if you have configured the cradle connection as a regular user As a handheld cradle is normally con nected to one specific computer possibly withseveral users on it it may still be useful to configure the connection with administrator permissions Note The following configuration steps require administrator permissions and cannot be performed from a regular user account After completing the steps as described below add users to the uucp group to allow them to use KPilot Note 198 8 2 Conduits Used by KPilot USB Cradle To connect ove
347. lp Center A 3 The Search Function of the SuSE Help Center To search all installed information sources of SuSE Linux generate a search in dex and set a number of search parameters To do this open the Search tab See Figure A2 Search Contents Search Gl Method and Max results 5 Scope selection Default Scope z Administration i Hardware cups Linux Documentation O Browse info page i O Manpages Development i E Bash Reference lo MEI Create Search Index Figure A 2 Configuring the Search Function If no search index was generated previously the system automatically prompts you to do so when you click the Search tab or enter a search string and click Search In the dialog window for generating the search index Figure A 3 on the following page use the check boxes to determine the information sources to index The index is generated when you exit the dialog with OK To limit the search base and the hit list as precisely as possible use the three drop down menus to determine the number of displayed hits and the selection area of sources to search The following options are available for determining the selection area Default A predefined selection of sources is searched SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOJUSUUNDOG PUD djey 393 O Build Search Index KDE He Index HTML Search Search Scope Status El Bash Reference Missing
348. lter v J Customize Filter j Back Abort Finish es tais Figure 3 24 Group Administration Password settings For new passwords to be checked by the system before they are accepted mark Checking new passwords and Plausibility test for password Set the minimum and maximum length of passwords for newly created users Define the period for which the password should be valid and how many days in advance an expiration alert should be issued when the user logs in to the text console Boot settings Specify how the key combination A should be interpreted by selecting the action from the drop down list Usually this combination entered in the text console causes the system to reboot Do not modify this setting unless your machine or server is pub licly accessible and you are afraid someone could carry out this action without authorization If you select Stop this key combination causes the system to shut down With Ignore this key combination is ignored Specify the Shutdown Behavior of KDM by granting permission to shut down the system from the KDE Display Manager the graphical login of KDE Only root the system administrator All users Nobody or Local users If Nobody is selected the system can only be shut down via the text console SuSE Linux User Guide 105 106 Login settings Typically following a failed login attempt there is a waiti
349. lution from the main menu or with the command evolution When started for the first time Evolution offers a configuration assistant If it is not opened automatically select Tools gt Settings gt Mail Accounts and click Add Click Next to access the assistant Enter your name and your e mail ad dress in the respective fields If you have several e mail addresses specify your preferred address Additional addresses can be configured later Click Next Select the appropriate incoming e mail format for this address from the Server Type drop down box POP is the most common format for downloading mail from a remote server IMAP works with mail folders on a special server Ob tain this information from your ISP or server administrator Complete the other relevant fields displayed when the server type is selected Click Next when finished The next set of information to enter is about mail delivery This is used for all configured e mail addresses To submit outgoing e mail on the local system select Sendmail For a remote server select SMTP Get the details from your ISP or server administrator For SMTP complete the other fields displayed after selection Click Next when finished By default the e mail address is used as the name to identify the account Enter another name if desired The field Make this my default account determines whether the account should be used as
350. ly it is possible to set the resolution larger than the vis ible area of the screen If you move the mouse beyond the margins of the desk top the virtual part of the desktop is displayed on screen This increases the available work space The virtual resolution can be set in two different ways By Drag amp Drop Move the mouse pointer over the monitor image and the mouse will turn into crosshairs Keep the left mouse button pressed 3 4 Hardware El Sax2 XI Eile Help 2 Desktop 0 Select virtual resolution for Mode 1024x768 1024 576 768 UOILOINBYUOD ISOA Cancel Finish Configure virtual resolutions 4 a Figure 3 13 Configuring the Virtual Resolution and move the mouse to enlarge the raster image which corresponds with the virtual resolution This method is best if you are not quite sure how much virtual space you want on your desktop a By selection from the pop up menu In the pop up menu in the middle of the raster image the currently used virtual resolution is displayed To use one of the default virtual resolutions select one from the menu 3D Acceleration Optionally activate the 3D acceleration of your graphics card A dialog is dis played in which to activate the 3D properties of your graphics card Image Position and Size Under these two tabs precisely adjust the size and the position of the image wit
351. ly be used for additional input Entering formulas in the above way is cumbersome when many cells are involved For example if you have several items in your A column and want to add them try the SUM function In the field B6 enter the formula SUM B3 B5 An alternative possibility is to click the Sigma 2 icon next to the input line and enter the range manually This formula adds all numbers from B3 to B5 You can also specify several ranges at once As shown in the above formula a range is defined by two cell addresses sepa rated by a colon By contrast ranges are separated by semicolons Accordingly the formula SUM B3 B5 D3 D5 adds everything from B3 to B5 and from D3 to D5 Basically the formula is a short form of a longer one which would read B3 B4 B5 D3 D4 D5 6 7 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 6 7 3 Creating Charts Now add some more entries to the spreadsheet for instance by including some more months in row 2 After doing so the table could look like Figure 6 9 Figure 6 9 Expanded Example Spreadsheet Select the range from A2 to E5 The text appears white on black To create a chart select Insert gt Chart This opens a dialog window The first page in this dialog gives the option to modify the original cell selection and to specify whether to use the first row or column as chart labels Usually the set tings on this page can be accepted without change Continue by cli
352. ly control all GNOME toolbars from here Select for toolbar icons to be displayed as Text Only Icons Only Text Beside Icons or Text Below Icons The default setting is Text Only Activate Toolbars can be detached and moved around to allow the detachment of the toolbar from all other window elements and allow its free positioning on the desktop This makes a grabbing area appear on the left side of the toolbar Clicking and holding this area relocates the toolbar Every menu entry in any application menu can be displayed with the corre sponding icon Activating Show icons in menus tests the settings with the pro vided example menu 5 2 4 Screensaver The module for configuring the screensaver is subdivided into two tabs Dis play Modes and Advanced Select the screensaver in Display Modes The Advanced tab contains a few special options that normally do not need to be modified Select the screen saver mode under the Display Modes tab Choose from Ran dom Screen Saver random selection of screen savers from a custom defined list Only One Screen Saver Blank Screen Only or Disable Screen Saver Select one or more screensavers from the list for the operating modes Only One Screen Saver or Random Screen Saver The currently selected screensaver is displayed in the small preview window The Preview button launches a SuSE Linux User Guide 161
353. m 3 10 1 Controls The usage may be unfamiliar but is very simple Basically the entire program can be controlled with Tab Alt Tab Space the arrow keys Dand 1 C2 and shortcuts The YaST Control Center appears first as shown in Figure 3 32 on the facing page The left frame which is surrounded by a thick white border features the cat egories to which the various modules belong The active category is indicated by a colored background The right frame which is surrounded by a thin white border provides an overview of the modules contained in the active category The bottom frame contains the buttons for Help and Exit When the YaST Control Center is started the category Software is selected au tomatically Use 1 and to change the category To start a module from the selected category press gt The module selection then appears with a thick bor der Use T and 7 to select the desired module Keep the arrow keys pressed to scroll through the list of available modules When a module is selected the module title appears with a colored background and a brief description is dis played in the bottom frame 3 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses Session Edit View Bookmarks Settings Help UOHDINBYUOD ISOA 14 New 34 shell il Shell No 2 dil Shell No 3 Figure 3 32 The Main Window of YaST2 ncurses Press to start the desired module Various buttons or selection
354. m configura tions This is especially useful for mobile computers that are used in different lo cations in different networks and by different users Nevertheless this feature is useful even for stationary machines as it enables the use of various hardware components or test configurations Although the module with the accompany ing help is easy to use the configuration of profiles is a task that should be per formed by experts or system administrators For more information about SCPM basics and handling refer to the respective sections in the Administration Guide 3 8 8 Runlevel Editor The Runlevels in SuSE Linux SuSE Linux can be operated in several runlevels By default the system boots to runlevel 5 which offers multiuser mode network access and the graphical user interface X Window System The other runlevels offer multiuser mode with network but without X runlevel 3 multiuser mode without network runlevel 2 single user mode runlevel 1 and S system halt runlevel 0 and system reboot runlevel 6 The various runlevels are useful if problems are encountered in connection with a particular service X or network in a higher runlevel In this case the system can be booted to a lower runlevel to repair the service Many servers operate 3 8 System without a graphical user interface and must be booted in a runlevel without X such as runlevel 3 Usually home users only need the standard runlevel 5 However if
355. me click Suggestion for the system to generate one automatically SuSE Linux User Guide 39 40 Enter your NIS domain e g foo com and Configuration of NIS client the NIS server s address e g nis foo com or 10 20 1 1 Specify multiple servers by separating their addresses with spaces The Broadcast option enables searching in the local network to find a server after the specified servers fail to respond It is a security risk NIS client Automatic Setup via DHCP If you are using DHCP and the server O Static Setup provides the NIS domain name or servers you can enable their use here DHCP itself NIS domain can be set up in the network module Expert gives access to some less AS frequently used settings If you need to access Multiple domains use the button to switch to a detailed dialog Expert Back Abort Figure 2 17 NIS Client Configuration Finally enter a password for the user Reenter it for confirmation to ensure that you did not type something else by mistake The user name tells the system who a user is and the password is used to verify this identity Caution Remember both your user name and the password because they are needed each time you log in to the system Caution To provide effective security a password should be between five and eight char acters long The maximum length for a password is 128 characters but if no special
356. mou 86 4 kB 0 9 5 825 H D neq TO O Terk Development System O Experienced User Description Technical Data Dependencies Versions 3ddiag A Tool to Verify the 3D Configuration With 3Ddiag you can verity the 3D configuration Name DiskUsage Used Free Total 1 181 1 41 68 3161 MB 172 GB Check Dependencies J C Autocheck Cancel Accept Figure 3 4 YaST Package Manager The window comprises various frames The frame sizes can be modified by clicking and moving the lines separating the areas The contents of the frames and their use are described below SuSE Linux User Guide 53 54 The Filter Window Selecting all packages of an installation one by one would be vary laborious and time consuming Therefore the package manager offers various filter methods for arranging the packages in categories and limiting the number of displayed packages The filter window is located to the left under the menu bar It controls and displays various filter methods The filter selection box at the top deter mines what will be displayed in the lower part of the filter window Click the filter selection box to select a filter from the list of available filters The Selections Filter At start up the Selections filter is active This filter groups the program packages according to their application purpose such as Multimedia or Office Applications The various groups o
357. multaneous access from multiple applications If a sound application freezes this might be the cause Tip 18 2 1 gamix If you have multiple sound cards gamix provides a set of controllers for each card Slide the control sliders to set the levels as desired 18 1 Basic ALSA PCM Types Prog Sound Blaster 16 CTL1745 Input Gain PC MIC CD Synth PCM Output Master Tone Auto Speaker Gain Control Gain Con HOST El E rm ri Lock F Lock Lock ff Lock ff Lock Figure 18 1 The Mixer gamix 18 2 2 qamix QAMix is a mixer with a Ot interface If necessary the application interface can be configured in a flexible way in an XML file All parameters can be controlled via MIDI On start up the application first searches the directory qamix for an XML file corresponding to the name of the ALSA driver of your sound card If such a file does not exist it searches the same directory for the file default xml If this file does not exist either the program continues its search in the directory usr share qamix If you have several sound cards select the desired card with the parameter c hw 0 stands for the first sound card hw 1 for the second and so on The pa rameter g can be used to specify a file for the XML description of the applica tion interface explicitly Detailed information about the XML format is available in the directory usr share doc packages qamix Eile About
358. n Layers on page 347 for more information Caution 2 GIMP provides a relatively simple text tool Many text effects such as shadows or gradients must theoretically be input by hand In practice however Script Fu and the Filters submenu provide many automatic modification procedures which have in part been specifically designed for use with text The color picker allows a controlled selection of a color from your im age and transfers it to the color selection box When you click a specific color in the image with the color picker tool this color is selected With it quickly find for example a specific skin tone needed to retouch a photo graph With the paint bucket fill a selected area with color Instead of a color it can also fill with a pattern Prior to the filling action activate Pattern Fill Everything in the selection is then painted over with the selected settings 23 2 Using The GIMP The icon represents a color or grayscale gradient GIMP has several prede fined gradients to use to fill the selected area This tool is relatively com plicated and requires some practice especially if you want to overlay an image with transparent color gradients With the virtual pencil as with a real pencil draw free hand lines Select the type of line and the width and shape of the pencil point with the brush dialog To access it double click the brush icon in the bottom right corner of the toolbox or select
359. n alternative to the mouse is a trackball Here you move a ball inside a stationary casing to control the mouse pointer In contrast to the mouse the trackball reduces the movements in the hand and arm area 25 3 Links and Literature A great manual for staff members and superiors with many checklists and questionnaires that also take the mental strain into account Burmester M G rner C Hacker W Karcher M and others 1997 The SANUS Manual EU compliant Screen Work research FB 760 Berlin Series of the Federal Office for Work Protection and Work Medicine SANUS Safety and health protection for terminal work on the basis of international standards A clear and well structured guide for analysis and work protection tasks around the terminal workstation Richenhagen G Priimper J amp Wagner J 1998 2nd edition Handbuch der Bildschirmarbeit trans Manual of terminal work Neuwied Luchterhand Information Network of the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work Available in many languages comprehensive information http europe osha eu int SuSE Linux User Guide SOOI AGHIOM SUL ui soiuouo813 389 Help and Documentation The SuSE Help Center provides central access to the most important documen tation resources on your system in searchable form These resources include all manuals enclosed with your product online help for the installed applications and databases on hardware and soft
360. n be operated with a differ ent set of options However this is not required when using the CUPS printing system because CUPS allows users to set options individually for each print job One standard configuration is sufficient for plain black and white printers such as most laser printers However color ink jet printers usually require at least two configurations two queues A standard Ip configuration for quick and inexpensive black and white printouts A color queue for color printing SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 65 66 Supported Printers Because most Linux printer drivers are not written by the maker of the hard ware it is crucial that the printer can be driven through one of the generally known languages Normal printers understand at least one of these common languages In the case of a GDI printer however the manufacturer has built a device that relies on its own special control sequences Many inexpensive ink jet models belong to this group Such a printer only runs out of the box under the versions of the operating systems for which the manufacturer has included a driver As the device cannot be operated through one of the standard languages it cannot be used with Linux or can only be used with difficulties Nevertheless a number of these printers are supported by SuSE Linux How ever their use is often rather problematic and some features might not be available at al
361. n pass word management In addition to that there is an entry in which to spec ify from which web sites Mozilla should accept images To maintain a degree of privacy it is often a good idea to accept cookies only from the server from which the requested document is received To achieve this enable Enable cookies for the originating web site only En abling Disable cookies may cause some web pages not to function in the intended way The Manage Stored Cookies button gives the possibility to inspect the properties of any cookies that have been accepted JOSMOIG ASM DIIZON SUL Use the Images dialog to define similar settings for the handling of graphics This is especially useful if you do not want to clog an already slow connection modems with the download of large images The dialog also allows you to suppress the animation of any images To achieve this just select Never under the Animated images should loop header In the Passwords dialog decide whether Mozilla should store any pass words entered Consider both convenience and security However if you use the browser for online banking you should definitely not have the corresponding password stored by Mozilla Advanced Often web pages are not only written in plain HTML Many sites also use JavaScript or Java to produce some special effects As a general rule it is recommended to turn off Java Under Scripts amp Plugins you should also turn
362. n rdi S SO serves to determine the basic system usa KDEIX11 information and configuration on your computer If you need further support for individual problems you can make use of the SuSE Professional Services as well You will find more information about this at http Your question for SuSE support www suse de en support Figure 3 31 Submitting a Support Request 3 9 2 Boot Log The boot log contains the screen messages displayed when the computer is started It is logged to var 1log boot msg Use this YOST module to view the log for example to check if all services and functions were started as expected SuSE Linux User Guide 119 120 3 9 3 System Log The system log logs the operations of your computer to var log messsages Kernel messages are recorded here sorted according to date and time 3 9 4 Loading a Vendor s Driver CD With this module automatically install device drivers from a Linux driver CD that contains drivers for SuSE Linux When installing SuSE Linux from scratch use this YaST module to load the re quired drivers from the vendor CD after the installation 3 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses YasT can also be controlled by means of a text based terminal This is especially useful in the case of systems that cannot run the X Window System or where X is unneeded as in dedicated server or firewall machines It is also good for administrators remotely accessing a syste
363. n the last object selected for inser tion This also means that you can now insert a table again with just a short click without any need to reopen the pop up toolbar Tip 6 6 6 Inserting Graphics Graphics can be inserted with the same vertical pop up toolbar as tables only you need to select its second button Alternatively select Insert gt Graphics gt From File This opens a dialog window in which to select the desired file If you check Preview the selected image is displayed in the right part of the dialog Such a preview may take some time in the case of larger images After confirming your choice the inserted image is placed in the document at the cur sor position In the document itself select an image by clicking it When selected an image has little square handles on its edges Then select Graphics from the context menu to open a dialog in which to change various image settings such as the wrap type and border style To change the size of an image first click it to activate it Now click any of its handles keep the button pressed and drag the handle until the dashed frame reaches the desired size When you release the button the image is scaled ac cording to your changes To change the position of an image while leaving its size unchanged click the image and keep the mouse button pressed Drag the image to the desired posi tion 6 7 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Ca
364. n this way their eyes can adapt to a different distance f a document is being copied it should be at the same distance as the screen to avoid frequent changes of focus The difference in luminance between the direct working area the screen and the immediately surrounding areas such as the screen case should not be more than three to one For this reason computer cases in offices are not black The difference between the working area and the surround ings should not be more than ten to one 25 2 Office Equipment Shiny areas create large differences of luminance This is why office furni ture is not available in bright colors and has a matt surface To minimize the reflex glare on the screen the screen and the keyboard should be arranged so the line of vision is parallel to window panes The further the screen is away from the window the better The screen should not be directly under a lighting strip but to the side of it The line of vision should be parallel to the lighting strip 25 2 3 The Keyboard and the Wrists It is well known that the keyboard arrangement derived from the typewriter is not necessarily ergonomic During typing the fingers hands arms and shoul ders are strained This leads to tense muscles The strain caused by a keyboard of inferior quality adds up over time Unfortunately the tiny movements pro duced while typing are very difficult to measure Risk factors include the RSI syndrome
365. n window shown in Figure 2 4 on the next page displays some information about the hardware recognized and pro poses a number of installation and partitioning options When selecting any of these items and configuring them in the corresponding dialogs you are always returned to the suggestion window which is updated accordingly The individ ual settings are discussed in the following sections 2 5 1 Installation Mode This offers the opportunity to change the installation type selected previously If you already have a Linux system installed on your machine you can use this to boot into that system This is useful if the system is damaged for some reason and cannot be booted from the hard disk 2 5 2 Keyboard Layout Select the keyboard layout By default the layout corresponds to the selected language After changing the layout test Y Z and special characters to make sure the selection is correct When finished select Next to return to the sugges tion window 2 5 Installation Suggestion 2 YaST Er Installation Settings p gt Language Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below Selection gt Mode New installation O Installation Keyboard layout Seti EOD English US Mouse Perform PS 2 mouse Aux port Installation Partitioning Format partition dev sdb7 6 3 GB for with reiser Format partition dev sdb6 258 8 MB for swap Format partition
366. nch button to customize the way in which the items in the dialog are sorted and viewed Save Ct S This saves the document in its current form If you have been editing a new document the program display a dialog with which to specify the name of the file and its location directory Save As This opens a dialog in which to specify the name and the directory under which to save the document The dialog is essentially the same as the one displayed after selecting File Open Print P This opens a simple dialog in which to define printing options for the document and start the print job Close Ctr W This closes the currently loaded document If there are changes that have not yet been saved a dialog opens to ask whether to do so Quit Ct This exits the editor If there are unsaved changes to a loaded document KWrite shows a dialog asking whether to save before exiting 7 3 The Edit Menu This menu provides all the program s editing functions such as selecting and searching or replacing text according to certain patterns SuSE Linux User Guide 191 Undo Redo Use this to undo any unwanted changes and to restore the orig inal text after an undo step These functions are also available using the keyboard shortcuts Ct and Ct 1 shift Cut This cuts the currently selected text region The corresponding keyboard shortcut is 00
367. nclusion in the following pop up To enter more information click Edit Full to open the contact editor Otherwise click OK If you have selected Edit Full click Save and Close to exit the contact editor when you are finished To enter a completely new contact click New Contact in the Contacts view Enter all desired contact information Click Save and Close when finished 16 6 2 Making a List If you frequently send e mail messages to a group of people make this easier by creating a list Click New gt Contact List in the Contacts view The contact list editor opens Enter a name for the list Add addresses by typing the address in the box and clicking Add or by dragging contacts from the Contacts view and dropping them in the box Toggle Hide addresses to select whether the recipients can see who else has received the mail Click Save and Close when finished The list is now one of your contacts and appears in the composition window after the first few letters are typed 16 6 3 Sharing Contacts To send contact information from your address book to another Evolution user right click the contact to forward Select Forward Contact This sends the con tact card as an attachment in an e mail Compose and send this message as usual To add a contact you have been sent go to the contact in the e mail mes sage and click Save in addressbook to add the complete
368. nd mode overwrites the old text Changes to insert mode and overwrites each character Changes to insert mode the character where the cursor is positioned is replaced by the next entry you make eo oR um C Changes to insert mode the rest of the line is replaced by the new text o Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted following the current one O Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted preceding the current one x Deletes the current character dd Deletes the current line dw Deletes up to the end of the current word cw Changes to insert mode the rest of the current word is overwritten by the next entries you make u Undoes the last command J Joins the following line with the current one Repeats the last command Changes to last line mode Table 24 2 Simple Commands of the vi Editor Each command can be preceded by a number specifying on how many objects the following command should operate Delete three words at once by entering 3dw The command 10x deletes ten characters after the cursor position and 20dd deletes twenty lines The most important commands in last line mode are q exits vi without saving any changes w filename saves as filename DX saves the modified file and exits the editor Table 24 3 continued overleaf 24 5 The vi Editor e filename u edits loads filename undoes the last edit command Table 24 3 Complex Commands of the v
369. nd sound events associated with your keyboard The module consists of the Keyboard and Audio tabs Use the Audio tab to configure of an audio signal for your keyboard For audible notification when a wrong key is pressed activate the corresponding radio button Exit the Keyboard module with Close or go the accessibility module with Accessibility The functionality of this module is de scribed in Section Accessibility on page 163 5 2 Settings 5 2 2 Mouse Configuration The mouse configuration consists of three tabs Buttons Cursor and Motion The configuration options of the Buttons tab refer to the Mouse Orientation Left handed users should activate Left handed mouse to swap the right and left mouse buttons Use the slider to determine the maximum delay in seconds between two clicks that the system should interpret as a double click The appearance and size of the cursor can be changed under the Cursor tab Four different settings are available Changes are not activated until the next lo gin Under Locate Pointer activate an option that causes the cursor to be high lighted when you press the key enabling you to find it easily doptseq 3INONO SUL Under Movement set the Acceleration and Sensitivity of the screen cursor 5 2 3 Menus and Toolbars The settings in this module affect the menus and toolbars of all GNOME compatible applications Central
370. nds on the type of sound card used The following description refers to the widely used AC97 standard for mixer functionality If your sound card does not comply with this stan dard some features may not be supported The mixer Envy24 should be used for sound cards equipped with the Envy24 ice1712 chip Note The basic controls for sound output are Master PCM and CD Master sets the master volume PCM and CD control the respective weighting of the PCM and audio CD channels Determine the recording source by pressing Space The capture controller reg ulates the input amplifier Whether the Line controller or the MIC controller is used depends on the recording source For more information enter man alsamixer alsamixergui is a mouse operated variant of alsamixer with a graphical interface 286 18 2 Mixers 18 2 6 Mixer Parameters of Soundblaster Live and Audigy Apart from the parameters of the AC97 standard there are many additional options for Soundblaster Live and Audigy cards The controls AC97 Wave and Music are used for playback AC97 can be used to adjust the level of the AC97 mix This mix also receives input from the line mic and CD signals Wave adjusts the level of the PCM channels Music controls the volume of the internal wavetable synthesis of MIDI data xnu ui punos Apart from the Capture parameter for re
371. nformation about the Internet Dial Up 89 30 0 Network Card 42 22 43 xRRR LG xxx Pe Bas 89 254 Modem rosea ia bb 644 add 91 355 BSL t4e08 ego eS ae eee eim decane 4 93 25 ISDN i ne awa eels oa A 95 Network Services c oia DERE EE 99 3 6 1 HostNameandDNS een 99 306 2 NES Clientand NFS Setver 2 22 RES 99 3 63 Configuration of a Samba Server 100 3 64 Configuration of Samba Clients 101 2900 NIPENDE coa nos ra o A er 101 266 TROU cue segue ee ee Esl aoe RON Rar xum m Dente 101 367 Mal Transier Agent set esce doe mom ket enn 101 36 8 Network Services inetd 4 sp eses ea Rs 102 Security dnd Users o dete doe a a eto da Got d 103 2 51 User Acdiministrati n 3 762934 RR s 103 34 2 Group Admunistratl n i c9 ao La Y Sui 103 24 9 J5eeurity SENES o i doe Loe bd Leh wet borde 104 3 4 Firewall suh nam nes m me oe ee a 107 SVOE N S v oed dede NN 108 3 8 1 Backup Copy of the System Areas 108 3 8DB909 Restore the System i 2 co s a 109 SuSE Linux User Guide 3 8 3 Creating a Boot Rescue or Module Disk 110 3 8 4 Boot Loader Configuration with YOST 112 285 IVM uus ra e aa AA e Re 116 3 8 6 Partitioning coca a A a Rae RR 116 3 8 7 Profile Manager SCPM ic oa a Brevis 116 38 8 Runlevel Editor 2 2 3 2 04 465 4424 he eee da 116 389 Sysconiie Editor s i eara ah ee hb ek bee She 1k 117 38 10 Time Zone Selection o eo cy Rx eS 118
372. ng and entering kdeprintfax a Select Settings gt Configure KDEPrintFax Click the System icon in the left pane As capisuitefax is largely compatible with the HylaFAX suite select HylaFAX under Fax system Set Command to the following command usr bin capisuitefax d number files see screenshot Finish the configuration by clicking OK and closing KDEPrintFax The option Send to Fax is then available in the Print menu of any KDE appli cation Selecting it starts KDEPrintFax which requests the target phone number and sends the fax 278 17 3 Usage ped ial bar a S File Fax Settings Help Add File R Fax system selection Files Use EFax system Use HylaFax system Fax Numbe usr bin capisuitefax d number files Name Enterprise Comment Cx Idle Hylafax Figure 17 5 Configuring CapiSuite in KDEPrintFax Non KDE applications can also use this function if their print command can be set manually In this case replace commonly used lpr with kprinter When you print a document the KDE print menu will be displayed along with the possibility to transmit fax messages Caution To date capisuitefax does not support the full range of HylaFAX fea tures Thus features such as the resolution settings are currently ignored Caution E 17 3 3 Operation of the Answering Machine If e mail transmission was not deactivated v
373. ng period lasting a few seconds before another login is possible The purpose of this is to make it more difficult for password sniffers to log in In ad dition you have the option of activating Record failed login attempts and Record successful login attempts If you suspect someone is trying to discover your password check the entries in the system log files in wvar log By means of the Allow remote graphical login other users are granted access to your graphical login screen via the network How ever as this access possibility represents a potential security risk it is inac tive by default Add user settings Every user has a numerical and an alphabetical user ID The correlation between these is established via the file etc passwd and should be as unique as possible Using the data in this screen define the range of numbers assigned to the numerical part of the user ID when a new user is added A minimum of 500 is suitable for users Proceed in the same way with the group ID set tings Miscellaneous settings For Setting of file permissions there are three se Press lection options Easy Secure and Paranoid The first one should be sufficient for most users The YaST help text provides information about the three security levels The setting Paranoid is extremely restrictive and should serve as the basic level of operation for system administrator setting
374. ng and shopping JavaScript is an interpreted scripting language mainly used for the dynamic structuring of web pages e g for menus and other effects Konqueror allows you to enable or disable these two language This can even be done in a domain specific way which means that you can permit access for some hosts and block access for others Java and JavaScript are often disabled for security reasons Unfortunately some web pages require JavaScript for cor rect display 11 5 Java and JavaScript The Web Browser Galeon Recently the widely used web browser has been transformed into a real jack of all trades The fact that today s Internet applications feature such depth in integration and are heavily integrated into their corresponding desktop envi ronments is almost taken for granted Users of outdated machines soon feel the effects of this development All around browsers are often memory eaters slug gish in their operation and occupy thirty megabytes on the hard disk That is why the idea behind Galeon is to devote itself just to one assignment the web and only the web Galeon implements the speedy Gecko engine of the Mozilla browser and integrates this into an extremely functional user interface The application loads quickly and is one of the fastest browsers available 121 Optimized forthe Web es ss 224 122 Efficient Surfing with Tabs c gor ide 225 12 3 Smart Bookmarks 244693 RR ES 225 12 4 Settings and C
375. ng to decompress the archives File Roller supports drag and drop allowing you to drag file icons from the desktop or from the file manager Nautilus to the File Roller dialog and drop them there To create a new archive select Archive gt New In the next dialog specify the directory in which to create the new archive in the left window Enter the file name of the new archive in the input field below without the file extension Then determine the archive type with the drop down menu above the name field Exit the dialog with OK and return to the main view of File Roller Now fill the empty archive by inserting files from the desktop or the file manager with drag and drop or by selecting Edit gt Add Files In the following dialog select one or several files keep pressed to select multiple files or directo ries If necessary determine the following advanced options for the archive Add only if newer If the archive already contains a file with the same name the file is only added if it is newer than the one existing in the archive 5 4 Important Utilities Include subfolders To compress an entire directory activate this option to in clude all subdirectories Exclude backup files Avoid unnecessary data trash by disabling the inclu sion of backup copies when creating an archive Exclude hidden files Usually hidden files do not contain any data that are relevant for the user By default they are
376. not included in the archive to reduce the amount of data Exclude files This explicitly excludes certain files from the archive This option is useful if you want to compress entire directories but exclude certain files from the archive Instead of file names you can also specify search patterns Ignore case File Roller ignores different spellings of file names and extensions like JPEG or jpeg After completing the selection and configuration exit the dialog The archive created is available for further processing at the desired location To decompress an archive load it to File Roller click Edit gt Extract to and specify the target directory SuSE Linux User Guide doptseq 3INONO SUL 169 Part Ill Office Applications The OpenOffice org Office Suite OpenOffice org is a powerful Linux office suite that offers tools for all types of office tasks such as writing texts working with spreadsheets or creating graph ics and presentations With OpenOffice org use the same data across different computing platforms You can also open and edit files in Microsoft Office for mats then save them back to this format if needed This chapter only covers the basic skills needed to get started with OpenOffice org 6 1 The Quickstarter 64 6 i sr kc 174 6 2 Overview of the Application Modules 174 6a Geline Help o tomes bi DS SSG eS 175 6 4 Converting Microsoft Office Documents 175 6 5
377. nstallation gt Start installation system gt Rescue system You will be prompted for the rescue floppy 006 J Standard boot floppy Re scue Floppy Module Floppies All SuSE kernels are modularized This means that most drivers are loaded as kernel modules on demand Because the space on one single floppy is not sufficient for all kernel modules you might wantto create one of the module floppies Module Floppies Custom Floppy Download Floppy Image e UOILOINBYUOD ISOA Custom Floppy To create a floppy from another image select Custom Floppy You will be prompted forthe file containing the floppy image Cancel Next Figure 3 29 Creating a Boot Rescue or Module Disk Module disks Module disks contain additional system drivers The standard kernel only supports IDE drives If the drives in your system are con nected to special controllers such as SCSI load the needed drivers from a module disk If you select this option and click Next you will be taken to a dialog for creating various module disks USB modules This floppy disk contains the USB modules you might need if USB drives are connected IDE RAID and SCSI modules As the standard kernel only supports normal IDE drives you will need this module disk if you use special IDE controllers Further more all RAID and SCSI modules are provided on this disk Network modules If you need access to a network lo
378. nt directories with filters For example a VFolder could be created to search all your folders for unread e mail To create a new virtual folder select Tools Virtual Folder Editor In the dialog click Add Like filters virtual folders can also be created from e mail messages Right click the e mail message select Create Rule from Message and define the desired criteria 16 4 E Mail Enter a Rule Name For the new mail example mentioned above set the crite rion to Status is not Read Set the sources as desired Other VFolder searches can be set similarly Click OK when finished This returns to the virtual folder list The order can be changed if desired Click OK to close it The new VFolder is in the folder list under VFolders You can read answer and delete e mail with the VFolder However deleting the message deletes it from the real folder in which it is stored not just the VFolder 16 5 Calendar 16 5 1 Adding Appointments To add a new appointment to your calendar click New Appointment Under the Appointment tab enter the details for the appointment Select a category if desired to ease searching and sorting later Optionally set for Evolution to pro vide a reminder before your appointment under the Reminder tab If the ap pointment occurs regularly set that under Recurrence Click Save and Close after all settings are made The
379. ntextual fil ter functions Of particular interest is the Navigate menu This is built directly from the EPG data It will appear in the language provided by the network 316 194 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC K3b The KDE Burning Application K3b is a comprehensive program for writing data and audio CDs Along with the usual features the program offers some additional options that facilitate working especially in the field of multimedia You can start the program from the main menu or by entering the command k 3b The main program features are described in the following sections 20 1 Creating a Data CD s a a ia ee A 318 202 Bumine CDS 2a eiai le Me deme EPA e ips 318 20 3 Creating an Audio CD suci bk ee 319 204 Copying a CDs oo a a wee who Ee le 320 205 Writing ISO Images 44 ais pe 9 s 320 20 6 For More Information 321 uooo day Buung 33x eui ae 318 20 1 Creating a Data CD Creating a data CD is easy Go to File gt New Project New Data Project The project view will appears in the lower part of the window as shown in Fig ure 20 1 Drag the desired directories or individual files from your home direc tory to the project folder and drop them there Save the project under a name of your choice with File gt Save as K3b The CD Kreator vx File Tools Settings Help E New Project Ey Open Ey Save amp Bum Eb Copy CD S
380. o Q during system boot Manual the driver N must be started with the rcisdn start command only the user root can do this 1 HotPlug is a special case for PCMCIA ISDN card into and USB devices Vendor Abocom Magitek ISDN protocol In most cases the BERG ey protocol is Euro ISDN O Area code Enter your local area code 5 forthe ISDN line here without a leading 12 O zero and without a country prefix ON ES Eum nu 5 Dial Prefix If you need a prefix to get 5 Euro ISDN EDSS1 Germany an public line you can enter it here C me WS EA Je Only used on a internal SO bus most Leased line Et O common is 0 MT c It you don t want to log all your ISDN trafic uncheck Start isdnlog Sat Hous Dialprefix RJ start isdnlog Q OnBoot 3 5 ERA Back abor Figure 3 20 ISDN Configuration use an internal SO bus and use internal numbers for the connected devices Use one of the internal numbers to specify the MSN One of the MSNS of your phone system should work provided external access is possible with this MSN As a final resort a single zero might work For more information refer to the documentation of your phone sys tem b For commercial use Normally the 1TR6 protocol is used for the in ternal ports of large phone systems Here the MSN is called EAZ and is usually the extension For the Linux configuration the last digit of the EAZ is normally sufficient If this does not work try the digits 1
381. o files The output produced by the program lists all lines that do not match This is frequently used by programmers who need only send their pro gram alterations and not the entire source code q Only reports whether the two given files differ File Systems mount option s lt device gt mountpoint This command can be used to mount any data media such as hard disks CD ROM drives and other drives to a directory of the Linux file system r mount read only t filesystem Specifies the file system The most common are ext 2 for Linux hard disks msdos for MS DOS media vfat for the Win dows file system and iso9660 for CDs For hard disks not defined in the file etc fstab the device type must also be specified In this case only root can mount If the file system should also be mounted by other users enter the option user in the ap propriate line in the etc fstab file separated by commas and save this change Further information is available in the man page for mount man mount umount option s mountpoint This command unmounts a mounted drive from the file system To pre vent data loss run this command before taking a removable data medium from its drive Normally only root is allowed to run the commands mount and umount To enable other users to run these commands edit the etc fstab file to specify the option user for the respective drive 372 2 4 4 Important Linux Commands 24 4 2 System Commands
382. o which you allow Lj PoP3 access from the Internet Use YOU usi POP3 with SSL POP3s YaST2 Online Update to keep your E imap system up to date with the latest update packages from the SuSE FTP servers HTTP Service to run a web server such as Apache SMTP Service used by mail servers that accept incoming e mail such as sendmail C IMAP with SSL IMAPs Other Services O Secure Shell ssh O telnet O Remote Synchronization rsync Additional Services Expert UOILOINBYUOD ISOA POP3 and IMAP Protocols for fetching e mails from your host ssh ssh is preferred over telnet for both security and features telnet Ge An obsolete method for remotely A Bak J Abort nex Figure 3 27 SuSE Firewall Externally Accessible Services 3 8 2 Restoring the System The restore module shown in Figure 3 28 on the next page enables restoration of your system from a backup archive Follow the instructions in YaST Press Next to proceed to the individual dialogs First specify where the archives are located removable media local hard disks or network file systems As you continue a description and the contents of the individual archives are dis played enabling you to decide what to restore from the archives Additionally there are two dialogs for uninstalling packages that were added since the last backup and for the renewed installation of packages that were deleted since the last back
383. odel is not listed in the printer database YaST offers a se lection of standard drivers for the standard printer languages Advanced Settings Use this dialog to access some additional hardware SuSE Linux User Guide 69 70 dependent driver specific and hardware independent options If needed change special queue settings or restrict access to the printer However normally there should be no need change anything here Details about the possible settings are provided in the printing chapter of the Administration Guide Configuration for Applications Applications rely on the existing printer queues in the same way as any command line tools do There is usually no need to reconfigure the printer for a particular application and you should be able to print from applications using the available queues Printing from the Command Line Print from the command line using the command lpr Plp filename where filename is the name of the file to send to the printer In this example the default printer queue 1p is used but the P option allows you to specify another queue For instance the command 1pr Pcolor filename tells the printing system to use the color queue Using the LPRng Printing System With this printing system applications use the 1pr command for printing In the application select the name of an existing queue such as color or enter the respective print command such as lpr Pcolor in the print dialog of the applicati
384. of the search term to the next select Find Next F3 To go to a previous match of the search term select Find Previous f Shift F3 To replace a search term with another string use Replace Ct Q Go to Line To jump to a particular line in the document select this menu item enter the line number in the dialog that opens then confirm with OK 7 3 The Edit Menu 7 A The View Menu From this menu you can change several aspects of the text display in KWrite You can enable or disable the editor s word wrap feature and toggle the display of line numbers F11 Also decide whether to display the icon border F6 to see or hide the bookmarks Finally the menu has an item to set the encoding of the text document 7 5 The Bookmarks Menu 1043 4XO SLM SUL In KWrite bookmarks are references to specific positions in the document They can be used to quickly navigate to a given line which is especially useful with longer documents To use bookmarks first enable the icon border View gt Show Icon Border Add a bookmark by clicking the icon border at the desired line A paper clip should appear after this to indicate that the bookmark has been set Remove a bookmark by clicking the corresponding clip Verwenden Sie N chstes Lesezeichen und voriges Lesezeichen zur Navigation zwischen den einzelnen Lesezeichen Wollen Sie s mtliche Lesezeichen l schen w hlen Si
385. og such as 192 168 22 99 If you are not dynamically assigned a name server specify the IP addresses of your provider s name server here Idle timeout seconds allows you to set an idle time after which the connec tion is terminated automatically A value between 60 and 300 seconds is recom mended Tip If you select Dial on Demand the connection is not terminated com pletely after the timeout but remains in a standby mode that enables the automatic establishment of a connection as soon as data needs to be transferred If you do not use Dial on Demand the connection is termi nated completely requiring the manual establishment of a connection before data can be transmitted For this case block automatic establish ment of a connection by setting the idle time to 0 Tip The configuration of T DSL German Telecom is similar to ADSL If you select the provider T Online continue automatically to the configuration dialog for T DSL Furthermore you need the connection ID T Online number user ID and personal password specified in your T DSL registration documents 3 5 6 ISDN This module enables the configuration of one or several ISDN cards in your system If the ISDN card is not automatically detected by YaST select the card manually Theoretically you can configure several interfaces However this is usually not necessary for home users as several providers can be configured for one interface
386. ograms it soon becomes evident that the GNU Image Manipulation Program is a phenomenal gift to the Linux commu nity As with so many Linux programs GIMP is under constant development This introduction cannot cover the whole range of features The official GIMP manual has 924 pages and is available on the Internet at http manual gimp org Unfortunately some of its descriptions and illustrations are out dated because GIMP has undergone extensive development since the manual was written The internal help system still under development also provides valuable assistance to the new user Note The version included in this distribution and discussed in this manual is the most recent release of the stable 1 2 series The unstable GIMP 1 3 series is not intended for regular users Itis only intended for those involved in developing GIMP itself Note 23 1 Image Processing and Graphics For mats 23 1 1 Pixel Images GIMP has been designed for processing pixel graphics These images consist of small blocks of color that together create the entire image A full screen image on a monitor with an 800x600 resolution has exactly that number of pixels 480 000 individual pixels Considering this it is not surprising that image files are generally quite bulky In addition to the coordinates of each pixel the color information is stored With an image of 800x600 pixels it is easy to get more than one MB of data From the outset
387. oice messages left on the answering machine will be sent by e mail to the recipient associated with the dialed phone number Thus the operation of the answering machine does not require any additional description All incoming messages can be received and opened in SuSE Linux User Guide uouooiunululoo2eJe NASI 279 280 the e mail client For backup purposes the incoming messages are also stored in var spool capisuite users lt username gt received The recording of the personal welcome message is performed directly over the remote access feature of the answering machine To access your answering machine remotely call your associated number from any telephone Enter the previously defined PIN during the welcome message playback Wait a few seconds if you mistype your PIN then try again after the beep Shortly after having correctly entered the PIN the answering machine gives the number of stored messages You then have the choice of either record ing anew welcome message or listening to your stored messages Follow the instructions given The following table provides a brief overview of the menu items for the remote accessing of messages It is recommended to carry a copy of it if you use the remote access frequently The commands can be entered at any time during the playback of the messages This means that an excessively long voice message can be skipped easily Key Function delete current message skip to the n
388. omputer has more than one hard disk specify the boot sequence of the disks as defined in the BIOS setup of the machine Default Section This option lets you specify which kernel or operating system to boot by default if no other entry is selected in the boot menu The de fault system is booted after the timeout Click this option and Edit to see a list of all boot menu entries Then select one entry from the list and click Set as Default Click Edit to modify an entry This dialog is the same as the following It allows change the order of entries in the boot menu add modify and delete entries and set a default entry UOILOINBYUOD ISOA Available Sections The existing entries of the boot menu are listed under this option in the main window If you select this option then click Edit a dialog opens that is identical to the Default Entry dialog Make Boot Loader Partition Active Use this option to activate the partition whose boot sector holds the boot loader independently from the partition on which the directory with the helper files of the boot loader are stored boot or the root directory Replace Code in MBR Specify whether to overwrite the MBR which may be necessary if you have changed the location of the boot loader Backup affected disk areas Backs up the changed hard disk areas Add Saved MBR to Boot Loader Menu Adds the saved MBR to the boot loader menu Using the Timeout option in
389. on Using the CUPS Printing System The CUPS printing system provides command line tools such as the 1pr command so the approach as de scribed above works with CUPS too To enable the above for KDE programs it is necessary to use the Print through an external program option in the print dialog There are also several graphical tools such as xpp and the KDE program kprinter which provide a graphical interface to choose among queues and to change both CUPS standard options and printer specific options as made available through the PPD file If desired configure applications to use kprinter as the standard print ing interface by specifying kprinter or kprinter stdin as the printing com mand in the respective dialogs of these applications Which of the two commands to use depends on the behavior of the application itself If this is set up in the correct way the application should call the kprinter dialog whenever a print job is issued from it so you can use kprinter to select the queue and to set other options This requires that the application s own print setup does not conflict with that of kprinter and that the setup is left unchanged after kprinter has been enabled 3 4 Hardware Troubleshooting If there is some kind of error in the communication between the computer and the printer the printer may no longer be able to interpret data correctly This can cause the output to be garbled and use up large amounts of paper
390. on the autocheck is not activated by default In either case a consistency check is performed when you confirm your selection with Accept UOILOINBYUOD ISOA In the following example package sendmail and package post fix may not be installed concurrently Figure 3 5 on the next page shows the conflict mes sage prompting you to make a decision package post fix is already installed Accordingly you can refrain from installing package sendmail remove pack age postfix or take the risk and ignore the conflict M Caution Ignoring a conflict is strongly discouraged as the stability and operability of your system can no longer be guaranteed under these conditions Caution 3 3 5 System Update This module enables an update of the version installed on your system Dur ing operation you can only update application software not the SuSE Linux base system To update the base system boot the computer from an installation medium such as the CD When selecting the installation mode in YaST select Update an existing system instead of New installation The procedure for updating the system is similar to the new installation Ini tially YaST examines the system determine a suitable update strategy and present the results in a suggestion dialog see Figure 3 6 on page 61 Click the individual items with the mouse to change any details Some items such as Language and Keyboard layout are covered in t
391. on dialog Here you can determine the maximum number of print jobs to display Enter a number in the white field or use the slider to the right in order to determine a value You can operate the slider by clicking it with the left mouse button keeping the button pressed and moving the mouse Press OK to save the setting or Cancel to exit the dialog without saving The icons under the menu bar correspond to the functions you can access by way of the menu help text explaining the function is displayed when you move the mouse pointer over one of the icons The job list consists of eight columns The job ID is automatically assigned by the print system and serves the identification of the various jobs The next col umn contains the login of the user who sent the job followed by the file name of the document The status column indicates whether a job is still in the queue currently being printed or already completed Next the size of the document is displayed in kilobytes and number of pages The default priority of 50 can be increased or reduced if necessary Billing information can be cost centers or other company specific information If you click a job in the list with the right mouse button the Jobs menu will open under the mouse pointer allowing you to select an action Only a limited function scope is available for completed jobs The bottom left corner features the check box Keep window permanent If you activate th
392. on not available with ls 1 These lines only state file name owner and owning group Lines 4 to 9 hold the ACL entries Conventional access permissions represent a subset of those possible when using ACLs Our example ACL grants read and write ac cess to the owner of the file as well as to a user jane lines 4 and 5 The con ventional concept has been expanded allowing access to an extra user The same applies to the handling of group access The owning group holds read permis sions line 6 and the group d jungle holds read and write permissions The mask entry in line 8 reduces the effective permissions for the user jane and the group djungle to read access Other users and groups do not get any kind of access to the file line 9 Only very basic information has been provided here Findfurther background information about ACLs in Access Control Lists in Linux in the Administration Guide SuSE Linux User Guide 367 368 24 4 Important Linux Commands This section gives insight into the most important commands of your SuSE Linux system Along with the individual commands parameters are listed and where appropriate a typical sample application is introduced To learn more about the various commands it is usually possible to get additional informa tion with the man program followed by the name of the command for example man ls In these v manual pages move up and down with PgUp and PgDn and move between the beginning an
393. ontrols oo o coe cas P ie a 225 12 5 For More Information aoaaa eee 225 UOS D2 JOSMOIG q M SUL 224 Welcome to SuSE Galeon SuSE THE LINUX EXPERTS Site Map Links Shop Conntru Tanonas Y ES Search EJ suse Linux Operating System Consulting SuSE Linux Support gt Business Customers Business Solutions Solutions Figure 12 1 The Main Window in Galeon Galeon s most essential navigation tools are available in the first toolbar Next and Back flip through the history of visited Internet sites as in other browsers Reload updates the contents of a site Cancel stops a connection or trans fer from taking place Zoom the magnification level of a document is usually scaled to 100 a 1 1 display of the document The up and the down arrows to its right set the zoom levels in intervals of ten Enter Internet addresses URLs in the following entry box The GNOME foot shows Galeon s progress If the icon is animated Galeon is working and transferring data 12 1 Optimized for the Web Galeon is primarily designed to make surfing the Internet as convenient as pos sible In the default configuration Galeon presents a second toolbar enabling quick access to the popular Google search engine and its news and image search function It can also offer access to an online dictionary and use the book marklets This is made possible by small JavaScript functions built into Galeon
394. oooooococccccccccccnnns 59 online update 5 50 51 user administration 103 package dependencies 32 EYOU vos 50 51
395. or in your vicinity same country to speed up the download A list of mirror is available at http www suse de en support download ftp I cannot find any exe files Where are all the applications In Linux executable files normally do not have file extensions Most pro grams are located in usr bin and usr X11R6 bin How can I recognize executable files The command 1s 1 returns all executable files in the directory usr bin in green Also recognize them by the x in the fourth column rwxr xr x 1 root root 64412 Jul 23 15 23 usr bin ftp I want to remove Linux How does this work With disk the Linux partitions are deleted You might need to run fdisk in Linux Afterwards boot from the MS DOS disk and run fdisk MBR in DOS or Windows How can I access my CD First mount the CD with the mount command Information about this command can be found in Section File Systems on page 372 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 I cannot get my CD out of the drive What should I do now First unmount the CD This is done with the umount command More information about this can be found in Section File Systems on page 372 In KDE just right click the CD ROM icon and select Unmount Drive If YaST is running on your computer exit it How can I find out how much space is available in Linux With the d hT command See Section System Information on page 373 Ov XNU 3sns Can I copy and paste in
396. ots are images of sections of your screen set basic options and access the recently processed files The main items under the Xtns menu are modules plug ins additional programs associated with GIMP that implement a specific graphical functionality scripts and GIMP web pages The Help menu pro vides access to help information 23 2 4 The Tool Icons Each graphic in the toolbox represents a specific function The toolbox can be resized both in width and height Overall a distinction can be made between three or four function areas Selection Tools In image processing process either the whole image or only a specific section of it GIMP needs to know to which area the following actions should be applied Several selection tools help define a specific area Once a selection has been made it can be processed without affect ing other parts of the image Selection areas can also be increased or de creased in size with the aid of additive selection and sub tractive selection The cursor changes to show a plus or a minus sign Transform Tools These functions are used to modify selections Many func tions are available including crop flip and transform Paint Tools The paint tools represent pencil paintbrush airbrush pen and finger smudge and try to emulate their real world properties on the PC A fourth functional area to be classed with these three areas might include the color fill and brush options which sp
397. ou can also configure various parame ters for each service By default the master service that manages the individual services inetd or xineta is not started When this module starts choose which of the two services to configure The selected daemon can be started with a standard selection of network services If desired Add Delete or Edit services to compose your own selection of services 3 6 Network Services Caution This is an expert tool Only make modifications if you are familiar with network services Caution A 3 7 Security and Users A basic aspect of Linux is its multiuser capability Consequently several users can work independently on the same Linux system Each user has a user ac count identified by a login name and a personal password for logging in to the system All users have their own home directories where personal files and con figurations are stored UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 3 7 1 User Administration Use the check boxes to decide whether to edit users or groups YasT provides an overview of all local users in the system If you are part of an extensive network click Set Filter to list all system users e g root or NIS users You can also create user defined filter settings Instead of switching be tween individual user groups combine them according to your needs To add new users fill in the required blanks in the following screen Subsequently the new user can lo
398. ously created bookmarks can be selected from the menu Tools A number of useful browser functions can be accessed via the Tools menu For example access a search engine to find certain contents on the Internet The Cookie Manager gives control over the cookies the browser has stored on your computer and lists each cookie together with the address of the site from which it originated Use it to reverse previous decisions on whether to accept or reject cookies The Image Manager allows you to block images and advertising banners from web sites which improves speed The Password Manager can make things easier for you if you frequently log in to sites via web interfaces both in internal net works and on the Internet Mozilla can remember the passwords for you However this feature also poses a certain security risk so you may not want use it for sites with high privacy requirements such as online bank ing sites SuSE Linux User Guide JOSMOIG ASM PIIZON SUL 229 230 Window This menu lets you switch to other browser windows and to those of other Mozilla components if installed to the mail client the composer and the address book Help Mozilla is a multipurpose tool so you may want to use this menu to ac cess the online help which provides information and hints about the fea tures of the program 13 1 2 The Navigation Toolbar The buttons of the navigation toolbar give quick access to th
399. own under the respec tive controller As soon as a controller event that does not exist in the list is re ceived via MIDI it is added to the list The list to the right shows the modules and their parameters If you select a parameter here the respective control ap pears enabling modification of the parameter and range limits To create a MIDI binding select a controller in the list to the left and a parame ter in the list to the right Then click Bind To clear a MIDI binding simply se lect the respective parameter in the list to the left under the controller and click 18 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor Clear Binding Clear All clears the entire list of MIDI controllers and bind ings With Toggle MIDI Sign determine whether a parameter should increase or decrease with rising controller values 18 11 5 The MIDI Out Module The output of the MIDI events generated by a MIDI Out module is realized by way of the two readable MIDI ports of AlsaModularSynth in the left list of kaconnect If several MIDI Out modules are used simultaneously the MIDI events are merged accordingly As both notation and controller events can be sent the module can also be used to control all kinds of parameters via con trol voltage To do this the readable MIDI ports must be connected with the writable MIDI port The example example midiout controller ams shows the change in an envelope with autogenerated cont
400. p If you select Change Suggested Partitioning Setup the Ex pert Partitioner opens It allows you to tweak the partition setup in every de 2 5 Installation Suggestion tail This dialog is explained in Section Expert Partitioning with YaST on the next page The original setup as proposed by YaST is offered there as a starting point If you select Create custom partitioning setup a dialog like that in Figure 2 7 opens in which to select a hard disk from those on your system SuSE Linux will be installed on the disk selected in this dialog YaST e All hard disks automatically detected on Preparing Hard Disk Step 1 your system are shown here Select the hard disk on which to install SuSE Linux You may select later which part of the disk is used for SuSE Linux The custom partitioning option for experts allows full control over partitioning the hard disks and assigning partitions to mount points when installing SuSE Linux uoipblipsu peugeqr esf Choose a hard disk 1 1 SCSI 1 96 GB dev sda QUANTUM FIREBALL TM2110S Q2 2 SCSI 8 54 GB dev sdb IBM DNES 309170W Custom partitioning for experts Back Figure 2 7 Selecting the Hard Disk The next step is to determine whether the entire disk should be used Use entire hard disk or whether to use any existing partitions if available for the instal lation If a Windows operating system was found on the disk
401. pa Browser modules for LADSPA effects Plug ins should always be created with Create Plugin unless you use AlsaModularSynth as a polyphonic synthesizer Create Poly Plugin generates a separate plug in instance for each part 18 11 3 Synthesizer Patches After having used the MIDI patchbay kaconnect to connect AlsaModularsynth with a master keyboard vkeybd or an external keyboard you can use the program as a synthesizer If polyphony is not explicitly activated with the pa rameter pol y AlsaModularSynth will be monophonic just like its classi cal model example_basic ams contains the simplest synthesizer patch In example_basic_vcf ams the sound is modified by a filter Portamento and resonance filters are added in example_basic_vcf_reverb ams In most patches the pitch bend and modulation wheel are determined by module pa rameters To prevent parameter leaps the movements of these MIDI controllers is only effective when the current parameter value is accepted As in many ana log synthesizers the envelope modules are single triggered they are not restarted for legato playback This enables some interesting phrases In example_full_midi ams the first sixteen MIDI controller events are linked to module parameters If you do not have a device that can send these events use the software MIDI controller box QMidiControl started with qmidicontrol When experimenting with this program open Control Center S
402. pace and some times little legroom swiveling mouse pad unstable and insufficient working space and good view of the screen too close too high allow you to use a computer for a short time only They should not be used at professional terminal workstations as they hardly meet any criteria of the corresponding standards You will not find much of this kind of computer furniture in professional com puter equipment catalogs because manufacturers indirectly keep an eye on the employees health by observing the minimum standards of computer worksta tions Even these minimum standards should be improved 25 1 1 The Right Desk A table at the wrong height strains arm and back muscles The resulting cramped posture especially strains the spine Too little leg room can force an unnatural body posture and cause disorders to the blood supply Choosing the right table is very easy It should be as wide and deep as possible An individual adjustment of the table height would be optimal Working tables at which you can change between sitting and standing by turning the table into a writing stand often just at the push of a button are a luxury but changing between a sitting and standing position brings relief The flexible arrangement of working materials requires a table top of at least 160 x 80 cm Workstations made of several interlinked boards are recommended Tables that cannot be vertically adjusted must be 72 cm high Tables that ar
403. page 203 Time Synchronization Conduit Enabling this conduit adjusts the handheld s clock to that of the desktop computerduring each sync operation This is only a good idea if the clock of the desktop computer itself is corrected by a time server at fairly frequent intervals 8 KPilot lt 2 gt 3 apu Available Conduits Available conduits are on Active Conduits KDE Addressbook Conduit Ol retis pus BS ko Calendar Conduit are on the right Only genre Se Sear Sonen active conduits can be KOrganizer Todo Conduit configured KPilot Expenses Conduit KPilot KNotes Conduit Time Synchronization Conduit X Cancel Figure 8 1 Configuration Dialog with the Available Conduits 8 2 1 Configuring the Handheld Connection Apart from setting up the physical link there is also some manual configuration necessary on the software side The configuration depends on the type of cradle docking unit used with the handheld There are basically two types of these USB cradles and serial cradles The connection can be configured either on a SuSE Linux User Guide JOlldM YHM anduon pjeupubpH o BuIzZluoJyoa s 197 system wide basis by the administrator the root user or by a regular user for his personal environment Configuring the Connection from within KPilot To set up the connection with the handheld cradle select Settings gt Config ure KPilot First specify the correct device file under Pi
404. page for sudoers man sudoers for the procedure If you are not familiar with vi select a different editor such as joe by exporting the desired editor for example with the command export EDITOR joe Then execute visudo as root and append the following line at the end of the file etc sudoers xnur ui punog ALL ALL ALL usr bin timidity Now all system users are permitted to run timidity in root mode with the command sudo timidity The password of the respective user is requested if more than five minutes passed since the last sudo command 18 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit Using the JACK Audio Connection Kit package jack and package ajackconnect applications can exchange audio data with each other and with the sound card This is only possible if the respective application has a JACK interface JACK support has become a standard feature so there are many applications that have the needed interface File About Readable Clients Ports Writeable Clients Ports alsa_pem alsa_pem capture_1 Pplayback 1 capture 2 playback 2 ams 129 0 ams 129 0 i iOutlDi 0 j n ID3 0 Out ID1 1 Out ID2 i In ID4 0 CEDENS In 1D4_1 bridge 25018 bridge 25018 i monitor 1 i meter 1 Connect Disconnect Show All Ports Hide All Ports CPU load 12 87 Sample rate 48000 Figure 18 9 QJackConnect a Patchbay for Jack To use JACK first start the engine with jackd d alsa d hw 0 JACK was de
405. ptions Attach Tools Settings Help DO Ow BOY Alo To tux localhost ES ce Subject Do you have ice cream for me prefer pistachios ice cream Do you have some for me Cheers Geeko Column 1 Line 1 Figure 15 2 Composing a Message 15 5 Creating a New Message To compose a message fill in the respective fields in the New Message win dow To send messages from different e mail accounts select one of the identi ties configured as described in Section Defining Your User Identity on page 247 The buttons next to To and CC and possibly blind copy Bcc open the address book allowing you to select an address After entering the first few characters of an address you can also press D to see a list of possible completions When the message is completed click Send Under View gt Headers select various header types with more or fewer entries To attach files to your message click the paper clip icon and select the file to attach Alternatively drag a file from the desktop or another folder to the New Message window or select one of the options in the Attach menu Normally the MIME type encoding of a file is recognized correctly If this is not the case select the type from a list Enter a short description in the Descrip tion field Then select an encoding from the list of encoding options the default values usually work
406. r Email Address As soon as you enter a character string in the adjacent input field the data is searched by the selected criterion The search result is displayed in the overview and in the detailed view Searching for initials or numbers jump bar Activate this toolbar with Settings gt Show Jump Bar Depending on the activated search criterion in the Incremental search clicking the SuSE Linux User Guide oogsseJppy uli jJueuJe8Dub N sseJpp v 213 Address Book Browser KAddressBook amx File Edit View Settings Help Incremental search Given Name Q a A o ex e al 247 Distribution Lists None nM Tex Linux Geeko Linux Address Home Address ll ix ceberg St 42 Name Email Use Preferred Geeko Linux Yes Tux Linux Yes Example Inc 3 New List Rename List Remove List Figure 10 3 Editing Distribution Lists respective letter or number produces the contact entries whose given name family name or e mail address begins with this letter or number Search in a remote LDAP directory To use this function first configure an LDAP server in your network Go to Settings gt Configure KAddress Book gt LDAP to access a list of various LDAP servers If no selection is Offered ask your system administrator for the name of the server the port number and the base DN Enter this data
407. r file manager document viewer and image viewer The following paragraphs cover the use of Konqueror for file manage ment Start Konqueror by clicking the house icon in the panel The contents of your home directory are then displayed The file manager window consists of the menu bar at the top the toolbar and the location bar The lower part of the window is split vertically into the naviga tion panel and the main window which displays the contents 4 3 1 B file home tux Documents Konqueror lt 2 gt Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help Q a c io qq emu E gt Location file home tux Documents fe Audio CD Browser ODevices o D a p LAN Browser lt SPrint System Browser Pictures Presentatio ns 7 gt 0 3ltems 0 Files 3 Directories Fr Figure 4 3 The File Manager Konqueror The Konqueror Menu Location Using the Location menu open additional Konqueror windows Edit If you click New Window your home directory is displayed in a new window Duplicate Window produces a second window with the same content You can also send a file or a link using the browser function by e mail If you click one of these menu items the KMail composer opens Specify the recipient and compose a text Depending on the selected item the file is already attached or the link is displayed in the e mail body You can also print directly from this menu
408. r you can stop the job and resume it if you decide to print it You can re move your own print jobs from the queue with Remove To change the printer perhaps because your colleagues already sent some large documents to the printer you can select a different printer with Move to Printer With Restart you can print a document anew To do this select the item Tog gle Completed Jobs from the Filter menu select the respective document and click Restart in the Jobs menu The Job IPP Report contains the technical SuSE Linux User Guide 149 150 4 Print Jobs for colorlaser_4w KJobViewer EPS File Jobs Filter Settings Help e gt B Size KB Page s Priorit t printl ps Completed 291 gv 3eb92946 1 Completed 333 1 t A 1 gt lt o m 7 Cary Ir Keep window permanent Max Unlimited Figure 4 5 Monitoring Print Jobs with KJobViewer details of a job You can use the menu items Increase Priority and Decrease Priority to set the priority depending on how quickly you need the document The Filter enables you to switch between various printers toggle completed jobs and limit the view to your own print jobs by selecting Show Only User Jobs The current user will be displayed in the top right field The Settings menu contains the item Configure KJobViewer that takes you to a little configurati
409. r a USB cradle create a symbolic link from dev ttyUSB to dev pilot To to so first check to which USB bus the cradle is connected If you do not have any other USB devices on the same first USB bus it can be safely assumed that this is dev ttyUSBO In this case the command to create the symbolic link would be as follows ln s dev ttyUSBO dev pilot Serial Cradle First determine to which port the cradle is connected The de vice files for serial ports are named dev ttyS and just as USB ports the counting starts from zero for the first port To create the link for a cra dle connected to the first serial port enter the command ln s dev ttyS0 dev pilot 8 2 2 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit Initially it should be sufficient to enable the KAddressBook conduit without changing any of the defaults After the data has been synchronized for the first time configure the details what to do in case of conflicts the way in which backup databases are saved and how certain fields as stored on the handheld should be assigned to the fields expected by KAddressBook 8 2 3 Managing To Do Items and Events On the KDE desktop to dos tasks and events appointments are managed with KOrganizer Start the application from the main menu or with the com mand korganizer After enabling the calendar and the to do conduit of KPilot set some configuration options before using them KOrganizer stores its files in the directory kde
410. r configuration files Replace Code in MBR Leave Untouched h ud click Edit Configuration Backup Affected Disk Areas No O m Add Saved MBR to Boot Loader Menu No C Via the Reset button you can clearthe Save Method Save Only Changed Files current configuration and propose a pr new configuration start from scratch or color white blue black light gray Q reread the configuration saved on your timeout 8s disk If you have multiple Linux systems gfxmenu hd0 1 boot message installed YaST can try to find them and O merge their menus 5 waa A 10 Add Edit Reset w Edit Configuration Files Figure 3 30 Boot Loader Configuration with YaST The Main Window The table listing the configuration data white background consists of three columns Under Changed to the left there are flags to mark the changed op tions listed in the center column To add an option click Add To change the value of an existing option select it with a mouse click and click Edit If you do not want to use an existing option at all select it and click Delete The combo box Reset to the right under the configuration window offers the following options Propose New Configuration Generates a new configuration suggestion Older Linux versions or other operating systems found on other partitions will be included in the boot menu enabling you to boot Linux or its old boot loader The latter takes you to a second boot menu Start from Scra
411. r profile settings with OK 15 3 2 Setting up Network Connections The settings under Network in the Configure KMail menu instruct KMail how to receive and send e mail There are two tabs one each for sending and for receiving mail Many of these settings vary depending on the system and net work where your mail server is located If you are not sure about the settings or which items to select consult your Internet service provider or system adminis trator Sending Create outgoing mail boxes under the Send tab Add gives the choice of either SMTP or sendmail For most purposes select SMTP here After making this selection a window appears in which to enter SMTP server data such as Name Server and if needed the required autho rization A preprocessing command to run before sending each message can be entered in the corresponding field Security settings are under the Security tab Specify your preferred en cryption method here If uncertain about which one to choose click Test server capacity The respective settings are then tested and applied If necessary consult your system administrator Receiving Make settings for receiving e mail under the Receiving tab Use Add to create a new account Choose between different methods for SuSE Linux User Guide uoupoldd IION IY SUL IONX 247 248 fetching mail such as local Mbox or Maildir format POP3 or IM
412. r the e mail address of the recipient and modify the standard text if necessary Then send the message Refer to Figure 4 8 on the following page Use Delete All to revoke all invitations To delete an individual invitation select it then click Delete If an invited person requests a connection KDE informs you about this request Decide to accept or deny the connection If you accept the connection also use the check box to release the keyboard and mouse control For security reasons the maximum duration for a connection is one hour To change the default settings start the Control Center via Settings in the main menu In the left frame select Internet amp Network Desktop Sharing Various configuration options are available in the lower part of the window However for security reasons you should not modify the default settings SuSE Linux User Guide 153 154 i Desktop Sharing Control Center nad Eile View Help Access Network Invitations Open invitations 4 Index Search Help r Appearance amp Themes S Desktop E Internet amp Network a Email File Sharing EA Local Network Brows Preferences ka Proxy L Create amp Manage Invitations j Uninvited Connections iL Allow uninvited connections ES Y Desktop Sharing VNC invitation KMail Manage Invitations De Message Edit V
413. rd or the prefix or suffix Under Help access the online manual of the ap plication with Contents and information about the author and version of the application with About SuSE Linux User Guide 167 168 C CNN c Dictionary Edit Help Word linux I D Look Up wora O Jargon File 4 3 0 30 APR 2001 Linux lee nuhks or li nuks not li nuhks n The free Unix workalike created by Linus Torvalds and friends starting about pronunciation li nuhks is preferred because the name Linus F Jee sound in Swedish Linus s family is part of Finland s 6 ethnic Swedish minority and Linus considers English short i tc closer to ee than English long i This may be the most remar hacker project in history an entire clone of Unix for 386 486 Pentium micros distributed for free with sources over the net Alpha and Sparc and many other machines are also in use Linux is what GNU aimed to be and it relies on the GNU toolset the Free Software Foundation didn t produce the kernel to go w j gt Lookup done Figure 5 2 GNOME Dictionary 5 4 2 Managing Archives with File Roller In GNOME manage file archives with File Roller This application is able to handle archives of the following types tar tar gz tgz tar bz tar bz2 tar Z zip lha rar lzh ear jar and war Easily view archive contents fromFile Roller with other applications without havi
414. re outside the selection or choose a different selection tool and apply it SuSE Linux User Guide 341 342 23 2 7 Paint Tools The first few tools in the following list are somewhat different from the other paint tools They are included in this section however because they are used to add colors or text rather than modify it The main paint tools provided by GIMP have particular properties in the real world that are emulated by the pro gram Set the appropriate options to simulate various pencils or to adjust the paintbrush to your personal requirements In the option boxes of the paint tools find the slider Opacity This is used to set the opacity of the color employed With the Mode drop down box specify how painted lines or surfaces should be integrated into the image Depending on the tool the different modes have different effects T The T stands for text input In GIMP text input is done in two ways and many options are available Double click the tool to open the option box By activating or deactivating Use Dynamic Text select multiline text in put with alignment or single line text input A click in the image with the T tool activated opens the corresponding dialog box in which to enter text and select font size and other parameters Caution If you do not save the text in a separate layer you will later be un able to modify it because it is integrated into your image in pixel form See Sectio
415. rectory name Now try to move the previously created file Testbackup into the current directory subdirectory without changing the di rectory again To achieve this specify the relative path to that file mv test Testbackup The dot at the end of this command is required to tell the shell that the current directory is the destination to which to move the file in this example refers to your home di rectory 24 2 5 Wild Cards Another convenience offered by the shell is wild cards There are four different types of these in Bash 358 242 Introduction to Bash Matches exactly one arbitrary character m Matches an arbitrary number of characters set Matches one of the characters from the group specified inside the square brackets which is represented here by the string set set Matches one character other than those identified by set Assuming that your test directory contains the files Test file Testfilel Testfile2 and datafile the command 1s Testfile will list the files Testfilel and Testfile2 With 1s Test the list will also include Testfile The command 1s i11 shows all the sample files Finally you can use the set wild card to address all sample files whose last character is a number ls Testfile 1 9 Among the four types of wild cards the most inclusive one is the asterisk It could be used to copy all files contained in one directory to another one or to delete
416. ree of lost file fragments and crosslinks After that run defrag to move SuSE Linux User Guide UOID OISU peugeqr esf 27 28 files to the beginning of the partition This will accelerate the resizing pro cedure in Linux Note If you have optimized virtual memory settings for Windows in such a way that a contiguous swap file is used with the same initial minimum and maximum size limit consider another step With these Windows settings the resizing might have the effect that the swap file is split into many small parts scattered all over the FAT partition Also the entire swap file would need to be moved during the resizing which makes the process rather slow It is therefore useful to unset these Windows optimizations for the time being and reenable them after the resizing has been completed Note NTFS file system In Windows run scandisk and defrag in order to move the files to the beginning of the hard disk In contrast to the FAT file system this must be done in NTFS in order to enable resizing Note If you operate your system with a permanent swap file on an NTFS file system this file may be located at the end of the hard disk and remain there despite defrag Therefore it may be impossible to shrink the partition sufficiently In this case temporarily deactivate the swap file the virtual memory in Windows After the partition has been resized you can configure as much virtual memory as yo
417. ressed The option is activated by default as it facilitates navigation in documents with the arrow keys Key click volume If you want to hear a sound when a key is clicked activate this option and adjust the volume with the slider Use sticky keys slow keys or bounce keys These options are the same as those listed in Section Accessibility on page 141 where they are described in detail NumLock on KDE startup Here determine whether the number pad of your keyboard should be active or inactive when KDE is started Mouse The mouse configuration comprises three tabs General Advanced and Mouse Navigation Configuration options of the General tab Button Mapping Hlere specify right handed or left handed use of your mouse Icons Determine how the system should react to clicks and double clicks The default setting for the KDE desktop is a single click for opening files or folders and a mouse pointer that changes its appearance when it is moved over icons If you want icons to be selected automatically in addition to the single click activate the respective option and set the delay for this selection To use the Windows typical double click for opening files and folders select Double click to open files and folders select icons on first click Finally set the size and color of the pointer and the visual feedback on activation Configuration options of the Advanced tab Pointer Acceleration and
418. ret eren 135 Screensaver 6 eee eee ee eee 137 pU dealeans 139 window decorations 138 A eic esie see reus 126 133 desktop sharing 153 dc s opono eena neared aioe eas 128 e mail applications 245 formatting floppy disks 151 A isa exe eset 148 KMail iaa 245 256 Main menu sssseesene 131 MENUS iii ce dt a Pee Rx 126 spanel ceia soda 131 printing occcooccccncconcccnos 128 149 Shell circa e iiiki 354 A EP AAEN tees 127 utilities comarca 145 154 windows aaae Eok EAT EEEE 133 keyboard configuring cce eerte mets 118 jc P 147 KGpg ien atinada mea ze ets 235 applet cer esas obest teias 241 clipboard encryption 241 drag and drop 242 A taces tb ei abe inta 242 exporting public keys 237 generating a key pair 236 importing keys 44 238 key servers 0ooooocccccoccccnccooo 239 exporting keys 241 importing a key 239 signing keys oooooooccoommmo 238 Kl FA AM O KInternet A O ieee Erani address book ssuuusu 253 Attachments sssssssss 251 configuring crussi ian vera 247 248 decoding messages 256 encrypting messages 254 A eee dtl anis 253 254 AA ier eae eee 251 SS iius Skorina 254 identities aee enter 247 messag
419. rinter dialog appears The file to print is already preselected 4 1 Desktop Components 4 1 5 The Panel The panel at the lower edge of the screen consists of several areas By default the icon for the main menu is located to the far left Other icons are lined up alongside it The house icon provides quick access to your home directory with all subdirectories The other icons start applications such as OpenOffice org K Mail and the web browser Konqueror provided these programs were in stalled Next to these icons are the numbered buttons with which to switch between the individual desktops These multiple desktops enable you to organize your work if you use many programs simultaneously as if you had several desks for various tasks dosed JG eui The taskbar is located next to the virtual desktops All started applications are displayed in the taskbar If you click a window title in the taskbar the applica tion will be moved to the foreground in case it is located behind other windows If itis already in the foreground a mouse click will minimize the application If you click it again it will be opened anew Next to the taskbar you will notice applets such as the clipboard Klipper SuSEwatcher and any other applets you have started The clock helps you keep track of the time If you click an empty space in the panel with the right mouse button a menu providing the usual help and configuration options for the panel is displayed
420. rmats the floppy disk in MS DOS format using the fdformat command mcd a makesa your current directory mmd a test creates the subdirectory test on the floppy disk mrd a test deletes the subdirectory test from the floppy disk 24 2 10 Cleaning Up After this crash course you should be familiar with the basics of the Linux shell or command line You may want to clean up your home directory by deleting the various test files and directories using the rm and rmdir commands At the end of this chapter find a list of the most important commands and a brief de scription of their functions 24 3 Users and Access Permissions Since its inception in the early 1990s Linux has been developed as a multiuser system Any number of users can work on it simultaneously This resulted in some notable distinctions from the Microsoft end user Windows operating sys tems The most important distinguishing feature is the necessity for users to log in to the system before starting a session at their workstation Each user has a user name with a corresponding password This differentiation of users guarantees that unauthorized users cannot see files for which they do not have permission Larger changes to the system such as installing new programs are also usually impossible or restricted for normal users Only the vzroot user or super user has the unrestricted capacity to make changes to the system and has unlimited access to all files Those who u
421. rocedure For example if you configure an Internet connection you will be able to per form an online update immediately In this way you can include the latest up dates for your system If you establish a connection with a local network you can configure a name service such as NIS YaST assumes that you will not manage any local users on your system This is usually the case with commercial workstations whose users are administered centrally e g on a department server If you do not configure a name service you can set up local users intended for normal opera tions on the system 1 4 Configuration An additional overview displays the detected screen graphics card and other hardware components printer sound card etc If necessary change set tings such as the suggested screen resolution or the color depth Refer to Sec tion Hardware Configuration on page 41 Some of the dialogs for the configura tion of the additional hardware are able to search for connected devices How ever these settings do not need to be specified at this stage You can also skip this step and do it later After the completion of this last step your newly in stalled system is booted and you can start using it Have a lot of fun with SuSE Linux SuSE Linux User Guide UOHOIIO SU AONO User Defined Installation The previous chapter covered the quick installation procedure This chapter provides detailed information about the sett
422. roller events Easily follow the movement of the envelope by opening the configuration dialog of the ENV module ID 5 with the right mouse button The option Follow MIDI in the Control Center should be deactivated while this patch is running If you connect the readable MIDI ports of AlsaModularSynth with a MIDI sound generator example midiout note ams plays scales controlled by an LFO example midiout note velocity ams shows that the velocity data can also be autogenerated example midiout random ams generates random music with drums 18 11 6 Writing WAV Files with the WAV Out Module Using the WAV Out module directly record the signals generated or processed by AlsaModularSynth as a WAV file in CD quality In the configuration dialog of the module select New File to open a file browser If the file displayed under File is successfully generated the buttons under Record are activated and can be used 18 12 NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers NoteEdit is one of the most comprehensive Linux applications for editing scores with a graphical interface As the entered notes are sounded immediately by the selected MIDI device even newcomers can easily prepare scores with NoteEdit This program offers the entire range of music symbols for writing scores With NoteEdit even play and record MIDI files The scores can be exported in several formats including MusicTeX and LilyPond SuSE Linux User Guide xnur ui punog
423. rs digits and _ Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you really know what you are doing User names have stricter restrictions than Details Bassword Settings j Additional Users and Groups UOID OISU peugeqr esf passwords To work with Linux first enter the User Back Abort Installation ae Loain and the password This startina Bl Le L sex Figure 2 18 Entering the User Name and Password were printed If you have installed update packages the most recent version of the release notes is available 2 7 Hardware Configuration Configure the graphics card and if desired other hardware devices such as the printer and the sound card Just click a component to start its configuration For the most part YAST then detects and configures the devices automatically You may skip any peripheral devices and configure them later However you should configure the graphics card right away Although the display settings as autoconfigured by YaST should be generally acceptable most users have very strong preferences as far as resolution color depth and other graphics features are concerned To change these settings select X Configuration The configura tion is explained in Section Graphics Card and Monitor SaX2 on page 72 When finished click Finish Installation After YaST has written the configuration data you can finish the installation of the SuSE Linux with Finish in the
424. rtcuts or use regular expressions Check the Klipper handbook for details Former Windows users may appreciate the option for activat ing the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl C and Ctrl X for cutting and Ctr for pasting under the General tab To use this feature activate the entry Synchronize contents of the clipboard and the selection in Clip board Selection Behavior Subsequently use the mouse or the keyboard shortcuts to which you are accustomed doptseg FG eui Help This item opens a submenu from which to open the Klipper handbook send a bug report to the developers and view information about Klipper and KDE Quit If you click Quit a dialog is displayed asking whether Klipper should be started automatically the next time you log in If you click No start the program from the main menu the next time you want to use it If you click Cancel the program will not be terminated 4 4 5 Monitoring Print Jobs You can start KJobViewer from the main menu or with the command kjobviewer from the command line This program assists you in monitoring your print jobs Print jobs are placed in a queue from where they are sent to the printer consecutively As long as your jobs are not printed you can edit them by means of the Jobs menu or by clicking the respective icon under the menu bar see Figure 4 5 on the next page If for example you want to check if you sent the correct document to the printe
425. ruary March April Figure 6 10 A Chart in Calc Importing Data from the Clipboard For instance you may want to import stock exchange data Display the desired table in your web browser Then select the table with the mouse or using Copy depending on the browser This copies the selected data to the clipboard After that open a new OpenOffice org document with File New Spreadsheet Select the cell in which the inserted table should start Then select Edit Paste This inserts the table into the document with all the formatting specifications hyperlinks and other information included Importing Data with a Filter Import a saved HTML file to Calc by selecting File gt Open This opens a dialog window in which to select Web Page OpenOffice org Calc under File type Use the arrow keys to scroll the list of file types Finally select the file name then Open to import the ta ble 186 67 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 6 8 Creating Graphics Using Open Office org Draw Draw can be used to create vector graphics Vector graphics are images in which lines and curves are defined through certain parameters such as the location of points and the curvature To create a new drawing start Draw from the main menu Applications gt OpenOffice org Draw If OpenOffice org is already running select File New gt Drawing The grap
426. run concurrently As the processor can only handle one process at a time each process is assigned a certain amount of time by the operating system s sched uler The switching action between processes normally happens so quickly that the user does not notice it However during audio playback even brief interruptions are noticeable in the kscd gomenor ari II Playing 01 04 10 ISG LOLS Sd vor 25x ovn BETES No matching CDDB entry found Figure 18 8 The kscd User Interface SuSE Linux User Guide 291 292 form of clicks Therefore audio programs use a buffer for the playback enabling the audio data in the buffer to be emitted continuously by the sound card even when the audio program is interrupted by the scheduler Accordingly the play back is click free if the buffer is large enough to bridge the longest possible in terruption However the buffer size also determines the reaction time latency of the pro gram Therefore the buffer size is kept as small as possible especially for in teractive applications such as real time synthesizers and DJ mixer consoles Basically the length of the interruptions depends on the system load and the priority of the process Consequently the size of the buffer required for click free playback can be reduced by increasing the priority of the audio program or by switching to a real time scheduler For this reason many audio programs attempt to switch their processes to a re
427. ry the Help Agent instead which offers help and tips as you perform different actions with OpenOffice org Select Help gt Help Agent to enable this If less information should be sufficient try Tips and Extended Tips They enable the program s tooltips short information about the element to which the mouse is pointing These items can easily be disabled later when you are more familiar with the program Tip If you are not sure whether the features are active open the Help menu A checked menu item indicates that the corresponding help function is currently active Tip 6 4 Converting Microsoft Office Documents OpenOffice org is able to work with Microsoft Office documents To convert such documents select File gt AutoPilot Document Converter SuSE Linux User Guide ejns eoyo 610 eoyouedo Sul 175 Now choose the file format from which to convert There are several StarOffice and Microsoft Office formats available After selecting a format click Next then specify where OpenOffice org should look for documents to convert and in which directory the converted files should be placed Before continuing make sure all other settings are appropriate Note Documents from a Windows partition are usually in a subdirectory of windows Note Click Next to see a summary of the actions to perform which gives another opportunity to check whether a
428. s 367 changing 6 00 scenes eee eens 364 description 6 0 60 c eee eens 363 directories 2o ues bie kohei 364 2 362 PUG esa lonas 374 PNG dossesedirsive ed a ebciv decir cand 337 posce 63 72 applications from 70 command line oooooococoo 70 configurations ssssssssss 65 configuring with YaST Connection CUPO La iebeeI eee ED ERRARE GDI Printers 0c eee Ghostscript driver 68 kprinter 2 4 opa ree het 70 A A irae ashes 64 xu E 64 65 LPRng and Ipdfilter 70 uo iisgacerecnsiase danni ne tees 68 printer driver 00 eee 68 printer languages 63 printing system ssessse 64 PHODIOMS circa icon 71 processing a printjob 64 queues denr erener aenor eiai 65 68 supported printers 66 Switching the Printing System 67 troubleshooting ZI APP eade ito HEP MM end 70 processes aie iono EEn enn 373 A aneas 374 OVerview 1 0 cece ee eee eee eee ee 373 profile manager cece eens 116 programs PS iii e 373 A pe e aed deena ite 337 Q qamix rae EI AoE E AE erheben 285 R I ioa ERER NA E Eei 375 removing Linux ooooocccccccococcncooo 396 rescue disk eoe tie p DER nex haces 110 rescue system 066 eee eee eee eee 16 o ta 369 POGUE or di
429. s uoupojueuunoo pub d eH 392 View Window The view window always displays the currently selected con tents such as online manuals search results or web pages O SuSE Help KDE Help Center DZ rr File Edit Go Settings Help AQWA eco Contents Search Gl SuSE HelpCenter Y Application Manuals Y Administration Y Development Y Online Resources Development Documentation for Developers o Bash Reference o Tools o Languages o Libraries Administration o Linux Documentation o Hardware o System Application Manuals o KDE Application Manuals Manuals of applications sorted as in start menu o Reference documentation Online Resources e SuSE Hardware Database o SuSE Homepage t Figure A 1 The Main Window of the SuSE Help Center A 2 Contents of the SuSE Help Center The SuSE Help Center bundles useful information from various sources It con tains special documentation for SuSE Linux User Guide and Administration Guide all available information sources for your workstation environment online help for the installed programs and help texts for other applications Fur thermore the SuSE Help Center provides access to SuSE s online databases that cover special hardware and software issues in connection with SuSE Linux All these sources can be searched comfortably once a search index has been gener ated A 2 Contents of the SuSE He
430. s If you select Paranoid remember that some programs might not work or not work correctly because you no longer have the permissions to access certain files In this dialog also define which user should start the updat edb pro gram This program which automatically runs on a daily basis or after booting generates a database locatedb where the location of each file on your computer is stored locatedb can be searched by running the locate command If you select Nobody any user can find only the paths in the database that can be seen by any other unprivileged user If root is se lected all local files are indexed because the user root as superuser may access all directories Finally make sure the option Current directory in root s path is deacti vated default Finish to complete your security configuration 3 7 Security and Users With this module change the local security settings The local security settings include the boot configuration login settings password settings some user creation settings and file permissions All particular settings are described in the respective dialogs You can choose one ofthe preset configurations or you can make your own settings Use Home Workstation for a home computer not connected to any type of a network Use Networked Workstation for a computer connected to any type of a network orthe Internet Use Network Server for a computer that
431. s once a day and automatically download PP Edit Server and install updates when new ones are q _t ItIEE gt XE zqz 2 available without the need of user Bj Manually Select Patches interaction E Reload All Patches from Server L Configure Fully Automatic Update Abort Update if Next Figure 3 3 YaST Online Update on Usually this includes the actual program associated configuration files and documentation Often a package containing the source files for the respective program is also available The sources are not needed for running the program Nevertheless you may want to install the sources to compile a custom version of the program In Linux this is possible and permitted Some packages depend on other packages This means that the software of the respective package only works properly if another package is also installed package dependency Furthermore the installation not only the operation of some packages is only possible if certain other packages are installed perhaps because the installation routine needs specific tools Accordingly such packages must be installed in the correct sequence Moreover there are some packages with identical or similar functionalities that serve the same purpose If these package make use of the same system resource they should not be installed concurrently package conflict Dependencies and conflicts can occur between two or more packages and are sometimes very complex The
432. s connected alternatively specify the port number of the external MIDI port SuSE Linux User Guide 299 300 x Virtual Keyboard ver 1 7 129 0 Q File View Reverb Chorus Channel lt o gt Control ModiWheel NN Preset 000 000 Piano 1 DA 000 006 Harpsichord 000 007 Clavinet 000 008 Celesta 000 009 Glockenspiel Key i Velocity Ey met mmf Pitch Clear Eia Figure 18 12 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard vkeybd supports a number of additional options For example enter vkeybd addr 73 0 octave 5 amp to increase the number of displayed octaves to five An overview of the command line options can be accessed with vkeybd helporin the man page for vkeybd man vkeybd The instrument designation in the preset list can be configured by specify ing a preset file with the preset option Extract the instrument names of a sound font file with the command sftovkb Change to the respective directory with cd usr share sounds sf2 and enter the command sftovkb Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 vintage vkb to save the names in your home directory in vintage vkb The vkeybd interface can be configured with the view menu The mapping of the keys to the sent MIDI notes is saved in the file vkeybdrc Additional specifications can be made in this file To implement your own modifications retrieve the designations of keyboard event
433. s for moving a window The possible choices are Ctrl Alf and the key 5 2 6 Background Determine a background for your desktop By default the changes made here are applied to all virtual desktop If you do not want any background picture click No Picture and define a background style The drop down menu offers a horizontal gradient a vertical gradient or no gradient at all Use Color to define the desired colors in the color editor To use an image file as a background picture drag and drop it from the file manager to the Select picture field in the module dialog Alternatively click Select picture to open a dialog in which to select the desired image Picture Options determines what processing steps should be applied to the selected image to adapt it optimally to the current screen resolution The options are Wallpaper Centered Scaled and Stretched 5 2 Settings 5 2 7 Font This module determines the font to use for the desktop In a second step enable optional effects for the improvement of the font quality The upper part of the dialog window features four buttons holding the fonts selected for Applica tion font Desktop font Window title font and Terminal font Click one of the buttons to open a selection dialog in which to set the font family style and size The options for Font Rendering and the additional configuration options accessible throu
434. s of the shell environment variable A position in the vzenvironment of the shell Every environment variable has a name that is usually capitalized The variables are assigned values such as path names SuSE Linux User Guide 403 404 ethernet Popular standard for less expansive computer networks EXT2 Second Extended File System EXT2 is the default file system used by Linux FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Widely used acronym for documents providing answers to frequently asked questions file system A file system is a system for structuring files There are many file systems available which differ sometimes quite extremely in performance and power firewall Protects a local network or host from unauthorized access from the Inter net using various security measures free software See r GNU FTP file transfer protocol A tsprotocol based on v TCP IP for transferring files GNOME GNU Network Object Model Environment Another user friendly graphical desktop environment for Linux similar to KDE GNU GNU is Not Unix GNU is a project of the Free Software Foundation FSF Closely linked to the GNU Project is the name of Richard Stallman RMS The aim of the GNU Project is to create a free Unix compatible operating sys tem free not so much in the sense of free of cost but in the sense of freedom having the right to obtain modify and change the software To guarantee the freedom of
435. s on the desk top are placed on top of each other in such a way that only the top and left borders of the lower windows are visible Desktop 1 Desktop 1 is your default desktop All open windows are listed un der this menu item Click windows to move them to the foreground additional desktop Furthermore you can use additional virtual desktops You can switch to another desktop with the menu or the panel All functions are available on all desktops This possibility is quite useful to limit the number of programs and associated windows on one desktop These vir tual desktops resemble additional desks in your office If you click the desktop with the right mouse button a more complex menu is displayed allowing you to customize your desktop Create New Enables creation of new elements such as directories files or URLs on the desktop A list of possible elements is provided for selection in a submenu 4 1 Desktop Components Bookmarks This item opens the bookmark editor KEditBookmarks With it create group change or delete bookmarks The browser and file manager Konqueror can access these bookmarks Undo This option allows you to undo the last action For example if you just created a new directory on the desktop clicking this item reverts the cre ation so the directory disappears Paste To be able to open a folder or document quickly by means of a desktop symbol copy the icon from the file manager by clicking it with the
436. s the creation of DVD copies reading audio data in WAV format rewrit ing CDs or the integrated audio player A detailed description of all available program features is available at http k3b sourceforge net SuSE Linux User Guide uojooyddy Buluing 333 eur ae 321 Digital Cameras and Linux The application gphoto2 is an extremely convenient program for managing digital photographs in Linux gPhoto 2 0 is a command line program It is compatible with several graphical interfaces front ends including giKam Konqueror Kamera and GnoCam This chapter covers the use of giKam Konqueror and Digikam 21 1 Connecting to tlie Camera se cos eoo ee 324 21 2 Installating the Programs 324 21 5 Using Konqueror ar oon e do eben RR 324 214 Ding PIKAD iux cats SoR e GR as a ales 325 21 5 Usine Digikami cuu sen a Es 327 21 6 For More Information 327 xnur PUD SOIOLUDZ Jorba Tip A comprehensive list of supported cameras is available at http www gphoto org cameras html If gohoto 2 is installed re trieve the list with the command gphoto2 list cameras gphoto2 help provides information about the available commands in the command line interface Tip _ 21 1 Connecting to the Camera The fastest and most convenient way to connect digital cameras to the computer is USB provided the kernel the camera and the computer support USB The standard SuSE kernel provid
437. s the dialog for configuring your network card See Figure Network Card on page 89 The DHCP protocol is not used for the au tomatic assignment of IP addresses for DSL Therefore do not use Automatic SuSE Linux User Guide 93 address setup with DHCP Instead use a static dummy IP address like 192 168 22 1 In Subnet mask enter 255 255 255 0 For a stand alone system do not make any entries in the Default gateway field Tip The values for the IP address of your host and Subnet mask are merely placeholders They are not used for establishing a connection with DSL and are only needed for activating the network card Tip CAT SuSE Here setthe mostimportantsettingsfor DSL configuration DSL connection Frist choose your PPP mode This is either PPP over Ethernet PPPOE or PPP over ATM PPPOATM Use PPP over DSL Connection Settings Ethernet if your DSL modem is connected via ethernet to your computer If you are not sure which mode to use ask your provider PPP over Ethernet 3 PPP mode It you are using PPP over Ethernet first configure your ethernet card PPP Mode Dependent Settings The PPP Mode Dependent Settings are VPINCI settings required to set up your DSL connection The VPI VCI makes sense only for PPP over ATM connections Ethernet card is needed for PPP over pimein Ethernet connections eto 3 Configure Network Cards For PPPoATM enter your V
438. s the most flexible because it allows selection of the desired area with the mouse Once the settings have been made request the preview of the image to scan by clicking Preview Scan on Scan Parameter 22 3 The Final Scan If you selected Custom for the scanning size use the mouse to select the rect angular area to scan The selected area is confined by a dotted border Click Scan Parameter again Choose between color and black and white scan ning and set the resolution with the slider See Figure 22 3 on page 333 The 22 1 The Kooka Window KDE Scanning Kooka File Image Settings Help S266 ARIMA X Ea C 90 Wave S B image Viewer Scan Preview 4Kooka Gallery allljpg 12 LY i andreas t i acl Jpg o ei x Gallery Kooka Gallery KA x Scanner Settings AGFA e SNAPSCAN 1236U e Scan mode Ea Color Cj Halftone pattern Resolution 300 A 4 E e FinalScan j PreviewScan Loading file home tux kde share apps ScanImages all1 jpg 1280x938 pixel 32 bit Figure 22 1 The Kooka Main Window higher the resolution the better the quality of the scanned image is However this also results in a correspondingly larger file and the scanning process can take a very long time at high resolutions Activate Use custom gamma table and click Edit to change the settings for brightness contras
439. s with the Xev program 18 9 3 Establishing Connections Between MIDI Ports ALSA provides an efficient infrastructure for the connection of several MIDI ports Sound cards and MIDI programs provided these support the ALSA se quencer structure have one or several MIDI ports for communicating with each 18 9 ALSA and MIDI Eile Help Readable Ports 64 0 External MIDI 0 80 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 0 81 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 1 82 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 2 83 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 3 129 0 Virtual Keyboard 130 0 Virtual Keyboard 131 0 MIDI Viewer 133 0 Virtual Keyboard 134 0 MIDI Viewer 72 0 External MIDI 1 Writeable Ports 54 0 External MIDI 0 65 0 Emul0k1 WaveTable 65 1 Emul0k1 WaveTable 65 2 Emul0k1 WaveTable 55 3 Emu10k1 WaveTable 72 0 External MIDI 1 80 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 0 81 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 1 82 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 2 83 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 3 131 0 MIDI Viewer 132 0 Client 132 132 1 Client 132 134 0 MIDI Viewer connect disconnect Figure 18 13 Connecting MIDI Ports and Status Display with kaconnect other These ports can be connected with the KDE program kaconnect or the command aconnect On start up kaconnect shows the readable and writable MIDI ports available on your system and their connection status To test the pro cedure start two MIDI programs with the commands vkeybd and aseqview For the connection
440. sages can be received and administered on the server without downloading them to the hard disk This is often used in internal networks as it allows access to mail from different computers 15 3 Configuring KMail When KMail is started for the first time a Mail folder is added to your home directory This folder contains some basic mail directories inbox outbox drafts 15 1 Mail Formats sent and trash Go to Settings gt Configure KMail to enter the information needed for sending and receiving messages All configuration options can be accessed under Configure KMail wrench icon 15 3 1 Defining Your User Identity You can manage several e mail addresses e g your private e mail address and your business address with KMail Select from the defined identities when writ ing e mail To create a new identity profile select New and enter a name for the profile such as Private or Office Click OK to proceed to a dialog in which to enter some additional informa tion Under General enter your name organization and e mail address Under Advanced enter your OpenPGP key specify a default BCC field or reply to address and determine the folder in which your messages should be stored Under Signature define a signature footer to use for every message To use this feature select Enable signature Insert the signature from a file an input field or a command output Confirm you
441. se Browse to select a suitable sound from the list Visible bell If you want system bells to be communicated visually to the user activate Use visible bell If no other modifications are performed the screen is inverted when a system bell rings the radio button Invert screen is activated by default The duration of the visual bell can be ad justed with the slider Instead of the inversion the screen can be set flash To do this activate Flash screen and select a suitable color in the color editor by clicking the color bar Sticky Keys Some shortcuts require a key to be held down this is the case with Att Ctrl and f Shift while the second part of the shortcut is en tered If sticky keys are used the system considers these keys to be pressed continuously even if they are only pressed once Slow Keys Here determine if and to what extent the system delays the output of characters on the screen when a key is pressed The longer the interval adjusted with the slider is the longer a key can be pressed without trig gering a repeated output of the respective character on the screen Bounce Keys If you activate this option pressing a key twice is only in terpreted as two characters if the interval selected with the slider has elapsed If a key is pressed twice inadvertently this will be ignored SuSE Linux User Guide 141 142 4 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Konqueror is a unified web browse
442. se this concept wisely only logging in with full root access when necessary can cut back the risk of unintentional loss of data Because under normal circumstances only the super user can delete system files or format hard disks the threat from the Trojan horse effect or from acciden tally entering destructive commands can be significantly reduced 24 3 1 File System Permissions Basically every file in a Linux file system belongs to a user and a group Both of these proprietary groups and all others can be authorized to write read or execute these files 24 3 Users and Access Permissions A group in this case can be defined as a set of connected users with certain col lective rights For example call a group working on a certain project project3 Every user in a Linux system is a member of at least one proprietary group normally users There can be as many groups in a system as needed but only root is able to add groups Every user can find out with the command groups of which groups he is a member File Access The organization of permissions in the file system differs for files and directories File permission information can be displayed with the command 1s 1 The output could appear as in Output 1 rw r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap Output 1 Sample Output Showing File Permissions As shown in the third column this file belongs to user tux It is assigned to the group project 3 To discover the user p
443. security modules are loaded only the first eight characters are used to identify the password Linux distinguishes between lowercase and uppercase letters in the password Accented characters and umlauts are not allowed Special characters and the digits 0 9 may be used 2 6 8 Reading the Release Notes After completing the user authentication setup YOST displays the release notes They contain important up to date information not available when the manuals 2 6 Finishing the Installation It you fill out the fields Full User Name Add a New Local User and User Login a new user account is created with the password given in the corresponding field When entering a password distinguish between uppercase and lowercase It Eul User Name should not contain any special characters e g accented characters TuX SuSE User Login With the current password encryption n DES the password length shouid be geeko EA between 5 and 8 characters Enter a Password Valid password characters are letters digits blanks and _ 19 Reenter the Password for Verification cum o m To ensure that the password was entered correctly repeat it exactly in a second field Do not forget your password The User Login could be created from Receive System Mail components of the full name by clicking Suggestion button It may be modified R Enable Auto Login but use only letters no accented characte
444. see them in this menu It is recommended to arrange your collection by subjects grouped hierarchically Create a new group for bookmarks with New Directory Open the bookmark editor by selecting Bookmarks gt Edit Bookmarks Use this program to organize rearrange add and delete bookmarks If you are using Netscape or Mozilla as additional browsers it is not necessary to recreate your bookmarks File gt Import Netscape Bookmarks in the book mark editor enables you to integrate your Netscape and Mozilla bookmarks into your most current collection The reverse is also possible via Export as Netscape Bookmark Change your bookmarks by right clicking the entry A pop up menu appears in which to select the desired action cut copy delete etc When you achieve the desired results save it with File gt Save To save your bookmark list and have instant access to it make your bookmarks visible in Konqueror Select Settings gt Show Bookmark Toolbar A bookmark panel is automatically displayed in the current Konqueror window SuSE Linux User Guide Jo1enbuoy JSSMOJA JSM SUL 221 222 11 5 Java and JavaScript Do not confuse these two languages Java is an object oriented platform independent programming language from Sun Microsystems It is frequently used for small programs applets which are executed over the Internet for things like online banking chatti
445. selected program looks Use Setup and Test to test the screen saver in the running system and configure it Start screen saver automatically For the screensaver to be activated automat ically select this check box and specify the time in minutes after which the screensaver should be activated Require password to stop screen saver The screensaver can block your workstation and require a password for the release Priority Use the slider to set the priority of the screensaver in relation to other processes If you use a graphically complicated screensaver that generates a high processor load set the priority higher to achieve a smooth display quality In this case the priority of other processes is reduced accordingly However if you frequently let your machine work while you do other things you should refrain from running a complex screensaver with a high priority Colors Use this module to manage and edit color schemes for your desktop Select one of the many existing schemes The preview window displays all desktop ele ments in the defined colors To change the color of one or several widgets select SuSE Linux User Guide 137 138 the name of the widget from the drop down menu under Widget Color and click the color bar below to choose a suitable color in the color editor Finally adjust the contrast settings and save the modified scheme under a name of your choice To apply this scheme globally activ
446. should only be used for system administration maintenance and re pair Logging in as root for daily work is rather risky a single mistake could lead to many system files being irretrievably lost Figure 2 13 on the following page shows the relevant dialog For verification purposes the password for root must be entered twice Do not forget the root password It cannot be retrieved later Caution The user root has all the permissions needed to make changes to the system To carry out such tasks the root password is required You cannot carry out any administrative tasks without this password Caution zl 2 6 2 Network Configuration In this step configure network devices for a connection to the outside world If you have these devices such as network cards modems and ISDN or DSL hardware it is a good idea to configure them now An Internet connection al lows YaST to retrieve any available SuSE Linux updates Directions for configuring network hardware are available in Section Network Devices on page 87 where the necessary steps are described If preferred con figure your network devices later from the installed system To do so select Skip Network Configuration then Accept 2 6 3 Testing the Internet Connection If you configured an Internet connection you can test it right now For this pur pose YaST establishes a connection to the SuSE server and checks if any product SuSE Linux User Guide
447. shows Networks news Text search Start Time tomzoGnefkom repeat hobbies d TOM jou can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of music e Version 2 as published by the Free Software ems Add filter shortcut tributed in the hope that it will be useful but without any Update filter shortcut arii Reset Acauisition is wating for reception forced passive Figure 19 2 The Electronic TV Magazine nxtvepg SuSE Linux User Guide UJO2q9M PUD OIPRy O9pIA AL 315 If you have not started a TV application let nxtvepg search for EPG broadcast ers To do this use Configure Provider scan Use xatv is activated by de fault This indicates that nxtvepg is accessing the broadcasters saved in this file Tip If there are problems check to see if the proper video source has been chosen under TV card input Tip Select from the EPG providers found in Configure Select Provider Config ure gt Merge Providers even creates flexible associations between the various provider databases 19 4 2 Sorting the Programs nxtvepg provides a convenient filter function for managing even the most ex tensive program offerings Activate a network selection list with Configure Show networks The Filter menu offers plenty of filter functions Right click the program list to open a special filter menu in which to activate co
448. sical disk ar eas assigned to a particular operating system Using primary partitions you could not set up more than four partitions per hard disk More do not fit in the partition table This is why extended partitions are used Extended partitions are also continu ous ranges of disk cylinders but an extended partition may itself be subdivided into logical partitions Logical partitions do not require entries in the partition table In other words an extended partition is a container for logical partitions If you need more than four partitions create an extended partition This ex tended partition should span the entire remaining free cylinder range Then create multiple logical partitions within the extended partition The maximum number of logical partitions is fifteen on SCSI disks and 63 on E IDE disks It does not matter which type of partitions are used for Linux Primary and logi cal partitions both work fine 2 5 Installation Suggestion Required Disk Space The amount of hard disk space needed depends on the intended use of the sys tem Available space limits what applications can be installed The following hints give some guidelines for space requirements Minimal system 180 MB No graphical interface X Window System is installed which means only console applications can be used Also only a very basic selection of soft ware is installed Minimal system with graphical interface 500 MB This includes X and
449. signed to achieve a low latency Therefore the engine should run with SuSE Linux User Guide 293 294 real time priority For more information read the file usr share doc packages jack README SuSE The patchbay QJackConnect assists in tracking the JACK clients running in your system Following the program launch with qjackconnect the clients with readable ports are listed on the left side and the clients with writable ports are listed on the right side If no JACK clients were started the lists initially only display the inputs and outputs of the sound card The lists are updated automatically as the port configuration changes The ports are displayed in a tree view under the client Connect individual ports by selecting them from the lists and clicking Connect Connect multiple ports simultaneously by selecting clients 18 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity With audacity package audacity record and edit audio files This is called hard disk recording When you start the program for the first time selection a language At other times change the language setting under File gt Prefer ences gt Interface The language change it then effective the next time you start the program 18 6 1 Recording WAV Files and Importing Files Click the red recording button to generate an empty stereo track and start the recording To change the standard parameters specify the settings under File
450. solution 600 A height 33 mm ET a EA size 613 3 KB l Final Scan Jl Preview Scan Figure 22 2 The Kooka Preview Window Image The Image menu allows starting a graphics application for postpro cessing or optical character recognition of an image The recognized text from an OCR operation is displayed in its own frame Various tools for scaling rotating and flipping an image are available These functions can also be accessed from the toolbar The submenu Create From Selection allows saving an area of an image previously marked with the mouse Settings Settings adjusts of the look and feel of Kooka The toolbar and status bar can be switched on and off and keyboard shortcuts for menu entries can be defined Configure Toolbars provides a list of all the functions available to the toolbar Configure Kooka opens a configuration dialog in which to modify the look and feel of Kooka Normally however the defaults are sufficient In Tool Views enable and disable the thumbnail viewer the preview the gallery the scanning parameters and the OCR result window Help The Help menu provides access to the online help manual for Kooka Also use it to access a feedback channel for problems and wishes It also provides information about the version authors and license of Kooka and KDE 22 4 The Menus KDE Scanning Kooka 5 mer
451. specific files or directories on your host If you select Add Bookmark the current content of the location bar is saved as a bookmark To access this location simply click this bookmark For practical reasons arrange bookmarks in folders The SuSE folder already exists This folder contains bookmarks of important SuSE web pages Edit Bookmarks opens the bookmark editor in which to perform tasks like deleting obsolete bookmarks renaming bookmarks and moving bookmarks from one folder to another Settings Use the Settings menu to configure the look and feel of Konqueror Hide the menu bar by deactivating Display Menubar Press M to display it again Under Toolbars hide or display the main toolbar an extra toolbar the location bar and the bookmark list If you changed the view of a specific directory save these changes under View Properties Saved in Directory or Remove Directory Properties Using view profiles change the view by means of predefined patterns The default setting is File Management Under Load View Profile switch to File Preview Midnight Commander or Web Browsing For example when you click the Konqueror icon in the panel the web browser profile is displayed Specify individual keyboard shortcuts with Configure Shortcuts customize the toolbar with Configure Toolbars and configure global settings for the file manager with Configure Kon queror
452. sr bin cdrecord By means of the setuid bit all users belonging to the group users can use the program In effect this means that the program is executed as root Caution Setting the setuid bit for a program makes your computer more vulner able to attacks Only do this in exceptional cases when you know the program well and are aware of the potential risks Caution ell 24 3 4 The setgid Bit The setuid attribute applies to users However there is also an equivalent prop erty for groups the setgid attribute A program for which this attribute was set runs under the group ID under which it was saved no matter which user starts it Therefore in a directory with the setgid bit all newly created files and subdirectories are assigned to the group to which the directory belongs Con sider the following example directory drwxrwxr 2 root archive 48 Nov 19 17 12 backup Set the setuid bit with the command chmod g s test Subsequently the access permissions appear as follows drwxrwxr 2 root archive 48 Nov 19 17 12 backup 24 3 5 The Sticky Bit Apart from the setuid and setgid bits there is the sticky bit It makes a differ ence whether it belongs to an executable program or a directory If it belongs to a program a file marked in this way will be loaded to the RAM to avoid need ing to get it from the hard disk each time it is used Nowadays this attribute is used rarely as modern hard disks are fast enough
453. ssible to switch this to other display modes Tree The Tree view shows the complete directory tree of the system History The History view lists objects that have been accessed previously Emblems The Emblems view presents all available emblems These are used for marking files for instance as art To mark a file as art drag the art emblem to the file and drop the emblem on top of the file Emblems are removed by dropping the Eraser emblem over a file SuSE Linux User Guide 165 166 gecko File Edit View Go Bookmarks Help gt t0 Q 2 Up Stop Reload Home o View as Icons a uw Documents nsmail public html 1 item 0 items 0 items S w a hvaesjpg proofed tar gz sample txt suse gnome theme 109 6K 448K 13 bytes 0 2 184 rpm 487K EN titlebar sh 334 bytes Fito Veter Figure 5 1 Nautilus in Your Personal Home Directory Notes Notes is useful for managing personal information about objects These notes are saved along with the object Nautilus tries to select appropriate icons for objects according to their associated file information Image and text files are shown as a thumbnail Double clicking shows the file in a viewer The left sidebar in its Information view shows a list of applications with which the file can be opened The file cannot be processed directly with Nautilus Nautilus also manages bookmarks Access the Bookmarks menu to
454. st of the information about the installation and features of SuSE Linux is provided in the manuals Documentation for applications is available in usr share doc packages and the HowTos are located in usr share doc howto en Read these files with a command like less usr share doc howto en DOS to Linux HOWTO txt gz Terminate the command by pressing Q 4 Where can I get special tips or help In Konqueror enter the path usr share doc sdb en html index html to view our Support Database which contains useful information Ov XNU ASNS 396 10 11 If this path does not exist install the packages sdb and sdb en On the Internet find the most recent version at http sdb suse de en sdb html How can I enter commands in KDE Click the screen with shell icon in the panel to start the Bash shell Se lect alternative terminals from the main menu To run a single command press Att F2 then enter the command I cannot find many programs in KDE You can start all programs from a terminal window by entering the pro gram name and pressing 1 What is a mirror Why should I not get these things from ftp suse com As there are many users who need to retrieve things from the server at the same time its capacity limit would be reached very quickly For this reason there are a number of other FTP servers that contain a duplicate of the SuSE server These servers are referred to as mirrors Select a mirr
455. st option should not be used if your modem is connected to a PBX The baud rate and the initialization string settings for the modem can be spec ified under Details Only make changes if your modem has not automatically been recognized and special settings must be made for data transfer This is pri marily the case for ISDN terminal adapters Exit this dialog with OK Select the ISP Internet Service Provider in the following dialog To select your provider from a list of preconfigured providers in your country activate Coun tries Configure the ISP parameters manually by pressing New In the dia log that opens enter the name of the dial up connection the provider and the provider s phone number Furthermore enter the user name and the password assigned by your provider Activate Always ask for password to be prompted for the password every time a connection is established Enter the connection parameters in the final dialog Dial on demand Refer to Section Information about the Internet Dial Up on 3 5 Network Devices page 89 Enter at least one name server to use dial on demand Modify DNS when connected This check box is activated by default Accord ingly the name server is adjusted each time a dial up connection is estab lished Deactivate this setting and specify static name servers for Auto matic dial up Stupid mode This option is activated by default Input prompts by the dia
456. stand alone machines If possi ble YaST selects this system type Click Software Selection in the suggestion screen to open a dialog in which to select one of the basic systems To start the software installation modules pack age manager and modify the installation scope click Detailed Selection see Figure 2 11 on the next page 2 5 Installation Suggestion Eile Package Extras Help Filter Selections si TNCS Summary T Su lin e Selection A cabextract A Program to Extract Microsoft Cabinet files 55118 0673 G EZ CheckHardware CheckHardware tool 27 6K8 01695 C f expat XML Parser Toolkit 4908 k8 1956 64 27 alot koe EZ fontconfig library for font configuration 737 78 2213 O GNOME system A freetype2 A TrueType font library 5260kB 21448 Help amp Support Documentation fribiai Free Implementation of the BIDi algorithm 153748 0404273 T Office Applications fvwm2 An Improved Version of the FVWM Window Manager 80MB 25721 E Multimedia lib The utility functions for Gtk 3520 B 1210458 J Simple Webserver with Apache2 EZ gnomesilesystem GNOME Directory Layout 5428 0152 O Simple Webserver tk A library forthe creation of graphical user interfaces 2 4 MB 1210671 E NetworkiServer itnteuro European fonts for the X Window System 217 748 12113 O E kemetbevet E imiib A shared library for loading and rendering 3D images 4213k8 19447 i Kde Devel imwheel A program to enabl
457. stem with motv hwscan 19 2 Video Text with alevt 19 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC From some broadcasters an EPG signal Electronic Program Guide is trans mitted along with the video text signal Easily view this electronic guide using the program nxtvepg To do this however you must have a TV card supported by the bttv driver and be able to receive one of the channels broadcast with an EPG With nxtvepg the broadcasts are sorted according to channel and topic such as movie and sport and filtered according to criteria such as Live Stereo or Subtitle Start the application via the SuSE gt Multimedia gt Video menu or at the command line with nxtvepg 19 4 1 Importing the EPG Database To set up and update the program database via the EPG signal set the tuner of your TV card to a station that broadcasts EPG This can be done using a TV application such as motv or nxtvepg Only one application at a time can access the tuner If you set an EPG broadcaster in motv nxtvepg immediately begins importing the current list of TV programs The progress will be displayed PA Nextview EPG Ice Control Configure Filter Navigate Help RES 7 Tie Network Fi 09 50 90 EE eatures r Tune TV Parental Rating Sound JPG Editorial Rating Format JE Rest Gi Buide for Your PC ed Themes Encryption series EE livelRepeat Pp kaa Program index A
458. t to load a list of all available patches and start the package manager described in Section In stalling and Removing Software on the current page In the package manager the filter for YOU patches is activated enabling selection of updates to install Patches whose installation is advisable are preselected Normally you should accept this suggestion After making your selection click Accept in the package manager All selected updates are then downloaded from the server and installed on your machine Depending on the connection speed and hardware performance this may take some time Any errors are displayed in a window If necessary skip the respec tive package Prior to the installation some patches may open a window dis playing details allowing you to confirm the installation or skip the package While the updates are downloaded and installed track actions in the log win dow Following the successful installation of all patches exit YOU with Finish If you do not need the update files after the installation delete them with Re move Source Packages after Update Finally SuSEconfig is executed to adapt the system configuration to the new circumstances 3 3 3 Patch CD Update The Patch CD Update is for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server customers Patches are installed from CD instead of downloaded from a FTP server 3 3 4 Installing and Removing Software This module enables installation uninstallation and updatin
459. t and gamma Once all settings have been made click Final Scan to scan the image The scanned image is then displayed in the image viewer and as a thumbnail When prompted select the format in which to save the image To save all the future images in that same format check the corresponding box Confirm with OK 22 4 The Menus Some of the functions of the toolbar are also available in the File and Image menus Modify preference settings for Kooka in Settings File Use this menu to start the Kprinter printing assistant to create a new folder for your images and to save delete and close files The OCR re sults of a scanned text document can be saved here Also use this menu to close the Kooka application SuSE Linux User Guide uoupooiddy OGuiuubos v DAOOY 331 332 File Image Settings Help o WES Aba Y Eola 90 Image Name Size Format En mage Viewer QScan Preview 5 tems kscan 0001 bmp 8385kB BMP Preview Dkscan 0001jpeg6328kB JPEG r Scan Size 3 ikscan 0002jpeg 110 3kB JPEG Custom skscan_0003jpeg 630kB JPEG keran ANNA inan IRIMR__ IDEG o S u S E Linux 4 4 1 FACTO Gallery rAutoselection O active on black 3 scanner background Threshold XX Scanner Settings AGFA SNAPSCAN 123606 Scan mode Ea Color ua m Halftone pattern DispersedDot8x8 gt pose width 33 mm Re
460. t print system type The following description only covers the configura tion part Note The configuration options relevant for your daily work with the system can be accessed under Jobs and Instances Information and Proper ties mainly provide information or are used for system administration Note Depending on which printer is currently selected in the overview you can view and modify status and model information and configuration options in the fol lowing four tabs at the center of the dialog window Information This tab provides general and unmodifiable information about the printer such as the printer type its status location and designation Jobs The functionality under this tab corresponds to the description of KJobViewer in Section Monitoring Print Jobs on page 149 Properties All settings in connection with the printer are available here gen eral information drivers interfaces separator pages quotas and user accesses SuSE Linux User Guide 135 136 Instances Depending on the document type you may have diverse require ments for the printouts page format duplex printing orientation print quality and banners Combine the characteristic settings for each type in instances To create a new profile select New and enter a name for the profile Click Settings to open a configuration dialog in which to specify these settings To save the settings and exit
461. t see what is on the screen If it is too dark sharpness of vision decreases The wrong lighting overstrains the visual system and eventually causes symptoms of fatigue and stress It is assumed that a combination of general lighting and individual worksta tion lighting is best For the workstation at home the combination of a high powered ceiling lamp 500 watts preferably with a dimmer and one or two workplace lamps is recommended The fluorescent lamps usually found in of fices for general lighting should be supplemented by individual workstation lamps The lighting should however not be too intense and be individually ad justable Stark contrasts should be avoided Be careful with strong desk lamps Good illumination is unfortunately very expensive and the minimum require ments of lighting can also be fulfilled with cheaper illumination layouts It is important that you are exposed to daylight A view outside is impor tant General lighting is considered pleasant if it is not below 250 Ix usually 500 Ix is required 1000 1x for an open plan office 500 750 Ix should be emitted by the individual workstation lighting However individual lamps are often problematic If they are too strong the contrast to the general lighting is too great Harmonic soft transitions are considered more pleasant The lighting should not flicker In the case of worn out fluorescent lamps a flickering can sometimes be noticed from the corner o
462. t you can simply drag documents with the mouse from one application into another or paste data from the clipboard see Section The Clipboard Klipper on page 148 To edit a text file for which you have put an icon on the desktop click the icon with the left mouse button and hold the button while dragging it into the edi tor window You can now edit the file as usual You can also paste text from the clipboard by clicking the middle mouse button To edit or view the source code of an HTML page drag the URL into the editor window of KWrite keeping the left mouse button pressed see Figure 7 1 index html KWrite 3 pS File Edit View Bookmarks Tools Settings Help J amp g 84 O amp 4 AH RAR 1 68 lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 0 Transitional EN t http www w3 org TR html4 loose dta gt m 2 lt htm1 gt 3 head 4 lt link rel SHORTCUT ICON href favicon ico title external favicon ico gt 5 lt title gt 6 Willkommen bei SuSE 7 lt title gt 8 Met 3 i 9 lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt 10 kmeta name robots content noarchive gt 11 lt META NAME description CONTENT SuSE Linux AG The Linux Experts Ihr globaler L sungsanbieter rund um Linux gt 12 lt META NAME keywords CONTENT SuSE SuSE Linux Linux Linux Service Linux Consulting Linux Software Distributor Linux Distributor gt 13 Meta Ta 14 tyle 15 lt link rel styl
463. tallation use the arrow keys to select Installation Note If your computer does not boot from CD 1 or the DVD read Section The Boot Screen on page 15 Note 1 2 Step Two Accept Suggestions After the system is booted from CD or DVD the SuSE system assistant YaST will be started First select the language for your system The language setting is automatically adopted for the keyboard layout Then YaST checks your system If you already installed a SuSE Linux version on your computer the next dialog asks whether to install SuSE Linux from scratch or perform an update of your previous system If Linux was not installed on your computer previously or if you select New in stallation YaST checks all your hardware and list the result in the suggestion dialog shown in Figure 1 1 on page 10 This dialog also displays the partition ing suggestion possibly Windows will be resized and the selected installation type If installing Linux for the first time you should accept these suggestions which are usually suitable The following messages and suggestions are displayed after the system check Mode New installation is the default value here Keyboard The keyboard layout defaults to the selected language This can eas ily be changed Mouse The detected mouse type is listed here Partitioning Suggests a suitable partitioning If Windows 9x or ME FAT32 file system exists on the hard disk the resizing rate is
464. tand the difference between the two types consider how a PCM de vice is opened It must be opened with specific settings for at least the following parameters sample format sample frequency number of channels number of periods previously referred to as fragments and size of a period For exam ple an application may attempt to play a WAV file with a sample frequency of 44 1 kHz although the sound card does not support this frequency In this case ALSA can automatically convert the data in the plug in layer to a format sup ported by the sound card The conversion affects the following parameters sam ple format sample frequency and number of channels Activate the plug in layer by selecting the PCM type plughw If the PCM type hw is selected ALSA tries to open the PCM devices directly with the parameters required by the application The complete designator for a PCM device consists of the PCM type followed by a colon the card number and the device number for example plughw 0 0 18 2 Mixers Mixers are a convenient way of controlling the volume and balance of the com puter s sound output and input The main differences in the various mixers are the interfaces Select one that meets your needs Tip Generally it is advisable to open a mixer application prior to opening other sound applications Use the mixer to test and adjust the control settings for the input and output of the sound card Some sound cards may not allow si
465. tart up KGpg is available as an applet in the panel Click the padlock icon with the left or middle mouse button to open a menu with all available func tions Apart from the options introduced above Open key manager Key server dialog find the options Encrypt clipboard and Decrypt clipboard as well as the option for opening the integrated editor Right click to open a menu for configuring and closing KGpg 14 3 1 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard Files copied to the clipboard can easily be encrypted with a few clicks Open the function overview by clicking the KGpg icon Select Encrypt clipboard and designate the key to use A status message about the encryption procedure is SuSE Linux User Guide 6d5 ULIM UOYAA OU 241 242 displayed on the desktop The encrypted contents can now be processed from the clipboard as needed The decryption of clipboard contents is just as easy Simply open the function overview select Decrypt clipboard and enter the password associated with your secret key The decrypted version is now avail able for processing in the clipboard and in the KGpg editor 14 3 2 Encrypting and Decrypting by Dragging and Dropping All you need to do to encrypt or decrypt files is to click the icons on the desk top or file manager drag them to the padlock in the panel and drop them there If the file is not encrypted KGpg asks for the key to use As soon as you have selecte
466. tch Enables you to create the entire configuration from scratch No suggestions will be generated Reread Configuration from Disk If you already performed some changes and are not satisfied with the result you can reload your current configuration with this option SuSE Linux User Guide 113 114 Propose and Merge with Existing GRUB Menus In a case another operating system and an older Linux version are in stalled in other partitions the menu will be generated from an entry for the new SuSE Linux an entry for the other system and all entries of the old boot loader menu This procedure might take some time This is not possible if LILO is used Restore MBR from hard disk The MBR saved on the hard disk will be written back The button Edith Configuration Files under this combo box enables you to edit the relevant configuration files in an editor To edit a file load it by means of the selection field Click OK to save your changes To exit the boot loader configu ration click Cancel Click Back to return to the main window Caution Remember that the sequence of the options or commands is very impor tant in GRUB If the specified sequence is not followed the machine may not boot Caution zn Boot Loader Configuration Options For less experienced users the configuration with YaST is much easier than edit ing the files directly Select an option and click Edit to open a dialog in which
467. tection YaST attempts to assign the correct tuner to your card If you are not sure simply keep the setting Default recog nized and check whether it works If you are not able to set all channels this might be due to a failure of the automatic detection of the tuner type In this case click Select Tuner and highlight the correct tuner type in the list If you are familiar with the technical details you can use the expert dialog to specify settings for a TV or radio card Select a kernel module and its parame ters in this dialog Also check all parameters of your TV card driver To do this select the respective parameters and enter the new value in the parameter line Confirm the new values with Apply or restore the default values with Reset The dialog TV and Radio Cards Audio enables you to connect your TV or ra dio card with the installed sound card You must use a cable to connect the out put of the TV or radio card with the external audio input of the sound card This only works if the sound card is already configured and the external input is ac tive If you have not yet configured your sound card select Configure Sound Card to go to the respective dialog see Section Sound on page 85 If your TV or radio card has loudspeaker jacks you can also connect the loud speakers directly without configuring the sound card There are also TV cards without any sound function which do not require an audio
468. ted in the installed system by means of entries in the file etc fstab The respec tive subdirectories are created in media Use this YaST module to integrate additional drives in the system When the module is started a list of all detected drives is displayed Mark your new drive using the check box at the beginning of the line and complete the in tegration with Finish The new drive will be integrated in the system 3 4 2 Printer Linux Printing Basics A Linux system manages printers through printer queues Before any data is printed it is sent to a printer queue for temporary storage From there it is re trieved by a print spooler which sends it to the printer device in the required order However for the most part this data is not available in a form that can be pro cessed by the printer A graphical image for instance first needs to be converted into a format the printer can understand This conversion into a printer lan guage is achieved with a printer filter a program called by the print spooler to translate data as needed so the printer can handle it Some Standard Printer Languages ASCII text Every normal printer should at least be able to print ASCII text directly However there are devices that cannot print ASCII text directly but are able to handle one of the other standard printer languages mentioned be low SuSE Linux User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 63 PostScript PostScript
469. tem Unlike FAT file systems NTFS file systems can currently only be read from Linux Therefore you can read your Windows files from Linux but you cannot edit them If you want write access to your Windows data and do not need the NTFS file system you can install Windows anew on a FAT32 file system In this case you will have full access to your Windows data from SuSE Linux Note More Partitioning Tips If the partitioning is performed by YaST and other partitions are detected in the system these partitions are also entered in the file etc fstab to enable easy access to this data This file contains all partitions in the system with their prop erties parameters such as the file system mount point and user permissions dev sdal datal auto noauto user 0 0 dev sda8 data2 auto noauto user 0 0 File 1 Jetc fstab Partition Data SuSE Linux User Guide 29 30 The partitions regardless of whether they are Linux or FAT partitions are spec ified with the options noauto and user This allows any user to mount or un mount these partitions as needed For security reasons YaST does not automati cally enter the exec option here which is needed for executing programs from the respective location However to run programs from there you can enter this option manually This measure is necessary if you encounter system messages such as bad interpreter or Permission denied Detailed background information and
470. ter rebooting check that dev hdb1 has actually been mounted to opt using the command mount If everything is working as de sired remove the old data in opt old ed rm fr opt old My computer crashed Can I just press the reset button without risking anything If your computer no longer reacts to your mouse or keyboard this does not necessarily mean that your entire system has crashed Possi bly one program is blocking the mouse or the keyboard but all other programs are still running If your machine can be accessed remotely serial terminal network log in elsewhere and abort the respective program with killall programname If this does not work try killall 9 programname If this is not possible try switching to another console using F2 to kill the faulty process from there If the computer does not respond to any of the keys and network intervention is not possible wait at least ten seconds before pressing reset to make sure there is no hard disk activ ity How can I switch from a virtual text console to the graphical user inter face By default there are six virtual text consoles that can be accessed with Ctr Alf FD to F6 Press E to go to the graphical user inter face Glossary access permissions The account is defined by the user name or login name and the password The access permissions are generally set by the system administrator The access permissions define to which
471. terface Internet access security settings user administration installation of software system updates and system information This chapter also provides instructions for using YaST in text mode Sub Sarong YOST uuu eme Heke ees gate pee tte eas 48 3 2 The YaST Control Center 2 122 xc ok Rs 48 3 3 Software in ae yo RR S 49 sub Hardware ced dk a oko SE RU OUR eR RO 62 35 Network Devices gt o e oa coce cea crie ea caa 87 sb Network Services oo es eae o Rye 99 9 Gecurity and USCIS e rr a dd aS 103 36 INS S sua a a A A 108 3 9 Miscellaneous 66r E IRR 118 UOHDINBYUOD ISOA 48 3 1 Starting YaST System configuration with YaST is conducted by means of various YaST modules serving different purposes such as the configuration of the keyboard or the se lection of the system language These modules can be accessed in various ways An overview of all modules is available in the YaST Control Center which can be started from the SuSE menu the SuSE icon at the bottom left of your KDE panel Select SuSE System YaST The individual modules can also be accessed from the KDE Control Center If you use KDE you can also start YOST by pressing E2 In the window that opens enter kdesu sbin yast2 and confirm with 1 As these start methods are usually used by a normal user YaST opens a small dialog for entering the root password root privileges are required for all YaST modules as only t
472. th E or Tools gt Fullscreen switch to full screen mode If the TV image in full screen mode is not scaled to the full monitor size some fine tuning is re quired Many graphics cards can scale the full screen mode television image to the full monitor size without changing the graphical mode If your card does not support this function the graphics mode must be switched to 640x480 for the full screen mode Create the related configuration in Settings Config uration After restarting motv the monitor mode is also changed if you have switched to full screen mode Tip The xawtv file is created automatically and updated by clicking Set tings Save settings Here the broadcasters are saved along with the configuration More information pertaining to the configuration file can be found in the man page for xawtvrc Tip 19 1 4 The Launcher Menu Use the launcher menu to start other applications to use with motv Start the audio mixer gamix and the video text application alevt for example using a SuSE Linux User Guide 313 314 keyboard shortcut Applications to launch from motv must be entered in the xawtv file The entries should look like this Gamix Ctrl G gamix AleVT Ctrl A alevt The shortcut then the command used to start the application should follow the application name itself Start the applications entered under launch via the Tool menu 19 2 Video Text
473. th the manual scanner selection If you can identify your scanner in the list of vendors and models select it If not select Cancel Information about scanners that work with Linux is provided athttp cdb suse de index php LANG en http sdb suse de en and http www mostang com sane Caution Only assign the scanner manually if you are absolutely sure A wrong selection could damage your hardware Caution es Troubleshooting Your scanner may not have been detected for one of the following reasons The scanner is not supported Check http sdb suse de en fora list of Linux compatible devices a Your SCSI controller was not installed correctly There are termination problems with your SCSI port a Your SCSI cable is too long a Your scanner has a SCSI Light Controller that is not supported by Linux Your scanner is defective 3 4 Hardware Caution SCSI scanners should not be connected or disconnected when the the system is running Shut the system down first Caution J For more information about scanning refer to Chapter Kooka A Scanning Application on page 329 3 4 10 Sound When the sound configuration tool is started YaST tries to detect your sound card automatically Configure one or multiple sound cards To use multiple sound cards start by selecting one of the cards to configure Press Configure to enter the Setup dialog Edit opens a dialog in which to
474. the Settings menu If you click Save settings the network found is entered into the xawtv file in your home directory and will be available the next time you start the applica tion Tip If you do not want to browse for all available channels find the next channel with T If needed subsequently adjust the broadcast frequency with or gt Tip 19 1 Watching TV with motv 19 1 2 From Silent Film to Sound Film The audio output of the TV card is connected to the line input of your sound card to the speakers or to an amplifier Some TV cards can change the volume of the audio output The volume can then be set with the sliders that appear after selecting Settings gt Slider This box also provides the sliders for bright ness contrast and color To use your sound card for audio playback check the mixer settings using gamix described in Section Mixers on page 284 For sound cards meeting the AC97 specifications set Input MUX to Line The volume can then be adjusted with the Master and Line sliders 19 1 3 Screen Proportions and Full Screen Mode Most television images have a height and width ratio of 4 3 These proportions can be set with Tools Screen Dimensions If 4 3 is selected here this is the default setting the screen dimensions are retained automatically even when the display size is changed UJO2q9M PUD OIPRy OSPA AL Wi
475. the archive name an empty window is displayed Move files or directories into this window from Konqueror Ark compresses and lists the files For more information about Ark go to Help gt Ark Handbook 4 4 8 Desktop Sharing dosed JG eui You can share your desktop for use by other users on their hosts Desktop shar ing makes use of the REB protocol more commonly referred to as VNC This feature enables a Linux desktop to be made available for clients using other op erating systems provided they support VNC To grant trustworthy users access to your desktop send them a password This can be done by means of an invitation Start the Control Center from the main menu and select the item Desktop Sharing in the Internet amp Network module Click Create amp manage invitations and choose between Create Personal In vitation and Invite via Email If you click Create Personal Invitation an invitation indicating the IP address of the host password and expiry of the in vitation will be generated You have to send this data manually to the respective person If you click Invite via Email all required data is transmitted by e mail KMail starts automatically and generates an e mail message with the needed data host password and expiry At the end of the e mail a link which the re cipient of the message merely needs to click to view your desktop in a browser is provided Simply ente
476. the bottom section you can define for how many seconds the boot loader will wait for entries before the default sys tem is booted A number of other options can be specified by means of the button Add However the use of these options requires a deeper under standing and is not covered here In this connection refer to the respective chapter in the Administration Guide and the manual pages of GRUB and LILO commands man grub man lilo man lilo conf Additionally a detailed online manual for GRUB is available at http www gnu org software grub SuSE Linux User Guide 115 116 3 8 5 LVM The Logical Volume Manager LVM is a tool for individually partitioning hard disks by means of logical drives As this is a genuine expert tool no additional information is provided within the scope of this user guide For information refer to the Administration Guide 3 8 6 Partitioning Although it is possible to modify the partitions in the installed system this should be handled by experts who know exactly what they are doing as oth erwise the risk of losing data is very high If you decide to use this tool refer to the description in Section Partitioning on page 19 the partitioning tool during the installation is the same as in the installed system 3 8 7 Profile Manager SCPM The SCPM System Configuration Profile Management module offers the possi bility to create manage and switch between entire individual syste
477. the configuration selected SuSE Linux User Guide 67 68 Manual Configuration If one of the requirements for automatic configuration is not met or if you want a custom setup configure the printer manually Depending on how successful the autodetection is and how much information about the printer model is found in the database YaST may be able to determine the right settings automatically or at least make a reasonable preselection The following parameters must be configured Hardware Connection Port The configuration of the hardware connection depends on whether YaST has been able to find the printer during hard ware autodetection If YaST is able to detect the printer model automatically it can be as sumed that the printer connection works on the hardware level and no settings need to be changed in this respect If YaST is unable to autodetect the printer model there may be some problem on the hardware level and some manual intervention is re quired to configure the connection To learn about the steps involved in this refer to the Administration Guide Name of the Queue The queue name is used when issuing print commands The name should be relatively short and consist of lowercase letters and possibly numbers only Ghostscript Driver or Printer Language Printer Model The Ghostscript driver and the printer language depend on your printer model YaST lets you select a predefined configuration suitable for the
478. the default The default account is the e mail address initially selected for sending e mail Another account can be se lected in the message composition window if desired Click Next The time zone information from the next window is used for the calendar func tions It is important to select the correct time zone for using the appointment scheduling functions Click the dot on the map for a city in your time zone Selection zooms the display to that area and a change can be made if desired When the correct time zone is displayed under Selection click Next In the next window click Finish to save the data entered Use Back to make changes 16 2 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Pro grams Evolution can import e mail from other e mail programs such as Netscape or KMail To do so select File gt Import For KMail or mutt select Import a sin gle file For Netscape select Import data and settings from older programs More information can be obtained through the program s Help menu 16 1 Starting Evolution 16 3 Overview of Evolution The default window view is shown in Figure 16 1 The available menus menu items and the icons in the toolbar vary from window to window Use the Shortcuts panel to the left to select the information to display in the right panel Adjust the size of any panels by dragging the dividing bars Use View to remove the Shortcuts Bar or add
479. the graph ical user interface freezes at any time you can restart the X Window system by switching to a text console with Ctrl Aff ED logging in as root and switch ing to runlevel 3 with the command init 3 This shuts down your X Window System leaving you with a text console To restart the graphical system enter init 5 Setting the Runlevel in YaST In a default installation runlevel 5 is selected To start a different runlevel when the system is booted change the default runlevel here With Runlevel proper ties determine which services are started in which runlevel UOHDINBYUOD ISOA Caution Incorrect settings for system services and runlevels can render your system useless To retain the operability of your system consider the possible consequences before modifying any of these settings Caution l For more information about the runlevels in SuSE Linux refer to the Administra tion Guide 3 8 9 Sysconfig Editor The directory etc sysconfig contains the files with the most important settings for SuSE Linux formerly centrally administered in the file etc rc config The sysconfig editor displays all settings in a well arranged form The values can be modified and saved to the individual configuration files Gener ally manual editing is not necessary as the files are automatically adapted when a package is installed or a service is configured Caution Do not edit the files in etc syscon
480. the print spooler removes the print job from the print queue Available Printing Systems SuSE Linux supports two different printing systems 64 3 4 Hardware LPRng and Ipdfilter This is a traditional printing system that consists of the print spooler LPRng and the printer filter lpdfilter The entire configura tion of this printing system is left to the system administrator Regular users can only choose between the different print queues that have al ready been set up To allow users to choose between different options for a given printer a number of print queues must be defined each with a different printer configuration CUPS In the CUPS printing system users can determine individual printing settings as the entire configuration of a queue is not defined by the sys tem administrator Rather printer specific settings are stored in a PPD PostScript Printer Description file for each queue and can be offered to users in a print dialog Because of conflicts between these two printing systems you cannot have both installed at the same time More information about CUPS is available at http www cups org and in the Administration Guide Queues In most cases more than one print queue is required for the following reasons a Different printer devices must be addressed through different print queues The printer filter can be configured differently for each print queue By having different queues for one printer it ca
481. the source code the actual program code ev ery change of the original code must be free as well so modifications of or additions to the original software cannot compromise this freedom in any way The now classic GNU Manifesto http www gnu org gnu manifesto html explains many aspects of this thinking In legal terms GNU software is protected by the GNU General Public License or GPL hnttp www gnu org copyleft gpl html and by the GNU Lesser General Public License or LGPL http www gnu org copyleft lgpl html In connection with the GNU Project all Unix tools and utilities are being redeveloped and in part provided with more or enhanced functionali ties Even complex software systems such as Emacs or glibc are integral components of the Project The Linux kernel subject to the GPL profits from this Project espe cially from the tools but should not be seen as the same thing AJOSSO GPL GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE See r GNU home directory Your own private directory in the Linux file system This belongs to a spe cific user usually in home username Except the superuser root only the user has full access rights in his home directory host name Name of a machine in Linux usually the name by which it can be reached on the network HTML Hypertext Markup Language The most important language used in the v World Wide Web for designing the contents The layout commands m
482. three basic image modes RGB grayscale and indexed RGB is the main color mode usually used in GIMP Grayscale is for black white and gray images Indexed is used almost exclusively for converting images to the GIF file format There are a few things to remember when working with image modes Only RGB mode has all the filters available Most however are available in grayscale mode To run filters on an indexed image convert to RGB first Convert to indexed only right before saving to image formats that require it such as GIF Never work with an image in indexed mode 348 ______ 23 3 Working with The GIMP Regardless of any color used on a grayscale image the color is desatu rated and applied in a shade of gray Study the internal help system for more information about image modes 23 4 Introduction to Image Manipulation The following sections provide tips for working with your own images This only introduces a small part of the things possible in GIMP 23 4 1 Special Effects diAIO SUL ULM saludo In the context menu many different manipulation tools are available under Fil ter or Script Fu These include some easy to apply effects Usually clicking the filter in the menu opens an option box with which to control the effects of such filters Refer to the internal help system for descriptions of the filters 23 4 2 Inserting Text You can easily integrate text into your images with GIMP First
483. three sections your home directory is displayed to the left the photographs available in the camera are displayed to the right and a list of cameras is displayed below To set up a camera in Digikam select Configure gt Setup A window display ing a list of supported cameras opens First try to autodetect the camera with Auto Detect If this fails browse the list for your model If your camera model is not included in the list try an older model Normally this should work The path to your image folders the location where your photographs are saved can be specified in the same dialog under the General Settings tab You can also determine the size of the thumbnails the way file names are displayed and some other settings After your camera has been detected correctly and you have configured the program as desired confirm with OK The name of your camera is then dis played at the bottom left in the main window Double click it or select Camera Connect to connect Digikam to your camera The thumbnails are displayed to the right Right click the image to open a pop up menu with which to view save or delete the image or view its properties Select all photographs to download from the camera by pressing the left mouse button or click individual photographs with pressed Selected photographs appear with inverted colors Drag the selected photographs to the desired di rectory Digikam will downloa
484. tion value Each entry should be space separated for example io 0x300 rq 5 Note If two cards are configured with the same module name options will be merged while saving Get a list of available network cards by pressing Select from List If you have a PCMCIA network card click on the PCMCIA check box if you have an USB network card click on the check box USB Network interface Network device l Ethernet Device number sj U Wireless support r Kernel module Module name Options Ej Pcmcia Cj use Back Select from List Abort Figure 3 16 Configuration of the Network Card Configuration of the Network Address Specify the address assignment method for your network card 90 J S855 Network Devices Automatic Address Setup with DHCP If a DHCP server exists in your network automatically retrieve the con figuration data for your network card from there Activate the address assignment with DHCP if your DSL provider has not given you a static IP address for your system Click DHCP Client Options to access the client configuration Here specify whether the DHCP server should always respond to a broadcast Additionally you can specify an ID By default the host is identified by means of the hardware address of the network card However if you several virtual machines using the same network card you can distinguish them by means of various IDs St
485. tiple packages I only have an application in source code How can I install it Some know how is required with some applications Find more informa tion in a good Linux book Find examples at http www suse de de produkte books Here a brief description Decompress the archive with tar xvzf name tar gz read the INSTALL or README files and follow the instruc tions Usually the following command sequence needs to be executed configure make make install No installation support is avail able for the compilation or self compiled programs Is my hardware supported It is best to refer to the component database at http hardwaredb suse deorhttp cdb suse de less usr share doc howto en Hardware HOWTO gz can also provide some information 24 25 26 27 How can I defragment my hard disk Linux has an intelligent file system This file system makes defragmenta tion superfluous because it prevents fragments from occurring Your par titions should not be more than ninety percent used Use df h to view information about used and available hard disk space What is meant by partitioning Partitioning means dividing the hard disk into individual sections For the default configuration SuSE Linux requires at least two partitions one for Linux itself and one swap partition for the virtual main memory Ov XNU 3sns How much space do I need for Linux This depends on how many and which packages you
486. tips for partitioning are provided in the Administration Guide in Special Installation Procedures Partitioning for Experts 2 5 6 Software SuSE Linux contains a number of software packages for various application pur poses As it would be burdensome to select the needed packages one by one SuSE Linux offers three system types with various installation scopes Depend ing on the available disk space YaST selects one of these basic systems and dis plays it in the suggestion screen Minimum System only recommended for special purposes This installs the operating system with various services without the graphical user interface The machine can only be operated by way of the ASCII consoles This system type is especially suitable for server applica tions requiring little direct user interaction Minimum Graphical System without KDE If you do not want the KDE desktop or if the disk space is insufficient in stall this system type The installed system includes an elementary graph ical user interface with terminal windows but no real desktop with the usual functionality You can use all programs that have their own graphi cal user interfaces such as Netscape No office programs are installed Default System with KDE and office package This is the largest of all offered basic systems It contains the KDE desktop together with most of the KDE programs and the office programs This is the most suitable system type for normal
487. to 9 By means of a check box determine whether existing connections should be terminated prior to the next charge increment ChargeHUP However this does not yet work with all providers For Channel bundling multilink PPP activate the respective check box To start SUSEfirewall2 mark Activate firewall Details opens a dialog that enables the implementation of more complex con nection scenarios Normal home users do not need this dialog Exit the dialog with Next SuSE Linux User Guide 97 98 My phone number Asyourown f Add syncppp interface ipppo telephone number MSN put in your telephone number without area code if your ISDN card is connected EERTISTSHEND Connection Settings company provided socket If it is connected to a PBX put in the MSN My gione number stored in the PBX e g your phone o extension orthe last digit or digits of your phone extension If this fails try EEE using 0 which normally means the default MSN is actually used OnBoot Start Mode OnBoot the driver is loaded during system boot Manual the driver must be started with the Est it rcisdn start command only the user root can do this HotPlug is a special CJ Channel bundling for PCMCIA and US coe ES Activate firewall R Firewall QuickMode If you select manual you have to start stop the service manually by issuing the following commands while Details logged in as root
488. to insert the slide or Cancel to abort the procedure To use templates select File New gt From Template Figure 6 11 Inserting Slides in Impress 6 9 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress The KWrite Text Editor KWrite can be used to write simple texts or lists Apart from text editing KWrite can also be used to view and edit various different types of source code or HTML with syntax highlighting This chapter provides a brief overview of the main features of KWrite introducing the main menus and tools 71 General Features lt o o c ce ces 190 72 The File Menu e e cci aaa or nae E Bag are s 191 73 TheEditMen i2 29 34993 3 191 74 TheViewMenu leen 193 75 TheBookmarksMenu 193 76 The Tools Men sv ies do RR ERES 193 Ja TMesctines Men oc ao a al 194 Ae The Help Ment fe a ages bs qx 3s 194 ds USE EE he eae toe a td ty 194 JOJIp3 XO SHA SUL 190 7 1 General Features You can start KWrite from the main menu or using the command kwrite The command can be entered on the command line together with the name of the file you want to open Apart from using the menu bar the toolbar and a number of shortcuts you can click the opened document with the right mouse button in order to access a con text menu providing basic editor functions KWrite supports the drag and drop functions of KDE which means tha
489. to the screen as is usually the case c Creates a new tar archive r Adds files to an existing archive t Outputs the contents of an archive 370 24 4 Important Linux Commands u Adds files but only if they are newer than the files already contained in the archive x Unpacks files from an archive extraction z Packs the resulting archive with gzip j Compresses the resulting archive with bzip2 v Lists files processed The archive files created by tar end with tar If the tar archive was also compressed using gzip the ending is tgz or tar gz If it was com pressed using bzip2 tar bz2 Application examples can be found in Section Archives and Data Compression on page 360 IOUS SUL ULM BUOM locate pattern s The locate command can find in which directory a specified file is located If desired use wild cards to specify file names The program is very speedy as it uses a database specifically created for the purpose rather than searching through the entire file system This very fact however also results in a major drawback locate is unable to find any files created after the latest update of its database The database can be generated by root with updatedb updatedb options s This command performs an update of the database used by locate To include files in all existing directories run the pro gram as root It also makes sense to place it in the background by ap pending an ampersand 8
490. to the sound card The signals of the analog inputs are shown under H W In The S PDIF inputs are shown to the right The input and output levels of the analog channels must be set under Analog Volume Envy24 Control Utility 0 1 0 TerraTec EWS 88M Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings Analog Volume About HAW Out 1 L H W Out 2 R HAW Out 3 L H W Out 4 R H W Out 5 L HAW Out 6 R H W Out 7 L PCM Out1 PCMOut2 PCMOu3 v PCMOut4 v PCMOut5S PCMOut amp PCM Out7 Digital Mix L Digital Mix R y SIPDIF Ink S PDIF InL v S PDIFInL v S PDIF InL v S PDIFInL S PDIF InL y S PDIF In L y SIPDIF In R S PDIF InR S PDIF InR v S PDIFInR v S PDIF In R S PDIF In RA S PDIF In R y HAW In y HW Ind HAW Ind y HAW In T HV Ind y HAW 1 H W Ind y HAW In2 y HA In 2 y HAW In 2 HW In 2 y HAN In2 y HAW In 2 v HAW In 2 y HAW In 3 y HAW In 3 y HAW In 3 y HN In 3 y HN In 3 y HAW In 3 y HAW In 3 y HN In 4 y HIN Ind y HN In 4 y HAW In 4 y HAW In 4 y HAW In 4 y HN In 4 y HAW In 5 y HIW In S y HAW In 5 y HW In 5 y HAW In 5 y HAW In 5 y HAW In 5 y HAW In 6 y HIW In 6 y HAW In 6 v HIW In B y HAW In 6 y HIW In 6 y HAW In 6 wv HAW In wv HAW In 7 y HAW In y HW In 7 y HAW In y HAW In 7 y HAW In 7 y HAW In 8 y HAW In 8 y HAW In 8 y HAW In 8 y HAW In 8 y HAW In 8 y HAW In 6 Figure 18 4 The Patchbay Use the Monitor Mixer sliders for digital mixing T
491. to use for the signature An alert reminds you to check the authenticity of this key before you sign it If you have performed this check click Yes and enter the password for the selected secret key in the next step Other users can now check the signature by means of your public key 14 1 Key Management 14 2 The Key Server Dialog Several Internet based key servers offer the public keys of many users To en gage in encrypted communication with a large number of users use these servers to distribute your public key For this purpose export your public key to one of these server Similarly KGpg enables you to search one of these servers for the keys of certain people and import their public keys from the server 14 2 1 Importing a Key from a Key Server By means of the Import tab in the key server dialog import public keys from one of the Internet based key servers Use the drop down menu to select one of the preconfigured key servers and enter a search string e mail address of the communication partner or the ID of the key to find When you click Search your system connects to the Internet and searches the specified key server for a key that matches your specifications Refer to Figure 14 3 4 Key Server Operation le ade Import Export Key Servers Key server hkp pgp mit edu Text to search or ID of the key to import Close Figure 14 3 Search Screen for Importing a Key If your
492. tranet portal for instance or the last page visited In the History dialog define the number of days for which the addresses of visited pages should be stored Languages lets you define a list of preferred languages which is useful for pages that are available in several languages Under Internet Search tell Mozilla which search engine to use If you do not want Mozilla to show matching Internet addresses from the history automatically as soon as you start typing disable this feature un der Smart Browsing gt Automatically complete text typed into Location bar Alternatively configure Mozilla to autocomplete addresses in the en try field itself To do so select the Advanced button then in the dialog Autocomplete best match as you type One of the options available in the Tabbed Browsing dialog is to have Mozilla open a new tab for a web page whenever you middle click a link Under Downloads specify how the progress of file downloads should be monitored Enabling Open the download manager causes the browser to open the full featured download manager dialog Open a progress di 13 3 Preferences alog limits the dialog to a progress bar displayed during download Turn off all download feedback by enabling Don t open anything Privacy amp Security This is one of the most important parts of the preferences with a number of settings related to cookie handling and the built i
493. u need Note After these preparation return to the Linux partitioning setup and select Shrink Windows Partition After a quick check of the partition YaST will open a dialog with a suggestion for resizing the Windows partition The first bar graph shows how much disk space is currently occupied by Win dows and how much space is still available The second bar graph shows how the space would be distributed after the resizing according to YaST s current proposal Figure 2 10 on the facing page Accept the proposed settings or use the slider to change the partition sizing within certain limits If you leave this dialog by selecting Next the settings will be stored and you will be taken back to the previous dialog The actual resizing will take place later before the hard disk is formatted 2 5 Installation Suggestion loose the new size for your Windows Resizing the Windows partition 1 The upper bar graph displays the current O situation The lower bar graph displays the h situation after the installation after the parition resize Drag the slider or enter a numeric value in O either input fio to adjust tho suggested E O Within the pats Linux 5 necessary 1140 MB 27 Windows free VB Linux MB gt 200 5 1405 Q Back Next O EE Figure 2 10 Resizing the Windows Partition M Note By default the Windows versions NT 2000 and XP use the NTFS file sys
494. uSE Linux User Guide 307 308 gt Show Control Center If Follow Midi is activated here the most recently moved MIDI controller and the first parameter associated with it are automati cally displayed More information about the Control Center is available in the following section 18 11 4 Keeping Track with the Control Center The main purpose of the Control Center is to bind module parameters to MIDI controllers However extended parameter control settings such as the range of sliders can also be specified here MIDI Controller Parameter Module Module Parameter type 10 channel 0 param 0 Freeverb Version 3 ID 10 type 10 channel O param 1 LFO ID 14 ecay ENV ID 3 4 requency VCF ID 7 i cPhiD type 10 channel 0 param 10 MCY ID 12 tSustain ENV ID 18 Mixer 4 gt 1 ID 16 type 10 channel O param 11 Noise ID 15 type 10 channel 0 param 12 t PCM Out ID 1 Volume 0 Mixer 4 gt 1 Slew Limiter ID 3 ei Frequency Ej Log Set Min Set Max Reset Min Max j Min 0 000 12 550 Max 23 981 Ej Enable note events Ey Follow Configuration Dialog R Follow MIDI Bind Clear Binding Clear All Toggle MIDI Sign Figure 18 17 MIDI Controllers and Module Parameters in the Control Center The list to the left displays the MIDI controllers used in a patch In this tree view the parameters associated with a controller are sh
495. uick Format or Full Format The quick format procedure merely rewrites the file system and deletes all data The full format procedure rewrites all tracks and sectors and is able to detect and mark bad sectors Sectors marked as bad are not used for writing data Se lect Verify Integrity to have the formatting checked and verified upon comple tion If you activate Volume Label designate a name for the floppy disk in the SuSE Linux User Guide 151 input field below After making all settings click Format You will be warned that all data on the disk will be lost and prompted to confirm KFloppy informs you if any problems occur during the formatting procedure including information about any bad sectors Click Help to access a short menu that offers the KFloppy handbook Addition ally use it to send a bug report or other concerns to the developers of KFloppy Selecting About KFloppy from the submenu accesses information about the version authors translation and license The menu item About KDE provides information about KDE and web pages of the KDE developers Exit KFloopy by clicking Quit 4 4 7 Ark Displaying Decompressing and Creating Archives To save space on the hard disk use a packer that compresses files and direc tories to a fraction of their original size The application Ark can be used to manage such archives It supports common formats such as zip tar gz tar bz2 lha r
496. up These two steps enable you to restore the exact system state at the time of the last backup Caution As this module normally installs replaces or uninstalls many packages and files use it only if you have experience with backups as otherwise you may lose data Caution l SuSE Linux User Guide 109 110 try Oe Restore module Archive selection Restore module can restore your system Backup archive from backup archive Local file Archive selection S Archive can be read from Archive file name Local file Archive is already available in the Select file system Itis on a mounted file system Network C Network NES Backup archive can be read from network using NFS IP adress or name of NFS server Removable device The archive is on a removable device or on an unmounted file system The device can be selected from a list or you can enter the device file name e g dev hdc if not listed Archive file name If you press Select file the device willbe C Removable device mounted and you can select the file Pena from a dialog Archive file name Note If you have a multivolume archive selectthe first volume Wer c EE cime Back Abort next Figure 3 28 Start Window of the Restore Module 3 8 3 Creating a Boot Rescue or Module Disk This YOST module facilitates the creation of boot disks rescue disks and module disks These floppy disks are
497. up by pressing A After that select Disk Utilities which dis plays the connected hardware components Make a note of the SCSI ID for your CD ROM drive Exit the menu with then open Configure Adapter Settings Under Additional Options select Boot Device Op tions and press 1 Enter the ID of the CD ROM drive and press again Then press twice to return to the start screen of the SCSI BIOS Exit this screen and confirm with Yes to boot again Your CD ROM drive may not be supported because it is an older model 2 2 The Boot Screen Move from item to item using the arrow keys For a normal installation select Installation Confirm the selection with Enter Boot from Harddisk Installation Installation ACPI Disabled Installation Safe Settings Manual Installation Rescue System Memory Test booting in 7s ad boot options F1 Help F2 1024 x 768 F3 Driver Update Figure 2 1 The Boot Screen The boot screen provides several options for starting from the CD The options and the actions triggered by them are SuSE Linux User Guide UOILO JOJSu peuyeq esn Boot from Harddisk Boots the system installed on the hard disk the sys tem normally booted when the machine is started This option is prese lected Installation The normal installation mode All modern hardware func tions are enabled Installation ACPI Disabled If the normal installation fails
498. ur well being it is important to observe the recommended basic values for temperature and humidity and to avoid strong air movement The working material itself should not contribute to the increase of temperature For activities in a sitting position or simple work a room temperature of 20 to 22 C is recommended In summer the temperature should be 26 C at the most This value should only be exceeded for a short time when the outdoor temperature is higher A lot of equipment as well as people emit heat and influence room air conditions This should be reduced as much as possible The air humidity should be between 40 sometimes 50 and 65 percent and should be checked This value is especially affected by heating systems Draft possibly from open windows and doors or air conditioning should not exceed 0 1 to 0 15 m s Draft on individual parts of the body should be avoided An air conditioner should be individually adjustable It should be ser viced regularly The windows should be able to be opened and have sunshades to avoid glare effects Sunlight can increase the room temperature considerably Sunshades attached to the outside of the building provide the best protec tion SuSE Linux User Guide e2DJ O 10M SUL ui soiuouo813 383 384 a Plants can improve room conditions and are therefore recommended in all cases They increase the relative humidity and filter pollutants from the air 25 1 5 Too Much Noise
499. uration of a Samba Server Set up a Samba server to share resources such as files or printers with Windows hosts In the first dialog define the role of the Samba server You can deactivate it use it as file and print server or use it as backup or primary domain con troller A file and print server makes directories and printers available A do main controller enables its clients to log in to a Windows domain The primary domain controller manages users and passwords A backup domain controller uses another domain controller for authenticating the users More information about Samba is available in the Administration Guide After determining the use enter the Windows domain or workgroup Use Browse to display all existing domains and workgroups Under Server De scription enter a text to display to all clients Use Authentication Details to enter an advanced configuration dialog in which to set the user authentication mode If you activate smbpasswd all users and their passwords are saved in the file smbpasswd If you opt for LDAP the user information is stored on an LDAP server Specify the LDAP server by entering the server name Base DN and Administration DN Detailed information about LDAP is available in the Administration Guide Test the LDAP connection with the respective button En ter the LDAP administration password when required to do so Complete all settings and click Next In the following dialog
500. utgoing fax and voice connections Fax and audio files can then be sent and received over these connections Some special functions like the switching of a phone connection to a fax connection and the processing of DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency common touchtone phone tones are supported However the system does not constitute a complete application suite for cer tain tasks such as an answering machine application The actual application was written in the Python scripting language a language especially suitable for beginners and can thus be freely adjusted to the respective requirements CopiSuite merely processes the provided scripts and executes the specified commands This allows the creation of flexible solutions from a simple answer ing machine or fax program to a small call center for which the system is still lacking some basic features The CapiSuite package includes some ready made scripts that enable a com fortable multiuser answering machine and a fax solution The following pages refer to the usage of these scripts Following the installation details on the system as well as instructions for writing custom scripts are available in usr share doc packages capisuite manual index html and on the project page http www capisuite de 17 2 Configuration CapiSuite makes use of the CAPI programming interface for ISDN hardware Since this interface has only been available for Linux for a short time suitable drivers are not
501. viders today support dynamic DNS assign ment so a current IP address is forwarded to the name server each time the connection is set up However a suitable dummy name server IP must be en tered in this dialog for example 192 168 22 99 1f you do not receive a dy namic name server assignment enter the IP addresses of the name servers of 3 5 Network Devices your provider here Also set the time after which the connection should be ter minated automatically if no data exchange has occurred Finally confirm your settings with Next to continue to the overview of the configured interfaces Ac tivate your settings with Finish 3 6 Network Services This group mostly contains tools for professionals and for the system admin istrator If you have SuSE Linux Personal Edition some of the tools covered in this section are not available as they are only installed in the Professional Edi tion UOHDINBYUOD ISOA Note The tools LDAP Client NIS Server NIS Client NIS Client and Proxy are not addressed here as these are genuine expert tools that are usually only used in company networks More information about these modules is provided in the Administration Guide Note 3 6 1 Host Name and DNS The host name and the domain name can be changed here If the provider has been configured correctly for DSL modem or ISDN access the list of name servers contains entries made automati
502. voice and fax messages in your e mail program where you can view them or listen to them as usual 17 3 2 Fax Operation uol o2IunuJuJoo29 9 NASI No further instructions are necessary for receiving fax messages As soon as a fax is received for a number assigned to a user the message will be stored in the system and delivered to the user as an e mail with a PDF attachment PDF is acommon exchange format for documents and can be read in virtually all operating systems with Acrobat Reader from Adobe The user can open read and print the document as in his mail program For backup purposes every received document is also stored on the hard disk in var spool capisuite users lt username gt received This direc tory can be accessed if anything goes wrong during the e mail transmission of if an e mail message was accidentally deleted More information can be found in the CapiSuite documentation in usr share doc packages capisuite manual index html The command line tool capisuitefax is available for the sending of faxes It accepts one or more target fax numbers and one or more documents in the PostScript format This format is generated by virtually all Linux applications when printing to a file capisuitefax supports parameters such as the following h or help Returns a short summary of valid parameters d number or dialstring lt number gt This parameter declares the target number to which the fax should be sent
503. w Enter a search string and use the check boxes to determine where to search for this string in the name in the description or in the package dependencies Advanced users can even define special search patterns using wild cards and regular expressions and search the package depen dencies in the Provides and Requires fields For example software de velopers who download source packages from the Internet can use this 3 3 Software function to determine which package contains a specific library needed for compiling and linking this package Tip In addition to the Search filter all lists of the package manager feature a quick search for the current list content For example sim ply enter the initial letter of a package name to move the cursor to the first package in the list whose name begins with this letter The cursor must be in the list by clicking the list Tip UOILOINBYUOD ISOA Installation Summary After selecting the packages for installation update or deletion use the filter selection box to view the installation summary It shows what will happen with packages when you click Accept Use the check boxes to the left to filter the packages to view in the individual package window If for example you merely want to check which pack ages are already installed start the package manager and deactivate all check boxes except Keep Of course the package status in the individual packag
504. ware issues in connection with SuSE Linux A 1 Using the SuSE Help Center When you start the SuSE Help Center for the first time from the main menu SuSE Help the standard view of the SuSE Help Center is displayed Fig ure A 1 on the next page The dialog window consists of three main areas Menu Bar and Toolbar The menu bar provides the main editing navigation and configuration options The File menu contains the option for print ing the currently displayed content With the Edit menu access the search function Go contains all navigation possibilities Home home page of the Help Center Back Forward and Last Search Result With Settings gt Configure KDE Help Center Create Search Index gen erate a search index for all selected information sources The toolbar con tains three navigation icons forward back home and a printer icon for printing the current contents Navigation Area with Tabs The navigation area in the left part of the win dow provides an input field for a quick search in selected information sources Details regarding the search and the configuration of the search function in the Search tab are presented in Section The Search Function of the SuSE Help Center on page 393 The Contents tab presents a tree view of all available and currently installed information sources Click the book icons to open and browse the individual categorie
505. with alevt Use alevt to browse video text pages Start the application via SuSE gt Multi media gt Video alevt or at the command line with alevt The application saves all the pages of the selected station just activated with motv Pages can be browsed by entering the desired page number or by clicking a page number Move forward or backward through the pages by clicking lt lt or gt gt located in the lower window margin 19 3 Webcams and motv If your webcam is already supported by Linux access it with motv Find a sum mary of the supported USB devices at http www linux usb org If you have already used motv to access the TV card prior to accessing the webcam the bttv driver is loaded The webcam driver is loaded automatically when your webcam is connected to the USB Start motv at the command line with the parameter c dev videol to access the webcam Access the TV card with motv c dev videoO When connecting the webcam to the USB before the bttv driver has been automatically loaded for example by starting a TV application dev videoO is reserved for the webcam In this case if you start motv with the c dev videol parameter to access the TV card you might get an er ror message because the bttv driver was not automatically loaded Solve this problem by loading the driver separately with modprobe bttv as the user root Acess an overview of the configurable video devices on your sy
506. wn requirements The tool icon that looks like a pin is in reality a thin wooden stick with a glued on opaque cardboard circle Such an instrument is needed in a photographic laboratory for the perfect exposure of a manual paper copy As only a small part of the negatives or positives is exposed perfectly this instrument is moved over the areas that would otherwise become too dark while the paper is exposed Thus the exposure of specific prob lem areas can be adjusted individually The opposite is a piece of card board with a little hole in it for postexposure Both functions are fulfilled by this GIMP tool Dodge make lighter individual image areas or burn make darker them To create soft transitional borders use a diffuse brush shape The finger shown in this tool icon moves over the color just applied to the paper and smudges it This can be used to create very interesting effects With the calipers measure distances and angles In the associated option box activate Use Info Window 23 2 8 Color Brush Pattern and Gradient Selection The selected colors brush pattern and gradient are shown in your toolbox The color selection functions are on the left On the right are the currently active 23 2 Using The GIMP brush shape the active pattern and the active gradient Clicking each of these opens a dialog window for individual configuration 23 3 Working with The GIMP 23 3 1 Opening Images To edit an imag
507. x Name of the Linux penguin see http www sjbaker org tux UNIX UNIX is an operating system that is widely distributed above all on workstations in networks Since the beginning of the 1990s there has been a freely available version for PCs Linux URL Uniform Resource Locator Unique Internet address that contains the type e g http and the name of the host e g www suse de user account See we access permissions user directory See ve Tiome directory VESA Video Electronics Standard Association Industrial consortium that defines among other things important video standards wild cards Placeholder for one symbol or more symbol unknown char acters most often used in commands especially search commands window manager A window manager is the layer that interacts between the vx X Window System and the user It is responsible among other things for your desk top display There is a wide variety of window managers available one of the more popular ones being kwm for KDE WWW World Wide Web Based on the HTTP protocol this is a hyperlinked collection of docu ments files and images that can be viewed with a web browser X Window System The X Window System is the standard for graphical interfaces in Linux It is simply the middle layer between the hardware and the window man ager such as KDE or GNOME X11 See vx X Window System YP See x NIS YaST Yet another
508. x computers that do not have the resources for demanding display systems Vir tual consoles are used in this case Six of them are available in text mode Press FD through F6 The seventh console is reserved for X 24 2 Introduction to Bash In the KDE taskbar there is an icon depicting a monitor with a seashell When you click this icon with the mouse a console window opens in which to enter commands The console normally runs Bash Bourne again shell a program de veloped as part of the GNU project It is by far the most widely used derivative of the Bourne shell sh Once you have opened the shell see the prompt on the first line The prompt usually consists of the user name host name and current path but it can be customized When the cursor is behind this prompt you can send commands directly to your computer system tux gt 24 2 1 Commands A command consists of several elements The first element is always the actual command followed by parameters or options Commands are executed when you press J Before doing so easily edit the command line add options or correct typing errors One of the most frequently used commands is 1s which can be used with or without arguments Entering the plain 1s command in the console shows the contents of the current directory Options are prefixed with a hyphen The command 1s 1 for instance shows the contents of the same directory in full detail Next to each file name s
509. x configuration there is a list with the already configured users which is empty when the module is started for the first time The recorded incoming call is sent to the user associated with the phone number This shows the importance of assigning unique phone numbers to the users The individual user welcome message cannot be set at this point The recording will be made later on with the remote access function of the configured answering machine SuSE Linux User Guide uolI oO2IunuJuJo29 9 NASI 273 YaST2 6 Uhlenbeck An answering machine for one Answering machine configuration or more users can be set up in this dialog Each user must have at least one own unique phone number configured Please refer to the telecommunication chapter in the manuals for further details When adding or editing a user User table a dialog will be shown with the Phonenumbers Delay Duration Action following details User The system user who wants to receive calls with the answering machine Phonenumbers One or more phone numbers delimited by d Edit Delete commas which belong only Am en cose to this user Delay Delay in seconds before the answering machine responds to the call Duration Maximum record length for one call Action By default recorded Finish Figure 17 3 YaST Module for Configuring the Answering Machine The answering machine has an automatic silence
510. xpenses 184 GAS Creating Chante aaa a ao a 185 6 7 4 Importing Spreadsheet Tables 185 6 8 Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw 187 6 9 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress 187 6 9 1 Creating Presentations with the AutoPilot 187 6092 Addig andes ssx ava ra ce ek Se EIS 188 The KWrite Text Editor 189 Zl General Features oo a 269 ono da a ke a a 190 7 2 The File Ment pcenas ruue caros a Eds 191 Zo The EiEMen ios dl prod 00 A cae eas 191 7A The View Men esu 4 2 wos a Paw Go ee a a ea 193 75 The Bookmarks Men e G ea aue ag ee eae Neg Em ea 193 Pio The Tools Mente 2 uc hace Riko ROUX RA A ee Re Em E 193 ie Ihe Settings MEDI ice ime as eo ae aS us 194 78 The Help Mende bt Boot eR SS dle eS 194 79 ate uus es SR era 194 Sychronizing a Handheld Computer with KPilot 195 8l KPIORBSGSIeS ia aces Bn omnem A ee GH AS GRR 196 82 Conduits Used by KPIGE 2 oo 20S ces xx um RR A ee mies 196 82 1 Configuring the Handheld Connection 197 8 2 2 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit 199 823 Managing To Do Items and Events 199 83 Working With KPHOT oue dos one em Re ee aa 200 8 3 1 Backing up Data from the Handheld 200 8 3 2 Installing Programs on the Handheld 200 SuSE Linux User Guide 9 Scheduling with KOrganizer 9 1 Starting KAGET 2 6 aa coke ai a 92 Gonte rns KOMOnIZer cs ro ek ee mU SD
511. y 1 Click Settings gt Configure Filters and mark the newly created filter 2 To filter all messages containing kde userfkde org in the To or Cc fields and originating from Fred define a second filter under Filter Crite ria using the second row of drop down menus Select From in the first menu and contains in the second Then enter the e mail address to filter Activate Applies to all 3 Select the action to execute move delete etc You have now created a filter that transfers all mails from Fred Johnson on the KDE user list as specified 15 9 Mail Encryption with PGP or GnuPG You can encrypt outgoing e mail with KMail To encrypt your e mail first gener ate a key pair as described in Chapter Encryption with KGpg on page 235 Then log out and log in again 15 9 Mail Encryption with PSP or GnuPG Go to Settings gt Configure KMail Security gt Crypto Plugins gt Configure to specify when and with which method your e mail messages should be encrypted First activate the respective module usually openpgp Under Location enter the file name of the crypto library for OpenPGP se lect usr lib cryptplug gpgme openpgp so and for smime select usr lib cryptplug gpgme smime so An asterisk must appear in the Active column of the displayed table Also determine whether an alert should be displayed when you send unencrypted e mail
512. yboard operation is recommended The ergonomic mouse feels good in your hand The keys should not be too close or too small There are even mice for children s hands Your fingers should be able to rest on the keys in a relaxed position The mouse should be next to the keyboard Left handed users have an advantage because the keyboard has several function keys and the numer ical key block between letter keys and a mouse on the right side These extend the gripping distance If you are left handed get a mouse for left handers Learning keyboard codes reduces the workload on the complete arm An arm shoulder area strengthened by the appropriate physical training can deal better with overstrain for a short time 25 2 Office Equipment The cable should be long enough If necessary purchase an extension A wireless mouse is a luxury The mouse needs a proper base to function well Get a good mouse pad Pay attention to the mouse driver Good mice have mouse drivers with a multitude of functions You can for example adjust the cursor move ment exactly according to your requirements or assign special instructions to the different mouse buttons The double click might be placed on the middle button with the mouse driver Make sure you adjust the acceleration and double click adjustment of the mouse to your own preferences Some people work with the mouse from the hand joint Others prefer moving their complete forearm A
513. yboards are something to which you have to get accustomed but nevertheless are an alternative worth con sidering They have been constructed according to the latest ergonomic findings and are already recommended in some standards They prevent wrist strain to the side The keyboard of a notebook or laptop cannot correspond to the standards because of the crowded keys A notebook should therefore not be used as workstation equipment unless it is linked to an external keyboard and mouse 25 24 Liberating the Mouse Due to the advance of graphical user interfaces users are practically forced to use a mouse The intensive use of the mouse can cause not only fatigue but also disorders in the hands arms and shoulders An example of this is RSI The dan ger increases when a bad mouse is used So far there are no commonly ac cepted standards for an ergonomic mouse Often a PC is sold with the standard mouse This mouse should certainly be examined closely Is the mouse really suitable or should it be replaced by a better one Have the dealer unpack sev eral mice for you to try The cable is probably too short Ask the dealer to give you an extension Evaluate your own mouse use Can you reduce the use of the mouse Many professional programs with a lot of interaction do without any mouse clicks Learn how to use shortcuts to operate programs It takes time to learn but you can work up to four times as fast Often a combination of mouse and ke

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Bolens 147 - 660 Lawn Mower User Manual  PresenterPLUS  Mode d`emploi de l`article n° GP25  BCF810 - Switel  Samsung Galaxy Note (10.1, LTE) Εγχειρίδιο χρήσης  RiskCAT Nuclear User`s Manual  Progress Lighting P2760-74 Installation Guide  colle_rat_souris  GE PEB7226 User's Manual  Sony MVC-CD1000 Digital Camera User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file